Home

Operator10 Help - AllMax Software, Inc.

1. Bribie Island STP Bribie Island STP Compliance Rate at S_STP i Unitywater Reports 10 01 2011 10 31 2011 DB DERM Month Report_3rd Week DB DERM Monthly Report DB Final Effluent DataView List Actions From the DataView list users can perform the following actions Create a New DataView gt To create a new DataView click the u Add button or use the drop down arrow to select from a list of available options Creating a new DataView will open the DataView application and will present the DataView Properties window to the user Open a DataView O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Operator10 Help To open a DataView highlight the desired DataView and click the 3 OK button Users can also double click the desired DataView to open the view Delete a DataView To delete a DataView highlight the desired DataView and click the x Delete button Confirm the deletion of the DataView by clicking either the Y Yes Yes or X No No button 7 2 Add DataView There are many ways to create a new DataView Main Application To create a new DataView fromthe Main Application follow these steps 1 Go to the View ribbon 2 Click the New DataView button 3 Choose from the available options e Daily Values DataView e Hourly Values DataView e Summary Values DataView DataView List To create a new DataView from the Main Application follow these steps 1 L
2. UNITY WATER JU 191213 WAS Murrumba Downs STP No Access localhost UNITY WATER JU 191213_WaS South Caboolture STP No Access localhost UNITY WATER JU 191213 WAS Woodford STP No Access localhost UNITYWATERSE 191213 WAS Brendale STP No Access localhost UNITYWATERSE 191213 WAS Bribie Island STP No Access localhost UNITYWATERSE 191213 WAS Burpengary East STP No Access localhost UNITYWATERSE 191213 WAS Caboolture Water Recycle Pl No Access localhost UNITYWATERSE 191213 WAS Dayboro STP No Access localhost UNITYWATERSE 1191213 W45 Murrumba Downs STP No Access localhost UNITYWATERSE 1191213 WAS South Caboolture STP No Access localhost UNITYWATERSE 1191213 WAS Unitywater Reports No Access localhost UNITYWATERSE 1191213 WAS Woodford STP No Access localhost 191213 WAS AL Solutions Inc No Access localhost 191213 WAS City of New Cumberland No Access localhost 191213 WAS HRO No Access localhost 191213 WAS West Basin WWTP No Access localhost AC localhost guu AD 40501 1 WA Wastewater ample Data No Access localhost 405011_ WAS HRO No Access localhost 4 2 1 Add New Database Users with permission to do so may create new databases for use within Operator10 Each database created will allow for separate data storage of facility location parameter data etc For more information on database and data storage see the following help topic for Database Structure Add New Database 1
3. Facility Directory Facility Name Location Parameter Order DATA_000 Murrumba Downs Weather Station Rainfall DATA_000 Murrumba Downs Weather Station Wet Weather Day 2 DATA000 Murrumba Downs S1ROC Ef DO_FIELD 3 DATA_000 Murrumba Downs S1 ROCIEff AMMONIA_N 14 DATA_000 Murrumba Downs S1 ROCIEff CHLORINE_TOT 5 DATA_000 Murrumba Downs S1 ROC Ef Toc 6 DATA_000 Murrumba Downs S1ROC Ef PH 7 B DATA_000 Murrumba Downs S1 ROC Eff BOD 8 DATA_000 Murrumba Downs STROCIEf SUSPENDED S 9 DATA_000 Murrumba Downs S1 ROC Eff FAECAL_COLI_ 10 DataView Properties Column Setup Add Column Click the M Add button to display a list of Location Parameters Choose individual or multiple Location Parameters to be added as columns in the DataView Multiple Facility Location Parameters Location Parameters from multiple facilities can be selected Use the Facility selection menu in the top right area of the Location Parameter list to select the All option Choose from available Location Parameters Insert Column Before Click the drop down menu beside the Y Add button and select the option Insert Before to insert a Location Parameter before the selected Location Parameter Choose individual or multiple Location Parameters from the provided picklist Insert Column After O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 182 Operator10 Help 7 8 3 gt
4. 8 4 1 2 4 Refresh Refresh Select the Graph menu item Refresh to Refresh the Graph Refresh transfers data from the underlying database to the Graph and calculates formula values If the Default Legends menu item is marked all legend text is updated In a multi user environment Refresh always obtains the most current data 2014 AllMax Software Inc 228 Operator10 Help 8 4 1 2 5 Graph Properties Graph Properties Several types of Graph Properties may be set from menu items or Toolbar buttons and dialog boxes General Properties include basic Graph Type Appearance Grids and Color Pattern options for the entire Graph Series Properties include Graph Type Appearance and Color options for each Location Parameter e Scale Properties include Linearity and Scaling options for the x and y axis e 3 D Properties allow 2 Dimensional or 3 Dimensional Graphs including full 3 D Rotation and Shadows Title Properties include a Top Bottom Left and or Right Titles for the Graph Font Properties may be set individually for Titles Legends Legend Boxes and Data Values Graph Properties may also be chosen by pressing the appropriate Toolbar button 8 4 1 2 5 1 General Properties General Properties General Properties include basic Graph Type Appearance Grids and Color Pattern options for the entire Graph r General Options Gallery Type al Appearance Stacked Style
5. The Logged Documents section allows users to view a list of logged documents printed from the DataView Graphing and Reporting sections Accessing Logged Documents O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 134 Operator10 Help To access the Logged Documents section in the DataView application go to the File menu click the Logged Documents menu option Adding Logged Documents To add new documents to the list of logged documents go the the DataView Graphing or Reporting sections of Operator10 and print a document Upon printing a prompt may be visible asking for the user to log the document as printed with an associated note Depending on the settings found in the Database Properties section users can edit which sections of the program prompt for logging documents Delete Logged Documents To delete a logged document highlight the document in the list and click the x Delete button Confirm the deletion of data by clicking the Y Yes Yes or X No No button 2014 AllMax Software Inc 136 Operator10 Help 5 BioSolids BioSolids The BioSolids Ribbon visible when licensed for BioSolids provides access to BioSolids features e BioSolids Application e BioSolids Available Nitrogen e BioSolids List e BioSolids Nutrient e BioSolids Owner e BioSolids Site e BioSolids Site Detail e BioSolids Site Limits 5 1 BioSolids List BioSolids BioSolid The BioSolid List displays all BioSolids created in
6. Data View Properties Column Setup Column Properties DataView Options i Orientation Margin i Header Footer Color Size Quality Color 9 Print in Color default gt Print in Black amp White Grayscale Paper Size Letter 8 5 x 11 0 Draft Quality C Scaling 0 Sizeto Fitto page width DataView Properties Page Page Options The following Page options are available Orientation e Portrait Choose Portrait to print the DataView in a Portrait orientation e Landscape Choose Landscape to print the DataView in a Landscape orientation Color Size Quality e Color Choose from the available options using the radio buttons to print in color or in black amp white grayscale e Paper Size Choose from the available options in the drop down menu to select a paper size e Draft Quality Check the box for Draft Quality to print the DataView using the selected printer s draft quality setting Low quality print shortest printing time O 2014 AllMax Software Inc DataView 187 Scaling e Size to Select the option for Size to and enter a numeric value to define the size in percent that the DataView should be printed e Fit to page width Select the option for Fit to page width to force the page to be printed to the page width 7 8 4 3 DataView Print Properties Margin DataView Print Properties Margin In the D
7. 1 VSS out Solids Vol 100 100 A S Air Solids Ratio A S airflow in CFM AIRFLO runhours RUNHRS influent loading in LB LSolids Vol or LSolids TSS 4 5 WasteFlow Waste Flow WASTE_F waste flow Flow MGD waste flow Flow MGD WasteRem Waste SS Removed WASTE_R solids in MGL Solids TSS flow Flow MGD 8 34 solids in MGL Solids TSS flow Flow MGD 8 34 AirFlow Air Flow in MCF AIRFLOW airflow in CFM AIRFLO 1440 1000000 AF B Air Flow BOD in CF LB AF B airflow in CFM AIRFLO loading in LB LBOD 5 1440 AF B_R Air Flow BOD Removed in CF LB AF B_R airflow in CFM AIRFLO loading removed in LB LBOD 5 1440 Grit Grease Grit or Grease Removed in CF MG GGRTVOL volume removed in cubic yards GRTVOL flow Flow MGD 27 GritWeight Grit Removed in KLB MG GRIT volume removed in cubic yards GRTVOL flow Flow MGD specific gravity defaults to 1 Solids Vol 1 6848 Yield_HR Cake Yield in LB HR YLD_HR loading in LB LSolids Vol or LSolids TSS runhours RUNHRS 2014 AllMax Software Inc ne Operator10 Help e Yield_HR_U Cake Yield in LB Units HR YLD_HR loading in LB LSolids Vol or LSolids TSS volume or surface area of tank runhours RUNHRS e S_Avg Summary Average of Sections ABC average of sections ABC e S Sum Summary Sum of Sections ABC sum of secti
8. 2014 AllMax Software Inc 8 4 1 4 3 Palette Bar Palette Bar Go to the Window Menu and choose the Palette Bar option Press the Left or Right Arrows to make the desired Color visible LeftDrag it onto any part of the Graph to use that Color on that part of the Graph LeftDoubleClick any Color on the Palette Bar to edit the Color 8 4 1 4 4 Pattern Bar Pattern Bar Go to the Window Menu and choose the Palette Bar option Press the Left or Right Arrows to make the desired pattern visible LeftDrag it onto any graphed data to use that pattem on the data LeftDoubleClick any Pattern on the Pattem Bar to edit the pattern 8 4 1 5 Help menu Topics in this section include e About 8 4 1 5 1 About About Go to the Help menu and select About Operatori0 Wastewater The About dialog shows current information about the application including copyright and version numbers for OP10 software a About Graphing Graphing AllMax Graphing Version 10 20 Copyright 1996 2010 AllMax Software Inc PO Box 40 Kenton OH 43326 1 800 670 1867 8 4 2 Toolbars Topics in this section include e Main Toolbar 2014 AllMax Software Inc 238 Operator10 Help 8 4 2 1 Main Toolbar Toolbar Most common menu items are available from the Toolbar Click on the graphic below for additional information blank ajajaja e E EA orin Bleku EIA z Y o a a N I D P 5 P a 8 3 5
9. 42 Operator10 Help information returned if y is O then the result is the count of the number of violations for the day if y is 1 then the result is the duration for the entire day in hours that hourly data values exceed limits x or y The result will range from 0 to 24 hours If the previous day s last value exceeds the limits then the duration starts at the beginning of the day Durations are accumulated until the violation ends or the end of the day where vnum is the number of the violation 1 is the first 2 is the second etc or O for the longest violation if y is 256 vnum 2 then the result is the time of the start of the violation in hours since midnight if y is 256 vnum 3 then the result is the duration of the violation in hours This may be greater than 24 hours if y is 256 vnum 4 then the result is the maximum value of the data recorded during the violation if y is 256 vnum 5 then the result is the minimum value of the data recorded during the violation if y is 256 vnum 6 then the result is the average value of the data recorded during the violation Examples V_DLYM Effluent 00058 0 0 BLANK 100 number of times flow readings fall below 100 g min V_DLYM Effluent 00058 0 1 500 BLANK hours that flow exceeds 500 g min for the day V_DLYM Effluent 50050 0 256 1 2 500 BLANK the time in hours of the start of the first multiple violation V_DLYM Effluent 50050 0 516 500 BLANK the maximum
10. O 2014 AllMax Software Inc ase Operator10 Help 13 2 13 3 Export L P Lists Once the L P lists have been built for DataPort Users the data must be exported as files that the DataPort HotSync operation can use to populate the DataPort with data In the DataPort Sync window find the y Export Location Parameter list to DataPort button Press the button to build the lists Text based indexed lists of Location Parameters will be built to the database directory Repeat the Export step following the addition or removal of the desired Location Parameters HotSync Once lists of Location Parameters have been exported users should perform a HotSync operation to sync the selected Location Parameter lists to the DataPort See the DataPort HotSync topic for more information DataPort Setup Prior to use of the DataPort the following basic steps must be performed in order for proper communication between the HotSync support Operator10 Wastewater and DataPort The communication chain allows for the transfer of data to and from the DataPort and Operator10 Wastewater applications 1 Install Palm Desktop Software version 4 1 4 as provided by AllMax Software 2 Install Operator10 Wastewater HotSync Support 3 Select Location Parameters 4 Export Location Parameter lists 5 Perform HotSync Each of the basic steps will potentially require additional steps to be taken Contact AllMax Software technical support for m
11. Site Select this option to sort the App List Report by the Site of Biosolid application Months Reported Choose a number of months to be reported on the Biosolid App List Report Select a number from the dropdown list box Decimal Precision Enter a value into the Decimal Precision field to indicate the number of decimals to be shown Treat lt gt Data As Select from the drop down menu to determine the method by which data with the less than lt greater than gt or non detect data qualifiers will be treated Available options are e Preserve Types Calculations will preserve the available data qualifiers and calculated results will display the appropriate data qualifier Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 34 6 2 1 4 lt 3 as the less than symbol to be preserved for the final calculation 2014 AllMax Software Inc Reporting 313 Entered Value Calculations will drop the data qualifiers from data and calculated results will display without the qualifiers using only the numeric entered portion of the data Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 6 2 1 4 3 as the less than symbol will be dropped for the final calculation Half Entered Value Calculations will drop the data qualifiers from data and calculated results will display without the qualifiers using one half the entered value of the data Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 64 1 1 4 2 75 as the less than symbol is
12. A default Header based on the Location Parameter selected will be filled in here modify the header if desired There are two lines of text available for each header Decimal O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Default decimal precision based on the selected Location Parameter will be shown in the Decimal field modify this value as necessary Avg Type Select from the drop down menu the type of Average to be calculated Available options include e Average e Geometric Mean Flow Weighted Remove Press the Remove button to remove a selected Location Parameter from the Limit Report Move Up Move Dn To re arrange the order in which the selected Location Parameters are shown on the Limit Report press the Move Up or Move Dn button s Parameters Column 1 of 2 Location Parameter Plant Effluent Flow Mgd rrr srr Plant Effluent Flow Mad MGD Flow Thru Treatment Plant M Plant Effluent BOD 5 MG L LP BOD DESC Weekly Summary 01 Weekly Summary 4 m Save Preview Guidance Click template or press PageUp PageDn 9 7 5 1 4 Comments In the Comments setup section for the Limit Report users can edit the following information Comments 2014 AllMax Software Inc 298 Operator10 Help Comments Enter the default comments to appear on report at the time of printing Users can modify these comments at the time of printing if the JAllow Comments checkbox is
13. Fite Dashboard View Setup Bio Solids Tools Support Help 9 9 Y 2 A Views 7 Create New View Add Page to View Add Container to Page 7 Page Options Save Dashboard View Management Hot Spot Options Save The Dashboard Ribbon allows for the management of Dashboard Views Pages and Containers Dashboard Functions The following options are available in the Dashboard ribbon and are discussed as they appear in the button groups Dashboard View e Views Press the 4 Views button to drop down a list of available Views for the database choose Open List of Views to view the View list Management e Create New View Press the F Create New View button to create a new View for the database LE e Add Page to View Press the Add Page to View button to add a Page to a View e Add Container to Page Press the Add Container to Page button to select from the list of Container types to be added to the View HotSpot Options e Page Options Press the may Page Options button to set Page Properties for the Page Save e Save Press the E Save button to Save the current View settings or to Save As 4 1 2 3 View Ribbon Main Application View Ribbon The View ribbon provides the following functionality O 2014 AllMax Software Inc so Operator10 Help Bl P Operator10 Wastewater Dashboard View Setup Bio Solids Tools Support Help Fl bl ao S A
14. H_CALC Eff1 50050 Eff2 50050 2 0 0 half the flow from eff2 whenever a corresponding eff1 flow exists H_CALC Flow1 50050 OverFlow 50050 0 2 OverFlow values every 30 minutes H_COMB l p l p x y H_COMB I p l p x Hourly COMBination of two locations and parameters type y offset x days Value The hourly values calculated from the hourly data at two specific locations and parameters The function uses the hourly data for the date x days from the current date It stores the result at the Location Parameter where the formula is attached at the time corresponding to each data value The function then returns the Hourly Calculation as configured for the Location Parameter where the formula is attached The function considers only valid data and will return BLANK if there is no valid data The function uses the following type z to determine the calculation method if y is O then the hourly result is the first data values the second if y is 1 then the hourly result is the first data value the second if y is 2 then the hourly result is the first data value the second if y is 3 then the hourly result is the first data value the second if y is 4 then the hourly result is the maximum of the data values if y is 5 then the hourly result is the minimum of the data values if y is 6 then the hourly result is the average of the data values Examples H_COMB Eff1 50050 Eff2 50050 0 0 hourly sum of two effluents H_COMB
15. Save on Exit Items listed under the Save on Exit include e Window Position Place a check in the Window Position checkbox to save the position of the Main Application and other windows when opening closing the application Press the reset button to clear all existing positions and reset positions to default e Recent Licenses Place a check in the Recent Licenses checkbox to save the previous license information to the registry Press the reset button to clear all existing recent licenses Custom Tools Users can define up to 4 custom tools that can be accessed from the Tools ribbon Custom tools are links to external files Click the button to browse and select a file to be opened using the custom tools menu option Database Database From the Database Facility list users have the ability to perform many actions Users of Operator10 Wastewater who have permission to do so can e Create New Database e Create New Facility e Delete Database e Delete Facility e Import Export Facility Data e Backup Databases e Set Database Properties Accessing Database Facility To access the Database Facility section go to the File menu and choose the Open 2014 AllMax Software Inc Main Application e Database option a Vi II E K lt q 50recoras gt DP e HR BWiS QAL t e localhost Select single Database Facility Database License Facility Name Security Level Server Metric Audi i
16. ccutetveseceGecerecetredcceceusecd aerat aeaea aana A aeaaaee da aeaaeai ardeta aaae 198 Column Headers 198 DataView Column Icons 199 Find Data a 201 Quick Note Sii A A heat 202 IMport Data ses ces sceisnkscvc cvstecsssunacoccessocceaccccvescuchesseaheizseteseeahceuseisuveseveteus seit spare tspateasiecuoce sascieahsivsguesdestsvucet save evexest 204 Export Data E E E A E E E A E E E A E 205 FRE OZ COMAS rs a ngss a r e a a aa ae TES Tan 207 Right Click EAA E EE E LEE AEREE ES A e 207 A O ODA 209 Date Format Options 2000 AA A A AAA AAA 210 eDV Electronic Data Vie W ra aa aa raaa a aaa daaa 211 e DV Vie CF ic sscessscvcsccvescccessccnsscenssscnesssaveivevceucsvsavetesseveecevesssevevveiSeuesveausuveteusetevsdecaveiversenecdvonerssdeveudevevscevevceveeuerevens 211 Working WATTS DV EE A EA A E E E E A PA TE 213 eDV Templates iai nepred ea aaee e e aaa vende ovsaduatbuds cosas aae dst adeecde cu ea aa eraa daia 214 Graphing 217 CAPAS T E ATT 218 Graph Datania ioina raina aaa aa a ia 218 2014 AllMax Software Inc Data OUT CE ui A AA A AA AA Open Graph Date Range Cal e ah at tack 3 Graph Opticos Graph Type Linear Regression Graph Data Type iii a rai co OAT A OA A A Ballons a A N A aaa 4 Main WindOW io ccoiiioniici ii ci id Menus oes File menu Facility A A ei E AN New Graphic reia Cose O ES a tees SAVE SAVES AS a cise chuesscavecee slash de sie ch dulows a A da PRIME at nt arar CN
17. 1 ISDATA BLANK 0 14 49 ISDATK p x ISDATE I p x If the value offset x days IS a DATE code then TRUE Value If the value of a specific location and parameter for the date x days from the current date is a Date value the value TRUE 1 is returned Otherwise the function returns FALSE 0 Examples ISALPHA Effluent 50050 0 1 if a Date value otherwise 0 ISALPHA Effluent 50050 1 1 if the previous day contained a Date value 14 4 10 ISFECAL I p ISFECAL I p If l p IS a FECAL parameter then TRUE Value If parameter p is a fecal parameter the value TRUE 1 is returned Otherwise the function returns FALSE 0 Examples ISFECAL Effluent 31614 ISFECAL Effluent 50050 14 4 11 ISFLOW I p ISFLOW I p If l p IS a FLOW parameter then TRUE 1 0 Value If parameter p is a flow parameter the value TRUE 1 is returned Otherwise the function returns FALSE 0 Examples ISFLOW Effluent 50050 1 ISFLOW Effluent 31614 0 14 4 12 ISGREAT I p x ISGREAT I p x If the value offset x days IS a GREATer than value then TRUE 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 393 Value If the value of a specific location and parameter for the date x days from the current date is a Greater Than value the value TRUE 1 is returned Otherwise the function returns FALSE 0 The function considers only Greater Than values it ignores data Alpha Codes Less Than or Non Detect v
18. Custom Tools Press the K Custom Tools button to select from a list of Custom Tools Locked Data Press the e Locked Data button to open the Locked Data tool 4 1 2 7 Support Ribbon Support Menu The Support menu in the main application toolbar displays specific help and support options available to clients who have a current support contract and keycode with AllMax Software Inc wl Operator10 Wastewater COLES File Dashboard View Setup Bio Solids Tools Support Help P B A OB BM A License 210246 Check For Updates Check File Versions Go2Tech AllMax Website Email AllMax View Error Log Current File Versions Contact AllMax Error Log Options available in the Support menu include e License Displays the license number as provided by AllMax Software Check for Updates Displays notification of current updates available from AllMax Software File Versions Opens the Check Version Utility go2tech Internet Connection required Begins a new session with AllMax Software Technical Support View the go2tech topic to learn more Web Support Internet Connection required Takes users to support form on AllMax Software s website Form information is sent directly to Technical Support Representatives Email Support Internet Connection required Initializes a new email message addressed to AllMax Software Technical Support staff Error Log Provides a link to the error log of Operator
19. DataView List New DataView Graphs Reports Sampling Events Event Joumal OPC DDE Interface eDV Viewer View Documents View Notes DataView Graphing Reporting Data Entry Logged Documents Notes The View Ribbon allows users to access sections of Operatori0 like DataViews Reports Graphs and more View Functions The following options are available in the View ribbon and are discussed as they appear in the button groups DataView e DataView Press the DataView button to open the DataView List e New DataView Press the New DataView button to choose from the list of available DataView Types to create a new DataView Graphing e Graphs Press the wil Graphs button to open the Graphing section of Operator10 Wastewater Reporting e Reports Press the El Reports button to open the Reporting section of Operator10 Wastewater Data Entry e Sampling Events Press the F Sampling Events button to open the Sampling Events section of Operator10 Wastewater e Event Journal Press the 17 Event Journal button to open the Event Journal section of Operator10 Wastewater Event Journal only available in Synexus Pretreatment Data Management Application e OPC DDE Interface Press the a OPC DDE Interface button to open the OPC DDE Interface section of Operator10 Wastewater O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Main Application st e eDV Viewer Press the fal eDV Viewer button to open the
20. Edit multiple 30 Edit Process 102 eDV 211 eDV Viewer 211 Electronic DataView 211 Email 57 Enabled 344 English 440 Entering Data 362 366 Equal 390 EQUAL 390 Equality 390 Even Biased Rounding 126 433 Exceed 476 Excel 347 467 468 469 Exceptions 257 Exclusive Or 395 Execute 469 Exit 57 EXP 426 Exponential 426 432 Export 30 364 468 470 Export Data Utility 518 Export Facility 504 Export L Ps 355 Export Location Parameters 355 ye FAC 443 Facility 83 223 366 368 443 Facility Export 504 Facility Import 504 Facility Security 43 Facility Location Parameter 387 FACTO 427 Factorial 427 FALSE 395 Fecal 392 Fecal Parameters 75 Federal DMR 298 File Menu 57 Filtering 38 Find 30 368 427 First 405 427 FIRST 427 Flow 392 399 452 Flow Estimate 519 Flow Parameters 75 Flow Weighted Average 125 399 Follow 401 405 418 Fonts 231 Form Date 253 Formatting Options 177 Formula 108 109 111 113 443 FORMULA 443 Formulas 108 111 113 FRAC 427 Fraction 427 Fractional 427 Freeze 36 Freeze Column 207 Frequency 257 Full Custom Report 259 Functions 108 375 389 397 409 413 424 434 452 467 471 473 475 492 496 Future 401 405 418 FWA 399 Gz Gauge 399 400 Gauge Containers 161 Gauge Reading 399 400 General Properties 75 228 Geo Mean 126 Geometric Mean 126 400 418 456 Geometric Mean Type 75 gmean 418 Graffiti 362 372 Graph 217
21. Standard 3320 1 page Weekly Summary Import from file Create In new folder Multiple Pages If you wish to create multiple pages of a multipage report press the button beside the report and enter in the number of pages you wish to create below Standard 3320 Number Of Pages Report Folder To create the selected reports in a selected Report Folder choose from the drop down list box Create In If new folder is selected you will be prompted to create a new folder name with a selected icon for shortcut use in the Operator10 Wastewater Report section below O 2014 AllMax Software Inc za Operator10 Help 9 3 2 New Report Availability Reports available in the New Report selection window can be limited To add to or reduce the number of available reports to users go to the File menu and select New Report Availability from the menu Remove Report Availability To remove a report from the New Reports selection window click the X button beside the selected report Repeat as necessary and click the Save button to save the changes Add to Report Availability To add a report to the New Reports selection window click the space beside the selected report Repeat as necessary and click the Save button to save the changes f New Report Availability Custom from DV DERM Export OH EPA 4500 OMI Weekly Ctl Standard 3320 4
22. XY iris ARA ARA da Ankona ilH od E ea aa A ea Utilities Database Backup a 503 Import Export Facility csini aa a E e a a aa a a aa A aE aaaea aia Aaa kaataa 504 Operatori O Age nts sisas aaa arca 505 Calculation Sche dUe a a cece a ev ec aa a a E e ara Ea E a a ea aaay 509 Calculate UNIN osonni EEEE AEEA AAE EAE A AA E AERA 509 Locked DA h r E E e iia 510 eie a a A EET TT E A ET 511 Import Sampling Events Data oconccconnccnnccnnnccnnnncnncncnn cnn 515 Export Data Util e Aaa da alado dia 518 Calculator Toluca a 518 Operator iO TOS coccion cocaina 519 Index 521 O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 15 Welcome to Operator10 Wastewater 1 Welcome to Operator10 Wastewater Operatori0 Wastewater is a full featured data management application designed to help meet the data collection and reporting needs for the Water and Wastewater Treatment industries Operator10 Wastewater allows users to manage data that has been manually entered calculated via internal formula or user defined formula or collected from an alternate data source such as LIMS SCADA data import and or DataPort Unique Location Parameter data points provide the means by which data is stored and shown throughout the application Unlimited Location Parameters can be created to define regulatory reporting data process control data and other internal data points DataViews custom defined collections of Location Parameter data serve as tools to enter and
23. 2014 AllMax Software Inc os Operator10 Help 4 7 4 7 1 and can be copied and pasted as needed Data Data Analytical Results Calculated Results and any other entered information is referred to as Data Data is conveniently entered or viewed using a DataView This Data is used for calculations reports process control or other needs of the Facility Data is stored at a specific Location Parameter at a specific date or time It may consist of Daily or Hourly values Less Than Greater Than or Non Detect values Time or Date values or Alpha Codes Data values are stored internally with 15 significant digit Precision Internal values are unaffected by the number of display digits or following zeros Numbers may range to 1 0E16 For storage of the data results the following table provides a translation of the field Type in the Data btr table and its equivalent in terms of the data displayed in a section like DataView Data Type Value Data Type 0 Numeric Data 1 Blank 2 Less Than Data lt 3 Alpha Code 4 Greater Than Data gt 5 Non Detect Data 6 Time 8 Date Add Data Add Data In the Add Data dialog users can enter result data for the selected Facility Location Parameter and date Enter a value and click the Apply button Data will immediately be saved to the database and available for use O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Main Application 09 m Add Data Add da
24. 408 446 447 Daily Data Functions 397 Daily DataViews 168 Daily Values DataView 173 153 154 155 157 159 161 163 Dashboard Dashboard Ribbon 58 Data 98 99 100 101 172 386 391 392 437 451 Data Comments 202 Data Containers 157 Data Entry Data Export 205 Data Functions 492 Data Note 368 Data Notes 202 337 Data Permissions 45 Data Type 447 451 466 Data Types 451 Data Value 100 Data Window 235 Database 68 73 Database Backup 503 Database Properties 75 Database Security 42 Database Structure 73 Database Timeout 75 Database Utilities 79 80 81 172 362 366 370 375 397 413 452 471 472 475 2014 AllMax Software Inc Index 525 DataPort 119 355 356 357 361 364 366 DDE Linking 467 468 469 DataPort Application 364 DDE Server 340 345 DataPort Setup 356 DDE 467 DataPort Sync 355 DDE_P 468 DataView 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 DDE_X 469 180 182 189 Decay 500 DataView Application 189 Decimal 432 433 434 DataView Block Summary 209 Default 426 427 DataView Column 182 DEFAULT 426 DataView Column Header 198 Delete 30 370 DataView Column Icons 199 Delete Chemical 118 DataView Column Properties 182 Delete Database 72 DataView Column Setup 180 Delete DataView 171 DataView Columns 172 180 Delete Facility 72 DataView Data Entry 172 Delete Formula 111 DataView Data Export 205 Delete Formulas 111 DataView Edit Ribbon 193 Delete Location 87 DataView Fil
25. 9 7 6 9 7 6 1 marked in the General Properties and Settings screen 4 Weekly Summary 01 Weekly Summary w r Save Preview Guidance Click template or press PageUp PageDn Federal DMR Report The Federal DMR Discharge Monitoring Report EPA 3320 provides information for Federal EPA and many State reporting requirements There are five setup sections e General Properties e General Information e Rows e Reporting e Comments Federal DMR Setup Topics in this section include e General Properties e General Information e Rows Add Remove Move Up Move Dn 2014 AllMax Software Inc e Reporting e Comments 9 7 6 1 1 General Properties In the General Properties setup section for the Federal DMR Report users can edit the following fields Page Adjustment and Print settings Size Enter a percentage to which you would like to reduce the printed form X Offset Adjust the X coordinate to which you would like to offset the printed form Y Offset Adjust the Y coordinate to which you would like to offset the printed form OPlain Paper Mark the Plain Paper radio button to print the entire form including all lines headers and data Form Mark the Form radio button if you are printing directly on or will be copying onto a blank form Preprinted Form If generic information is already preprinted on the form mark the Preprinted Form
26. Data Views Properties Date Range Hourly Options Display Options Calculations Printing E A e A Effluent Data Entry Rainfall Wet Ar F F Daily Precipitation Weather NH3 4 01 2012 4 30 2012 mmiday Day 7 de April 1 Sunday 0 000 N 7 350 N 7 390 lt 0 050 April 3 Tuesday N 7 360 0 050 April 4 Wednesday N 7 480 0 03 lt 0 050 7 40 13 00 lt 2 000 la 1 600 00 April 5 Thursday N 7 420 0 03 lt 0 050 April 6 Friday N 7 400 April 7 Saturday N April 8 Sunday N April 9 Monday N 7 610 April 10 Tuesday N 7 300 0 06 lt 0 050 114 000 17 50 18 00 4 000 April 11 Wednesday N 6 910 0 03 lt 0 050 3 00 April 12 Thursday N 6 930 0 03 lt 0 050 10 000 April 13 Friday N lt 0 050 April 14 Saturday Y April 15 Sunday Y 6 900 April 16 Monday N 17 100 0 02 0 050 April 17 Tuesday 16 500 Y 7 500 lt 0 02 lt 0 050 7 50 17 00 3 000 April 18 Wednesday Ne 17 360 0 07 lt 0 050 6 00 April 19 Thursday N 7 490 0 10 lt 0 050 April 20 Friday N 7 310 0 04 lt 0 050 April 21 Saturday N lt 0 050 a April 22 Sunday N April 23 Monday N 0 12 April 24 Tuesday N 7 300 April 25 Wednesday N 7 230 1 00 April 26 Thursday N 7 290 lt 0 050 April 27 Friday N 7 350 0 13 lt 0 050 UpperLimit 5 E The DataView application displays data and provides access to data entered and stored in the database DataView Application The DataView application uses a rib
27. Greater Than z or Non Detect w values Value The value of x is returned The value x may be a single data item or the result based on multiple data items The option y z or w is one of the following BLANK to use the Facility Options for Less Than y Greater Than z or Non Detect w values O to treat Less Than y Greater Than z or Non Detect w values as BLANK 1 to treat Less Than y Greater Than z or Non Detect w values as 0 2 to treat Less Than y Greater Than z or Non Detect w values as half or twice the value 3 to treat Less Than y Greater Than z or Non Detect w values as the value 4 to preserve Less Than y Greater Than z or Non Detect w values Examples OPTION Inf Dom BOD 4 0 0 preserves a Less Than but treats others as BLANK OPTION M_SUM Inf Dom MGD Flow 0 0 0 0 0 treats all as BLANK OPTION Inf Dom BOD 2 1 BLANK treats a Less Than as half a Non Detect as O and uses the Facility options for a Greater Than 2014 AllMax Software Inc Operator10 Help 14 10 22PRE_LMT I p x PRE_LMT kp x PREtreatment LiMiT for sampling point and parameter limit type y offset x months Value The limit for a specific sampling point and parameter for the current date y is the type of limit if y is O then the if y is 1 then the if y is 2 then the if y is 3 then the if y is 4 then the if y is 5 then the if y is 6 then the if y is 7 then the result is
28. O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 104 Operator10 Help 4 8 1 Process Setup Process Setu The Process Setup screen allows users to define and maintain process control settings to assist in the calculation of standard water and wastewater math D OS OO O O OOOO O O O e Process Setup Facility South WWTP Process Type Primary Process Location Primary Cir Pro Source Status Plant Influent flow Plant Influent lab Process Influent Data Flow Flow Lab Data 1 Plant Influent ow Y y Process Effluent Primary Cir Ef Process Section Flow Based On 2 3 9 of Process Influent Flow 4 a Section Fow Meters 5 6 Sections Remove Section Information Remove Type of Process Section Primary Clr 1 Primary Clarifier Tank 1 fi Primary Clr 2 Primary Clarifier Tank 2 a Primary Cir 3 Primary Clarifier Tank 3 Influent of Process Flow Primary Clr Sum Primary Clarifier Summary 33 In Service Previously In Out Service History Section Summary Only The Process Setup section allows users to define process influent process effluent process section dimension flow rate and other information in order to calculate process control values using standard water and wastewater math The following options can be defined in the Process Setup section e Process Type Select from the drop down list
29. W_AVG I p x y z w Weekly AVG offset x months week rule avg W_MAX I p x y z w Weekly MAX offset x months week rule avg W_MIN I p x y z w Weekly MIN offset x months week rule avg WDOM x WeekDay Of 1st of Month 1 7 offset x months WEIR x y z WEIR rectangular gal min for head x inches width y ft type z WOM x Week Of Month 1 5 offset x days x lt XOR x y if x OR y eXclusively then 1 else O lt Y_AVG I p x y z Yearly AVG Daily value offset months type Y_AVGM I p x y z Yearly AVG Monthly average offset months type Y_CAVG I p x y Calendar Year AVG of daily values offset x months type Y_COUNT I p x y Yearly COUNT of daily values offset x months for y months Y_CSUM l p x Calendar Year SUM of daily values offset x months Y_MAX l p x y Yearly MAX daily value offset x months for y months Y_MAXM I p x y z Yearly MAX Monthly average offset months type Y_MIN I p x y Yearly MIN daily value offset x months for y months Y_MINM l p x y z Yearly MIN Monthly average offset months type Y_RES I p x y1 y2 y3 y4 Yearly RESidual offset x years percents y1 y2 y3 y4 Y_SUM I p x y Yearly SUM of daily values offset x months for y months Y_TOTM l p x y Yearly sum of Monthly TOTals offset x months for y months YR x the YeaR 1970 2037 offset x years 143 General Information 14 3 1 Topics in this section include e Data Types e LP I p l p
30. Wednesday April 25 2012 8 00 AM Wednesday April 25 2012 9 00 AM Thursday April 26 2012 8 00 AM Friday April 27 2012 6 00 AM Friday April 27 2012 7 00 AM Count 7 Sum 1103 Avg 157 57 Max 700 Min 1 GMean 15 22 Std Dev 243 31 Upper Limit 1000 Hourly Values DataView Daily Values DataView Functionality For additional information the following functionality topics are available in the DataView section e Add New DataView DataView Properties Display Options e DataView Properties Column Setup e DataView Properties Column Properties e DataView Application 7 7 3 Summary Values DataView Summary Values DataView Summary Values DataView types allow users to display the DataView in a view that provides daily data in a row column format In this type of DataView Location Parameters are displayed as columns and summarized monthly intervals are displayed as rows O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Operator10 Help Sum Flow Summary Summary 1 01 2011 12 31 2012 244 853 187 818 Dayboro Flow mL Day t la 11 973 la 4 968 6 020 Murrumba Downs Flow mL Day 1 223 716 554 388 632 285 South Caboolture Flow mL Day 637 745 393 482 474 558 266 174 187 928 la 5 937 647 276 452 626 233 977 180 967 ja
31. add the additional parameter D_STDEV I p l_flow p_flow x y Examples D_STDEV Effluent 50050 7 7 standard deviation of past 7 days D_STDEV Effluent 50050 3 7 standard deviation of week beginning 3 days ago 14 6 23 D_SUMI I p x y D_SUM I p x Daily SUM for location and parameter offset x days for y days Value The sum of data values of a specific location and parameter for the date x days from the current date and extending for a range of y days When a parameter to calculate loading is specified O 8 or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter D_SUM p l_flow p_flow x y Examples D_SUM Effluent 50050 7 7 sum of past 7 days D_SUM Effluent 50050 3 7 sum of week beginning 3 days ago 14 6 24 D_TOTAL I p x y D_TOTAL I p x Daily TOTAL for location and parameter offset x days for y days average number of days Value The total of data values of a specific location and parameter for the date x days from the current date and extending for a range of y days The total is defined as the average of values multiplied by the number of days in the range Examples D_TOTAL Effluent 50050 7 7 total of past 7 days D_TOTAL Effluent 50050 3 7 total of week beginning 3 days ago 14 6 25 D_VAL I p x y D_VAL I p x Daily VALue for location and parameter offset x months and y days Va
32. and Parameter Flow MGD Importutility exe Usage The Operator10 Import Utility must be aware of the server and database to which the user will be importing data This information can be provided in several ways e Manually When running ImportUtility exe as an application i e double clicking the application file ImportUtility exe a prompt for the Database Facility window will appear and users are requried to select a server and database from this window The utility will then begin the import e Command line When creating a shortcut or running the import from a command line prompt users may include the server and database in the command line as follows C AllMaxWater Application ImportuUtility exe localhost WATER In the above example the command line parameters of localhost server name and WATER database name are provided to ensure correct import via Scheduling When using the Scheduled Import option Tools ribbon menu Import Export Data group Schedule Imports button server and database information is automatically included when the import is scheduled 2014 AllMax Software Inc Utilities 515 e Automatically When a user calls the ImportUtility from within a running Operatori0 application the program is aware of the current database and server on which the database is located Call the Import Utility from the Tools ribbon menu Import Export Data group Import Now button e Browse for Import File s Users m
33. following parameters to determine the calculation method y is the week of average if y is O then the result is the weekly average for a monthly period see also M_AVG if y is 1 then the result is the weekly or 7 day average for the first week if y is 2 then the result is for the second week if y is 3 then the result is for the third week if y is 4 then the result is for the fourth week if y is 5 then the result is for the fifth week etc special cases if y is 32 then the result is the offset from the first of the calendar month of the start day of the monthly period if y is 33 then the result is the offset of the last day of the monthly period z is the rule used for a 7 day average if z is O then the result uses a continuous or floating average if z is 1 then a week falls in the month which contains its Saturday if z is 2 then a week falls in the month which contains its Wednesday if z is 3 then the result uses the first of month for 4 weeks 28 days if z is 4 then the first of month 4th week extends to the end of the month if z is 5 then the first of month is controlled by facility option if z is 6 then only full weeks Sun Sat in the month are considered w is the type of average used if w is O then the average is the arithmetic mean average if w is 1 then the average is the geometric mean for fecals if w is 2 then the average is the flow weighted average When a parameter to calculate loading is
34. ih 2 Point Type A Grid Lines Y Point Size _ Color Scheme VOD ond noo Marker Volume 3D Cluster Color Lines hooodnowaon 8 4 1 2 5 2 Series Properties Series Properties Series Properties include Graph Type Appearance and Color options for each Location Parameter 2014 AllMax Software Inc 51 Faecal Coliform SA4 Type 3D Bar s shape Multiple Types Series Color m Gallery Type ME Multiple Shapes UA No of vertex 0 Show Values Borders Area Lines E Conic Connecting Lines 8 4 1 2 5 3 Scale Propeties Scale Properties Scale Properties include Linearity and Scaling options for the x and y axis 9 Main Y axis X Axis Secondary Y axis Main Y axis Minimum g Maximum 1100 Scale unit 1 Decimals 9 Increment gap Automatic Fixed 0 Show Zero axis Axis scale 9 Linear Logarithmic 10 8 4 1 2 5 4 3D View Properties 3 D Properties 3 D Properties allow 2 Dimensional or 3 Dimensional Graphs including full 3 D Rotation and 2014 AllMax Software Inc 230 Operator10 Help Shadows x Angle 10 3D _ Full 3D View Y Angle 0 Y Shadows 8 4 1 2 5 5 Titles Titles Title Properties include a Top Bottom Left and or Right Titles for the Graph 51 Faecal Coliform Median cfu 1 00m Left Faecal Coliform cfu 1 00m Right Bottom Days Apply 8 4 1 2 6 Copy Options
35. lt x z2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 z2 2z 1 00 No Limit Daily Values DataView Daily Values DataView Functionality For additional information the following functionality topics are available in the DataView section e Add New DataView e DataView Properties Display Options e DataView Properties Column Setup e DataView Properties Column Properties e DataView Application 7 7 2 Hourly Values DataView Hourly Values DataView Hourly Values DataView types allow users to display the DataView in a view that provides daily data in a row column format In this type of DataView Location Parameters are displayed as columns and date time intervals are displayed as rows O 2014 AllMax Software Inc DataView 175 Hourly 4 01 2012 Manet 4 30 2012 12 00 00 Wednesday April 04 2012 6 00 AM Wednesday April 04 2012 8 00 AM Wednesday April 04 2012 9 00 AM Tuesday April 10 2012 7 00 AM Tuesday April 10 2012 8 00 AM Wednesday April 11 2012 6 00 AM Wednesday April 11 2012 7 00 AM Wednesday April 11 2012 8 00 AM Wednesday April 11 2012 9 00 AM Tuesday April 17 2012 7 00 AM Tuesday April 17 2012 8 00 AM Tuesday April 17 2012 9 00 AM Wednesday April 18 2012 6 00 AM Wednesday April 18 2012 7 00 AM Wednesday April 18 2012 8 00 AM Wednesday April 18 2012 9 00 AM Tuesday April 24 2012 7 00 AM Tuesday April 24 2012 8 00 AM Tuesday April 24 2012 9 00 AM Wednesday April 25 2012 7 00 AM
36. offset type rule avg SNC violation MIN Daily SNC_MINM I p x y z w v offset type rule avg SNC violation MIN Monthly Weekly Data Functions W_AVG I p x y z w Weekly AVG offset x months week rule avg W_MAX I p x y z w Weekly MAX offset x months week rule avg W_MIN I p x y Z w Weekly MIN offset x months week rule avg Yearly Data Functions Y_AVG I p x y z Yearly AVG Daily value offset months type Y_AVGM I p x y z Yearly AVG Monthly average offset months type Y_CAVG p x y Calendar Year AVG of daily values offset x months type Y_COUNT I p x y Yearly COUNT of daily values offset x months for y months Y_CSUM l p x Calendar Year SUM of daily values offset x months Y_MAX I p1 x y Yearly MAX daily value offset x months for y months Y_MAXM I p x y z Yearly MAX Monthly average offset months type Y_MIN I p x y Yearly MIN daily value offset x months for y months Y_MINM l p x y z Yearly MIN Monthly average offset months type Y_RES I p x y1 y2 y3 y4 Yearly RESidual offset x years percents y1 y2 y3 y4 Y_SUM I p x y Yearly SUM of daily values offset x months for y months Y_TOTM l p x y Yearly sum of Monthly TOTals offset x months for y months 14 2 All Functions alphabetically All Functions alphabetically See also All Functions by groups Data Types Accessing Location Parameter data values 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 3
37. radio button to print only the data and appropriate information Verify Comments To enter comments at the time of printing check the Verify Comments checkbox Verify Exceptions To review and or modify reported exceptions at the time of printing check the Verify Exceptions checkbox Default Text for Rows Enter the default text that should appear when there is no calculation required or there is no data to be calculated Fill in the Sample Permit and Units fields Treat lt gt Data As Select from the drop down menu to determine the method by which data with the less than lt greater than gt or non detect data qualifiers will be treated Available options are e Preserve Types Calculations will preserve the available data qualifiers and calculated results will display the appropriate data qualifier Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 6 2 1 4 lt 3 as the less than symbol to be preserved for the final calculation 2014 AllMax Software Inc 300 Operator10 Help Entered Value Calculations will drop the data qualifiers from data and calculated results will display without the qualifiers using only the numeric entered portion of the data Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 6 2 1 4 3 as the less than symbol will be dropped for the final calculation Half Entered Value Calculations will drop the data qualifiers from data and calculated results will display without
38. represents choosing the checkbox displaying the name check name n1 to n2 characters represents a text entry of from n1 to n2 characters including spaces and punctuation If n1 is 0 no entry is required Reserved punctuation characters hyphen colon and comma have special usage and should not be used for most entries link click links to navigate to additional topics or information hover over this style of link to display acronym information and definition Copyright Operator10 Wastewater Data Management Software for Water and Wastewater is 1996 2014 by AllMax Software Inc AllMax Software Inc PO Box 40 911 S Main St Kenton OH 43326 Toll free phone 800 670 1867 Local phone 419 673 8863 Fax 419 673 8864 Sales amp account email address sales allmaxsoftware com Technical Support email address go2tech allmaxsoftware com Corporate website www allmaxsoftware com go2tech remote support website www allmaxsoftware com go2tech O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 30 Operator10 Help 3 3 1 General Features Topics in this section include e Grid e Multi Edit e Security e Date Calendar e Audit Trail e Windows Login Grid Topics in this section include e Grid Toolbar e Grid Columns e Grid Data View e Grid Print Grid Toolbar Toolbar The AllMax Grid Toolbar is available throughout the program and has many functions Users can manipulate the information presented in
39. rule z average w limit v Value The maximum monthly average Significant Non Compliance SNC violation for data values of a specific location and parameter for 6 months beginning x months from the current month The SNC is expressed as a ratio equal to the count of monthly averages exceeding the limit divided by the count of all months having values The function uses the following parameters to determine the calculation method y is the type of average if y is O then the result is based on a daily maximum if y is 1 then the result is based on a weekly or 7 day maximum if y is 2 then the result is based on an hourly maximum if y is 3 then the result is based on a 4 day maximum z is the rule used for a 7 day average if z is O then the result uses a continuous or floating average if z is 1 then a week falls in the month which contains its Saturday if z is 2 then a week falls in the month which contains its Wednesday if z is 3 then the result uses the first of month for 4 weeks 28 days if z is 4 then the first of month 4th week extends to the end of the month if z is 5 then the first of month is controlled by facility option if z is 6 then only full weeks Sun Sat in the month are considered w is the type of average used if w is O then the average is the arithmetic mean average if w is 1 then the average is the geometric mean for fecals if w is 2 then the average is the flow weighted average v is the violation lim
40. separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter V_CNTP I p _flow p_flow x y z w Examples V_CNTP Effluent 31614 0 2 3 1 number of violations for current month if count is less than 3 per week V_CNTP Effluent 31614 0 256 2 16 2 3 1 value of the second violation for previous month V_CNTP Effluent 31614 256 3 3 3 4 3 number of violations for previous quarter if count is less than 4 per month 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 481 14 16 5 V_DLY I p x y z w V_DLY I p x y zZ w DaiLY Violation for location and parameter offset x days type y max limit z min limit w Value The count or duration of violations for hourly data values of a specific location and parameter for the date x days from the current date Hourly data values that exceed maximum limit z or minimum limit w are considered If the limit z or w is BLANK it is not used The type y determines the information returned if y is O then the result is the count of the number of violations for the day if y is 1 then the result is the duration for the entire day in hours that hourly data values exceed limits x or y The result will range from O to 24 hours If the previous day s last value exceeds the limits then the duration starts at the beginning of the day Durations are accumulated until the violation ends or the end of the day NOTE The duration is the same as that retumed be the
41. shows all data values for the current month Each Cell is identified by the Column Location Parameter and Row Date or Summary Data may be edited or entered in the Current Cell identified by a dotted line around its perimeter Data values are stored internally with 15 significant digit Precision Internal values are unaffected by the number of display digits or following zeros Numbers may range to 1 0E16 Data is automatically recognized by its format Any entry containing a colon is a Time value Any entry containing a slash is a Date value Any entry beginning with a number plus or minus is a Numeric value Any entry beginning with a Less Than lt is a Less Than value Any entry beginning with a Greater Than gt is a Greater Than value Any entry beginning with a Tilde is a Non Detect value Any entry beginning with an Alphabetic character A B is an Alpha Code eDV Summaries Data summary values are provided by default at the bottom of each column When opened initially summary values will be calculated based on the data that may already be present Press the Calculate button to recalculate summary values 7 11 2 1 eDV Templates eDV Templates eDV Templates file extension edvt can be created when exporting the original O 2014 AllMax Software Inc css Data as DataView in order to provide a read only copy of the eDV eDV Templates when opened allow for data entry to b
42. such as Notepad and modified if necessary 15 8 Calculator Tool Calculator Tool The Calculator Tool allows users to perform evaluation of formulas functions and other mathematical calculations prior to writing data to the database or attaching the formula to a Location Parameter O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Uiltes s19 Formula e g MAX INFLOW 00310 3 7 100 D_LASTN 7 0 0 20 Formula Result 1 Formula Test Use values from Test Data 0 Use Data From Database Date 10 31 2012 k 1st L P Value 200 Default Loc Par for wildcards 2nd L P Value 353300 cua 3rd L P Value 4th L P Value 50 50 The Calculator Tool provides an area in which users can test possible formulas functions and other mathematical calculations Accessing the Calculator Tool To access the Calculator Tool go to the Main Application window and find the Tools ribbon menu In the Tools ribbon click the Calculator button to open the Calculator Tool For more information about usage see the Formula List topic 15 9 Operator10 Tools Operatori0 Tools Several calculator style Tools are available In the main application go to the Tools 2014 AllMax Software Inc s Operator10 Help ribbon menu select E Tools Calculators and Converters from the Useful Tools group Available tools calculators and converters are presented on the left side of the window in the tree Select from the available
43. then TRUE Value If the value of a specific location and parameter for the date x days from the current date is a Non Detect value the value TRUE 1 is returned Otherwise the function returns FALSE 0 The function considers only Non Detect values it ignores data Alpha Codes Less Than or Greater Than values Examples ISND Effluent 50050 0 1 if a Non Detect value otherwise O ISND Effluent 50050 1 1 if the previous day contained a Non Detect value 14 4 17 ISTIME I p x ISTIME I p x If the value offset x days IS a TIME value then TRUE Value If the value of a specific location and parameter for the date x days from the current date is a Time value the value TRUE 1 is returned Otherwise the function returns FALSE 0 The function considers only Time values it ignores data Alpha Codes Less Than Greater Than or Non Detect values Examples ISTIME Effluent 50050 0 1 if a Time value otherwise O ISTIME Effluent 50050 1 1 if the previous day contained a Time value 14 4 18 LT x y LT x y x lt y If x is Less Than y then TRUE else FALSE Value If x is less than y the value TRUE 1 is returned If x is greater than or equal to y the value FALSE 0 is returned If x is BLANK and y is a value the function returns TRUE If y is BLANK the function returns FALSE Examples LT 3 3 14 1 3 14 lt 3 14 0 14 4 19 NOT x NOT x NOT x 2014 AllMax Software Inc Value If x is TRUE not equal
44. y out Value The logarithm of the removal or reduction from the value x to the value y If either x or y is BLANK the function returns BLANK If a removal percentage is 90 the Log Removal is equal to 1 99 the Log Removal is equal to 2 99 9 the Log Removal is equal to 3 99 99 the Log Removal is equal to 4 etc 2014 AllMax Software Inc 430 Operator10 Help Examples LOG_REM Inf BOD 5 Eff BOD 5 the logarithm of the removal of BOD LOG_REM 127 0 4 2 5 14 9 20 MAX x1 x2 xn MAX x1 x2 xn MAXimum of all values from x1 through xn Value The maximum of values x1 through xn Any number of values may be specified If any value is BLANK the value is ignored The value BLANK is returned if all values are BLANK Examples MAX 3 14 2 14 3 14 MAX 5 BLANK 2 14 2 14 14 9 21 MIN x1 x2 xn MIN x1 x2 xn MINimum of all values from x1 through xn Value The minimum of values x1 through xn Any number of values may be specified If any value is BLANK the value is ignored The value BLANK is returned if all values are BLANK Examples MIN 3 14 2 14 2 14 MIN 5 BLANK 2 14 2 14 14 9 22 MOD x y x y MOD x y xY oy MODulus or remainder of x y Value The remainder of x y such that x i y remainder where i is an integer and the remainder is less than y Examples MOD 17 5 2 153 10 3 14 9 23 MUL x y x y MUL x y x y MULtiply x and y mul
45. 001 Plant If Flow MGD 1 600 imports a numeric hourly data value of 1 6 into the Facility referenced as 001 using Location Plant If and Parameter Flow MGD Example 3 The following line 09 01 00 001 Plant Ef BOD 2 2 imports a numeric daily data value of lt 2 data type 2 or less than into the Facility referenced as 001 using Location Plant Ef and Parameter Flow MGD See the Data help topic for more information about data types and equivalent values Sampling Events Data Sampling Events data can be imported using the ImportUtility exe application For more information please see the following help topic Import Sampling Events Data Data Notes Import File Structure A secondary data file named OP10Note impnote may be imported into the Operator Notes database as Data Notes QuickNotes It must also reside in the License directory Each line in the note file must either be Blank A comment beginning with a semicolon or tab A data line consisting of 2014 AllMax Software Inc sta Operator10 Help A Date A comma or tab A Facility ID A comma or tab A Location A comma or tab A Parameter A comma or tab A Note 1 through 2000 characters Example 1 The following line 09 01 00 001 Plant If Flow MGD This is a data note This is a new line in my data note imports a quick note into the database for the Facility referenced as 001 using Location Plant If
46. 14 6 15 D_LASTNP I p x y z w D_LASTNP I p x y Z w Daily Percentile of LAST z Number of values for location and parameter offset x months and y days percent w Value The w th percentile of z number of data values of a specific location and parameter equal to or prior to the date x months and y days from the current date the last data values not later than the date The function considers only valid data and will return BLANK if there is no valid data equal to or earlier than the date In the distribution of data values into 100 groups having equal frequencies w percent of the values lie at or below the w th percentile If z is less than or equal to zero the function returns BLANK The w th percentile Loading may be returned by adding the additional parameter D_LASTNP p x y z w 1 O 2014 AllMax Software Inc s Operator10 Help Examples D_LASTNP Effluent 50050 1 0 7 70 70th percentile of seven values one month ago or earlier 14 6 16 D_LOADING I p x y D_LOADING I p x Daily LOADING for location and parameter offset x months for y days Value The loading value in pounds per day LB D for any location including a process or section The function always uses the base parameter A second Location Parameter may be used to specify the flow location D_LOADING I p l p x y The flow value p is ignored use The optional parameter z may be added to return 1 for kg d 2 for g d Examples D_
47. 2 3 x FALSE 0 equal to 0 see also Constants FIRST x1 x2 xn FIRST non blank value FORMULA abc value from another FORMULA FRAC x FRACtional part of value x 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 383 G GT x y x gt y if x is Greater Than y 1 else O H H_AVG I p x y Hourly AVeraGe offset x days hour y H_CALC l p x y z Houlry CALCulations value x offset y days type z H_COMB I p l p x y COMBined Hourly offset x days type y H_COUNT l p x y Hourly COUNT offset x days hour y H_FUNC l p x y z Hourly FUNCtion offset x days value y type z H_GMEAN I p x y Hourly Geometric MEAN offset x days hour y H_INTER I p x y Hourly INTERpolate from adjacent data offset x days hour y H_MAX l p x y Z Hourly MAXimum offset x days hour y option z H_MED I p x y Hourly MEDian offset x days hour y H_METER I p x y z Hourly METER value offset x days max meter reading y multiplier z H_MIN l p x y z Hourly MINimum offset x days hour y option z H_PRTPWR I p l p x y Hourly PoWeR of PaRTicle counts particle diameter X for first L P particle diameter Y for second L P H_STD l p x y Hourly STandard Deviation offset x days hour y H_SUM l p x y Hourly SUM offset x days hour y H_VAL I p x y Hourly VALue offset x days minutes y HLIME x y z w Vv Hydrated LIME required in mg l ll IDIST x Inverse of standard normal DIST
48. 2 3 Help About Hel About Screen O 2014 AllMax Software Inc z Operator10 Help The Help About screen displays important details related the application and database support that can aid and assist the user and technical support in resolving technical support issues To access the Help About screen navigate to the Help menu and choose the option About Database Properties System Properties WasteWater DataPort Auditing OPC DDE BioSolids Audit Trail 1of5 Normal ALLMAX brian IP48BRIANDESK 9 19 1213 WorkGroup 11 0 247 Windows 1 1 of 1 Seat Wastewater Application A Copyright 1996 2012 AllMax Software Inc PO Box 40 Kenton OH 43326 1 800 670 1867 Sales sales allmaxsoftware com Np48briandesk allmaxwastewater 1213 data license Support go2tech allmaxsoftware com localhost Web www allmaxsoftware com Nip48briandesk allmaxwastewater 1213 data westbasi i Credits and Acknowledgements Operator10 Wastewater Data Management Setting Data In Motion Software The Help About screen displays important information related to the application and database support for Operatori0 Wastewater Information presented in the Help About screen includes but is not limited to the following sections 2014 AllMax Software Inc Introduction to Operator10 Wastewater 25 License Information The information presented in the License Information section includes b
49. 2 ACODE I p x ACODE I p x Numeric Alpha CODE representation of the value offset x days Value The value equal to the Alpha Code for a specific location and parameter for the date x days fromthe current date This represents the internal storage format for Alpha Codes useful for comparison or in the ASSIGN function If there is no valid Alpha Code for the day the function returns BLANK Examples ACODE Inflow 50050 1 Alpha Code representation for the previous day IF ACODE Inflow 50050 0 ALPHA AF 2 5 BLANK if the value is equal to AF then return 2 5 14 10 3 ALPHA ab ALPHA ab Numeric ALPHA code representation for ab Value The value representing the internal storage format for Alpha Codes useful for comparison or in the ASSIGN function Examples ALPHA ABCDE 2738179 ALPHA AH 217 IF ACODE Inflow 50050 0 ALPHA AF 2 5 BLANk if the value is equal to AF then return 2 5 14 10 4 APPLY x y APPLY x y APPLY function 2 y to the data used in function 1 x before returning the result Function 1 x can be most formulas which use a range of data for their source i e most fo the D_ H M_ V_ etc functions SUM AVG COUNT MAX MIN etc 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 437 Function 2 y can be any function and replaces option parameter with each data value An optional 3rd parameter where if the parameter is 1 function 2 y is app
50. 461 M_STAT 462 M_STDEV 464 M_SUM 464 M_SUM2 465 M_SUMH 466 M_TOTAL 466 M_TYPE 466 Main Window 366 Market Value 148 Mass Balance 281 Mass Balance Report 281 Mathematical Functions 424 Max 403 404 416 417 419 430 456 459 484 486 487 489 493 498 499 MAX 430 Maximum 403 404 416 417 419 430 456 459 484 486 487 489 493 498 499 Mean 125 126 400 418 425 453 456 492 496 497 Med 419 Median 402 419 457 Menu Bar 358 367 Meter 401 405 420 Meter Reading 401 405 420 Metric 440 Middle 402 419 457 Min 403 405 416 417 421 430 458 459 482 485 490 491 495 499 500 MIN 430 Mineralization 500 519 Minimum 403 405 416 421 430 458 459 482 485 490 491 495 499 500 Minimumax 417 Minus 398 433 454 Minute 394 Miscellaneous 446 Miscellaneous Functions 434 MOD 430 Modulus 430 Month 409 411 Month of Year 412 Monthly 446 447 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 464 465 466 476 496 497 499 500 501 s3 Operator10 Help Monthly Average 461 Monthly Data Functions 452 MOY 412 MUL 430 Multi Edit 30 40 Multiple Data Values 331 Multiple Violations 481 Multiplication 430 Multiply 416 417 430 Multi Year Summary Report 275 N Natural Logarithm 429 Navigate 30 Navigation 30 155 Navigation Containers 163 Nested If 390 NetDDE 353 New Database 69 New DataView 170 New Event 330 N
51. 50050 BLANK 4 if the flow value is a Less Than TYPE M_SUM Inf Dom 50050 0 0 BLANK 4 if some values are Less Than TYPE Inf Dom 50050 4 flow value but considered as produced by a Less Than 14 10 3NAL abc VAL abc a The VALue represented by abc Value The value equal to the representation of abc If there is no valid representation the function returns BLANK Any entry containing a colon is a Time value Any entry containing a slash is a Date value Any entry beginning with a number plus or minus is a Numeric value Any entry beginning with a Less Than lt is a Less Than value 2014 AllMax Software Inc 452 Operator10 Help Any entry beginning with a Greater Than gt is a Greater Than value Any entry beginning with a Tilde is a Non Detect value Any entry beginning with an Alphabetic character A B is an Alpha Code The Facility Options may be applied to the value add the additional parameter VAL abc 1 Examples VAL lt 10 a Less Than value of 10 VAL AA The Alpha Code AA VAL 2 15 The Time 2 15 135 minutes 14 10 3WEIR x yz 14 11 WEIR x y Z WEIR flow gal min for head x inches width y feet type z Value The estimated flow in gal min for a weir with a head of x inches and a width of y feet or angle in degrees if z is O then the result is the flow for a rectangular contracted weir 1495 width height 2 height 4 3 2 heigh
52. 5Year Forecast 4 m r save preview Guidance Click template or press PageUp PageDn 9 7 2 1 1 4 PE EDU and Industry Projections In the PE EDU and Industry Projections setup section for the 5 Year Forecast Report users can edit the following fields PE EDU and Industry Projections For PE EDU and Industry Projections enter the previous and projected totals and increases for the specified years Enter the values directly into the labeled fields 2014 AllMax Software Inc Operator10 Help z ReportProperties E E PE EDU and Industry Projections res PE EDU Previous 4yrs ago 3 yrs ago 2 yrs ago ARS SS SYear Forecast 01 5Year Forecast m r Click template or press PageUp PageDn 9 7 2 1 1 5 Comments In the Comments setup section for the 5 Year Forecast Report users can edit the following information Comments Enter the default comments to appear on report at the time of printing Users can modify these comments at the time of printing if the JAllow Comments checkbox is marked in the General Properties and Settings screen 2014 AllMax Software Inc Por Yea Wak ds SexfrenlicZD ft E rr error SYear Forecast 01 5Year Forecast malls m Click template or press PageUp PageDn 9 7 2 2 Multi Year Summary Report The Multi Year Summary Report provides information for multiple years of data The form can
53. 8 4 7 8 4 1 General Number displays the entered value to the last significant digit Os are not displayed Number displays the entered value as a number with O following the last significant digit Percent displays the percent symbol Time displays data as HH MM hour minute time values Date displays data as Date values Group Header Enter text to be used as a group header or select from available group headers For more information about Group Headers see the Group Header help topic Summaries Select from the list of available summaries to be displayed as column summaries at the bottom of the selected Location Parameters Summary Values Types If the selected DataView is the Summary Values Type the selected option in the Summary Values Types section will determine the type of monthly summary displayed for the column s Reset Columns To reset column settings to the default presentation of DataView columns click the EA Reset Column s to Default button This will update all selected columns to their default display settings DataView Properties Print Properties Topics in this section include e DataView Print Properties Options e DataView Print Properties Page e DataView Print Properties Margin e DataView Print Properties Header Footer DataView Print Properties Options DataView Print Properties Options In the DataView Print Properties Options section users can define options rela
54. 9 4 COUNT x1 x2 xn COUNT x1 x2 xn COUNT of all non BLANK values from x1 through xn Value The count of values x1 through xn Any number of values may be specified If any value is BLANK the value is ignored The value BLANK is returned if all values are BLANK Examples COUNT 3 2 2 COUNT 1 2 BLANK 3 2 4 0 3 O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 426 Operator10 Help 14 9 5 14 9 6 14 9 7 14 9 8 DEFAULT x y DEFAULT x y Value y or DEFAULT value x if y is blank Value The value y is returned unless it is BLANK where the default value x is returned instead Examples DEFAULT 50 Influent 00021 50 degrees F if there is no value recorded DEFAULT 0 Influent 50050 same result as NONBLANK Influent 50050 DIST x DIST x standard normal DISTribution of value x Value The area under the standard normal distribution curve for the value x Examples DIST 1 96 975 DIST 0 5 DIV x y x y DIV x y x DIVide x by y division Value The quotient of x and y x divided by y If either x or y is BLANK the function returns BLANK Examples DIV 7 5 30 25 3 14 2 1 57 EXP x EXP x EXPonential of x exponential Value Exponential of x e x The constant e 2 718 raised to the power of x If x is BLANK the function returns BLANK Examples EXP 0 1 EXP 3 14 23 104 O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 427 14 9 9 FACT x FACT x FACTorial
55. Average e 7 Day Average e Average Mean e Flow Weighted Average e Geometric Mean e Rounding Rules e Standard Deviation 4 13 1 1 4 Day Average 4 Day Average 4 Day Averages are calculated by Operator10 Wastewater software using the following method Data is averaged for groups of 4 consecutive values beginning with the earliest data available Only valid data is considered Groups are considered to be in the month only if the day of the last value of the group is in the month Any additional days outliers are ignored 4 Day Averages of each period are normally calculated by using the arithmetic mean 2014 AllMax Software Inc 1 4 Operator10 Help Average Fecals are calculated using the Geometric Mean The Monthly Average is the arithmetic mean average of each 4 day average The Monthly Maximum is the maximum of each 4 day average The Monthly Minimum is the minimum of each 4 day average 4 13 1 2 7 Day Average 7 Day Average The following 7 Day Averages are calculated by Operator10 Wastewater software Continuous or Floating Data is averaged for several overlapping 7 day periods beginning with the first of the month and continuing each consecutive day of the month until a period reaches the end of the month First of Month 28 day Data is averaged for four 4 7 day periods beginning with the first day of the month Any additional days are ignored First of Month whole month Data
56. COMB I p l p x y COMBined Hourly offset x days type y COUNT I p x y Hourly COUNT offset x days hour y FUNC I p x y z Hourly FUNCtion offset x days value y type z GMEAN I p x y Hourly Geometric MEAN offset x days hour y INTER p1 x y Hourly INTERpolate from adjacent data offset x days hour y MAX l p x y Z Hourly MAXimum offset x days hour y option z H_MED I p x y Hourly MEDian offset x days hour y H_METER I p x y z Hourly METER value offset x days max meter reading y multiplier z H_MIN I p x y z Hourly MINimum offset x days hour y option z H_PRIPWR I p l p x y Hourly PoWeR of PaRTicle counts particle diameter X for first L P particle diameter Y for second L P H_STD l p x y Hourly STandard Deviation offset x days hour y H_SUM l p x y Hourly SUM offset x days hour y H_VAL I p x y Hourly VALue offset x days minutes y EEE SE EJE Mathematical Functions ABS x ABSolute value of x ADD x y x y ADD x and y AVG x1 x2 xn AVeraGe of all non blank values COUNT x1 x2 xn COUNT of all non blank values DEFAULT x y value y or DEFAULT x if y is blank DIST x standard normal DISTribution of value x DIV x y x y DIVide x by y EXP x EXPonential of x e x FACT x FACTorial of value x 1 2 3 x FIRST x1 x2 xn FIRST non blank value FRAC x FRACtional part of value x IDIST x Inverse of standard normal DISTribution INT x
57. Click E Save to save and clear the Quick Note 7 10 6 Import Data Import Data can be imported directly into the DataView based on a known file format Based on the file format chosen the import process using the DataView will import data with options Beginning an Import To begin an import navigate to the Tools ribbon and select E Import to begin In the Select a File to Import window that opens on the lower right side of the window select from the following file types to import Text Files csv txt e Excel Files xls e XML Files xml Once the file type is selected navigate to the file location and select the desired file to be imported Click Open Import Options Based on the selected file type to imported file format options may need to be provided Text File Import Options For importing text files the following options are available e First Row is Column Headers Check this box if the import file contains a first row of data that are for column headers e First Column is Data Date Check this box if the import file contains a first column of data that is date e Has Summary Rows Check this box if the import file contains summary rows at the end of the date data rows 2014 AllMax Software Inc Dataview zos Click 0 OK to begin the import Export File Import Options XML Text File Import Options 7 10 7 Export Data Export Data can be exported from the
58. Click the drop down menu beside the Add button and select the option Insert After to insert a Location Parameter after the selected Location Parameter Choose individual or multiple Location Parameters from the provided picklist Delete Column To delete a column highlight single or multiple Location Parameters from the displayed x Location Parameters by answering Y Yes Yes or X No No from the confirmation dialog list of L Ps and click the Delete button Confirm the deletion of the selected Confirming Column Setup Click the 13 OK button to confirm the addition or removal of Location Parameters as columns DataView Properties Column Properties DataView Properties Column Properties In the Column Properties tab users can customize column display options for the DataView Column Properties are set on the right hand side of the Properties window Properties can be set on a single selected Location Parameter or for multiple selected Location Parameters Users can set properties the following items O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Dataview 183 a Dare A e Ready DataView Properties Column Setup Column Properties Print Properties ES 4 14 records 1 selected gt DE S Q A D 1 column selected Facility Directory Facility Name Location Parameter E Display T Background Color adi ad pS Column Header W S Aer 01 Column Justificatio
59. Control Full Control Full Control Full Control Full Control Full Control Full Control Full Control Full Control Full Control Full Control The Review Data window displays recent data values stored in the database All data can be displayed for the selected Location Parameter N N N N N N Y N Y Y Y F Y Y Y N Data Types Topics in this section include e Alpha Code e Data Value e Date Greater Than Less Than Non Detect e Time Alpha Code Alpha Code Alpha Code data values are one to ten character abbreviations that are stored at a specific Location Parameter at a specific date and time The first character must be non numeric and case is ignored A description is associated with each Alpha Code Any entry beginning with an Alphabetic character A B is an Alpha Code value If set in the Facility Options the Alpha Code AA may be treated in calculations as a zero value Likewise T True and Y Yes may be treated as 1 F False and N No may be treated as 0 Data Value Data Value Numeric Daily or Hourly Data values are numeric values stored at a specific Location Parameter 2014 AllMax Software Inc Main Application or at a specific date and time for Hourly Data Numbers may range to 1 0E16 Any entry beginning with a number plus or minus is a Daily or Hourly value 4 7 3 3 Date Date Data Values Date data values are stored at
60. Copy as Bitmap Metafile Data Choosing one of the Copy as menu items copies the current Graph to the windows clipboard in one of the following formats 2014 AllMax Software Inc Graphing a Select Copy as Bitmap to place a windows bitmap or DIB Device Independent Bitmap bitmap onto the windows clipboard The bitmap will be the same size number of pixels as is shown on the screen It will include stationary or fixed Legend Boxes but not the Toolbar Palette Bar Pattern Bar or floating Legend Boxes Select Copy as MetaFile to place a windows metafile onto the windows clipboard The metafile will be resizable It will include stationary or fixed Legend Boxes but not the Toolbar Palette Bar Pattern Bar or floating Legend Boxes Select Copy as Data to place the Data as ASCII text onto the windows clipboard It will include the x axis Legend as row labels the Series Location Parameter Legend as column headers and the data will be separated by tabs Copy as Bitmap and Copy as Data may also be chosen by pressing the appropriate Toolbar button 8 4 1 2 7 Automatic Scale Automatic Scale If the Automatic Scale menu item is checked the application will automatically choose an appropriate scale for the data values 8 4 1 2 8 Fonts Fonts Separate Fonts may be specified for several graph features including Left Right Top and Bottom Titles X and Y Legends Legend Boxes and Values Fonts are chosen from a stan
61. DERM Brendale DERM Brendale DERM Brendale DERM Brendale DERM ip48briandesk al ip48briandesk al ip48briandesk val ip48briandesk al Nip48briandesk al ip48briandesk al Nip48briandesk al in48briandesk al Report Report Report Report Report Report Report Report September 2011 The Logged Documents section allows users to view a list of logged documents printed from the DataView Graphing and Reporting sections Accessing Logged Documents To access the Logged Documents section in the DataView application go to the File menu click the Logged Documents menu option Adding Logged Documents To add new documents to the list of logged documents go the the DataView Graphing or Reporting sections of Operator10 and print a document Upon printing a prompt may be visible asking for the user to log the document as printed with an associated note Depending on the settings found in the Database Properties section users can edit which sections of the program prompt for logging documents 2014 AllMax Software Inc 132 Operator10 Help Delete Logged Documents To delete a logged document highlight the document in the list and click the x Delete button Confirm the deletion of data by clicking the Y Yes Yes or X No No button 4 144 Logged Documents Report Logged Documents The Logged Documents feature allows users to log
62. Data Secondary Aeration Process Standard 3320 DMR Monthly Standard 3320 DMR Monthly Standard 3320 DMR Monthly Weather 9 6 7 Report Verify Stat Date 01 01 2020 01 01 2020 01 01 2020 01 01 2020 01 01 2020 01 01 2020 01 01 2020 01 01 2020 01 01 2020 01 01 2020 01 01 2020 01 01 2020 01 01 2020 Created 10 11 2005 14 21 10 26 2005 15 31 10 26 2005 15 31 R G G E 10 11 2005 14 21 R 10 11 2005 11 27 10 11 2005 14 22 10 26 2005 15 32 10 26 2005 15 33 10 26 2005 15 32 08 08 2006 09 16 10 11 2005 14 22 10 11 2005 11 26 10 28 2005 10 37 O0DIDODOZDD D DataView G Graph R Report preview Report Verify Remarks Comments Enter remarks or comments to be printed on the Report Form Page If you wish to always be prompted for remarks mark the JAllow Comments checkbox in the Report Properties dialog box Remarks are preserved for the next time of printing O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 258 Operator10 Help Item 8 of 8 Exceptions Sample Enter or edit the Number of Exceptions Frequency of Analysis and Sample Type for the Parameter shown to be printed on the Report Form Page If you wish to be prompted for Exceptions mark the Verify Exceptions checkbox in the Report Properties window General Properties section pr voy soraa DE A Parameter BOD 5 DAY Row 1 20 DEG C 00310 G 0 0 RAW SEW INFLUENT Number of values 14 Exceptions 9 Freq THREE WE
63. DataView using one of the available formats for export Each format provides the user with individual options and functionality Creating an Export file To begin creating an export file go to the Tools ribbon and choose the E Export button to begin Choose from the available options to begin the export process e eDV Exports data in the Electronic DataView format ready for use with the eDV Viewer e CSV Exports data into a Comma Separated Values file suitable for use with a text editor or Microsoft Excel e Excel Exports data as a Microsoft Excel formatted file e XML Text Exports data in a XML formatted file File Export Options Each export options provides the user with data export options if applicable eDV Export Options When exporting data using the eDV format the process and options are as follows 1 From the Tools ribbon click the Export button 2 From the Export menu choose eDV 3 Enter the Export Start Date and Export End Date 4 If desired check the checkbox for Export as Template see Note below 5 Click 3 OK 6 Select a file location and enter a file name using the Explorer window that opens 7 Click Save O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 206 Operator10 Help CSV Export Options When exporting data using the CSV format the process and options are as follows 1 From the Tools ribbon click the Export button 2 From the Export menu choose CSV 3 Select a file location and enter
64. Dates button to select a date range for the open eDV Save amp Email e Save eDV Press the E Save eDV button to choose from the following options e Save eDV Saves the eDV with all data entered e Save eDV As Prompts the user to save the eDV with a new file name and or location e Email eDV Press the Pp Email eDV button to send the eDV by email as an attachment to a recipient Transfer to DB e Transfer Press the B Transfer button to transfer the data into the Operator10 Wastewater database Printing O 2014 AllMax Software Inc css ataview as e Print eDV Press the Print eDV button to choose from the following options e Print eDV Sends the eDV direct to the printer e Preview eDV Previews the eDV and provides an opportunity to print during Preview Calculate e Calculate Press the Calculate button to calculate refresh the parameter column summaries for the eDV Window Ribbon functions The following options are available in the Window ribbon and are discussed as they appear in the button groups Arrange Windows e Arrange Windows Press the a Arrange Windows button and select from the drop down menu e Cascade arrange all open eDV Windows in normal overlapping windows with the current eDV window in front e Tile Horizontally arrange all open eDV Windows in tiled windows with the current eDV window at the top left e Tile Vertically arrange all open eD
65. Description 0 to 30 characters may also be entered Select the Site Type by selecting either Land Application Surface Disposal Incineration or Other from the list of choices Site Area n Acres for the current site should be entered in the field Check the Active checkbox for Sites which are currently in use Notes can be entered for a Site enter text directly into the Notes field Click the Save button to save any data entered Add Similar Site O 2014 AllMax Software Inc BioSolids 141 From the Site list users are able to create similar Sites if one exists To utilize this feature highlight an existing Site in the list and click the arrow icon beside the Add button to select Add Similar Location Site Add Assign Parameters Parameters tests or samples collected at the respective Site can be added to the BioSolid gt Using the Add button secondary menu the drop down menu arrow or split button select the option Add Parameters or from the BioSolid list click the button that appears in the column titled Show Parameters to begin adding parameters to a selected BioSolid In the Assigned Parameter list that appears users can begin to add parameters to gt the list as needed Click the Mi Add button to begin adding parameters Once selected Location Parameter information can be edited In grid editing is possible by entering data where permitted Multiple record editing is also
66. Effluent 50050 OverFlow 50050 0 1 the difference of hourly data H_COUNT I p x y H_COUNT I p x Hourly COUNT for location and parameter offset x days hour y 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 417 Value The count of hourly data values of a specific location and parameter for the date x days from the current date If y is O the values for the entire day are used If y is from 1 to 24 a single hour is used i e y 3 for values from 02 01 through 03 00 The function counts only valid data it ignores Alpha Codes Less Than Greater Than or Non Detect values if Facility options are set to blank Examples H_COUNT Effluent 50050 0 0 count for the day H_COUNT Effluent 50050 0 15 count for 14 01 through 15 00 H_COUNT Effluent 50050 7 0 count 7 days ago 14 8 5 H_FUNC I p x y z H_FUNC I p x y z Hourly FUNCtion for location and parameter value y type z offset x days Value The hourly values calculated from the hourly data at a specific location and parameter The function uses the hourly data for the date x days from the current date and the value y It stores the result at the Location Parameter where the formula is attached at the time corresponding to each data value The function then returns the Hourly Calculation as configured for the Location Parameter where the formula is attached The function considers only valid data and will return BLANK if there is no valid data The functi
67. Gap defines the display options for the X Legend as it appears on the graph Several options are available see the X Legend Gap topic for more information 8 4 1 3 1 Legend Box Size Series Legend Box Size The Series Legend Box Size allows users to customize the dimensions and position of the series legend when floating or fixed on the graph Go to the Legends menu and choose Series Legend Box Size to set the values for the legend Enter numeric values for Left Top Width and Height Setting values for Top and Left will define where the box is positioned from the top and left edges of the graph and setting the width and height will define the size of the box Click Continue to apply the settings and see the changes Click Apply to define the settings but leave the dialog open Click Default Size to set the dimensions based on the legend text to be displayed Fixed Legend Box Size 8 4 1 3 2 X Legend Gap X Legend Gap 2014 AllMax Software Inc raping 285 The X Legend Gap may be specified by using the X Legend Gap Editor The X Legend Gap is the minimum distance between the x axis marks ticks Choose the Fixed radio button and enter a value in pixels screen points The Automatic radio button allows the application to choose an appropriate value If the Clip Legend Text checkbox is marked overlapping legend text will be clipped cut to an appropriate size To label the x axis non seque
68. Gauge Containers e Navigation Containers e Container Size 6 1 4 2 3 1 Data Containers Data Containers allow users to see a snapshot of data for a single Location Parameter Summarized and actual data values for the selected Location Parameter are displayed 2014 AllMax Software Inc 158 Operator10 Help based on the selected date range Data Brendale STP BD Final Eff BOD 08 01 2012 09 20 2012 GMean 37 87 Min 1 00 Count 51 09 05 2012 09 04 2012 09 03 2012 09 02 2012 09 01 2012 08 31 2012 08 30 2012 08 29 2012 08 28 2012 08 27 2012 08 26 2012 08 25 2012 08 24 2012 08 23 2012 08 22 2012 Sample Data Container Working with a Data Container To work with a Data Container see the following topics Adding a Data Container To add a Data Container in the Operator10 Wastewater Main Application open a Dashboard View and select a Page With a Page selected click the button in the ribbon to Add Container to Page and select Add Data Container 2014 AllMax Software Inc Dashboard 159 The new Data Container will be displayed at the top left of the page and will be blank and ready for setup Unlimited Data Containers can be added to any Page Editing Data Container Settings Select Location Parameter To select the Location Parameter to be displayed click the V Settings button at the top right of the Data Container window From the menu that appears choose Select L
69. Graph 3D View Properties 229 O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Graph Balloons 222 Graph Constants 226 Graph Containers 159 Graph Data 218 Graph Data Range 222 Graph Data Source 218 Graph Data Type 222 Graph Data Window 235 Graph Date 220 Graph Date Range 220 Graph Display Zoom 236 Graph Facility 223 Graph Fonts 231 Graph General Properties 228 Graph Help About 237 Graph Legends 232 Graph Limits 227 Graph List 217 218 Graph Logged Documents 133 Graph Main Toolbar 238 Graph Palette Bar 237 Graph Pattern Bar 237 Graph Properties 228 Graph Scale 231 Graph Scale Properties 229 Graph Series Properties 228 Graph Titles 230 Graph Tools 222 Graph Type 221 Graph X Legend Gap 234 Graphing 217 Graphs 217 Greater Than 101 386 390 392 447 451 466 Greater Than Data 101 Greatest 403 459 Grid 30 Grid Columns 36 Grid Print 40 Grid Toolbar 30 Group 30 Group Header 198 Grouping 30 38 Groups 375 Growth 398 454 GTO 390 O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Index 527 H HAVG 414 H_CALC 415 H_COMB 416 H_COUNT 416 H_FUNC 417 H_GMEAN 418 H_INTER 418 H_MAX 419 H_MED 419 H_METERO 420 H_MIN 421 H_PRTPWRO 421 H_STD 422 H_SUM 423 H_VALO 423 Header Footer 188 Help 23 362 373 Help About 328 Help About 237 Help File Conventions 27 Help Ribbon 66 HEX 443 Hexadecimal 443 Hide Column 36 Highest 403 459 HLIME 444 Hotspot Options 165 HotSpots 155 HotSync 355 364 Ho
70. I p x y m The return value is a sum of the following types add 1 to the return ist bit set bit 0 if the range contains Numeric values add 2 to the return 2nd bit set if the range contains BLANK values add 4 to the return 3rd bit set if the range contains Less Than values lt add 8 to the return 4th bit set if the range contains Alpha Code values add 16 to the retum 5th bit set if the range contains Greater Than values gt add 32 to the retum 6th bit set if the range contains Non Detect values add 64 to the retum 7th bit set if the range contains Time values add 128 to the retum 8th bit set if the range contains Note values add 256 to the return 9th bit set if the range contains Date values For example a month containing both Numeric and Less Than values returns the value 5 1 4 O function NOTE The return value may be interpreted using the B Examples M_TYPE Effluent 50050 0 0 current month daily values M_TYPE Effluent 31614 1 5 previous month hourly values 14 12 OPC DDE Functions Topics in this section include DDE a b c x DDE link replacing char with x DDE_P a b c x y DDE Poke value y DDE_X a b c x DDE eXecute command c OPC a b c x OPC link for node a server b itemc integer x OPC_W a b c x y OPC Write for node a server b itemc integer x value y 14 12 1 DDE al b c x DDE a b c x Value from a DDE link Service a Topic b Itemc replaci
71. I p x y z w DaiLY Multiple Violation offset type max min e V_MAV l p x y zZ w v offset type rule avg Violation Min AVerage e V_MAX I p x y z w v offset type rule avg Violation MAX e V_MIN p x y z w v offset type rule avg Violation MIN e SNC_CJP I p x y z w v1 v2 offset type rule avg daily violation avg violation e SNC_MAXD I p x y Z w v offset type rule avg SNC violation MAX Daily e SNC_MAXM p x y z wW v offset type rule avg SNC violation MAX Monthly e SNC_MIND I p x y z w v offset type rule avg SNC violation MIN Daily e SNC MINM I p x y z w v offset type rule avg SNC violation MIN Monthly 14 16 1 E_SUM I p x y z w v E SUM I p x y Z w V monthly Exceedance SUM limit z for location and parameter offset x months type y rule z average w limit v Value The sum of the portions which exceed the limit v of data values for a specific location and parameter for the month x months from the current month The function uses the following parameters to determine the calculation method y is the type of sum if y is O then the result is a monthly or 30 day sum if y is 1 then the result is a weekly or 7 day sum if y is 2 then the result is an hourly sum if y is 3 then the result is a 4 day sum z is the rule used for a 7 day average if z is O then the result uses a continuous or floating average if z is 1 then a week falls in the month which contains
72. Import Utility Export Data Utility Calculator Tool Operatori0 Tools 15 1 Database Backup A Backup of all current Facility data files in the Operator10 Wastewater can be made in a compressed file format zip The data files of the current database are compressed and copied to the file location chosen by the user with a name given by the user The backup file can then be stored to an external source or location Database Backup Manual There are several ways in which the database can be backed up Backup Method 1 Open Database window 1 To perform a database backup click the E Backup Selected Database button located in the grid tool strip to begin 2 In the Save As window that opens select a location in which to store the backup file 3 In the File name field give the backup file a suitable file name 4 Press the EJ Save button to perform the backup Backup Method 2 Tools ribbon 1 To perform a database backup go to the Tools menu ribbon click the Backup Now button 2 In the Save As window that opens select a location in which to store the backup file 3 In the File name field give the backup file a suitable file name 4 Press the EJ Save button to perform the backup Database Backup Scheduled To schedule a backup using the Operator10 Agent Scheduling tool see the Scheduled O 2014 AllMax Software Inc so Operator10 Help 15 2 Backup help topic Import Export Facility Us
73. Interval 95 of the values assumes large n one location parameter 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 407 z 7 Lexy the Sum of the Products of the first and second location parameter Czy Ss xy z 8 E the Covariance of the values S Y al Lai X y LJL xy ws x 7 y a z 9 the Sum of the Products of the Deviations of the values S Y 22x E to z 10 SO the Slope of the sample Linear Regression line y Ey bx z 11 4 the y Intercept of the sample Linear Regression line tc LL x 53 55 e z 12 the Correlation Coefficient of the values 12 p NOD z 13 the Coefficient of Determination of the values z 14 location parameter the Population Variance of the values one z 15 Sx X the Population Standard Deviation of the values one location parameter Examples D_STAT Inf Dom 50050 BLANK 7 7 1 sum of past 7 days D_STAT Inf Dom 50050 Inf Ind 50050 0 7 8 Covariance for the week 14 6 22 D_STDEV I p x y D_STDEV I p x Daily STandard DEViation for location and parameter offset x days for y days Value The standard deviation of data values of a specific location and parameter for the 2014 AllMax Software Inc Operator10 Help date x days from the current date and extending for a range of y days When a parameter to calculate loading is specified O 8 or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified
74. Location Parameter Data Types Data Types The Data Type represents the type of a single data item or the calculated result based on multiple data items Data Types carry through multiple functions and are often used for reporting final results on state forms For example a monthly average may be considered a Less Than value if the month contains daily Less Than values In some cases the Data Type cannot be logically established and the result will revert to 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 387 a Numeric Data Type For example when adding a Less Than and a Greater Than value Most errors set the Data Type to 0 even though the result may be BLANK The Data Type is one of the following 1 1st bit set bit 0 if the result is considered a Numeric value 2 2nd bit set if the result is considered a BLANK value 4 3rd bit set if the result is considered a Less Than value lt 8 4th bit set if the result is considered an Alpha Code value 16 5th bit set if the result is considered a Greater Than value gt 32 6th bit set if the result is considered a Non Detect value 64 7th bit set if the result is considered a Time value 128 8th bit set if the result is considered a Note value 256 9th bit set if the result is considered a Date value Multiple Data Types usually produce Numeric with Alpha Code produces Numeric Less Than with Numeric Alpha Code and or Non Detect produces Less Than Greater Tha
75. MAXimum of all values MIN x1 x2 xn MINimum of all values MOD x y x y MODulus or remainder of x y MUL x y x y MULtiply x and y NONBLANK x NONBLANK value of x NONZERO x NON ZERO value x or blank if x is O PCT _REM x y PerCenT REMoval x in y out PREC x y value x to y significant digits PRECision PWR x y x4y x to the PoWeR of y RAND x RANDom value less than x ROUND x y value x ROUNDed to y decimal places ROUNDE x y value x Even biased ROUNDed to y places SORT x SQuare RooT of x SUB x y x y SUBtract y from x SUM x1 x2 xn SUM of all non blank values TRUNC x y TRUNCate value x to y decimal places VERIFY x y z VERIFY value x gt y lt z else blank 2014 AllMax Software Inc 14 9 1 ABS x ABS x LI ABSolute value of x absolute value Value The positive value of x If x is BLANK the function returns BLANK Examples ABS 3 14 3 14 ABS 3 14 3 14 14 9 2 ADD x y x y ADD x y x y ADD x and y addition Value The sum of x and y If either x or y is BLANK the function returns BLANK Examples ADD 3 2 5 3 14 2 14 5 28 14 93 AVG x1 x2 xn AVG x1 x2 xn AVeraGe of all non BLANK values from x1 through xn Value The average of values x1 through xn Any number of values may be specified If any value is BLANK the value is ignored The value BLANK is returned if all values are BLANK Examples AVG 3 2 2 5 AVG 1 2 BLANK 3 2 4 0 2 8 14
76. M_REM I p x y Monthly percent REMoval offset x months type y e M_STAT I p l p x y Monthly STATistics offset x months type y e M_STDEV I p x STandard DEViation offset x months e M_SUM I p x SUM of values offset x months e M_SUM2 I p x y z w SUM offset x months type rule avg e M_SUMH I p x SUM of Hourly values offset x months e M_TOTAL I p x TOTAL offset x months avg days e M_TYPE I p x y Monthly data TYPE offset x months range type y 14 11 1 M_AVG I p x y z w M_AVG l p x y Z w Monthly AVeraGe for location and parameter offset x months type y rule z average w Value The average of data values of a specific location and parameter for the month x months from the current month The function uses the following parameters to determine the calculation method y is the type of average if y is O then the result is a monthly or 30 day average if y is 1 then the result is a weekly or 7 day average if y is 2 then the result is an hourly average z is the rule used for a 7 day average see also W_AVG if z is O then the result uses a continuous or floating average if z is 1 then a week falls in the month which contains its Saturday if z is 2 then a week falls in the month which contains its Wednesday if z is 3 then the result uses the first of month for 4 weeks 28 days if z is 4 then the first of month 4th week extends to the end of the month if z is 5 then the first o
77. NN Data SQUICE aura lt iii Constants Eli ic can O O REESE Graph POSES ii ido E General Properties iro ion cd da idad ia See EEEE E E A A ET T Scale Propeties 3D View Properties TES A A Geo cee ele COPY ON Automatic Scaleo n a A coves EOS O A A AE is Legends MN a A A A A A daa LegendiBOX iZ AEE E E E EEE E Aid E XK LeGend GaP ii e a E a a e ae a a i Window MU did ae Ea a ar aeaa Data Wide cia LOMA REO AE Palette Bar ae Patter Bat a at ae eate Sees El Mi A E E T About Toolbars sesse Main Toolbar Part IX Reporting 1 Report Direct Acc ss Tre r a a eee sc aa aaaea rya eo ches aaaea K Eaa eaa F Ea rE ele 240 2 Report PICKIISE 0 ar aaa a a a a a iii 242 3 Create Report a ahar aara ents coveted ana oaa Aarna A A AA 242 SN O 242 New Report Availability is ccssiiccsccsessscasccceccsssssssversstesescecenscescivecccssssuscsussicscavavensteusieessctessussensetevencevsnscevenvevectsnsneis 244 Report Nadia a E dass 245 O 2014 AllMax Software Inc e Operator10 Help 4 Report Properties ii Report CalCuUlatONS 4 2005 s2 cessceccascecsssesseckansacdsncestxsnadscneednenessenvensoes nuns sessandvaaiecesies acct angen aa tasendnaues ancesteonescerbaakens List and Label Report Designer Re port Guidance DOCUMENTS 6 0 cic cccescccesccssiesseaseczincezesicensetsasesssetestsouetcecvessodesastecvacessuacisabsivscueavetiressetas eiexeuess 5 Report Folder ausies rnanis cia A aa Paaa Kaa ae Kanini eaaa u
78. Operator10 Wastewater BioSolids are used to track application and loading values to selected Sites 1 record 1 selected XZ 2 QAy Create Calculation Parameters Location BioSolid List Location Location Description BioSolid Type Active Available Nitrogen Show Parameter Notes ul Cak e Biosolid The BioSolid List displays all defined BioSolids generated at the treatment facility to be applied at Sites Accessing the BioSolid list O 2014 AllMax Software Inc BioSolids 137 Go to the BioSolids ribbon menu and select dy BioSolids to open the BioSolids list Add a BioSolid gt To create a new BioSolid in the BioSolids List click the sl Add button to add a new BioSolid Users will be presented with a Location BioSolid window that will allow for data entry of required and optional information See below Dioni A Create Location BioSolid by entering or selecting available information Facility Name i Location Location Description BioSolid Type k Press the button to select the Facility Name from the Facility list Enter a unique Location 1 to 16 characters to identify the BioSolid A Description O to 30 characters may also be entered Select the BioSolid Type by selecting either Cake or Liquid from the list of choices Check the Active checkbox for BioSolids which are currently in use Notes can be entered for a Location enter text directly
79. Outfall Flow cal to kL E Weather Station Rainfall Wet Weather Day Data Source Editor The Data Source Editor links the Graph to its underlying database by specifying the appropriate data and formulas e Enter a Start Date and End Date for the Data Range or press the popup button to choose the date from a Calendar dialog If you wish to be prompted each time you open the graph mark the Prompt On Open checkbox Relative Dates may be entered to open the graph to dates relative to the system date e Select an appropriate option from the Display Data Values group To graph time intervals along the x axis hours days or months as selected by the 24 Hourly Daily Monthly or Yearly radio buttons and the Location Parameters Data values along the y axis or the X Y Scatter radio button to graph the first Location Parameter along the x axis and the second Location Parameter Data values along the y axis For X Y Scatter graphs mark the Regression check box to display a Linear Regression line e In the Data Series area e Enter a Location Parameter for each Data series by pressing the popup button and selecting from a PickList e Enter a value for Decimal to display that number of places after the decimal points for all Data Series O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 220 Operator10 Help 8 2 2 8 2 2 1 e If a Formula is required mark the Formula checkbox and ent
80. Parameter at a specific date and time Less Than values may range to 1 0E16 Any entry beginning with a Less Than lt is a Less Than value A Less Than value used in calculations DataView summaries and reports will be treated in one of four ways Blank no data Zero Half the Entered Value Entered Value or Preserve Less Than 4 7 3 6 Non Detect Non Detect Data Values Non Detect data values are stored at a specific Location Parameter at a specific date 2014 AllMax Software Inc 12 Operator10 Help 4 7 3 7 4 8 and time Non Detect values may range to 1 0E16 Any entry beginning with a Tilde is a Non Detect value A Non Detect value used in calculations DataView summaries and reports will be treated in one of four ways Blank no data Zero Half the Entered Value Entered Value or Preserve Non Detect Time Time Data Values Time data values are stored at a specific Location Parameter at a specific date and time Time values may range from 00 00 to 45 12 15 Any entry containing a Colon is a Time value The format of Time values is d hh mm where d is optional days hh is a two digit hour and mm is a two digit minute Time values through 24 hours are displayed as hh mm and compatible with a 24 00 clock and may be used to store time of day values Any Time values may represent duration values Time values used in calculations and DataView summaries will be treated as the number of minutes
81. Properties Topics in this section include e DataView Properties Display Properties e DataView Properties Column Setup e DataView Properties Column Properties e DataView Properties Print Properties 7 8 1 DataView Properties Display DataView Properties Display In the DataView Properties tab users can customize display options for the DataView Users can set the following options O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Operator10 Help ES Sl sss a a O a q a DataView Properties Display Options DataView Properties Facility optional Click the button to select from a list of Facilities The selection of a Facility in this field indicates to the DataView Application that user security should be applied based on the selected Facility DataView Type Choose fromthe available options in the drop down menu to select the type of DataView Hourly Interval Choose from the available options in the drop down menu to select the hourly interval to be displayed O 2014 AllMax Software Inc DataView 179 Start Date Enter or select a date on which the DataView date range should begin End Date Enter or select a date on which the DataView date range should end Use Whole Periods When checked the option Use Whole Periods will enforce a strict view of data and limit the range to 1 day for Hourly Values DataViews 1 month for Daily Values DataViews and
82. Reporting 325 General Information Report Name Facility South WWTP Beginning Page blank for default Add Remove Move Up Move Dn Print List Bio Limit 01 Bio Limit 4 Liso M r Save Preview Guidance Click template or press PageUp PageDn 9 7 7 3 3 BioSolids Limit Report Sites Site Each Limit report that is created can contain a number of Biosolid sites for which values can be reported Follow these instructions to add sites to the report 1 Press the Add button in the left pane of the Report Properties window in the Location picklist that appears select the Biosolid application site to be reported Once selected press the Select button 2 Once the site has been added brief information about that site will be visible in the right pane of the window 3 To change sites once it has been added press the button Remove Press the Remove button to remove the selected Site from the report Move Up Dn To reorder the sites to be reported highlight a site in the list and press the Move Up or Move Dn button O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 326 Operator10 Help Jones Field 001 Comer of 144 175 Jones Field 001 ua Jones Field 001 Corner of 144 175 Bio Nutrient 01 Bio Nutrient 4 Lm Save Preview Guidance Click template or press PageUp PageDn 9 7 7 3 4 BioSolids Limit Report Report Inclu
83. SUM 472 Sample Database 69 Sample Standard Deviation 127 Sampling Event 330 331 334 335 Sampling Event Detail 331 Sampling Event List 330 Sampling Events 330 331 Sampling Point 448 Save 224 437 SaveAs 224 Save Data 366 Save Graph 224 SCADA 340 469 Scale Properties 229 Scanner 366 369 371 Scanner Preferences 369 Scanning 369 371 Schedule Backup Seats 22 SEC 475 Secant 475 Section 471 472 Section Data Functions Section History 106 Security 41 57 359 Select 368 Select All 373 Series Legend Box Size Series Properties 228 Server 19 345 Service 505 Service Agent 505 Service Setup 57 Set Variables 395 Setting Variables 449 Setup 57 245 342 348 364 Setup Ribbon 61 SETVAR 395 449 Shortcuts 367 372 Show Column 36 Show Hide 36 503 471 234 2014 AllMax Software Inc Index 533 Significant Digits 431 Significant Non Compliance SIN 475 Sine 474 475 Site Detail 142 Site Limits 145 Site Owner 144 Sites 139 Slope 406 462 SNC 486 487 489 490 491 SNC_CJP 486 SNC_MAXD 487 SNC_MAXM 489 SNC_MIND 490 SNC_MINM 491 Soda Ash 450 SODA 450 Softening 444 448 450 Sort 402 403 457 459 460 Sorting 38 Specific Gravity 118 SQRT 433 Square Root 433 Squares 406 462 Standard Deviation 127 407 422 464 Standard Deviation Type 75 Standard Location 87 Standard Location Name 87 Standard Normal Distribution 426 Standard Rounding 126 Stat
84. SUM for location and parameter offset x months type y rule z average w Value The sum of data values of a specific location and parameter for the month x months from the current month The function uses the following parameters to determine the calculation method y is the type of sum if y is O then the result is a monthly or 30 day sum if y is 1 then the result is a weekly or 7 day sum if y is 2 then the result is an hourly sum if y is 3 then the result is a 4 day sum z is the rule used for a 7 day average if z is O then the result uses a continuous or floating average if z is 1 then a week falls in the month which contains its Saturday if z is 2 then a week falls in the month which contains its Wednesday if z is 3 then the result uses the first of month for 4 weeks 28 days if z is 4 then the first of month 4th week extends to the end of the month if z is 5 then the first of month is controlled by facility option if z is 6 then only full weeks Sun Sat in the month are considered w is the type of average used if w is O then the average is the arithmetic mean average if w is 1 then the average is the geometric mean for fecals if w is 2 then the average is the flow weighted average Daily values may be considered as persistent calculations use the last data not later than the date by adding 32 to the type y The number of months may be specified for monthly 7 day and hourly calculations where mis the n
85. Scanning instead of using the PickLists and always saves hourly data according to the system time NOTE Contact AllMax for additional information and password AllMax Preferences Hormal Password 13 4 Operator10 DataPort Software Operator10 Wastewater DataPort Software The Operator10 Wastewater DataPort software provides easy entry of data for O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 360 Operator10 Help Operator10 Wastewater Water and Synexus users Installation About Calendar Graffiti Help KeyPad Main Window Menu Bar Note PickList Preferences Remove Record Review Data Scanner Shortcuts Time Tips Undo Cut Copy Paste Select All DanPorr 2014 AllMax Software Inc DataPort 361 13 4 1 About About Options About In addition to copyright and trademark information the About dialog provides version information for the software and scanner drivers About Operatorii Alipay Operator 10 AllMax Professional Solutions Imc 300 670 1867 Application Version 1 01 Decoder Version SconManager Version Port Driver Version 13 4 2 Calendar Calendar Tap the calendar to select the date O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 362 Operator10 Help ef 28 29 30 13 4 3 Graffiti Help Graffiti Hel Common Graffiti strokes are illustrated through Graffiti Help NOTE An alternative to graffiti is the internal popup keyboard accessible by tapping
86. Select All Data Cells O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Ctrl C Copy Ctri E Block Read Ctrl F Toggle Full Column Color Ctri H AddData Editor Ctrl 3 Column Properties Ctri L Alpha Code Picklist Ctri M Block Summary Ctri N Edit Quick Note Ctrl P Print To Printer Ctri Shift P Print To Preview Ctri R Toggle Row Striping Ctri S Save DataView Ctrl V Paste Ctri W Review Data Ctri X Cut Ctrl Y Redo Data Ctri Z Undo Data Ctrl Space Displays calculator Ctrl Home Move Selection to Top Left Cell Ctri End Move Selection to Bottom Right Cell Space Edit Current Cell Delete Delete Enter Move Down 1 Cell F3 Find Next Shift F3 Call FindValue Dialog F5 Refresh DataView F12 Save DataView As Tab Move across to next cell Shift Tab Move across to previous cell 7 10 DataView Features Topics in this section include e Group Headers Column Headers DataView Column Icons Find Data e Quick Notes e Import Data e Export Data Freeze Columns 2014 AllMax Software Inc DataView 197 198 Operator10 Help e Right Click Functionality e Block Summary 7 10 1 Group Headers Group Headers Group Headers can be defined for selected columns and based on proximity to identical group headers will provide the user with an additional header row in a DataView The entered Group Header will appear centered for the grouped columns Group Header information
87. Sludge AMercury Sludge LB Acre Federal Accum Sum Jones Field 001 ALead Sludge Alead Sludge LB Acre Federal Accum Sum Jones Field 001 ACopper Sludge ACopper Sludge LB Acre Federal Accum Sum Jones Field 001 AChromium Sig AChromium Sig LB Acte Federal Accum Sum Jones Field 001 ACadmium ACadmium Sludge Federal Accum Sum Jones Field 001 AArsenic Sludge AArsenic Sludge LB Acte Federal Accum Sum Jones Field 001 A_NITRO A_NITRO LB A Avail Federal Accum Sum 80 Upper The BioSolid Site Limit List displays all site limits as defined by the user Accessing the Site Limits List To access the Site Limits List go to the BioSolids ribbon menu and press the Y Limits button Add Limits To create a new Limit in the Site Limit List click the Add button to add a new Limit O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Biosolids 147 Facility Name Location Parameter Press the button in the Facility Name field to choose the facility to add the limit to In the Site Limit editor click the button in the Location field to choose a Location Site Parameter from the list Select an Agency to associate with this limit Choose from the available options of Federal State Local or Nutrient Select the Calculation Type for this limit Choose from e Accum Sum accumulates ALL data for the selected Location Parameter e Year Sum
88. Software Inc 268 Operator10 Help Item002 Plant Effluent Solids TSS Total Suspended Solic Item003 Plant Effiuent Flow Mad Flow Thru Treatment t Item004 Plant Effluent pH pH Standard Units Custom Report 01 Custom Report gm Save Preview Guidance Click template or press PageUp PageDn 9 7 2 Annual Summary Reports Topics in this section include e 5 Year Forecast Report e Multi Year Summary Report 9 7 2 1 5 Year Forecast Report Add Remove Move Up Move Dn The 5 Year Forecast Report provides a projection for the next 5 years based on data from the previous 5 years The form is consistent with methods for Pennsylvania Chapter 94 reports Setup options include e General Properties and Information e Parameter and Calculation Settings e Additional Parameter e PE EDU and Industry Projections e Comments 9 7 2 1 1 5 Year Forecast Setup Topics in the section include e General Properties and Information 2014 AllMax Software Inc e Parameter and Calculation Settings e Additional Parameter e PE EDU and Industry Projections e Comments 9 7 2 1 1 1 General Properties In the General Properties and Information setup section for the 5 Year Forecast Report users can edit the following fields Page Adjustments and Print Settings Size Enter a percentage to which you would like to reduce the printed form X Offset Adjust the X coordinate
89. Sunday returns 1 Monday returns 2 etc Examples WDOM 0 weekday of the current month WDOM 1 weekday of the previous month 14 7 12 WOM x WOM x Week Of the Month offset x days Value The numeric value 1 to 5 of the week of the month for the date x days from the current date Example WOM 0 current week of the month 14 7 13 YR x YR x the YeaR 1970 2037 offset x years Value The numeric value 1970 to 2037 of the year x years from the current year The value x is usually 0 Example YR 0 current year 14 8 Hourly Data Functions Topics in this section include e H_AVG l p x y Hourly AVeraGe offset x days hour y 2014 AllMax Software Inc aa Operator10 Help H_CALC l p x y z Houlry CALCulations value x offset y days type z H_COMB l p l p x y COMBined Hourly offset x days type y H_COUNT l p x y Hourly COUNT offset x days hour y H_FUNC l p x y z Hourly FUNCtion offset x days value y type z H_GMEAN p x y Hourly Geometric MEAN offset x days hour y H_INTER I p x y Hourly INTERpolate from adjacent data offset x days hour y H_MAX I p x y z Hourly MAXimum offset x days hour y option z H_MED l p x y Hourly MEDian offset x days hour y H_METER I p x y z Hourly METER value offset x days max meter reading y multiplier z H_MIN l p x y z Hourly MINimum offset x days hour y option z H_PRTPWR I p l p x y Hourly PoWe
90. The value x is returned If the function is the final result of a formula then the Note text abc is also saved as a Data Note Data Notes are visible as Operator Notes in the Synexus main application and as QuickNotes in the DataView application If the Note text is an empty string any Data Note is removed Examples NOTE THIS IS PI 3 14 3 14 with THIS IS PI associated NOTE NO DATA TODAY BLANK with NO DATA TODAY associated NOTE 3 14 3 14 calculation will remove any associated Data Note 14 10 2 0NCE xy ONCE x y O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 447 The value y ONCE per month on the x th day of the month Value The value y is returned Once per month on the x th day of the month or on the last day of the month if x is O On all other days or if x is BLANK the function returns BLANK Examples ONCE 15 Raw WW 50050 the flow only on the 15th of the month ONCE 0 Raw WW 50050 the flow only on the last day of the month 14 10 220NC EW x y ONCEW x y The value y ONCE per Week on the x th day of the week Value The value y is returned once per week on the x th day 1 to 7 of the week On all other days or if x is BLANK the function returns BLANK Examples ONCEW 4 Raw WW 50050 the flow only on each Wednesday ONCEW 7 Raw WW 50050 the flow only on the last day of the week 14 10 2 OPTION x y z w OPTION x y x w Value x calculated using OPTIONS for Less Than y
91. Units e Quality or Concentration row x Min O 2014 AllMax Software Inc e Quality or Concentration row x Avg e Quality or Concentration row x Max e Quality or Concentration row x Units e Frequency Sample Type row x 00310G 00 RAW SEW INFLUENT Standard 3320 DMR Monthly Standard 3320 4 la gt save Preview Guidance Click template or press PageUp PageDn 9 7 6 1 3 1 Parameter For each row to be reported on the Federal DMR follow these directions Row Setup Parameter Location Parameter Press the button next to the Location Parameter field This will display the Location Parameter picklist select the desired Location Parameter to be reported and press Select Header Text In the Header Text field a default header will be displayed for recognized Location Parameters If there is no header or if the default header is not correct simply modify the information in the field To see the available headers for recognized Location Parameters press the button Find the desired header text in the picklist and press Select To automatically refresh the header or to reset it to the default press the button O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 304 Operator10 Help Location Parameter Plant Efficiency BOD 5 Header Text BOD 5 DAY 20 DEG C 00310 G 00 RAW SEW INFLUENT 9 7 6 1 3 2 Loading Two fields Average and Maximum for the calculation of loadings are availa
92. V_DLYM function PRAIRIE where vnum is the number of the violation 1 is the first 2 is the second etc or O for the longest violation if y is 256 vnum 2 then the result is the time of the start of the violation in hours since midnight if y is 256 vnum 3 then the result is the duration of the violation in hours This may be greater than 24 hours if y is 256 vnum 4 then the result is the value of the data at the violation Examples V_DLY Effluent 00058 0 0 BLANK 100 number of flow readings that fall below 100 g min V_DLY Effluent 00058 0 1 500 BLANK hours that flow exceeds 500 g min for the day V_DLY Effluent 50050 0 256 1 2 500 BLANK the time in hours of the start of the first violation V_DLY Effluent 50050 0 516 500 BLANK the value of the second violation y is equal to 256 2 4 14 16 6 V_DLYM I p x y z w V_DLYM I p x y zZ w DaiLY Multiple Violation for location and parameter offset x days type y max limit z min limit w Value The count or duration of multiple violations for hourly data values of a specific location and parameter for the date x days from the current date Multiple violations are defined as violations which extend through one or more data readings and are considered as one violation Hourly data values that exceed maximum limit z or minimum limit w are considered If the limit z or w is BLANK it is not used The type y determines the 2014 AllMax Software Inc
93. W_MAX Effluent 50050 0 0 0 0 current month monthly 7 day maximum 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 495 W_MAX Effluent 31614 1 1 6 1 previous month first full week average for fecals 14 17 3 W_MIN I p x y z w W_MIN I p x y Z w MINimum of Weekly average 7 day values for location and parameter offset x months week y rule z average w Value The minimum of weekly averages of data values of a specific location and parameter for the month x months from the current month The function uses the following parameters to determine the calculation method y is the week of average if y is O then the result is the minimum weekly average for a monthly period see also M_MIN if y is 1 then the result is the weekly or 7 day average for the first week if y is 2 then the result is for the second week if y is 3 then the result is for the third week if y is 4 then the result is for the fourth week if y is 5 then the result is for the fifth week etc special cases if y is 32 then the result is the calculated offset based on the z calculation type the numeric offset represents the beginning of the reporting period in which the weekly calculations are to be made if y is 33 then the result is the calculated offset based on the z calculation type the numeric offset represents the end of the reporting period in which the weekly calculations are to be made if y is 34 then the result is the calculated
94. XLS Sheet1 R C1 DOM 0 Retrieves value from Microsoft Excel the file BOOK1 XLS and sheet SHEET1 using the row based on the day of the month and using the first column DDE EXCEL Sheet1 R C MOY 0 DOM 0 4 Retrieves value from Microsoft Excel any open file having sheet SHEET1 using the row based on the month and using the column beginning after the fourth column and based on the day of the month 14 12 2 DDE_P alb c x y DDE_P a b c x Poke value y via a DDE link Service a Topic b Itemc replacing char with value x Value A Dynamic Data Exchange DDE link is established with another open application and the value y is Poked exported to the other application without its request The other application requires specific Service Topic and Item strings see documentation of the other application The and characters separate the strings and the character in any string is replaced by the integer value of x For example if x is equal to 4 then R C1 becomes R4C1 If the DDE link succeeds the value TRUE is returned otherwise FALSE is returned 2014 AllMax Software Inc In most cases the other application must be running and the appropriate file must be open Operator 10 DDE links require the other application to be able to return a single value in the ascii text CF_TEXT format The Service string is usually the name of the application the Topic string is usually the filename and or page and
95. a 2 y t S S 2 E A 3 Sa o lt o A oa x o a Y 5 o gt o o gt oO vw 3 3 Y o D k d hd i Is H a a m amp 2 BF b Feo ow 4 r 5 x 7 355809 93 5 a de x O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 240 Operator10 Help 9 9 1 Reporting Operator10 Wastewater Report section allows users to create comprehensive reports using stock report templates as well as full custom reports Certain state specific reports allow for the export of data using transformations that meet system requirements for import into state based electronic reporting For more information see the following topics e Report Direct Access Tree e Create Reports e Report Properties e Report Folder e Report Preparation e Report Types Report Direct Access Tree The Report Direct Access Tree pane lists the available Report Form Pages Reports are categorized under Report Folders Press the button next to each folder to expand and view the available reports Logged Documents a SYear Forecast Annual Limits Report Annual Multi Year Annual Standard 3320 DMR Annual BioSolids Reports Monthly Reports Limits Report Monthly Mass Balance Monthly Standard 3320 DMR Monthly Operational Reports Custom Report Operations Limits Report Operational Report Preparation Double click the listed report to begin the print preview process see Print Report Doub
96. accumulates data only for the current calendar year e Month Sum accumulates data only for the current month e Soil Sample treats the Limit as a soil sample or entered result no accumulation is applied e Quarter Sum accumulates data only for the current quarter Enter the numeric Limit value for the selected Limit A double asterisk on the reports will signify that the value has exceeded the specified Limit If a warning should be noted on the reports enter a Warn at a numeric value as a 2014 AllMax Software Inc 1 Operator10 Help 5 5 percentage to the defined limit A single asterisk on the reports will signify that the value has exceeded the specified percentage of the Limit Select the Limit Type for the selected Limit choose from Lower or Upper If an additional value base value residual carryover etc is to be considered in the limit enter a numeric value in the Include field Add Similar Limit From the Site Limit list users are able to create similar Limits if one exists To utilize this feature highlight an existing Site Limit in the list and click the arrow icon beside gt Add button to select Add Similar Site Limit the Nutrient List BioSolids Nutrient The Nutrient List allows users to define any parameters that should be treated as nutrients for a site and will calculate a value based on the entered market value for each nutrient Accessing the Nutrient L
97. always be the supplied Value Enter a numeric Value for each const Type Select a Type of avg max or min if the Constant Line should be recalculated whenever the graph is refreshed Select the Series to be used for the summary The Value is optional and displays the value fromthe most recent refresh A Label 0 to 255 characters may also be entered for each Constant Line 2014 AllMax Software Inc Choose a Line Style from the drop down Listbox Left click on the Line Color button to choose a color from a Windows Common Dialog Constant Bands Select a Type of none if the Constant Band should not be shown Select a Type of const if the Constant Band should always be between the supplied Values Enter a numeric Lower and Upper Value for each const Type Select a Type of max min 2stdev or 3stdev if the Constant Band should be recalculated whenever the graph is refreshed Select the Series to be used for the summary The Values are optional and display the values from the most recent refresh Left click on the Color button to choose a color from a Windows Common Dialog 8 4 1 2 3 Limits Editor Limits Editor Go to the Graph menu and choose Limits Editor to display the Limits Editor dialog The Limits Editor determines limits shown on the graph Limits are shown for Bar Line Mark Cube and Fit to Curve Graphs For each Series enter a Limit value ri as i Limits 51 Faecal Coliform Median
98. and Password that has been assigned OPC DDE rights for a DEFAULT Facility As an OPC or DDE Client the AllMax Operatori0 OPC DDE Interface can retrieve and summarize data from several data sources See the OPC DDE Interface Main Window help topic for complete information As a DDE Server the AllMax Operatori0 OPC DDE Interface provides an individual data or formula value or a month or hourly range of values The Facility which is to be accessed MUST be configured to Allow sharing of Facility data in the Facility Options The data is identified by specifying the Facility optional Formula Location Parameter and optional Date with optional time See DDE Server Functionality for complete information The DDE Link format is as follows Service OP10 Topic DATA or MONTH or HOUR or FORMULA or DV Item facility dataview formula location parameter lt date lt time 00 00 O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 32 Operator10 Help 12 1 2 12 1 2 1 12 1 2 2 OPC DDE Main Window OPC DDE Interface Main Window The AllMax Operator10 OPC DDE Interface Main Window provides complete OPC DDE Client capabilities Click on any item below for additional information TE OPC DDE Interface AllMax US ee I Flow METER HAS influent Flow Mad Last Result Schedule At 12 30 AM every day starting 12 05 2012 Image has hotspots click to view more information OPC DDE Link List OPC DDE Li
99. and Time a warning message is displayed with the option to cancel or replace the previous data value Optionally tap the Note button to enter or edit a Note for the Date Location and Parameter combination Tap the X button to exit the software Control will return to the AllMax Folder software if it is installed 13 4 8 Menu Bar Menu Bar The Menu Bar is activated by tapping the Menu silkscreen at the left of the Graffiti area Review Data Remove Record Graffiti Help 2014 AllMax Software Inc 368 Operator10 Help Preferences Tips About 13 4 9 Note Note DataPort Notes are transferred to the Operator 10 application as Operator Notes Also as Quick Notes in the DataView application e Tap the Note button to enter or edit a Note for the Date Location and Parameter combination If a valid combination of Facility Location and Parameter is not entered an error message is displayed e Enter the text by using graffiti or by the popup keyboard tap the abc logo in the graffiti area e To remove a note highlight and backspace to delete the entire text The button displays a character Note when a note is present O oe sceneeseeenteneenteneeee 13 4 10 Picklist PickList Although Facilities Locations or Parameters are most quickly entered using the built in scanner they may also be easily selected froma PickList Both Facilities and Locations displa
100. associated with the return the value x ONCE x y value y ONCE per month on x th day ONCEW x y value y ONCE per Week on x th day OPTION x y z w value x using OPTIONS for less than y greater than z or non detect w PRE_LMT x y PREtreatment LiMiT limit type x QLIME x y z w V QuickLIME required in mg l RANGE x1 y2 y3 yn find RANGE of data SETF x formula SET an internal reference Formula SET VAR x y SET VARx variable to value y SODA x SODA required in mg l SYNC abc SYNCronize location with facility abc TYPE x y TYPE of data x set type y VAL abc VALue and data type of abc WEIR x y z WEIR rectangular gal min for head x inches width y ft type z 14 10 1 ACCRUE I p x ACCRUE I p x ACCRUE all values for location and parameter offset x months Value The sum of all values prior to and including the month x months from the current month All valid data is considered Additional summary information can be returned 2014 AllMax Software Inc 436 Operator10 Help where n is the type of summary add 256 1 to x in order to return the average of all values add 256 2 to x in order to return the max of all values add 256 3 to x in order to return the min of all values add 256 4 to x in order to return the count of all values Examples ACCRUE Raw 50050 0 the sum of all flow values through the current month ACCRUE Raw 50050 1 the sum through the previous month 14 10
101. at Aer 1 or Aer 2 Meter Number D_VAL Meter Number 0 1 the value of parameter Number at location Meter less yesterday s value O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Main Application 111 Formula e g MAX INFLOW 00310 3 7 100 Formula Result LJ Fomula Test Az 9 Use Data From Database Date 06 07 2012 Default Loc Par for wildcards BE STP FINAL TKP uns 4 9 2 Delete Formula Delete Formula Formulas can be deleted from the database click the x Delete button to delete records Individually selected records can be deleted as well as multiple selections of formulas Confirmation is required when deleting formulas from the database Click the Y Yes Yes button to confirm or X No No to cancel the deletion of data O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 112 Operator10 Help 4 9 3 Formula List The Formula List window is split into two sections a Formula list and a Formula editor Formula List For more information about the functionality of the Formula list see the Formula help topic DS Formula Editor Users can select formula from the Formula list and edit view the details of the formula in the lower half of the Formula window For more information see the following e Assigned To The Assigned To field displays the Location Parameter s to which the formula is attached Click the button to add to the list of selected Location Parameters e Functions List To edit the
102. by pressing the popup button For both Link types The Test button allows users to test communication with the selected Server or Node Press the button to see a display of the value collected at the time of pressing Test OPC DDE Link Schedule Definition OPC DDE Link Schedule Definition The OPC DDE Link Schedule controls when and how often links are enacted each day Press the Schedule button to schedule the OPC DDE Link In the window that opens choose the appropriate interval from the Schedule Task drop down list box In the Start time list box select the appropriate time to begin collecting data each day Press the Advanced button to view advanced features 2014 AllMax Software Inc Interfaces 347 Schedule 67 At 8 00 AM every day starting 12 05 2012 Schedule Task Start time Daily gt 8 00AM Schedule Task Daily Every 1 day s 12 1 3 5 OPC DDE Link Examples DDE Link Examples The following examples describe common DDE Service Topic and Item strings for other applications See documentation of the other application for details The Service string is usually the name of the application the Topic string is usually the filename and or page and the Item string is usually a reference to the specific data Microsoft Excel example Server EXCEL Topic filename or bookname sheetname e g Book1 xls Sheet1 Item R C e g R1C4 Microsof
103. by using the Arithmetic Mean for all parameters except fecal parameters Arithmetic means are calculated by Operator 10 software using the following formula Arithmetic Mean Xit Xa t Xat A n n For fecal parameters the Average is calculated using the Geometric Mean The default fecal parameters include parameters 31614 31616 31617 31679 and 74055 If the standard list of Fecals is not acceptable contact AllMax for additional information A 4 Day Average is calculated according to various 4 Day rules See 4 Day Average The Monthly Average of 4 Day averages is the arithmetic mean average of each 4 Day Average A 7 Day Average is calculated according to various 7 Day rules See 7 Day Average The Monthly Average of 7 Day averages is the arithmetic mean average of each 7 Day Average 4 13 1 4 Flow Weighted Average Flow Weighted Average Flow weighted averages are calculated by Operator 1068 software using the following formula Flow Weighted Average ES x flown x2 x flowa x x flow flow fow flows Days that contain any unpaired values a value without a flow or a flow without a value or contain no data blank are ignored 2014 AllMax Software Inc 126 Operator10 Help 4 13 1 5 Geometric Mean 4 13 1 6 Geometric Mean Geometric means are calculated by Operator 10 software using the following formula Geometric Mean Y XXXIX X3X X Xp An alterna
104. calculations can be performed CALCULATE NOW To immediately calculate formulas for a given database go to the Tools ribbon and click the ED Calculate Now button The following window will appear 2014 AllMax Software Inc 122 Operator10 Help A Calculation Select a data range and formulas to calculate Start Date 10 22 2012 End Date 10 22 2012 All formulas for facility Town of Montague Calculate selected formulas Choose a date range in which the calculations should be applied Enter appropriate dates or press the popup button to choose from a Calendar dialog Calculations may take several minutes to complete depending on the number of days the number of formulas and the speed of the computer Calculations will continue in the background while allowing the Windows operating system to continue normally Calculations take place in the following order Hourly Calculations By Date By Formula Name in the order they appear in the Formula PickList By Location Parameter in the order they appear in the Location Parameter PickList Daily Calculations By Date By Formula Name in the order they appear in the Formula PickList By Location Parameter in the order they appear in the Location Parameter PickList Monthly Calculations By Date By Formula Name in the order they appear in the Formula PickList By Location Parameter in the order they appear in the Location Parameter PickList CALCULATE Mont
105. calculations use the last data not later than the date by adding 32 to the type y The number of months is assumed to be 6 but may be specified for monthly 7 day and hourly calculations where mis the number of months add the additional parameter SNC_MINM I p x y Z w V m When a parameter to calculate loading is specified amp or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter SNC_MINM I p _flow p_flow x y z w v Examples SNC_MINM Effluent 00400 0 0 0 0 5 5 current 6 months SNC monthly average below 5 5 SNC_MINM Effluent 00400 6 1 3 0 5 5 8 previous 6 months SNC 7 day 1st of Month average pH below 5 5 by 20 SNC_MINM Effluent 00400 6 1 3 0 5 5 8 gt 33 TRUE if the ratio is greater than 33 Weekly Data Functions Topics in this section include e W_AVG I p x y z w Weekly AVG offset x months week rule avg e W_MAX I p x y z w Weekly MAX offset x months week rule avg e W_MIN I p x y z w Weekly MIN offset x months week rule avg 14 17 1 W_AVG I p x y z w W_AVG I p x y Z w AVeraGe of Weekly average 7 day values for location and parameter offset x months 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 493 week y rule z average w Value The average of weekly averages of data values of a specific location and parameter for the month x months from the current month The function uses the
106. can be entered in the DataView Properties Column Properties section under the Display options is Effluent Data Entry Effluent Testing Effluent Data Entry p F gt Daily 4 01 2012 4 30 2012 il 5 Thursday Friday il 7 Saturday il 8 Sunday z z2 z 2 2 2 2 lt lt 2 lt lt 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 00 No Limit The DataView displayed here has been setup to display Group Headers See the top row displayed above the normal column header Columns with defined Group Headers when placed immediately next to one another will automatically display the group header information 7 10 2 Column Headers Column Headers Column Headers can be defined for any column displayed in a DataView Column headers are customized in a way that allows users to identify the Facility Location Parameter using a common or understood naming convention 2014 AllMax Software Inc DataView 199 Defining a Column Header To define a column header users can e Right click on the existing column header for any column on the open DataView Choose the Edit Column Header button from the right click menu In the Column Header dialog that opens enter the desired colunm header text e Open the Column Properties section and choose the Column Header property on the right side of the Column Properties section 7 10 3 DataView Column Icons DataView Column Icons Depending on the status
107. ceane hie eccectenens bbecddecensacsindseaeceuaevece 149 User Values nsee 7 Available Nitrogen Part VI Dashboard Cre ate RO O O 153 View Name View List Pages HotSpots UA Add r a Add COMA A See Ae SA Mi hn ee Containers Data Containers Graph Container Sonina r e a a ar venir ec cadets 159 Ga ge G ntaihet S Vinil diia 161 Naviagtion CONAM S iii AAA A AA incida 163 CONTAMOS AAA a see Bape ce 164 O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 6 Operator10 Help Part VII N Oo oO Ff WO DN 10 11 Part VIII Page Options AE cu sandsldscheesatassatlectaatnsavedenanasustateoicesznscstauapudce ta sai susheesgaasestdosicedauscaseisnasedhchsasees 165 DataView 168 Data View Litunia E indias 169 Add Data Vie Wii A E adan an 170 DataVie W Na MO a is 171 DeleteData Vie Wa ia 171 DataView Data Etico ia cai 172 DataView Columns da 172 Data View Type a Adina 173 Daily Values DataVieW weccsvcsccecisciccseccicccevicsntestevenscesdouceciguevsdivexsetevebcbenecetuetcevegsdhcsnrsusevedescvenssstueucevdcestsctusheereusters 173 Hourly Values DataView we 174 Summary Values DataView muirer n eaea e raa aee r Vaaa n aa eaa aiaa aada iraa atiina 175 DataView Properties ooo a i tanin 177 DataView Properties Dis play c ccceseceeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaneeeaeeenaeeseaeeesaeeeesaeessaseesaeeeneaeessaeeesaeeeneaeeneaees 177 DataView Properties Column Setup occconccconoconcncnnnnncnnnnncnnncc
108. century may be omitted for the year 2014 AllMax Software Inc as Operator10 Help e The day and its delimiter may be omitted when specifying a month or first day of month MM YY or MMYY e Dates wrap when digits exceed expected values e g 01 32 2000 represents February 1 2000 Examples e 020198 February 1 1998 e 2 1 98 February 1 1998 e 0298 February 1 1998 first of month assumed 12 31 04 December 31 2004 e 12 31 2004 December 31 2004 The Date may usually be selected from the Calendar dialog box by pressing the popup button next to the Date Use the lt and gt buttons to select the previous or next month then press the appropriate 1 to 31 day button to enter the date Select Select the start date for this DataView 01 01 2011 4 January 2011 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu 26 28 30 4 6 11 13 18 20 25 27 1 3 C Today 11 05 2012 3 4 1 Relative Dates Relative Dates Relative Dates may also entered in place of any date Enter the offset from the system date in the format xm d or xm y If the month offset is specified x is the number of months from the current system date and the first day of the month is assumed If the day offset is specified y is the number of days from either the first of the specified month if a month offset is specified or the current system date 2014 AllMax Software Inc General Features 49
109. display the appropriate data qualifier Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 34 6 2 1 4 lt 3 as the less than symbol to be preserved for the final calculation Entered Value Calculations will drop the data qualifiers from data and calculated results will display without the qualifiers using only the numeric entered portion of the data Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 6 2 1 4 3 as the less than symbol will be dropped for the final calculation Half Entered Value Calculations will drop the data qualifiers from data and calculated results will display without the qualifiers using one half the entered value of the data Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 6 1 1 4 2 75 as the less than symbol is dropped and 2 is divided in half for final calculation Zero Calculations will drop the data qualifiers from data and calculated results will display without the qualifiers using zero 0 in place of any entered data Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 6 0 1 4 2 5 as the less than symbol is dropped and 0 is used in place of lt 2 for the final calculation Blank no data Calculations will drop the data qualifiers from data and calculated results will display without the qualifiers treating data entered with qualifiers to be seen as blank Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 6 1 3 3 333 as the less than symbol is dropped and no data is used in place of lt 2 in the final calcu
110. e Single Result will show daily data as single value non repeating e Repeat Daily will repeat the selected daily data value for the defined report period choose this to display daily data in a table e Repeat Monthly will calculate a monthly value for the selected report period choose this to display monthly data in a table e As The As field will change as you select from the listed options above it however there are other options available e Variables Displays single value non repeating best when used with Single Result e Fields Displays repeating values best when used with Repeat Daily Transposed Fields Displays repeating values but the X and Y axis are reversed allowing for a result similar to the Daily or Weekly DataViews Chart Data Readies data to be available for List and Label s Report Chart Object Decimal Indicate the desired number of decimal precision to be shown on the report Units Enter the Units to be reported for a selected Item The default units of the selected Location Parameter will be shown modify as necessary O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Include Sampling Events Place a check in the Include Sampling Events checkbox to include the selected Sampling Event fields from the General Properties setup section fra m Report Data Item name Item001 Location Parameter Plant Effluent BOD 5 Header Plant Effluent B0D 800 k Single Result Repea
111. eDV Viewer application Logged Documents e View Documents Press the lv View Documents button to open the Logged Documents section of Operator10 Wastewater Notes e View Notes Press the Rss View Notes button to access the Notes section 4 1 2 4 Setup Ribbon Main Application Setup Ribbon The Setup ribbon provides the following functionality a m z Operatorl0 Wastewater l Dashboard View Setup Bio Solids Tools Support Help DIE 2d a ma YO Locations L Ps Stock Parameters Processes Process History Chemicals Formulas Alpha Codes Labels List Print Select L Ps Setup Location Parameter Process Chemical Formula Alpha Code Barcode Labels DataPort The Setup Ribbon allows users to access sections of Operator10 like Location Parameters Process Formulas and more Setup Functions The following options are available in the Setup ribbon and are discussed as they appear in the button groups Location Parameter e Locations Press the D Locations button to open the Location list e L Ps Press the D L Ps Location Parameters button to open the Location Parameter list e Stock Parameters Press the dE Stock Parameters button to open the Stock Parameter list Process e Processes Press the Processes button to open the Process list O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 62 Operator10 Help e Process History Press the ol Process History button to open the Process Histor
112. evaluate the specific single hour of the day i e y 3 for values from 02 01 through 03 00 z The optional parameter z can be used to define special handling options for the calculation and return of values The optional parameter z can be either 0 1 2 or the preceding options 0 1 or 2 plus 256 Parameter options e O If z is set to O the function will return the value for the day x days from the current date only e 1 If z is set to 1 the function will use the values for an entire 24 hour period beginning at a specific hour y i e y 3 z 1 for values from 03 01 the current day through 03 00 the next day e 2 If z is set to 2 the function will offset the period to begin on an even hour y i e y 3 z 2 for values from 02 00 through 02 59 the third hourly period of the day e 256 While z is set to O 1 or 2 add 256 to z to return the time of the minimum value for the day x days from the current date i e y 0 z 256 for the corresponding time of the minimum value for the day Examples H_MIN Effluent 50050 0 0 0 minimum for the day H_MIN Effluent 50050 0 15 0 minimum for 14 01 through 15 00 H_MIN Effluent 50050 1 15 1 minimum value for period beginning 14 01 yesterday and ending 24 hours later at 14 00 the next day today H_MIN Effluent 50050 7 0 256 corresponding time value for the minimum 7 days ago 14 8 12 H_PRTPWR I p I p x y H_PRTPWR I p l p x Hourly PoWeR of PaRTicle c
113. facilities Accessing the Parameter List The Parameter List is accessed most often when coming from the creation of a new Location Parameter When creating a new Location Parameter the button is available in the Parameter field use this button to open the Parameter List 2014 AllMax Software Inc Main Application ss Tintin i aa 516 records 1 selected gt gt ae X 4 SB QA L Select single or multiple Standard Parameter Parameter Units Description Air Flow CFM CFM Air Flow Cubic Feet per IDEG C Temperature Air Degrees DEG F Temperature Air Degrees M3 Min Ait Flow Cu Meters per M3 Sec A Air Flow Cu Meters per mal Alkalinity img Aluminum Total s Al ima L Aluminum Soluble UG L Aluminum Total As Al MG L Nitrogen Ammonia Total As mg L Armonia N Dx mg L Ammonia N reported to mg L Anionoc Surfactants as IkL Day Averag Annual Dry UGL Anthracene Total UG L Antimony Total As Sb ima L Arsenic Total As As MG KG Arsenic in Sludge al mg L Arsenic Dissolwdl As As Backwash Min MINZD ay Filter Backwash Minutes Parameter List Functionality The Parameter list and Parameter editor window have the general properties of the Grid and Grid Edit windows For more information about these sections please see the topic Grid Functionality In the Parameter List users can e Add Parameter e Delete Parameter
114. for fecals if w is 2 then the average is the flow weighted average v is the violation limit Daily values may be considered as persistent calculations use the last data not later than the date by adding 32 to the type y The number of months may be specified for monthly 7 day and hourly calculations where mis the number of months add the additional parameter V_MAX p X y 2 W V m The function will return the number of violations for the month Additional information about a particular violation can be retumed where vnum is the number of the violation 1 is the first 2 is the second etc add 256 vnum 4 to y in order to return the offset of the day of the violation add 256 vnum 8 to y in order to return the value of the violation O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 485 add 256 vnum 12 to y in order to return the time of the violation for hourly min max When a parameter to calculate loading is specified O 8 or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter V_MAX I p I_flow p_flow x y z w v Examples V_MAX Effluent 50050 0 0 0 0 3 14 number of violations for current month monthly maximum exceeding 3 14 V_MAX Effluent 31614 1 1 0 1 3 14 number of violations for previous month 7 day continuous maximum for fecals exceeding 3 14 V_MAX Effluent 31614 1 256 2 8 1 0 1 3 14 value of the second violation for p
115. for future use Click the Save button and choose Save View from the Save menu If this is a new View a prompt to name the View will be presented Enter a name and click the 3 OK button to save the view Please enter a name for this view View Name Save As Changes made to any View will require a Save However users may wish to save the modified View separately as a new different View To save an existing view as a new View choose the Save As button from the Save menu View List Multiple Views can be created In order to manage the list of Views click the 4 Views button and choose the Open List of Views option In the View list users can view and open all created views as well as delete Views Delete Views From the View List select Views either singularly or in multiple and click the x Delete button At the prompt confirm the deletion of the View by click the Y Yes Yes or X No No Pages Different Pages can be added to provide access to data or links to internal Operator10 Wastewater sections or external links Multiple pages can be created for any View see the following topics for more information e Add Page e Page Features and Options O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Dashboard 155 6 1 4 1 Add Page Pages can be added to any view Follow the step discussed below to add a page Add Page SS ae To add a Page open a View In the desired View click the E Add Page to Vie
116. formula and use a desired Function select from available Functions in the drop down menu The selected Function will be inserted into the formula in the Formula field e Location Parameter To select a Location Parameter to be used in the written formula click the button to display a list of available Location Parameters The selected Location Parameter will be inserted into the Formula field e Formula Edit the formula in the Formula field NOTE Changes to the formula are saved immediately Additional Functionality e To increase or decrease the displayed font size for the Formula field click the g buttons e The Formula Result field will display the calculated result of the formula based on testing information provided e In the Formula Test area testing of written formulas can be performed in 2 ways For date based or formulas sensitive to dates enter a test Date to be used when testing the written formula e Use values from Test Data Use this option to test with user entered data in the fields 1st L P Value 2nd L P Value 3rd L P Value and 4th L P Value e Use Data from Database Use this option to test with a selected L P from the facility O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Main Application 113 KX FZ 2 0 Y 1 Internal Formulas Formula Text Comments Parsed Text Influent Flow MUL MUL LP Facility Town of Montague Formula Name Plant Loading Assigned
117. functionality In this section e License e Help About e System Properties e Credits License License Information AllMax provides a separate License for each copy or installation of the Operator10 Wastewater software It controls access to Number of Concurrent Users Versions Demo Mode etc If you are licensed with Multi User capabilities this will allow you to load the software onto a computer network Multi user does not allow for installation of the program onto computers at different sites License Database A license database is created during the installation process or as needed with AllMax Software Inc Technical Support staff The license database holds secure information related to the number of seats purchased features enabled and support dates Licenses can be updated via a new keycode supplied by AllMax Software Inc Seats Operator10 Wastewater is licensed using a seat based structure which stipulates that a client who has purchased Operator10 Wastewater may install Operator10 Wastewater on a total number of computers workstations clients as not to exceed your total license seat count For example a user who has purchased a 5 user multi user version of Operator10 Wastewater is permitted to install the Operator10 Wastewater client application on up to 5 individual workstations that are connected to a main server or serving computer The seat count does not include the server unless the
118. immediately enacted and Daily Summary information collected The links will continue to be enacted at their set times even if the OPC DDE Interface window is iconized or hidden behind other windows Press the Stop button to stop or pause the internal timer The Current Date and Time display will freeze and no links will be enacted Daily Summary information remains unchanged 12 1 3 OPC DDE Links OPC DDE Links The addition or editing of links is performed using the OPC DDE Link dialog seen below e Link Name e AllMax Definition e Server Definition e Schedule 2014 AllMax Software Inc sa Operator10 Help 12 1 3 1 12 1 3 2 OPC DDE Link Link Name 4 Enabled AllMax Definition Facility Loc Par Image has hotspots click on sections to learn more OPC DDE Link Name OPC DDE Link Name Enter the Link Name 1 to 30 characters for an OPC or DDE Link to be created The name must be unique and will be shown in the OPC DDE Links Listbox and Log File Check the Enabled checkbox to tell the OPC DDE Interface to read this at the next scheduled time OPC DDE Link AllMax Definition AllMax Database Definition A valid Facility Location Parameter and Data type must be specified for each OPC DDE Link Press the button beside the Parameter field to select the Facility Location and Parameter together Choose a the Data Type in the Save Data As frame from the dro
119. in mg l minutes O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 440 Operator10 Help 14 10 1 CTR x y z w CTR x y zZ w Regression method for Disinfection Concentration and contact Time required for a particular temp pH Cl LI Value The value returned uses the regression method for calculating the product of the disinfection concentration C in mg l and the time required T in minutes to treat water for disinfection where x is the lowest water temperature in degrees centigrade y is the highest pH z is the lowest disinfectant Chlorine concentration in mg l w is the Log Inactivation e g 0 5 for conventional 1 0 for slow sand The formula where x gt 12 5 is 0 361 w 2 261 exp 2 69 0 065 x 0 111 z 0 361 y Examples CTR 20 8 2 1 90 5 required CT in mg l minutes CTR Tap 00010 Tap 00400 Tap 50064 5 required CT in mg l minutes 14 10 1 CVT a b x CVT abc def x ConVerT value x from abc units to def units Value The value returned is the value of x as expressed in abc units converted to def units where abc and def are each one of the following measurement units length units area units MM millimeters CM2 square centimeters CM centimeters SQIN square inches IN inches SQFT square feet FT feet SQYD square yards YD yards M2 square meters M meters ACRE acres KM kilometers HECT hectares MI miles SQMI square miles 2014 AllMax Software Inc
120. ina new window Press the New button to open a new window containing an empty graph 8 4 1 1 3 New Graph Create a New Graph To create a new Graph perform one of the following actions e Go to the File menu and choose New Graph e Go to the File menu and choose Open Graph and click the New button Performing either of the above actions will begin the process of creating a new graph and take the user to the Data Source Editor dialog For more information see the help topic for Data Source 8 4 1 1 4 Close Close Go to the File menu and choose Close to close the current graph Users can also click the small X that appears in the upper right hand corner of the graph to close the graph 8 4 1 1 5 Save Save As Save Save As Go to the File menu and choose the Save menu item to save a Graph as the same Graph Name as it was opened previously Choose the Save As menu item to save a Graph as a new Graph Name from what it was opened previously Enter a Graph Name or press the popup button to choose a Graph Name from a PickList Save may also be chosen by pressing the appropriate Toolbar button 2014 AllMax Software Inc Graphing 2 8 4 1 1 6 Print Print Go to the File menu and choose Print to print the open graph The print prompt that is first displayed contains various options related to printing the graph Print Fit To Page Print Size Size 100 X Offset 0 00 Starting pag
121. into the Notes field Click the El Save button to save any data entered O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 138 Operator10 Help Add Similar BioSolid From the BioSolid list users are able to create similar BioSolids if one exists To utilize this feature highlight an existing BioSolid in the list and click the arrow icon beside gt the N Add button to select Add Similar Location BioSolid Add Assign Parameters Parameters tests or samples collected at the respective BioSolid can be added to the BioSolid gt Using the Add button secondary menu the drop down menu arrow or split button select the option Add Parameters or from the BioSolid list click the button that appears in the column titled Show Parameters to begin adding parameters to a selected BioSolid In the Assigned Parameter list that appears users can begin to add parameters to gt the list as needed Click the Add button to begin adding parameters Once selected Location Parameter information can be edited In grid editing is possible by entering data where permitted Multiple record editing is also permitted Highlight a group of records to be edited together and click the Edit button to begin editing Items able to be edited include Upper Limit Lower Limit Formula Entry Type and Protected For more information see Location Parameter Select from available Calc Options to determine how the parameter data is to b
122. inventory volatile solids in LB sISolids Vol or ISolids TVSS sum of waste volatile solids in LB LSolids Vol or LSolids TSS SOR Surface Overflow Rate in GPD SF SOR flow in GAL surface area of tank SOR_M Surface Overflow Rate in GPM SF SOR_M flow Flow MGD surface area of tank 1440 1000000 WOR Weir Overflow Rate WOR flow in GAL weir length WOR_M Weir Overflow Rate WOR flow in GAL per MIN weir length DT_SEC Detention Time in Seconds DT_SEC volume of tank flow in GAL 86400 DT_MIN Detention Time in Minutes DT_MIN volume of tank flow in GAL 1440 DT_HR Detention Time in Hours DT_HR volume of tank runhours RUNHRS defaults to 24 flow Flow MGD 1000000 DT_DAY Detention Time in Days DT_DAY volume of tank flow in GAL F_VOL Filtration Volume in Gal F_VOL flow in GAL runhours RUNHRS 24 F_RATE Filtration Rate in G MIN SQFT F_RATE Filtration Vol F_VOL runhours RUNHRS volume of tank 60 UFRV Unit Filter Run Volume in G SQFT UFRV Filtration Vol F_VOL volume of tank B_RATE Backwash Rate in G MIN SQFT B_RATE Backwash flow in GPM volume of tank B_VOL Backwash Vol in Gal B_VOL Backwash flow in GAL minutes BWASHM 24 2014 AllMax Software Inc Main Application 115 e B_VOL_P Backwash Percent B_VOL_P Backwash Vol B_VOL Filtration Volume F_VOL 100 SL_SF Solids Loadin
123. is averaged for three 3 7 day periods beginning with the first day of the month and a fourth period extending to the end of the month Saturday Rule Data is averaged for 7 day periods beginning on Sunday and extending though the following Saturday Periods are considered to be in the month containing the Saturday of the period Wednesday Rule Data is averaged for 7 day periods beginning on Sunday and extending though the following Saturday Periods are considered to be in the month containing the Wednesday of the period Whole Week Rule Data is averaged for 7 day periods beginning on Sunday and extending though the following Saturday Periods are considered to be in the month only if the entire period is in the month Any additional days are ignored 7 Day Averages of each period are normally calculated by using the arithmetic mean Average Some calculations allow the Flow Weighted Average to be used Fecals are calculated using the Geometric Mean Only days containing valid data are averaged for the period A period containing no valid data is ignored The Monthly Average is the arithmetic mean average of each 7 day average The Monthly Maximum is the maximum of each 7 day average The Monthly Minimum is the minimum of each 7 day average O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Main Application 125 4 13 1 3 Average Mean Average a The following Averages are calculated by Operator10 Wastewater software The Average is calculated
124. is the arithmetic mean average if w is 1 then the average is the geometric mean for fecals if w is 2 then the average is the flow weighted average v is the violation limit The count of violations and values may be returned instead of the ratio add 4 to y in order to return the count of violations add 8 to y in order to return the count of values Daily values may be considered as persistent calculations use the last data not later than the date by adding 32 to the type y The number of months is assumed to be 6 but may be specified for monthly 7 day and hourly calculations where mis the number of months add the additional parameter SNC_MAXD I p x y Z w V mM When a parameter to calculate loading is specified O 8 or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter SNC_MAXD I p l_flow p_flow x y z w v Examples SNC_MAXD Effluent 00400 0 0 0 0 8 5 current 6 months SNC monthly maximum exceeding 8 5 SNC_MAXD Effluent 00400 6 1 3 0 8 5 1 2 previous 6 months SNC 7 day ist of Month maximum exceeding 8 5 by 20 SNC_MAXD Effluent 00400 6 1 3 0 8 5 1 2 gt 33 TRUE if the ratio is greater than 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 489 33 14 16 13SNC_MAXM I p x y z w v SNC_MAXM l p X y Z W V monthly Significant Non Compliance SNC MAXimun Monthly violation for location and parameter offset x months type y
125. location for data storage Group ID If you are using the OPC DDE Interface on multiple computers and would like to create groups select a Group ID from the drop down list for each instance of the OPC DDE Interface For more information contact the AllMax Software Technical Support Department Logging Check the Log Data Values checkbox to show all data retrieved by OPC DDE Links The data collection written to the database is also recorded in the log file Sampling Intervals Fill in a value in minutes for the OPC DDE Interface to poll for active links Midnight Avoidance If the OPC DDE Interface should avoid writing values before or after midnight enter a number of minutes O 2014 AllMax Software Inc aso Operator10 Help 12 1 4 2 12 1 4 3 DDE Links Timeout The timeout value measured in milliseconds tells the OPC DDE Interface how long it should try to collect a reading before timing out N A string If the application the OPC DDE Interface is to read from has a specific string for blank data enter it here OPC DDE Log OPC DDE Log The OPC DDE Log found in the main application directory using the Windows Notepad application The file includes dates and times for all events such as Loading and unloading the application Starting Stopping and Resetting the timer and and any errors encountered In the Setup section if the JLog Data checkbox is marked all data retrieved by OPC DDE L
126. median of weekly or 7 day continuous or floating average of values if y is 2 then the result is a median of hourly values z is the type of average used if z is O then the average is the arithmetic mean average if z is 1 then the average is the geometric mean for fecals if z is 2 then the average is the flow weighted average Values may be considered as persistent calculations use the last data not later than the date by adding 32 to the type y The number of months may be specified for monthly 7 day and hourly calculations where mis the number of months add the additional parameter M_MED I p x y w m When a parameter to calculate loading is specified amp or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter M_MED I p _flow p_flow x y z Examples M_MED Effluent 50050 0 0 0 median current month M_MED Effluent 31614 1 1 1 median previous month 7 day continuous avg for fecals 14 11 9 M_MIN I p x y z w M_MIN I p x y Z w Monthly MINimum for location and parameter offset x months type y rule z average w Value The minimum of data values of a specific location and parameter for the month x months from the current month The function uses the following parameters to determine the calculation method y is the type of minimum if y is O then the result is a monthly or 30 day minimum if y is 1 then the result is a w
127. months having values The function uses the following parameters to determine the calculation method y is the type of average if y is O then the result is based on a daily minimum if y is 1 then the result is based on a weekly or 7 day minimum if y is 2 then the result is based on an hourly minimum if y is 3 then the result is based on a 4 day minimum z is the rule used for a 7 day average if z is O then the result uses a continuous or floating average if z is 1 then a week falls in the month which contains its Saturday 2014 AllMax Software Inc 492 Operator10 Help 14 17 if z is 2 then a week falls in the month which contains its Wednesday if z is 3 then the result uses the first of month for 4 weeks 28 days if z is 4 then the first of month 4th week extends to the end of the month if z is 5 then the first of month is controlled by facility option if z is 6 then only full weeks Sun Sat in the month are considered w is the type of average used if w is O then the average is the arithmetic mean average if w is 1 then the average is the geometric mean for fecals if w is 2 then the average is the flow weighted average v is the violation limit The count of months having violations and values may be returned instead of the ratio add 4 to y in order to return the count of months having violations add 8 to y in order to return the count of months having values Daily values may be considered as persistent
128. offset based on the z calculation type the numeric offset represents the beginning of the 7 day period week which is calculated as the weekly minimum average using the value returned when using the special case 32 to determine the beginning of the period to be reported z is the rule used for a 7 day average if z is O then the result uses a continuous or floating average if z is 1 then a week falls in the month which contains its Saturday if z is 2 then a week falls in the month which contains its Wednesday if z is 3 then the result uses the first of month for 4 weeks 28 days if z is 4 then the first of month 4th week extends to the end of the month if z is 5 then the first of month is controlled by facility option if z is 6 then only full weeks Sun Sat in the month are considered w is the type of average used if w is O then the average is the arithmetic mean average if w is 1 then the average is the geometric mean for fecals if w is 2 then the average is the flow weighted average 2014 AllMax Software Inc 496 Operator10 Help When a parameter to calculate loading is specified O 8 or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter W_MIN I p I_flow p_flow x y z w Examples W_MIN Effluent 50050 0 0 0 0 current month monthly 7 day minimum W_MIN Effluent 31614 1 1 6 1 previous month first full week average f
129. options and review necessary data information on the right side of the window Enter appropriate information where required or press to select information using PickList and or Calendar dialogs Calculated results are immediately shown Available tools include Units Conversion Concentration x Time CT Lime Soda Mineralization Residual Area Volume Percent Solutions Flow Estimate Loading OPC DDE O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Index 521 Index 433 I aS I 430 amp amp 389 45359 395 F L P 387 395 101 443 CALC_LP 387 2014 AllMax Software Inc 425 A 101 394 390 5 Sec 101 390 1 1 x 428 E a 3 7853 395 3320 298 3D View Properties 229 4 4 Day Average 123 5 5 Year Forecast Report 268 5 Yr Forecast 268 Ta 7 day 413 492 493 495 7 Day Average 124 8 8 34 395 Vv 522 Operator10 Help 9 90 degree Weir 452 A About 23 328 361 ABS 425 Absolute Value 425 Accrue 435 ACCRUE 435 ACCUM 471 Accumulate 435 471 ACODE 436 ACOS 473 Add 30 416 417 425 434 Add Alpha Code 116 Add Alpha Codes 116 Add Chemical 118 Add Container 157 Add Data 98 Add DataView 170 Add Formula 109 Add Formulas 109 Add Limits 145 Add Link 342 Add Location 86 Add Location Parameter 95 Add LP 95 Add new 30 Add Owner 144 Add Page 155 Add Parameter 90 Add Process 102 Add Report 242 Add Samp
130. report up to 8 columns containing the Sum Average Maximum Minimum Maximum or Count of Daily Values the Average Maximum or Minimum Monthly Average the Average Maximum or Minimum Daily Loading or the Average Maximum or Minimum Monthly Average Loading Multi Year Summary Report Setup options include e General Properties and Information e Parameters e Summary Columns e Comments 9 7 2 2 1 Multi Year Summary Setup Topics in this section include e General Properties and Information e Parameters e Summary Columns e Comments 2014 AllMax Software Inc Operator10 Help 9 7 2 2 1 1 General Properties In the General Properties and Information setup section for the Multi Year Summary Report users can edit the following fields Page Adjustment and Print Settings Size Enter a percentage to which you would like to reduce the printed form X Offset Adjust the X coordinate to which you would like to offset the printed form Y Offset Adjust the Y coordinate to which you would like to offset the printed form Beginning Page Enter the beginning page The Multi Year Report will continue to number subsequent pages if applicable Leave this field blank to use default numbering Header Enter up to 3 three lines of text to be used as a header for the Limit Report The default header will be the Facility Address Facility To customize the name of the facility on this report enter it into this f
131. right click on the cells and choose Block Summary from the right click menu Summaries O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 210 Operator10 Help Available data summaries include e Sum Average Avg Maximum Max Minimum Min Count Geometric Mean GMean Standard Deviation Std Dev 7 10 11 Date Format Options Date Format The date format displayed in the Row Header cell is able to be set using pre defined options available in the DataView Properties section as well as the options shown below Directly enter the format string using the options displayed below d single digit day of month 1 31 dd 2 digit day of month 01 31 ddd abbreviated name of day of the week Mon dddd full name of day of the week Monday h single digit hour 12 hour clock hh 2 digit hour 12 hour clock H single digit hour 24 hour clock HH 2 digit hour 24 hour clock m single digit minute 0 59 mm 2 digit minute 00 59 M month number 1 12 MM 2 digit month number 01 12 MMM abbreviated month name Dec MMMM full month name December s single digit second 0 59 ss 2 digit second 00 59 tt AM or PM for the time y single digit year 0 99 yy 2 digit year 00 99 yyyy 4 digit year time separator date separator Examples dd ddd 01 Fri dd ddd MMM 01 Fri Feb MMMM dd yyyy February 01 2013 H m ddd dd MMM 5 10 Fri 01 Feb 2014 AllMax Software
132. separately on each computer however the same prompt will be received to indicate that an update is available O 2014 AllMax Software Inc General Features 53 Update Options The following options are available to dictate how and when the update notification is received Check for Updates An option is available to turn off update notifications at the application level In the main application window go to the File menu choose Setup then choose Options and find the Check for Updates option Place a check in the checkbox to turn on prompting for new versions on this computer Removing the checkbox for the option Check for Updates will turn off notifications and prompting for new versions on this computer Check for Updates Ribbon Theme Windows7 z Save on Bit Window Position J Recent Licenses Custom Tools Antero exe C Program Files AllmaxSoftware Ante eDVViewer exe C AllMaxWastewater 10 21 024 3 Skip This Version When displayed the new version availability window displays a Skip This Version button Using this option will flag this version and disable the notification until a new version is available Remind Me Later When displayed the new version availability window displays a Remind Me Later option Use this option to suppress reminders for a selected period of time 2014 AllMax Software Inc 54 Operator10 Help Do you want to download th
133. server or serving computer will be used as a workstation where day to day usage of the software will occur Keycode Keycode 2014 AllMax Software Inc Introduction to Operator10 Wastewater 23 AllMax Software Inc provides a separate License for each copy or installation of the Operator10 Wastewater software It controls access to Number of Licensed Seats Versions Demo Mode etc Licenses may be updated by entering the 20 digit KeyCode supplied by AllMax either when prompted during the installation or at any time from the Help About screen K No Y Yes Enter a new KeyCode 191213 Do you wish to continue 2 2 2 Configuration File Configuration File An application wide Configuration File OP10 cfg is found in the database directory The configuration file is used to manage application settings and characteristics Changes to the configuration file are not recommended and should only be made with the help of AllMax Software Inc technical support staff For more information contact AllMax Software Inc using any of the following methods AllMax Software Inc PO Box 40 911 S Main St Kenton OH 43326 Toll free phone 800 670 1867 Local phone 419 673 8863 Fax 419 673 8864 Sales 8 account email address sales allmaxsoftware com Technical Support email address go2tech allmaxsoftware com Corporate website www allmaxsoftware com go2tech remote support website www allmaxsoftware com go2tech 2
134. specific location and parameter for the month x months from the current month The function uses the following parameters to determine the calculation method y is the type of period where the limit is applied if y is 1 then the result is based on a daily period violation if count of hourly or daily values is less than z per day if y is 2 then the result is based on a weekly period violation if count of daily values is less than z per week if y is 3 then the result is based on a monthly period violation if count of daily values is less than z per month if y is 4 then the result is based on a quarterly period violation if count of daily values is less than z per quarter if y is 5 then the result is based on a semi annual period violation if count of daily values is less than z per 6 month if y is 6 then the result is based on a yearly period violation if count of daily values is less than z per year z is the violation limit w is the number of months The function will return the number of violations for the month Additional information about a particular violation can be returned where vnum is the number of the violation 1 is the first 2 is the second etc add 256 vnum 8 to y in order to return the offset of the day of the violation add 256 vnum 16 to y in order to return the value count of data values of the violation When a parameter to calculate loading is specified amp or amp amp parameter a
135. steps 1 In the DataView List highlight the DataView to be deleted 2 Click the x Delete button to delete 3 Confirm the deletion of the DataView by clicking the Y Yes Yes or X No No button 2014 AllMax Software Inc Operator10 Help 7 5 7 6 DataView Data Entry Data Entr Data is conveniently entered directly into any grid cell by selecting the cell and then entering the value via the keyboard Pressing the Enter or Tab key moves to the next cell Data is stored at a specific Location Parameter at a specific date or time It may consist of Daily or Hourly values Less Than Greater Than or Non Detect values Time or Date values or Alpha Codes Data values are stored internally with 15 significant digit Precision Internal values are unaffected by the number of display digits or following zeros Numbers may range to 1 0E16 DataView Columns DataView Columns Columns defined in the DataView represent Location Parameters Location Parameters can be added to any DataView in order to provide customized display of important data Location Parameters are added to DataViews as columns via the DataView Properties Column Setup section See the DataView Properties Column Setup help topic for more information O 2014 AllMax Software Inc DataView 173 All Pro Ready DataView Properties Column Setup Column Properties Print Properties 10 records
136. the day of the month using the DOM function to determine a row or column Examples OPC Hexatec PCData 1 Memory Load Retrieves the current Memory Load percentage value from the Hexatec PC Data Server OPC SERVER1 MyServer Tag_001 or OPC SERVER1 MyServer Tag_001 or OPC 192 168 0 1 MyServer Tag_001 Item from MyServer running on the workstation SERVER1 at IP address 192 168 0 1 14 12 5 OPC_W a b c x y OPC_W a b C X Write value y via an OPC link Node a Server b Item c replacing char with value x Value A OLE for Process Control OPC link is established with another open application and the value y is Written exported to the other application without its request The other application requires specific Topic and Item strings see documentation of the other application The and characters separate the strings and the character in any string is replaced by the integer value of x For example if x is equal to 4 then R C1 becomes R4C1 If the DDE link succeeds the value TRUE is returned otherwise FALSE is returned 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 471 In most cases the other application must be running and the appropriate file must be open Synexus DDE links require the other application to be able to retum a single value in the ascii text CF_TEXT format The Service string is usually the name of the application the Topic string is usually the filename and or page and the Item
137. the TRC multiplier only result is the result is the result is the result is the result is the result is the result is the 1 Maximum 2 Sum if y is 8 then the result is the average limit maximum limit minimum limit surcharge limit surcharge limit rate surcharge base rate surcharge summary option value O Average include facility value The TRC multiplier for Conventional or Non Conventional parameters may also be considered by adding 16 to the type y Examples PRE_LMT Effluent 50050 0 2 maximum limit for the current months PRE_LMT Effluent 50050 6 4 surcharge limit six months ago 14 10 2 QLIME x y z w v QLIME X y Z W V QuickLIME required in mg l Value The value returned is the quicklime CaO required in milligrams per liter to treat water for softening where x is the available carbon dioxide CO2 in mg l e g parameter 00405 y is the bicarbonate hardness as CaCO3 or alkalinity in mg l e g parameter 00425 z is the magnesium hardness as CaCO3 in mg l e g parameter 00920 w is the excess hydroxide alkalinity as CaCO3 in mg l e g parameter 00420 v is the percent strength purity of the quicklime usually 88 95 NOTE Unused variables may be left as BLANK Examples QLIME Raw 00405 Raw 00425 Raw 00920 Raw 00420 90 mg l lime required QLIME Raw 00405 Raw 00425 Raw 00920 90 1 15 15 excess of lime required 2014 AllMax Software I
138. the arithmetic mean average if w is 1 then the average is the geometric mean for fecals if w is 2 then the average is the flow weighted average v is the violation limit Daily values may be considered as persistent calculations use the last data not later than the date by adding 32 to the type y The number of months may be specified for monthly 7 day and hourly calculations where mis the number of months add the additional parameter V_MAV I p x y Z w V M The function will return the number of violations for the month Additional information about a particular violation can be returned where vnum is the number of the violation 1 is the first 2 is the second etc add 256 vnum 4 to y in order to return the offset of the day of the violation add 256 vnum 8 to y in order to return the value of the violation When a parameter to calculate loading is specified amp or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter V_MAV I p I_flow p_flow x y z w v Examples V_MAV Effluent 50050 0 0 0 0 3 14 number of violations for current month monthly average exceeding 3 14 V_MAV Effluent 31614 1 1 0 1 3 14 number of violations for previous month 7 day continuous average for fecals exceeding 3 14 V_MAV Effluent 31614 1 256 2 8 1 0 1 3 14 value of the second violation for previous month 7 day continuous average for fecals exceed
139. the column titled Show Parameters to begin adding parameters to a selected location In the Assigned Parameter list that appears users can begin to add parameters to gt the list as needed Click the Add button to begin adding parameters Once selected Location Parameter information can be edited In grid editing is possible by entering data where permitted Multiple record editing is also permitted Zi Highlight a group of records to be edited together and click the Edit button to 2014 AllMax Software Inc s Operator10 Help begin editing Items able to be edited include Upper Limit Lower Limit Formula Entry Type and Editable For more information see Location Parameter 4 4 1 Add Location Add New Location gt To add a new location to the list users should click the N Add button to begin 1 Users will be presented with a Location window that will allow for data entry of required and optional information See below 2 Enter a unique Location 1 to 16 characters to identify the Location A Description 0 to 30 characters may also be entered a Standard Locations can be added from an existing list of Locations created and managed by AllMax utilizing standard naming conventions and suggestions based on industry standards Click the button to view the list of Standard Locations 3 Check the In Service checkbox for Locations Sampling Points which are currently in use 4 Note
140. the function assumes 1 year When a parameter to calculate loading is specified O 8 or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter Y_SUM l p l_flow p_flow x y Examples Y_SUM Effluent 50050 0 0 start current month yearly sum Y_SUM Effluent 31614 6 6 previous 6 month sum 14 18 12Y_TOTMI I p x y Y_TOTM I p x Yearly sum of Monthly TOTals average number of days for location and parameter offset x months for y months Value The sum of the monthly totals for a specific location and parameter for y months beginning x months from the current month The total is defined as the average of values multiplied by the number of days in the range If y is O or BLANK the function assumes 1 year If 256 is added to y the count of days with flow data is used instead of the number of days When a parameter to calculate loading is specified amp or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter Y_TOTM I p _flow p_flow x y Examples Y_TOTM Effluent 50050 0 0 start current month yearly total Y_TOTM Effluent 31614 6 6 previous 6 month total 2014 AllMax Software Inc Uilites sos 15 Utilities Topics in this section include Database Backup e Import Export Facility Operator10 Agent Calculate Utility Locked Data
141. the printed report if the JAllow Comments checkbox is checked in the General Properties section users can edit these comments when printed O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 322 Operator10 Help Add Remove Move Up Move Dn Print List Bio Nutrient 01 Bio Nutrient 4 Lm r Click template or press PageUp PageDn 9 7 7 3 BioSolids Limit Report Bio Limit Report The BioSolids Limit Report allow users who have created a Biosolids type facility to review the defined limits of Biosolid sites Users can add as many or as few sites to the report The Bio Limit report generally shows the defined limits or warning levels of the identified parameters applied to the selected sites There are 5 sections of the reports that can be setup for each report are e General Properties e General Information e Site e Reporting Inclusions Bio Nutrient Report e Comments 9 7 7 3 1 BioSolids Limit Report General Properties General Properties In the General Properties section of the Bio Limit Report users can modify several options including 2014 AllMax Software Inc Reporting 323 Page Adjustment and Print settings Size Enter a percentage to which you would like to reduce the printed form X Offset Adjust the X coordinate to which you would like to offset the printed form Y Offset Adjust the Y coordinate to which you would like to offset the printed form JAllow Comments Plac
142. the same day last year 14 7 7 LOM x LOM x Length Of the Month offset x months Value The numeric value 28 to 31 of the length of the month x months from the current month Examples LOM 0 length of the current month LOM 1 length of the previous month 14 7 8 LOY x LOY x Length Of the Year offset x years Value The numeric value 365 to 366 of the length of the year x years from the current year 2014 AllMax Software Inc n Operator10 Help Examples LOY 0 length of the current year LOY 1 length of the previous year 14 7 9 M_DATE x y z M_DATE x y z Monthly DATE offset x months for month type y return type z Value The numeric date value offset or length for the month x months from the current month if y is O then the result uses a calendar month if y is 1 then a week falls in the month which contains its Saturday if y is 2 then a week falls in the month which contains its Wednesday if y is 3 then the result uses the first of month for 4 weeks 28 days if y is 4 then the first of month 4th week extends to the end of the month the value 5 is unused for compatibility with other monthly functions if y is 6 then only full weeks Sun Sat in the month are considered The Return Type z is one of the following O if the result is the beginning of the month as a julian date value 1 if the result is the beginning of the month as an offset in days from the current da
143. the time frame 3 6 Windows Login Windows Login Operator10 Wastewater Data Management utilizes information from the Microsoft Windows Operating System relating to current User In an effort to make the login process to Operator10 Wastewater smooth and efficient AllMax Software has implemented Windows Login which validates the current Windows User against a valid Operator10 Wastewater user and if successful allows entry into the Operator10 Wastewater application In previous versions of Operator10 Wastewater users and passwords could be defined and thus permit deny access to Operator10 Wastewater Operator10 Wastewater now requires a valid user name that would match a user from the Windows Operating System This effort to validate the current Windows User without requiring a separate password for Operator10 Wastewater allows a user quicker access and instant validation for use of Operator10 Wastewater 3 7 Auto Update Operator10 Wastewater updates can now be managed in an automated process whereby Operator10 Wastewater connects to the AllMax Software website and verifies version information to prompt users when a new version is available for download This process will be performed automatically by default but can be skipped or turned off if desired Check for Update Upon opening Operatori0 Wastewater Operator10 Wastewater will connect to the AllMax Software website www allmaxsoftware com and verify the cur
144. this list to define any constants to be used internally and by functions in the calculation of data Click the i Add button to begin Enter the constant 8 34 0 45359 pi etc to be defined and its value Calculation Parameters Define calculation parameters to aid in the calculation of process and internal formulas Specific Gravity Solids TSS Solids and Solids Vol can be defined Flow Parameters Use this list to define a set of flow parameters to be used in the conversion to MGD million gallons per day Click the Add button to begin Select a Flow Parameter by clicking the button and choosing from the parameter list Enter a MGD multiplier to convert the selected parameter to MGD Concentration Units Use this list to define a set of concentration units to be used in the conversion to MG gt L milligrams liter Click the y Add button to begin Enter a Concentration Unit and a mg l multiplier that should be used to convert the unit to mg l Bio Solids Units Use this list to define a set of units to be used in the calculation of biosolids related data Click the Add button to begin Enter a BioSolids Unit and the mg kg multiplier that should be used to convert the unit to MG KG milligrams kilogram Fecal Parameters Use this list to define parameters that should have any calculated average perform a calculation of geometric mean instead This list would typically contain parameters 2014 Al
145. to create the new Database The Import process will now begin Upon completion you will be able to select a facility from the new Database for use New Sample Database de A sample database can be created as needed using an option found on the Add button Select Add New Sample Database from the menu to automatically add a sample database for Operator10 Wastewater O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Main Application The process of adding a sample database is performed in a relatively hands free manner allowing users to select the option confirmthe operation and allow the application to perform the process of sample database creation Upon successful creation the Sample Database and Facility will be able to be selected from the Open Database window 4 2 2 Add New Facility Add New Facilit In the Database Facility window click the Add button to begin the process 1 To create a new Facility enter the name of the Facility 1 to 30 characters and continue editing 2 To edit a Facility fill in any information for the following fields e Address lines 1 3 O to 30 characters e City 0 to 20 characters State Province 0 to 20 characters e Zip 0 to 10 characters e Country 0 to 17 characters e Report State selection e Hourly Entry Type 24 Whole Hours or Any Time When entries are complete press 3 OK to close the dialog O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Operator10 Help 4 2 3 4 2 4 Fa
146. uses the average of the first 7 days and the last 7 days of the month to determine the increase e Month averages uses the averages for the current and previous months to determine the increase Multiplier Enter a mulitplier for calculating solids production Decimal Enter the decimal precision for the overall report Loading Units Select the units in which loadings are reported kilograms day e grams day pounds day O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Reporting 283 Treat lt gt Data As Select from the drop down menu to determine the method by which data with the less than lt greater than gt or non detect data qualifiers will be treated Available options are Preserve Types Calculations will preserve the available data qualifiers and calculated results will display the appropriate data qualifier Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 6 2 1 4 lt 3 as the less than symbol to be preserved for the final calculation Entered Value Calculations will drop the data qualifiers from data and calculated results will display without the qualifiers using only the numeric entered portion of the data Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 6 2 1 4 3 as the less than symbol will be dropped for the final calculation Half Entered Value Calculations will drop the data qualifiers from data and calculated results will display without the qualifiers using one half the entered value of
147. versions of documents DataViews Graphs and Reports as they are printed Logged documents can be reprinted at any time as they were printed the first time Facility Name Date Logged Description File Name cae Coane NN lei Logged Documents 196 records 1 selected gt PU KR S E A H Murrumba Downs STP Type User Name Comment 10 13 2011 11 23 11722 2011 12 36 Brendale DERM Brendale DERM Mip48briandeskt al Mip48briandesktal Report Report September 12 16 2011 08 36 01 17 2012 11 25 01 23 2012 13 41 02 12 2012 11 03 02 14 2012 15 52 02 23 2012 12 54 Brendale DERM Brendale DERM Brendale DERM Brendale DERM Brendale DERM Brendale DERM Nip48briandesk al IMip48briandeskhal Mip48briandesktal Mip48briandesktal ip48briandesk al Nip48briandesk al Report Report Report Report Report Report The Logged Documents section allows users to view a list of logged documents printed from the DataView Graphing and Reporting sections Accessing Logged Documents To access the Logged Documents section in the Report application go to the File menu click the Logged Documents menu option Adding Logged Documents To add new documents to the list of logged documents go the the DataView O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Main Application 133 Graphing or Reporting sections of Op
148. volume units mass units volume may convert to mass at a ratio mass may convert to volume at a ratio of 8 34 Ib gal of 8 34 Ib gal ML milliliters CC cubic centimeters CUIN cubic inches FLOZ fluid ounces QT quarts L liters GAL gallons CUFT cubic feet CUYD cubic yards KL kiloliters M3 cubic meters ACREIN acre inches KM3 thousand cubic meters ACREFT acre feet MGAL million gallons concentration units NGL nanograms per liter UGL micrograms per liter PPB parts per billion LBMGAL pounds per million gallon KGHECT kilograms per hectare LBACRE pounds per acre MGL milligrams per liter PPM parts per million MGKG milligrams per kilogram GRGAL grains per gallon KGMTON kilograms per metric ton GL grams per liter PCT percent LBCUFT pounds per cubic foot flow rate units LPD liters per day GPD gallons per day CFD cubic feet per day GPH gallons per hour M3D cubic meters per day LPM liters per minute GPM gallons per minute CFM cubic feet per minute LPS liters per second 2014 AllMax Software Inc NG nanograms UG micrograms MG milligrams G grams OZ ounces KG kilograms LB pounds TON tons english MTON tons metric time units SEC seconds HHMM hours minutes MIN minutes HR hours HH MM hours minutes DAY days WK weeks MO months YR years LYR leap years pressure units KGM2 kilograms per square meter PSF pounds per square foot MMHG millimeters of mercury FTW feet of w
149. w Value The maximum of data values of a specific location and parameter for the month x months from the current month The function uses the following parameters to determine the calculation method y is the type of maximum if y is O then the result is a monthly or 30 day maximum if y is 1 then the result is a weekly or 7 day maximum if y is 2 then the result is an hourly maximum if y is 3 then the result is a 4 day maximum 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 457 z is the rule used for a 7 day average see also W_MAX if z is O then the result uses a continuous or floating average if z is 1 then a week falls in the month which contains its Saturday if z is 2 then a week falls in the month which contains its Wednesday if z is 3 then the result uses the first of month for 4 weeks 28 days if z is 4 then the first of month 4th week extends to the end of the month if z is 5 then the first of month is controlled by facility option if z is 6 then only full weeks Sun Sat in the month are considered w is the type of average used if w is O then the average is the arithmetic mean average if w is 1 then the average is the geometric mean for fecals if w is 2 then the average is the flow weighted average Daily values may be considered as persistent calculations use the last data not later than the date by adding 32 to the type y The offset and count of maximum values may also be returned using the following s
150. weighted average When a parameter to calculate loading is specified O 8 or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter Y_MINM p l_flow p_flow x y Zz Examples Y_MINM Effluent 50050 0 0 0 start current month yearly minimum Y_MINM Effluent 31614 6 6 1 previous 6 month minimum for fecals The Minimum 3 Month Average of monthly averages may be specified by adding the additional parameter Y_MINM I p x y z 3 14 18 1 Y_RES I p x y1 y2 y3 y4 Y_RES I p x y1 y2 y3 y4 Yearly RESidual carryover for location and parameter offset x years percents y1 y2 y3 y4 Value The residual carryover of the yearly sums of data values of a specific location and parameter beginning x years from the current year Beginning with the previous year and moving backward each year s sum is multiplied by the y percentage for that year and the total is returned as the residual Examples Y_RES Effluent 50050 0 50 Y_RES Effluent 31614 1 50 14 18 1Y_SUM I p x y residual carryover from previous years next year s residual 20 10 0 20 10 0 Y_SUM I p x 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 501 Yearly SUM of daily values for location and parameter offset x months for y months Value The sum of data values of a specific location and parameter for y months beginning x months from the current month If y is O or BLANK
151. will be installed during the next HotSync operation Press the HotSync button on the DataPort cradle to initiate a HotSync action and transfer the software NOTE This step does not need to be repeated on multiple workstations but should be repeated for multiple DataPort handheld units 4 Export Location Parameters for the DataPort In the Operatori0 Wastewater Main Application go to the setup ribbon menu and choose 2 Select L Ps and review the list of Location Parameters to be exported For more information on this process see the DataPort Sync Select L Ps topic Once all Location Parameters are selected find the 2 toolstrip button to export the list The Location Parameter list will be installed during the next HotSync operation This step does not need to be repeated on multiple workstations Press the HotSync button on the DataPort cradle to initiate a HotSync action and transfer the software O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 366 Operator10 Help NOTE This step does not need to be repeated on multiple workstations but should be repeated whenever exported Locations or Parameters are changed 13 4 6 Keypad KeyPad Main Window Key button A popup KeyPad is available for entry of data values 13 4 7 Main Window Main Window The DataPort Main Window is the central screen for data entry All scanning should take place from this window Tap the Date selector to set the date by using a popup cal
152. x y MAXimum offset x days for y days D_METER I p x y z METER value offset x days max meter reading y multiplier z D_MIN I p x y MINimum offset x days for y days D_NEXT l p x y NEXT value not prior to date offset x months y days D_STAT I p l p x y z Daily STATistics offset x days for y days type z D_STDEV I p x y STandard DEViation offset x days for y days D_SUM l p x y SUM offset x days for y days D_TOTAL I p x y avg range offset x days for y days D_VAL I p x y VALue offset x mon y days LP I p l p Location Parameter data Date Functions O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 377 DATE 1 j1 m d y1 current julian or m d y DATE DAT E j x m d y x value x calculated on a julian or m d y DATE DOM x Day Of Month 1 31 offset x days DOW x Day Of Week 1 7 offset x days DOY x Day Of Year 1 365 offset x days DVAL j x VALue x for the julian Date j LOM x Length Of Month 28 31 offset x months LOY x Length Of Year 365 366 offset x years M_DATE x y z Monthly DATE offset x months for month type y MOY x Month Of Year 1 12 offset x months WDOM x WeekDay Of 1st of Month 1 7 offset x months WOM x Week Of Month 1 5 offset x days YR x the YeaR 1970 2037 offset x years Hourly Data Functions H_AVG I p x y Hourly AVeraGe offset x days hour y H_CALC l p x y z Houlry CALCulations value x offset y days type z
153. 0 93 01415 e Use the Vertical X Legend option to rotate the text on the X Legend by 90 degrees e Use the Bi Level X Legend option to display the text on two lines in an altemating fashion ee 01 03 05 07 09 11 02 04 06 08 10 iz e The y axis Legend is displayed from bottom to top at the left side of the Graph It is a numeric Scale for the associated Data Vid 4 34 lt 3 80 326 272 4 Wine 218 ES 1 64 110 cd oss o A Secondary y axis Legend may be displayed from bottom to top at the right side of the Graph O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 234 Operator10 Help A Legend Box may be moved as required Right click on any Legend Box and choose the Left Right Top or Bottom menu item to attach it to the edge of the Graph window Choose the Float menu item to make the Legend Box a floating moveable by dragging with the mouse and resizable window If the Floating Legend Box is within the Graph window choose the Fixed menu item to attach it in place to the Graph To change the appearance of a Legend Box Right click on any Legend Box and choose the Options menu item to select appearance options froma dialog box Legend Box Size To resize a Left Right Top or Bottom Legend Box drag the Splitter Bar available according to the Options settings To resize a Floating or Fixed Legend Box go to the Legends menu and choose the menu option Series Legend Box Size X Legend Gap The X Legend
154. 0050 0 12 increase since the previous year 14 11 3 M_COUNT I p x M_COUNT I p x Monthly COUNT for location and parameter offset x months Value The count of data values of a specific location and parameter for the month x months from the current month The function counts only valid data it ignores Alpha Codes Less Than Greater Than or Non Detect values if Facility options are set to blank The number of months may be specified where mis the number of months add the additional parameter M_COUNT I p x m Examples M_COUNT Effluent 50050 0 count of present month M_COUNT Effluent 50050 2 3 count of 3 months of values beginnging 2 months prior 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 455 14 11 4 M_COUNTH I p x M_COUNTH I p x Monthly COUNT for Hourly data values at location and parameter offset x months Value The count of hourly data values of a specific location and parameter for the month x months from the current month The function counts only valid data it ignores Alpha Codes Less Than Greater Than or Non Detect values if Facility options are set to blank The number of months may be specified where mis the number of months add the additional parameter M_COUNTH I p x m Examples M_COUNTH Effluent 50050 0 count of present month M_COUNTH Effluent 50050 2 3 count of 3 months of values beginning 2 months prior 14 11 5 M_DATE x y z M_DATE x y z Monthly DA
155. 1 calender year period for Summary Values DataViews Protected Place a check in the checkbox for Protected to force the DataView to be saved as a new DataView in the event of modifications Inverted View Place a check in the checkbox for Inverted View to switch the display of Location Parameters as rows rather than columns DataView Info Cell Show DataView Name Place a check in the checkbox to display the DataView Name in the top left comer cell of the DataView Show DataView Type Place a check in the checkbox to display the DataView Type in the top left comer cell of the DataView Show Date Range Place a check in the checkbox to display the Date Range in the top left corner cell of the DataView Column Header Properties Font amp Color Press the button to select the Font properties for the Column Header row Font style size color and effects can be selected Full Column Color Place a check in the checkbox to display the selected column background color for the whole column Row Height Enter a numeric value to define the height of the displayed column header row Status Bar Summaries Include Sum Average Maximum etc Place a check in the available checkboxes O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 180 Operator10 Help 7 8 2 to display the selected summaries at the bottom of the DataView window Summaries will be calculated in the status bar area based on the selected cells from the DataView Row Head
156. 1 selected gt DU X S E AS Facility Directory Facility Name Location Parameter Order DATA_000 Murrumba Downs Weather Station Rainfall 1 DATA_000 Murrumba Downs Weather Station Wet Weather Day 2 DATA_000 Murrumba Downs 51 ROC ER DO_FIELD 13 DATA_000 Murrumba Downs 51 ROC Ef AMMONIA_N j4 DATA_000 Murrumba Downs S1 ROCI Eff CHLORINE_TOT 5 DATA_000 Murrumba Downs S1 ROCIEff TOC 6 DATA_000 Murrumba Downs S1 ROCJER PH 7 DATA_000 Murrumba Downs S1 ROC ER BOD 18 DATA_000 Murrumba Downs S1 ROCIER SUSPENDED_S 9 DATA_000 Murrumba Downs 51 ROC Ef FAECAL_COLI_ 10 m DataView Columns Setup 7 7 DataView Types Topics included in this section e Daily Values DataView e Hourly Values DataView e Summary Values DataView 7 7 4 Daily Values DataView Daily Values DataView Daily Values DataView types allow users to display the DataView in a view that provides daily data in a row column format In this type of DataView Location Parameters are displayed as columns and days are displayed as rows 2014 AllMax Software Inc Operator10 Help F o Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 x x 2 x
157. 10 Wastewater 2014 AllMax Software Inc Operator10 Help 4 1 2 8 Help Ribbon Main Application Help Ribbon The Help ribbon provides the following functionality a Sl lis Murrumba Downs STPView Operatorl0 Wastewater old Sa File Dashboard View Setup BioSolids Tools Support Help E o e p ob Du A y Am Help Contents Program Manual DataPort Manual Report Designer Manual Program Log Import Log DataPort HotSync Log OPC DDE Log What s New About Log Files What s New About M Application Help Program Manuals The Help ribbon displays information and access to various help topics and log information Help Functions The following options are available in the Help ribbon and are discussed as they appear in the button groups Application Help e Help Contents Click the 12 Help Contents button to open the Help File Program Manuals e Program Manual Press the Program Manual button to open the PDF manual for Operator10 Wastewater e DataPort Manual Press the E DataPort Manual button to open the PDF manual for the DataPort Handheld e Report Designer Manual Press the El Report Designer Manual button to open the List and Label Report Designer Manual Log Files e Program Log Press the Al Program Log button to open the Operator10 Wastewater program log file e Import Log Press the UN Import Log button to open the Import Utility log fil
158. 14 AllMax Software Inc a Operator10 Help Locked Data Choices include Access No Access to enable disable the ability to Lock Data for the selected facility OPC DDE Choices include No Access View Only Add Edit Delete to limit access to the OPC DDE Interface Operator 10 Notes Choices include No Access View Only Add Edit Delete to limit access to the Notes section Owners List Bio Choices include No Access View Only Add Edit Delete to limit access to the BioSolids Owner section Process History Choices include No Access View Only Add Edit Delete to limit access to the Process History section Process Setup Choices include No Access View Only Add Edit Delete to limit access to the Process Setup section Reports Choices include No Access View Only Add Edit Delete to limit access to the Reports section Sampling Events Choices include No Access View Only Add Edit Delete to limit access to the Sampling Events section IMPORTANT Users assigned to a group will inherit the permissions of the selected group All security settings will be disabled The Group setting of Custom will allow exceptions to be made for the selected user The following is a legend for the various security options Access Allows user access to the selected section of Operator10 and enables use of that section No Access Denies user access to the selected section of Operator10 View Only Allows user access to the selected sectio
159. 2014 AllMax Software Inc 9 3 3 Report Name Report Name Reports can be named uniquely in order to identify the report and purpose of the report In the Rename dialog enter the report name in the Rename Report field Press the Save button to commit the change New Custom Report 9 4 Report Properties Report Properties Once a report has been created user must edit the report and define it s properties so that data may be output Right click a selected report and select Properties from the Right click menu A new window titled Report Properties will open Report properties and options vary by report consult this help file and look for the report style for specific information about it s properties See the Report Types topic for more information General Help The Report Properties window is divided into two panes In the left pane there is a reduced image representing the selected report style Areas in the image have been enabled so that a Left click will bring up the corresponding fields and options in the right pane Edit the available fields in the right pane as necessary In the left pane e Press the Save button to save the current setup e Press the Preview button to preview the current setup See Report Print Preview for more information e Press the Guidance button to view additional information regarding the selected report style See Report Guidance Documents for more information 201
160. 34 Operator10 Help Users can export grid data as a csv comma separated values file This export file will contain the columns displayed in the grid at the time of export Users should click on the down arrow beside the Print button to select Export then select Export grid as CSV Users will be able to give a file name and file location for the saved file in the next step Refresh Grid contents can be refreshed as needed press the F5 key or the amp Refresh button in the toolbar to refresh the data from the database This option re queries the database to provide new and or updated data Grouping Grouping allows users to organize and re organize data shown in grids When users click the A Grouping button a darkened area will appear above the grid space see image below Users are instructed to Drag a column header here to group by that column l Dowo T 93 records 1 selected gt DP X 2 S alap Location List Facility Name Dayboro STP Facility Name lt Location Location Description Location group Active Notes 2 Brendale STP E Mixed Liquor Filtered Cell 1 Brendale STP Mixed Liquor Filtered Cell 2 lt m Brendale STP BD Cell 4 Mixed Liquor Filtered Cell 4 Brendale STP BD Cell 8 Mixed Liquor Filtered Cell 8 Brendale STP BD Dried Sludge Dewatering Sludge Cake Conc Brendale STP BD DWFS De watere Feed Sludge Brendale STP BD Filtrate Sludge Dewatering Filt
161. 38 440 Li 445 License 22 License Database 22 Lime 444 448 Lime Soda 444 448 450 Limit 428 434 448 449 475 476 477 478 480 481 482 484 485 486 487 489 490 491 Limit Report 287 322 LIMIT 428 Limits 227 Limits Editor 227 Linear Regression 222 406 462 Link 344 Link Data 344 Link Examples 347 Link Schedule 346 Link Server Definition 345 Linking 467 468 469 470 Links 342 Liquid 136 Liquid BioSolid 136 2014 AllMax Software Inc List 368 List and Label 247 LN 429 Loading 107 404 Loadings 107 Location 84 86 87 366 368 387 393 Location Parameter 92 95 96 364 368 387 392 393 Location Parameters 172 180 Lock andLoad 247 Lock Data 510 Locked Data 510 Log 350 429 Log Document 129 Log File 350 Log Inactivation 438 440 445 LOGO 429 LOG_REM 429 Logarithm 429 Logarithm Removal 429 Logarithmic Mean 400 456 Logged Docs 127 129 131 132 133 Logged Document 127 129 131 132 133 Logged Document List 127 129 131 132 133 Logged Documents 75 127 129 131 132 133 256 Logged Documents Options 75 Login 51 LOMO 411 Look Up 446 449 LOOK 446 Lower Limit 287 Lowest 403 459 LOY 411 LP 92 95 96 180 LP 387 LPs 172 LT 394 M_AVG 453 M_COMP 454 M_COUNT 454 M_COUNTH 455 M_DATE 455 M_GMEAN 456 M_MAX 456 2014 AllMax Software Inc M_MED 457 M_MIN 458 M_NTH 459 M_PCT 460 M_REM
162. 4 AllMax Software Inc 246 Operator10 Help 9 4 1 Report Data Item name Item001 Location Parameter Primary Clr 1 Depth Blnkt FT Header Primary Clr 1 Primary Clarif Depth Blnkt FT Depth of Bla Calculation Daily Values 9 value kg day loading Item001 Primary Clr 1 Depth Binkt FT Depth of Blanket g day loading Item002 Primary Clr 2 Depth Blnkt FT Depth of Blanket i lb day loading Item003 Primary Clr 3 Depth Binkt FT Depth of Blanket i 5 Item004 Primary Clr Sum Detent Time H Detention Time Use Default Custom Report 01 Custom Report uw save Preview Guidance Click template or press PageUp PageDn Report Calculations In select reports users may choose from a list of stock formulas and user written formulas for use during reporting Highlight the calculation or formula and press Select Maximum minimum average and sum formulas calculate based on daily or hourly values for the selected reporting period Lower limit options for Average Lower Limit Average Hourly Lower Limit and Avg Removal Lower Limit have been provided for reporting requirements that specify a lower limit Example lower limit of 85 for percent removal Weekly average formulas are designed to meet state reporting requirements and determine when the 7 day period begins Averages are calculated for each week in the selected reporting period and a summary valu
163. 49 Constants Editor 226 Cake 136 Contact 26 Cake BioSolid 136 Contact Time 438 439 440 445 Calculate 121 509 Container Page 155 Calculate Now 121 Containers 157 159 161 163 Calculate Utility 509 Contents 17 2014 AllMax Software Inc s Operator10 Help Contracted Weir 452 Control L P 415 Converions 519 Conversion 438 440 443 Convert 438 440 443 Copy 373 Copy As 230 Copy As Bitmap 230 Copy As Data 230 Copy As Metafile 230 Copy Graph 230 Copyright 28 Correlation 406 462 COSO 474 Cosecant 474 Cosine 473 474 Cost 118 Count 398 425 446 449 454 478 480 498 COUNT 425 Covariance 406 462 Create Calculation Parameters 139 Create Calculations 104 Create DataView 170 Create New View 153 Create Process Calculations Credits 26 CSC 474 CT 438 439 440 445 519 CTO 438 CTIO 439 CTR 440 Custom Report 259 Custom Report from DataView 259 Custom Report from DV 259 Custom Reports 259 Custom Tools 67 Cut 373 CVT 440 CYL 442 Cylinder 442 D D_AVG 398 D_COMP 398 D_COUNT 398 D_FLOW 399 D_FWA 399 104 107 D_GAUGE 399 D_GMENA 400 D_IGAUGE 400 D_IMTR 401 D_INTER 401 D_LAST 402 D_LASTN 402 D_LASTNM 402 D_LASTNN 403 D_LASTNP 403 D_LOADING 404 D_MAX 404 D_METER 405 D_MIN 405 D_NEXT 405 D_STAT 406 D_STDEV 407 D_SUM 408 D_TOTAL 408 D VAL 408 Daily 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407
164. 5 1 100 14 9 28 PWR x y x4y PWR x y x2 x to the PoWeR of y Value The value of x raised to the y power If either x or y is BLANK the function returns BLANK If both x and y are zero the function returns BLANK If x is negative and y is not an integer the function returns BLANK Examples PWR 2 3 8 3 1442 9 8596 14 9 29 RAND x RAND x RANDom value less than x Value A random value between or equal to O and the value of x If x is BLANK the function returns BLANK Examples RAND 1 52678 RAND 10 9 45988 14 9 30 ROUND x y ROUND x Value x ROUNDed to y decimal places Value The value of x rounded to y decimal places Positive y values signify places to the right of the decimal point negative y values signify places to the left of the decimal point If x or y is BLANK the function returns BLANK Values whose discarded portion is exactly 2014 AllMax Software Inc between values i e the digit 5 will round up to the next value Examples ROUND 123 456 2 123 46 ROUND 123 456 1 120 14 9 31 ROUNDE x y ROUNDE x Value x Even biased ROUNDed to y decimal places Value The value of x even biased rounded to y decimal places Positive y values signify places to the right of the decimal point negative y values signify places to the left of the decimal point If x or y is BLANK the function returns BLANK Values whose discarded portion is exactly between values i e the digit 5 wi
165. 5 334 611 202 436 447 200 382 201 636 206 011 191 266 211 491 204 698 156 313 154 929 150 064 140 560 143 760 133 954 la 4 504 ln 4 437 ja 4 571 ja 4 165 ja 4 316 545 860 370 253 551 167 539 787 521 142 520 111 488 984 351 218 338 404 248 239 280 476 259 331 254 830 155 099 559 029 1381 125 450 918 257 301 1 068 101 684 440 389 257 230 878 834 695 542 195 467 596 _ 292 101 261 062 195 182 194 928 1 005 829 668 502 620 579 617226 369 427 350 939 I Monthly intervals can be summarized as follows Sum Average Maximum Minimum Count Count 9 Sum 1875617 Avg 208402 Max 306130 Min 140232 GMean 200488 Std Dev 59826 Summary Values DataView Upper Limit 12750 e Geometric Mean e Maximum 7 Day Average 1st of Month Rule e Minimum 7 Day Average 1st of Month Rule e Maximum 7 Day Average Continuous Rule e Minimum 7 Day Average Continuous Rule e User Selected Formula Daily Values DataView Functionality For additional information the following functionality topics are available in the DataView section e Add New DataView 2014 AllMax Software Inc DataView 177 e DataView Properties Display Options e DataView Properties Column Setup e DataView Properties Column Properties e DataView Application 7 8 DataView
166. 5 SampTime 09 01 00 001 Downstream pH 441 B MethodNum 09 01 00 001 Downstream pH 09 01 00 AnalStartDate 09 01 00 001 Downstream pH 10 00 AnalStartTime 09 01 00 001 Downstream pH No Special 09 01 00 001 Downstream pH 0023 BottleNum 09 01 00 001 Downstream pH No PriorityReview import several results into the Sampling Events section of the database for Location level and Parameter level data 2014 AllMax Software Inc ste Operator10 Help 15 7 Export Data Utility Export Data Utilit The Export Data Utility allows users to create a simple export file suitable for importing into Operator10 Wastewater databases The export file is created as an ASCII text comma separated values file The file format is defined in more detail in the Import Utility help topic see Import Utility for more information Create Export File To begin creating an export file go to the Tools ribbon menu Choose the amp Export Data button to begin In the Location Parameter list that opens select Location Parameters as single or in multiple and click the x OK button Enter or select a date range from the Calendar dialog that opens and click 3 OK The Export Data Utility will process the information provided and create a data export file in the database directory The name of the export file will be named as follows OPi0Export_ date_of_export exp The export file can be opened with any text editor
167. 50 Plant Eff Flow MGD the value on January 1 2020 DATE 1 1 2020 Plant Eff Flow MGD the value on January 1 2020 DATE MOY 1 D_AVG Plant Eff BOD 5 3 7 the value calculated on the same day last month DOM x DOM x Day Of the Month offset x days Value The numeric value 1 to 31 of the day of the month for the date x days from the current date Example DOM 0 current day of the month DOW x DOW x Day Of the Week offset x days Value The numeric value 1 to 7 of the day of the week for the date x days from the current date Example DOW 0 current day of the week 2014 AllMax Software Inc 14 7 5 DOY x DOY x Day Of the Year offset x days Value The numeric value 1 to 365 or 366 of the day of the year for the date x days from the current date Example DOY 0 current day of the year 14 7 6 DVAL x DVAL j x VALue x for the julian Date j Value The numeric value x calculated for the date specified by j instead of the current date The value j may be from either a data value or the result of the DATE or VAL functions Example DVAL Raw WW TestDate Raw WW 50050 flow value for the date specified in a DataView DVAL 201108010000 Raw WW 50050 daily flow value for August 1 2011 using the AllMax Software date format YYYYMMDDHHMM DVAL VAL 01 01 2020 Raw WW 50050 flow value for January 1 2020 DVAL DATE YR 1 Raw WW 50050 flow value for
168. 7 Day First of Month or Min 7 Day First of Month from the drop down list box O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Operator10 Help Maximum Type Choose the correct maximum type for the report choose from Maximum 1 Month or Max 3 Month Avg Design Limit Enter the design limit for comparison with PE EDU calculations PE EDU Choose the calculation method by select the option PE or EDU AAA CA Parameter and Calculation Settings SYear Forecast 01 5Year Forecast 4 m r save Preview Guidance Click template or press PageUp PageDn 9 7 2 1 1 3 Additional Parameter In the Additional Parameter setup section for the 5 Year Forecast Report users can edit the following fields Additional Parameter Location Parameter Press the button to select a Location Parameter to be reported on the 5 Year Forecast Report Find the Location Parameter in the Location Parameter Picklist that appears and press the Select button Header To modify the header of the selected Location Parameter modify this field 2014 AllMax Software Inc Decimal Indicate the desired number of decimal precision to be shown on the report Calculation Type Select the type of calculation to be performed on the selected Location Parameter Select from Year Total or Year Average from the drop down list box Report Properties ii Ad crac dis Mexica lira i i rr rrror SYear Forecast 01
169. 81 45359 45359 kg lb as set in the OP10 CFG configuration file see also Constants 3 7853 3 7853 liter gal as set in the OP10 CFG configuration file see also Constants 8 34 8 34 Ib gal as set in the OP10 CFG configuration file see also Constants A ABS x ABSolute value of x ACCRUE I p x ACCRUE all values offset x months ACCUM l p x y ACCUMulate offset x months y days ACODE I p x numeric Alpha CODE offset x days ACOS x ArcCOSine of x ADD x y x y ADD x and y ALPHA ab numeric ALPHA code representation for ab AND x y x amp y if x lt gt 0 AND y lt gt 0 then 1 else O APPLY x y apply function 2 y to data in function 1 x ASIN x ArcSINe of x ASSIGN I p x y ASSIGN value y type x to location parameter ATAN x ArcTANgent of x AVG x1 x2 xn AVeraGe of all non blank values BIN x BINary value of x expressed as an AlphaCode BIT x y if BIT x of y is 1 then 1 else 0 BLANK BLANK internally stored as 3 402823466e 38 see also Constants BLANK x BLANK data BLANK no data exists C Constants ASK BLANK BEEP TRUE FALSE pi e 8 3 3 785 45359 COS x COSine of x COUNT x1 x2 xn COUNT of all non blank values CSC x CoSeCant of x CT x y z w disinfection CT Concentration Time for temp pH Cl LI CTI x y z w interpolated disinfection CT Concentration Time for temp pH Cl LI CTR x y z w Regression method disinfection C
170. 81 V_MAV 482 V_MAX 484 V_MIN 485 VAL 451 Valid 391 392 393 Valid Location Parameter 393 Value 408 423 451 Values 98 395 Var 395 Variable 347 Variables 395 449 Variance 406 462 Verify 428 434 VERIFY 434 Version 361 View 347 View List 154 View Name 154 View Ribbon 59 Views 153 Violation 287 428 434 476 477 478 480 481 482 484 485 487 489 490 491 Violation Data Functions 475 Volume 442 519 V shaped Weir 452 W W_AVG 492 W_MAXO 493 W_MIN 495 WDOM 413 Week 413 Week Day of Month 413 Week of Month 413 Weekly 447 455 492 493 495 Weekly Data Functions 492 Weekly Summary Report 292 Weir 452 WEIRO 452 Welcome 17 Windows Login 51 WOM 413 Wonderware 347 Workgroup 19 Workstation 19 Write 437 470 X X Legend Gap 234 xor 395 XOR 395 Y Y_AVG 496 Y_AVGM 497 Y_CAVG 497 Y_COUNT 498 Y_CSUM 498 Y_MAX 498 Y_MAXM 499 Y_MIN 499 Y_MINM 500 Y_RES 500 Y_SUM 500 Y_TOTM 501 Year 409 411 413 Yearly 496 497 498 499 500 501 Yearly Data Functions 496 YR 413 Z Zero 431 Zoom 236 2014 AllMax Software Inc
171. 8281828459045 as set in the OP10 CFG configuration file 8 34 8 34 Ib gal as set in the OP10 CFG configuration file 3 7853 3 7853 liter gal as set in the OP10 CFG configuration file 45359 45359 kg lb as set in the OP10 CFG configuration file Several Functions are associated with constants BLANK x BLANK ignores x SETVAR x y sets variable VARx BLANK x BLANK x BLANK BLANK returns BLANK Value The value BLANK is returned The value x is calculated but the value is ignored BLANK is defined as the absence of any valid data Examples BLANK no data value BLANK SHOW MONTH LENGTH IS LOM 0 Shows the month length but does not return a value VARO 9 SETVAR x y SET VARx variable to value y Value The previous value of the variable is returned The ten available variables are named VARO through VARO By specifying an x value of O to 9 each may be set to the value y The value y may be BLANK Variables VARO through VAR9 may be used in any formula to represent the value O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 397 Examples SETVAR 0 45 1 the previous value of VARO VARO will now be 45 1 SETVAR 2 BLANK clears the value of VAR2 RawWW 50050 VAR4 the flow multiplied by the previously set variable VAR4 14 6 Daily Data Functions Topics in this section include D_AVG I p x y AVeraGe offset x days for y days D_COMP I p x y offset x Days COMPare o
172. ALL data for the current date at ALL matching parameters of the matching location of the Facility named abc Data values which are BLANK at the Facility will be made BLANK Parameters which do not exist at both Facilities are unaffected Examples SYNC AllMax Wastewater Facility all data values of matching parameters of the current location are copied 2014 AllMax Software Inc 14 10 3TYPE xy TYPE x y Value representing the Data TYPE of value x or set the type of x to type y Value If y is BLANK the Data Type of x is returned if y is not BLANK the Data Type is set to the Data Type y and the value x is returned The value x may be a single data item or the result based on multiple data items See Data Type for additional information The Data Type is one of the following 1 1st bit set bit 0 if the result is considered a Numeric value 2 2nd bit set if the result is considered a BLANK value 4 3rd bit set if the result is considered a Less Than value lt 8 4th bit set if the result is considered an Alpha Code value 16 5th bit set if the result is considered a Greater Than value gt 32 6th bit set if the result is considered a Non Detect value 64 7th bit set if the result is considered a Time value 128 8th bit set if the result is considered a Note value 256 9th bit set if the result is considered a Date value Examples TYPE 1 23 BLANK 1 numeric data TYPE Inf Dom
173. Add Assign Location Locations can be assigned to Parameters From the Parameter list click the button that appears in the column titled Assigned Locations to begin adding the selected parameter to select locations In the Assigned Location list that appears users can begin to add locations to the list as needed Click the uM Add button to begin adding locations Once selected Location Parameter information can be edited In grid editing is 2014 AllMax Software Inc 90 Operator10 Help possible by entering data where permitted Multiple record editing is also permitted Highlight a group of records to be edited together and click the 4 Edit button to begin editing Items able to be edited include Upper Limit Lower Limit Formula Entry Type and Editable For more information see Location Parameter 4 5 1 Add Parameter Add New Parameter gt To create a new parameter click the i Add button 1 In the Parameter window that appears see image below 2 Enter a unique Parameter name or number 1 to 14 characters in the Parameter field a To view a list of Stock Parameters based on US EPA STOrage and RETrieval codes STORET and Chemical Abstracts Service CAS numbers press the button Users can add parameters from the list by selecting and clicking the 3 OK button see also Parameter STORET List 3 Enter or select the Units of measurement 1 to 16 characters Units can be
174. Adjust the Y coordinate to which you would like to offset the printed form Range Select the range in months that the report should cover Choose the range from the dropdown list box Choose Custom from the drop down and enter a number of days in the Custom Days field Sampling Events Fields Press the button to view a list of available fields from the Sampling Events section of Operator10 Wastewater Software Individually select the fields from the list when selected a check will appear by each field press Continue to add those fields to the report Edit Template Press the Edit Template button to open the List and Label Report Designer window Treat lt gt Data As Select from the drop down menu to determine the method by which data with the less than lt greater than gt or non detect data qualifiers will be treated Available options are O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Reporting 261 Preserve Types Calculations will preserve the available data qualifiers and calculated results will display the appropriate data qualifier Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 34 6 2 1 4 lt 3 as the less than symbol to be preserved for the final calculation Entered Value Calculations will drop the data qualifiers from data and calculated results will display without the qualifiers using only the numeric entered portion of the data Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 6 2 1 4 3 as th
175. Average of monthly averages may be specified by adding the additional parameter Y_AVGM l p x y z 3 14 18 3 Y_CAVG I p x y z Y_CAVG I p x Calendar Year AVeraGe of daily values for location and parameter offset x months average y Value The average of data values of a specific location and parameter for the calendar year from January through the month x months from the current month The value y is the type of average used if y is O then the average is the arithmetic mean average if y is 1 then the average is the geometric mean for fecals if y is 2 then the average is the flow weighted average When a parameter to calculate loading is specified amp or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter Y_CAVG p I_flow p_flow x y Examples Y_CAVG Effluent 50050 0 0 yearly average from January through the present month Y_CAVG Effluent 31614 1 1 yearly geometric mean through the previous month The start month of the calendar may be specified where mis the start month January is 1 add the additional parameter O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Operator10 Help Y_CAVG p x m 14 18 4 Y_COUNTI I p x y z Y_COUNT I p x Yearly COUNT of daily values for location and parameter offset x months for y months Value The count of data values of a specific location and parameter for y months beginning x months from the curre
176. Bar Data Editor Image contains hotspots click options to learn more Balloons Balloon O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Graphing a Popup Balloons are available for additional information about Graphed Data x axis Legends and the Toolbar LeftDoubleClick or Right click on Graphed data to display a Balloon showing legends and actual Data value LeftDoubleClick or Right click on x axis Legend to display a Balloon showing full legend text Right click on a Toolbar Button to display a Balloon showing a description of the Tool 8 4 Main Window Topics in this section include e Menus e Toolbars 8 4 1 Menus Topics in this section include e File menu e Graph menu e Legends menu e Window menu e Help menu 8 4 1 1 File menu Topics in this section include e Facility e Open Graph e New Graph e Close e Save Save As e Print 8 4 1 1 1 Facility Facility Go to the File menu and choose Facility to open a list of Facilities contained in the opened database Select fromthe list and press Select to open a Facility 2014 AllMax Software Inc 224 Operator10 Help Open Graph Use the File menu option and choose the Open Graph option to select a graph from the current facility 8 4 1 1 2 Open Graph Open Graph Go to the File menu and choose Open Graph to display the Graph List Highlight an existing Graph from the list and press the Select button to open the graph
177. CNT I p x y z w V_CNT I p x y Z w monthly CouNT Violation for location and parameter offset x months type y rule z limit w Value The count violation of data values of a specific location and parameter for the month x months from the current month The function uses the following parameters to determine the calculation method 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 479 y is the type of minimum if y is O then the result is a monthly or 30 day count violation if count of daily values is less than w if y is 1 then the result is a weekly or 7 day count violation if count of daily values is less than w per week if y is 2 then the result is an hourly count violation if count of hourly values is less than w per day z is the rule used for a 7 day average if z is O then the result uses a continuous or floating average if z is 1 then a week falls in the month which contains its Saturday if z is 2 then a week falls in the month which contains its Wednesday if z is 3 then the result uses the first of month for 4 weeks 28 days if z is 4 then the first of month 4th week extends to the end of the month if z is 5 then the first of month is controlled by facility option if z is 6 then only full weeks Sun Sat in the month are considered if z is 16 then the result uses a continuous or floating average but only counts violations based on unique data w is the violation limit Daily values may be considered a
178. Continue to prepare the report Date Reported B Form Date 12 11 12 9 6 3 Print Preview Print Preview shows a screen representation of printer output prior to actual printing In the Preview window there are two panes in the left pane a reduced image representing the report page to be printed is visible left click the desired report page to make it visible in the right pane In the right pane of the Preview window the report is visible The shaded area around the outside of the report represents the unprintable area of the selected printer From left to right in the Preview window use the following toolbar options to preview 2014 AllMax Software Inc 254 Operator10 Help your reports Use the lt gt lt and gt buttons to navigate through the selected previews or select from the drop down list box showing the number of pages available Zoom In or Out using the drop down list box magnifying glasses or the 1 1 buttons To print the current page press To print all pages press a To save the report press To email the report press To exit the preview press O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Reporting 255 10 22 a4aZl Aa u January 2020 December 2020 Print Date 10 11 2005 XBOD5 Ib Lett BOD5 Day20 Average Max Weelty Avg Contnwous mum Plant Efluent Plant Effuent Stream PA pH pH Standard Units Mininum Maximum Plant E fluent Plant Effuent Sream
179. DDE 343 Stat OPC 343 Statistics 406 462 Stock Parameter 91 Stock Parameter Name 91 Stop DDE 343 Stop OPC 343 Sub 398 416 417 433 454 SUB 433 Subtract 398 416 417 433 454 Subtraction 433 Sum 406 408 416 423 434 435 462 464 465 466 472 473 476 498 500 501 SUM 434 Summary DataViews 168 Summary Values DataView 175 Support 26 Support Menu 27 486 487 489 490 O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Support Ribbon 65 Suppressed Weir 452 System Properties 26 Tae Table Properties 80 TAN 475 Tangent 474 475 Tank 399 400 Technical Support 26 Text 446 Then 390 446 449 Time 49 102 366 372 386 394 451 Time Data 102 Time of Day 102 Tips 373 Titles 230 Toolbar 238 Tools 30 Tools Ribbon 63 Topic 345 Total 408 423 434 435 464 465 466 472 473 476 498 500 501 Trapezoidal Weir 452 Trigonometric 473 474 Trigonometry 473 475 Trigonometry Functions 473 TRUE 395 True False Functions 389 TRUNC 434 Truncate 432 433 434 Truncated Rounding 126 Type 257 386 447 451 455 466 TYPE 451 U Undo 373 Unfreeze 36 Units 440 Units Conversion 519 Updates 19 Upper Limit 287 Usage 399 400 Use Whole Periods 179 User Defined Parameters 139 534 Operator10 Help User Facility Security 43 User Groups 45 User Security 41 42 User Security Groups 45 User Values 151 V V_AVG 477 V_CNT 478 V_CNTP 480 V_DLY 481 V_DLYM 4
180. DataView exe IPABBRIANDESK Data Delete Data Access Plant Effluent Flow Mod DataView exe IP488RIANDESK Data Delete Data Access Plant Effluent Flow Mad DataView exe IP4SBRIANDESK Data Delete Data Access Plant Effluent Flow Mad DataView exe IP48BRIANDESK Data Delete Data Access Plant Effluent Flow Mad Operator exe IP48BRIANDESK Seat Management 1 Updated IP4GBRIANDESK brian Dineratari eve HIPARRRIGNNFSK Seat Mananement 1 NK IPARARISNDESK brian 7 The Audit Trail tracks and displays changes to the database made by all users Enabling the Audit Trail To enable the Audit Trail feature users must go to the File menu item and choose Open Database Fromthe Open Database window users can locate a Database with auditing licenses and check the checkbox in the Auditing column to turn on the Audit Trail Information Recorded in Audit Trail Available information includes e DateTime of Audit Trail record in YYYY MM DD HH MM SS format e Facility ID e User Name e Application e Workstation e Action e Description e Reason e data information e DateTime in YYYYMMDDHHMM format Daily data will have an HHMM of 0000 Location Name Parameter Name Value Previous Value 2014 AllMax Software Inc General Features 51 To find audit trail data for a period of time use the slider bars in the area above the grid Slide each bar separately to increase or decrease
181. Dn 9 7 7 BioSolids Reports Topics in this section include e BioSolids Application List Report e BioSolids Nutrient Report e BioSolids Limit Report 9 7 7 1 BioSolids Application List Report Bio App List Report The Bio App List Report BioSolids Application List Report allows users to review all applications of Biosolids for up to a 12 month period The application list report can be sorted by Date of application Biosolid type applied or Site of application There are 3 sections of the report that can be setup e General Properties e General Information e Comments 9 7 7 1 1 BioSolids Application List General Properties General Properties 2014 AllMax Software Inc 312 Operator10 Help In the General Properties section of the Bio App List Report users can modify several options including Page Adjustment and Print settings Size Enter a percentage to which you would like to reduce the printed form X Offset Adjust the X coordinate to which you would like to offset the printed form Y Offset Adjust the Y coordinate to which you would like to offset the printed form JAllow Comments Place a check in this checkbox to verify enter comments at the time of printing the Bio App List Report Order By Date Select this option to sort the App List Report by the Date of Biosolid application Biosolid Select this option to sort the App List Report by the Biosolid applied to the sites
182. EK 3 7 Type COMPOS COMP 24 9 7 Report Types Many stock report styles or types are provided within Operator10 Wastewater See the following topics for more information e Custom Reports e Annual Summary Reports e Mass Balance Reports e Limit Report 2014 AllMax Software Inc e Weekly Summary Report e Federal DMR Report e BioSolids Reports e Pretreatment Reports not available in Operatori0 Wastewater and Water Data Management Applications 9 7 1 Custom Reports Topics in this section include e Custom Report Full Custom e Custom Report From DataView e Custom Report Setup 9 7 1 1 Custom Report Full Custom Reports can be created in Operator10 Wastewater Software using the Custom Report Style There are several options available for custom reports single data values daily tables monthly tables and graphs can be added to a custom report The custom report is created by adding parameters choosing calculation and data types then editing a template in the List and Label Report Designer There are 5 sections in which the Custom Report can be defined in addition to the template e General Properties e General Information e Report Data e User Input e Comments 9 7 1 2 Custom Report From DV Custom Report from DV can be created in Operator10 Wastewater Software using the Custom Report Style There are several options available for custom reports single data values daily tables mon
183. ERpolated value fb Value The interpolated result for b where fa and fc are the known function results for values a and b Examples INTER 2 5 40 100 3 interpolated result for 3 60 14 9 15 INV x INV x INVersion of x 1 x Value The value equal to 1 x If x is BLANK or x is equal to 0 the function returns BLANK Examples INV 25 4 INV 1000 001 14 9 16 LIMIT x y z LIMIT x y z LIMIT the value x so that it is not less than y and not greater than z 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 429 Value The value x If x is less than the limit y it is increased to equal y If x is greater than the limit z it is decreased to equal z If the limit y or z is BLANK it is not used Examples LIMIT 3 14 0 10 3 14 the value is already within the limits LIMIT 3 14 10 20 10 LIMIT 240 100 BLANK 240 no upper limit 14 9 17 LN x LN x Natural Logarithm base e of x Value The natural logarithm base e of x The power of the constant e 2 718 which will equal the value x If x is negative or x is O or BLANK the function returns BLANK Examples LN 1 0 LN 3 14 1 144 14 9 18 LOG x LOG x A LOGarithm base 10 of x Value The logarithm base 10 of x The power of 10 which will equal the value x If x is negative or x is O or BLANK the function returns BLANK Examples LOG 100 2 LOG 3 14 497 14 9 19 LOG_REM x y LOG_REM x LOGarithm of REMoval x in
184. Examples 1m The first day of the following month 0m The first day of the current month 30 The day 30 days from the current day 7 The day one week ago 1m 15 The fifteenth of the following month 1m 1 The last day of the current month The day preceding the first day of the following month 3 4 2 Time Time Times are usually represented in the form HH MM where HH is an hour from 00 to 24 and MM is a minute from 00 to 59 Valid times range from 00 01 through 24 00 Time may be entered in a variety of manners Delimiters may be omitted when the entered form is IRAM Delimiters can be any of the following characters When pl delimiters the leading O may be omitted for hour or minute a m or p m may be entered immediately following the time to indicate a m or p m Examples 0201 02 01 2 1 02 01 0201p 14 01 02 01a 02 01 3 5 Audit Trail Audit Trail The Audit Trail is a secure computer generated time stamped audit trail which independently monitors operator entries and actions that create update or delete data Changes to data do not obscure previously recorded information new records are created for each event The Audit Trail also includes information on other user activity such as User login attempts opening a new Facility etc Each event recorded in the Audit Trail will consume approximately 400 bytes of storage space Auditing features require an Auditing License wh
185. F SETF 1 RAND 100 M_SUM CALC_LP 1 0 BLANK will return the sum of 30 random daily values Examples SETF 1 RAND 100 sets reference formula 1 to RAND 100 And following formulas such as LP CALC_LP 1 will now return a random number SETF 2 clears reference formula 2 14 10 28 ETVAR x SETVAR x y SET VARx variable to value y Value The previous value of the variable is returned The ten available variables are named VARO through VAR9 By specifying an x value of O to 9 each may be set to the value y The value y may be BLANK Variables VARO through VAR9 may be used in any formula to represent the value O 2014 AllMax Software Inc aso Operator10 Help Examples SETVAR 0 45 1 the previous value of VARO VARO will now be 45 1 SETVAR 2 BLANK clears the value of VAR2 RawWW 50050 VAR4 the flow multiplied by the previously set variable VAR4 14 10 2SSODA x SODA x SODA required in mg l Value The value returned is the soda ash Na2CO3 required in milligrams per liter to treat water for softening where x is the noncarbonate hardness as CaCO3 in mg l e g parameter 00902 Examples SODA Raw 00902 mg l soda required SODA Raw 00902 99 soda of 99 purity required 14 10 3 SYNC abc SYNC abc SYNCronize location with Facility abc Value The value TRUE 1 is returned if the function is successful the value FALSE 0 if not The function will copy
186. File Association Click template or press PageUp PageDn 9 7 1 3 2 General Information In the General Information setup section for the Custom Report users can edit the following fields General Information Data Report Name Enter a name for the report Facility Enter a facility name for the Limit Report The default facility name will initially be filled in modify this as necessary Report Header Enter up to 3 three lines of text to be used as a header for the report Beginning Page Enter the beginning page The Custom Report will continue to number subsequent pages if applicable Leave this field blank to use default numbering O 2014 AllMax Software Inc General Information Report Name Facility Wastewater Sample Data Report Header 911 S Main St PO Box 40 Kenton Ohio 43326 Beginning Page blank for default tem001 Plant Effuent BOD 5 LP BOD DESC Add Item002 Plant Effiuent Solids TSS Total Suspended Solic Item003 Plant Effluent Flow Mad Flow Thru Treatment f Remove Item004 Plant Effluent pH pH Standard Units Move Up Move Dn Custom Report 01 Custom Report plied r Click template or press PageUp PageDn 9 7 1 3 3 Report Data In the Report Data setup section for the Custom Report users can define the following pieces of information Items To add Items Location Parameters to be displayed on the Custom Report press the Ad
187. Graph Container in the Operator10 Wastewater Main Application open a Dashboard View and select a Page With a Page selected click the button in the ribbon to Add Container to Page and select Add Graph Container The new Graph Container will be displayed at the top left of the page and will be blank and ready for setup Unlimited Graph Containers can be added to any Page Editing Graph Container Settings Select Location Parameter To select the Location Parameter to be displayed click the V Settings button at the top right of the Graph Container window From the menu that appears choose Select Location Parameter to display the Location Parameter list Select the desired Location Parameter from the list and click the 3 OK button Perform these steps as needed to edit any Graph Container at any time Set Graph Type To set the type for the Graph Container in the first drop down menu that appears on the Graph Container choose fromthe following options e Line A connected line graph e HorizColumn A horizontal bar chart e VertColumn A vertical bar chart e Scatter A graph of plotted points non connected by a line Set Graph Data Options To set the graph data options choose from the following options in the second O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Dashboard 161 drop down menu e Hourly Use this option to graph Hourly data for a selected Hourly Location Parameter e Daily Use this option to gra
188. I p x y z D_LASTNN I p x y z D_LASTNP I p x y z w D_LOADING l p X Y iocccocconconornonnonnnnnnnnnnnonanancancas D_MAX I P X Y coooooococncccocncnnoncnnancnanncnnnnnnnannnnnnn D_METER I p X Y Z cceseceeseeeesseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeaee D_MIN 1 p X y coccoococconccccnnnncanncnannncnnncnancnnnannnannn D_NEXT I P X y oooococcoccononcnnononanononanonancnnnannnnnnn D_STAT p 1 p x y z D_STDEV I p X y eoooccoccccononnnnoncncnnnonancnanancnannnannn D_SUM I p X y s ceessceceseeeeseeeseeeseeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeaee D_TOTAL l p X y 2 cceseceeseeeeseeeeeseeesseeeeseeeeaee D VAL LED X Y soii AAA AAA A AAA AR AAA AAA L Date FUNCION AT DATE LM Di ee ad nidad DATKI j x m d y x DOM x O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 12 Operator10 Help DIA discs 411 EOM X ia 411 LEO ds 411 M DATEX yZ A aliada 412 MOY x WDOM x WOM x YR x 8 Hourly Data FUNCIONA ias 413 AN ec nay Sup sane cents dees vasa vases devas de TEETE 414 H CALC Up y Z Gi A A A AA 415 H_COMB I p I p x y 416 H_COUNT I p X y 416 H_FUNC I p x y Z mn 417 H OMEAN Ep Y dao 418 FAL UNTER EA alan 418 E MAIL Zi TRAE aaa 419 o E TA 419 FUMED ERR DIED XiV3Z i ici A AAA aane Aia 420 FAM IN IS 5XGY Z E AEE T A E E E E T 421 H_PRTPWR I p I p x y a 421 FAST DG PND SG o ti 422 H SUM Ep Xy 2 A Atheists 423 FE MAL TIED UGG Y a sa
189. INTeger value of x INTER a c fa fc b INTERpolated value fb INV x INVersion of x 1 x LIMIT x y z LIMIT make value x gt y lt z LN x Natural Log of x 2014 AllMax Software Inc Operator10 Help LOG x LOG base 10 of x LOG_REM x y LOGarithm of REMoval x in y out MAX x1 x2 xn MAXimum of all values MIN x1 x2 xn MINimum of all values MOD x y x y MODulus or remainder of x y MUL x y x y MULtiply x and y NONBLANK x NONBLANK value of x NONZERO x NON ZERO value x or blank if x is O PCT_REM x y PerCenT REMoval x in y out PREC x y value x to y significant digits PRECision PWR x y xy x to the PoWeR of y RAND x RANDom value less than x ROUND x y value x ROUNDed to y decimal places ROUNDE x y value x Even biased ROUNDed to y places SQRT x SQuare RooT of x SUB x y x y SUBtract y from x SUM x1 x2 xn SUM of all non blank values TRUNC x y TRUNCate value x to y decimal places VERIFY x y z VERIFY value x gt y lt z else blank Miscellaneous Functions ACCRUE I p x ACCRUE all values offset x months ACODE I p x numeric Alpha CODE offset x days ALPHA ab numeric ALPHA code representation for ab APPLY x y apply function 2 y to data in function 1 x ASSIGN I p x y ASSIGN value y type x to location parameter BIN x BINary value of x expressed as an AlphaCode BLANK x BLANK data BLANK no data exists CT x y z w di
190. In the Database Facility window click the arrow beside the y Add button select Create a new database 2 To create a new Database enter a Database name 1 to 20 characters and continue editing 3 Choose a License to add this Database to click the button to view the list of available licenses select a License and click the 3 OK button to choose the license 4 To enable the Audit Trail for this database place a check in the checkbox for Auditing 5 To use Metric units of measurement for this database place a check in the checkbox for Metric 6 Click the EJ Save button to create the new database O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Operator10 Help Add ce ee Create Database Facility by entering or selecting available information New Database from Backup Restore Backups created from within Operator10 can be restored as full databases m ul Add To create a new database from a backup click the arrow beside the y Add button select Add New Database From Backup In the next window that appears browse to the location of the Operator10 database backup file Click Open to begin the process In the next window that appears enter a new Database name for use in Operator10 Choose a License to add this Database to click the button to view the list of available licenses select a License and click the 3 OK button to choose the license Click the Save button
191. Inc cs Date 7 11 eDV Electronic DataView eDV Documents An eDV Document is a special electronic document representing an Operator1i0 Wastewater DataView DataViews are the spreadsheet style grids where data is entered viewed imported exported or printed Columns represent Location Parameters and Rows represent dates or summary information The default and recommended file extension is eDV which allows Windows to associate the files with the eDV Viewer An eDV Document contains only Facility Column Headers Location Parameters and a particular month s data It does NOT include Entry Limits Data Notes Alpha Code descriptions or Summaries Summaries are recalculated in the eDV Viewer See the following help topic for information on how to create an eDV export file eDV Export Options Upon receiving an eDV Document either by e mail or another method the user opens it with the associated eDV Viewer The eDV Viewer displays the data in the familiar DataView format including Headers and recalculated basic Summary information The viewer supports editing data values where the original was editable and Windows clipboard functions The eDV Document may be Saved or E mailed to another user If the eDV Viewer is on a workstation where Operator10 Wastewater is running a Transfer ribbon item is also available which transparently puts the edited data into the database using the Facility Location Parameter and Date of
192. K to continue Pp Your task is now scheduled and ready for processing with the Operator10 Agent provided that you have added the server database to the list to be processed 15 3 1 Calculation Schedule The Calculation Schedule Utility allows for users to define and manage a schedule of tasks to calculate specified Facility data The Calculation Schedule allows all formulas for a selected Facility to be calculated on a scheduled task basis with the help of the Operator10 Agent For more information see the following topics e Operator10 Agent e Scheduled Calculations 15 4 Calculate Utility Calculate Utility 2014 AllMax Software Inc sto Operator10 Help The Calculate Utility is used to perform calculations for a given database The utility can calculate all formulas or a selection of formulas based on user provided date range A Calculation Select a data range and formulas to calculate Start Date 10 22 2012 End Date 10 22 2012 O All formulas for facility Town of Montague Calculate selected formulas Calculating To perform a calculation select enter the following pieces of information e Start Date Enter the date on which the Calculate Utility should begin performing calculations Enter a date or click the button to select using a calendar e End Date Enter the date on which the Calculate Utility should end performing calculations Enter a date or click the button to s
193. LOADING Effluent BOD 5 0 0 loading value for BOD 5 at the Effluent location Assumes flow parameter exists at location D_LOADING Effluent BOD 5 Influent 3 0 loading value for BOD 5 at the Effluent location using the Influent location for Flow D_LOADING Effluent BOD 5 0 0 1 loading value for BOD 5 at the Effluent location in kilograms per day KG D 14 6 17 D_MAX I p x y D_ MAX I p x Daily MAXimum for location and parameter offset x days for y days Value The maximum of data values of a specific location and parameter for the date x days from the current date and extending for a range of y days When a parameter to calculate loading is specified amp or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter D_MAX p l_flow p_flow x y Examples D_MAX Effluent 50050 7 7 maximum of past 7 days D_MAX Effluent 50050 3 7 maximum of week beginning 3 days ago O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 405 14 6 18 D_METER I p x y z D_METER li p x y z Daily METER value for location and parameter maximum meter reading y multiplier z offset x days Value The value calculated from the positive change in meter reading at a specific location and parameter The function uses the meter data from the date x days from the current date the last data prior to that date the maximum possible whole number meter read
194. Location New Location name 2014 AllMax Software Inc so Operator10 Help 4 2 7 2 Database Utilities Table properties Table properties Information regarding the properties of data files used within the Operator10 database are provided in the Table Properties tab Information presented in the grid is for information purposes only MONTAGUE table properties Town of Montague 70 records 1 selected gt f 2 8 0 Ap File Size Number Record L Wariabl Numbe File We File Name m Table Name lt Folder ho OF CO Bes 9 5 alpha btr g 5 audit btr 9 5 bioapplp btr c allmaxwaste c allmaxwaste 35 ContainerNavDat 3 5 Containers btr 9 5 ContainerSizes btr c allmaxwaste c allmaxwaste c allmaxwaster 9 5 appear btr c allmaxwaste 3 5 apply btr 9 5 site btr c allmaxwaste c allmaxwaste 9 5 chemical btr c allmaxwaste zl 5 data btr 9 5 doc btr c allmaxwaste c allmaxwaste 9 5 dwcolumn btr c allmaxwaste 9 5 formula btr c allmaxwaste 3 5 graph btr 9 5 icon btr c allmaxwaste c allmaxwaste 3 o 2 5 1 0 o J 4 0 0 2 o o 0 o 9 5 em_actn btr 9 5 em_actns btr 3 5 em_evnts btr c allmaxwaste c allmaxwaste c allmaxwaste oo N N N w NO w w w w m 1 9 5 em data btr c al
195. Lua Laso da IA e aa a e 62 TOOIS RIDDOM a tate caved Sas cake e tls eben aaa nde el cca A a cadets aaa E A ota eee 63 SUPPOMt RIDDOM csstvcssfetesscctckeshdescvcdssensinhoeanandbancsdetsdsuasenanadcsiteuyiecsatenstesasudulsansadiaauniuedbecdadasasubscsvata EAT 65 FER e 66 Operator TO OptiONS svcsecocssssicisecseseteessectvciceawsvsseccssucsecsceesveerehceevstweasencesteevestevceuseseuselustuevcouvevvadvesssstuneerehisteaeesevenere 67 2 Data ba Sii A A E 68 Add NeW Database ia 69 AG Ne A O ON 71 Delete Database zi Delete Facility E E E AAE TET T T E A E E E E A Database TUCU iio e aeaaea reao AA AAA AAA ii 73 Database Properties aitor saccsssacesnsiescvsces e aa aar A a a a a a aa aea a parasi aei 75 Database Utilitie S siidi iiaa aaaeeeaa IA aaa Saaana a eaae a aota adada aaea 79 Database Utilitids ROME cid A Aea e a daa a oes 79 Database Utilities Table properties oooonniccinncdinnnnnnnnccooncnconccconaccnnncnnancccnnnncnnn cn cnn n cra nn cnn nn nan nrran nc cnn nn ennnen 80 Database tiliti s Rebuild Ra atau donde carl 80 Database Utilities REGIS Y daa iii 81 PERVASIVE O NO 82 A E Cendbes sees cedgeneedaccandeuedidensies E A 83 EOCAT A NN 84 AA Oca ii iia caiod 86 Delete LOCAatiON sisiitccscoteviessecsscessssersensevesecssctssiseceusecedeotecssnssecdecttetesvesssevssdyeeuetsancrcscnceseusstescvatsa sosecuaueassvectselsrvsssers 87 Standard Location ii A A SALIA AAA AA A 87 5o Par Met A encased deeteeyy 88 NN A A 90 D
196. M_AVG I p x y z w AVG offset x months type rule avg COMP I p x y offset x Days COMPare offset y days COUNT l p x COUNT of values offset x months COUNTH I p x COUNT of Hourly values offset x months DATE x y z Monthly DATE offset x months for month type y GMEAN I p x Geometric MEAN offset x months MAX l p x y z w MAX offset x months type rule avg M_MED I p x y z Monthly MEDian offset x months type y rule z M_MIN I p x y Z w MIN offset x months type rule avg M_NTH l p x y z n NTH value offset x months type y avg z n M_PCT l p x y w p PerCenTile offset x months type y avg w p M_REM l p x y Monthly percent REMoval offset x months type y M_STAT I p l p x y Monthly STATistics offset x months type y M_STDEV I p x STandard DEViation offset x months M_SUM I p x SUM of values offset x months M_SUM2 I p x y z w SUM offset x months type rule avg M_SUMH I p x SUM of Hourly values offset x months M_TOTAL I p x TOTAL offset x months avg days M_TYPE I p x y Monthly data TYPE offset x months range type y MAX x1 x2 xn MAXimum of all values MIN x1 x2 xn MINimum of all values MOD x y x y MODulus or remainder of x y MOY x Month Of Year 1 12 offset x months MUL x y x y MULtiply x and y ic el od og 3 NONBLANK x NONBLANK value of x NONZERO x NON ZERO value x or blank if x is O NOT x if x is NOT equal to O th
197. Multiple Values for entry the summarized result will be displayed here 6 records 1 selected gt PU X ZlS As Y OK Multiple Values Date 10 02 2012 Location Downstream Downstream Sampling Parameter Fecal Coliform Fecal Coliform 100ML Facility City Wastewater Plant Summary type Average 1 Result y Ed Y E El y a Image 1 Multiple Values Enter multiple single results for select parameters and summarize 2014 AllMax Software Inc Sampling Events 333 a 4 24 records 1 selected gt PU e X B A H Multiple Values Date 10 02 2012 Location Downstream Downstream Parameter pH pH Standard Units SU Facility City Wastewater Plant Summary type Hourly avg Result Image 2 Hourly Values Enter hourly results for select parameters 10 2 Add Sampling Event ADD SAMPLING EVENT To add a new sampling event click the y Add button in the toolbar A pop up window will be displayed allowing you to enter all pertinent information about the Event O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 334 Operator10 Help 3 sopa tve TTT E Include Parameters Create similar Sampling Event by modifying or selecting available information 1 selected Sample Location Type CollectMeth ADD SIMILAR SAMPLING EVENT If a sampling event that has occurred is similar to an event that has already been enter
198. N Primary 00310 Influent 00310 0 writes the Influent value to Primary and half the value to the l p where the formula is attached since ASSIGN is NOT the first function in the formula see Note above 14 10 6 BIN x BIN x The BINary value x expressed as an AlphaCode Value The value returned is the value of x expressed as an AlphaCode The maximum value is BIN 511 or B111111111 Example BIN 15 AlphaCode B1111 BIN 8 AlphaCode B1000 0b1111 the value 15 14 10 7 BLANK x BLANK x BLANK BLANK returns BLANK Value The value BLANK is returned The value x is calculated but the value is ignored BLANK is defined as the absence of any valid data Examples BLANK no data value BLANK SHOW MONTH LENGTH IS LOM 0 Shows the month length but does not return a value 14 10 8 CT x y z w CT x y z w ni n2 Disinfection Concentration and contact Time required for a particular temp pH Cl LI Value The value returned is the CT the product of the disinfection concentration C in mg l and the time T in minutes required to treat water for disinfection where x is the lowest water temperature in degrees centigrade y is the highest pH 2014 AllMax Software Inc z is the lowest disinfectant Chlorine concentration in mg l w is the Log Inactivation e g 0 5 for conventional 1 0 for slow sand The following optional parameters n1 n2 may be specified for other results
199. OTE Parameter must be left empty AND the field be enclosed using single quote A comma or tab A Sampling Event value A comma or tab 2014 AllMax Software Inc se Operator10 Help Sampling Event field name containing one of the following phrases COCNum Employee SampleType SampleNum SamplerNum CollectMeth LabCert SampTime Duration Status Comments CollPhone PwsIDNum FacCode SampPointID SampLocType Import Sampling Event Parameter Data lower level grid of Sampling Events section Each line in the data file must either be Blank A comment beginning with a semicolon or tab A data line consisting of A Date A space and a Time optional A comma or tab A Facility ID A comma or tab A Location A comma or tab A Parameter A comma or tab A Sampling Event value A comma or tab Sampling Event field name containing one of the following phrases MethodNum BottleNum PreviousNum 2014 AllMax Software Inc Utilities 517 Special AnalCompDate AnalystNumber Comments DataQuality DataQualReas DataQualReslt AnalStartDate AnalStartT ime AnalCompTime RunNum BasisCode QACode PriorityReview QCDate AnalyteCode AnalyticalLab Example 1 The following lines 09 01 00 001 Downstream 001 892111 COCNum 09 01 00 001 Downstream BGS Employee 09 01 00 001 Downstream Grab SampleType 09 01 00 001 Downstream Grab CollectMeth 09 01 00 001 Downstream 08 0
200. Operator10 Wastewater Data Management Software AlIMaX Setting Data In Motion Software Operator10 Help O 2014 AllMax Software Inc All rights reserved No parts of this work may be reproduced in any form or by any means graphic electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording taping or information storage and retrieval systems without the written permission of the publisher Products that are referred to in this document may be either trademarks and or registered trademarks of the respective owners The publisher and the author make no claim to these trademarks While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document the publisher and the author assume no responsibility for errors or omissions or for damages resulting from the use of information contained in this documentor from the use of programs and source code that may accompany it In no event shall the publisher and the author be liable for anyloss of profit or any other commercial damage caused or alleged to have been caused directly or indirectly by this document Printed May 2014 Contents 3 Table of Contents Foreword 0 Part Welcome to Operator10 Wastewater 17 Part Il Introduction to Operator10 Wastewater 19 T GotlingStarted oomioioinanin ia a a ara AARNA E ENN 19 installati n Overy Wi iii atadas 19 2 About Operator10 WasteWater oooncconnccconncionnncconnenonnnennnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnrrnnnncrnnnrennnernnnnrranernenn
201. Page Options and Features 6 1 Views Views allow the user to combine the functionality of linking to other sections of the program DataView Graphs and Reports as well as to external objects with the ability to highlight individual critical pieces of information using Data Containers Graph Containers and Gauges Through the use of Views users can create Pages to manage each of these sets of information Using Pages users can create specific pages allowing users to link directly to the data entry reporting and graphing tools of Operator10 Wastewater HotSpots can be created over plant overview background images giving life to the plant diagram Containers can also be added to Pages allowing the user to view data via raw data displays and visual gauges and graphs For more information see the following topics e Create New View e View List o Pages 6 1 1 Create New View Unlimited Views can be created to manage Pages Create New View To begin the process of creating a new View access the Dashboard by clicking the Dashboard ribbon menu item In the Dashboard ribbon locate the Create New View button and click it A new View will be created and will be blank ready for users to begin adding Pages To add Pages please see the following topics e Add Page O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 154 Operator10 Help 6 1 2 View Name Saving a View Once a View is created users should Save the View to create and name it
202. Processor information e Disk space available and total Credits Credits and technologies in use include ComponentOne TrueDBGrid v2 0 20121 61252 CLR 2 0 List amp Label v13 8 ListLabel13 dll v13 6 0 18936 1992 2008 combit GmbH Ionic DotNetZip Library v1 8 4 3 0 OPC Foundation Data Components v3 00 10102 Microsoft NET Framework 3 5 SP1 Microsoft Visual C Runtime 2008 SP1 Palm Desktop v4 1 4 Pervasive PSQL v11 and v10 Database Engine Support Technical Support is available through AllMax Software Inc For more information please see the available help topics e Support Menu e Help About e Help File Conventions 2014 AllMax Software Inc 2 3 1 2 4 Introduction to Operator10 Wastewater For more information or to renew support please contact AllMax Software Inc at 800 670 1867 or by email at go2techOallmaxsoftware com Support Menu Support Menu The Support menu in the main application toolbar displays specific help and support options available to clients who have a current support contract and keycode with AllMax Software Inc e __ Operatorl0 Wastewater File Dashboard View Setup Bio Solids Tools Support Help P B AR OKB BB A License 210246 Check For Updates Check File Versions Go2Tech AllMax Website Email AllMax View Error Log Current File Versions Contact AllMax Error Log Options available in the Support menu include e L
203. R of PaRTicle counts particle diameter X for first L P particle diameter Y for second L P H_STD I p x y Hourly STandard Deviation offset x days hour y H_SUM I p x y Hourly SUM offset x days hour y H_VAL I p x y Hourly VALue offset x days minutes y 14 8 1 H_AVG I p x y H_AVG I p x Hourly AVeraGe for location and parameter offset x days hour y Value The average of hourly data values of a specific location and parameter for the date x days from the current date If y is O the values for the entire day are used If y is from 1 to 24 a single hour is used i e y 3 for values from 02 01 through 03 00 Examples H_AVG Effluent 50050 0 0 average for the day H_AVG Effluent 50050 0 15 average for 14 01 through 15 00 H_AVG Effluent 50050 7 0 average 7 days ago O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 14 8 2 H_CALC I p x y z H_CALC I p x y z Hourly CALCulation of values x offset y days type z corresponding to an interval or Control Location Parameter Value The hourly values calculated from hourly data at times based either on a time interval or at the times corresponding to each data value of the Control Location Parameter The function uses the hourly data for the date y days from the current date It stores the result at the location parameter where the formula is attached The function then returns the Hourly Calculation as configured for the location parameter where the formula is atta
204. Read Write Town of Montague Loading Kg 7 LSolids base parameter DIW MUL LP 18 Read Write Town of Montague Loading Lb 7 LSolids base parameter DIV MUL LP 16 Read Write Town of Montague m_A4 S Air Flow LPM Air Flow LPM MUL DI MUL 159 Read Write m Facility Town of Montague Formula Name Loading Assigned To Formula Result 200 Q Functions List Function Help Date 06 07 2012 Location Parameter am Use Data from Database Default Location Parameter for Wildcards tJ 9 Use Values from Test Data Ist L P Value 200 2nd L P Value 353300 3rd L P Value 50 4h L P Value 50 Formula List Functionality The Formula list and Formula editor window have the general properties of the Grid and Grid Edit windows For more information about these sections please see the topic Grid Functionality In the Formula List users can e Add Formula e Delete Formula e Edit Formula e Calculate Add Formula Add Formula To add a new formula click the u Add button from the Formula list window 1 Enter a unique Formula Name 1 to 30 characters for each formula 2 Remarks can be entered to help describe or define the formula 2014 AllMax Software Inc no Operator10 Help 3 Formulas can be Assigned To Location Parameters by clicking the button and selecting the desired L Ps 4 Functions may be chosen from the drop down list The Fun
205. Redo button to redo recent data entries Cut Press the Cut button to cut data from the selected data cells into memory clipboard Copy Press the SE Copy button to copy data from the selected cells into memory clipboard Paste Press the US Paste button to paste data into the selected cells from memory clipboard Delete Press the X Delete button to delete data from the selected cells Fill Block Press the Fill Block button to fill the selection of cells with data from the first selected cell in a column multiple columns will be filled with values from the first selected top cell in each column individually Block Summary Press the g Block Summary button to open a pop up of dialog window displaying summarized results based on the selected cells common functions such as Sum Average Maximum Minimum and more will be displayed based on the selected cells 60 Read Block Press the Read Block button to have selected values read back to the user from the computer Add Data Press the a Add Data button to perform data entry using the Add Data dialog for the selected Location Parameter Q Review Data Press the Review Data button to Review Data in the database for the selected Location Parameter Quick Note Press the Vd Quick Note button to select from the available options of View Edit Quick Note or Print Quick Notes for the selected cells Alpha Code Press the Alpha Code button to vie
206. Relative Dates 48 Precision 431 Preferences 358 369 PreTreatment 448 Previous 401 402 403 418 Print 30 40 225 240 Print Barcode 119 Print Graph 225 Print Grid 40 Print Label 119 Print Preview 253 Print Properties 184 185 187 188 O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 532 Operator10 Help Remainder Remarks Removal Removals Remove Link 342 Remove Record 370 Rename 30 79 240 245 Rename Facility 79 Rename Facility Directory 79 Rename Formula 79 Rename Location 79 Rename Location Parameter 79 Rename LP 79 Rename Report 245 Report Calcs 246 Report Calculation 246 Report Date 253 255 Report Folder 242 250 Report Folder Icons 251 Report Folders 250 Report Guidance 250 Report Guidance Documents Report Logged Documents Report Name 245 Report Prep 240 Report Preparation Report Preperation Report Print Date Report Properties Report Setup 245 Report Types 258 Report Verification 257 Reporting 240 242 244 245 246 250 251 252 253 255 256 257 258 259 268 275 281 287 292 298 311 316 322 328 Reset Column 182 Reset DataView Column Reset DV Column 182 Residual 500 Results 98 331 Review Data 99 370 Right click 38 Right Click Menu Root 433 Round 431 432 433 434 ROUND 432 ROUNDE 433 Rounding 431 432 433 434 427 430 257 107 429 431 461 107 250 132 252 240 253 245 182 207 Rounding Rule 75 Rounding Rules 126 RSLinx 347 e S AVG 472 S
207. Ribbon The DateView Window ribbon provides access to functionality to DataView application window behaviors GY gt Operatorl0 DataView Edit Tools Windows r Arrange Windows Switch Window Arrange Windows The DataView Window ribbon provides access to functionality related to the behaviors of the DataView windows Window Ribbon functions The following options are available in the Window ribbon and are discussed as they appear in the button groups Arrange Windows e Arrange Windows Press the a Arrange Windows button and select from the drop down menu e Cascade arrange all open DataView Windows in normal overlapping windows with the current DataView window in front e Tile Horizontally arrange all open DataView Windows in tiled windows with the current DataView window at the top left e Tile Vertically arrange all open DataView Windows in tiled windows with the current DataView window at the top left Arrange Icons arrange any iconized minimized windows along the lower left of the DataView application window e Minimize All minimize all open DataView windows e Restore All restore all minimized DataView windows e Switch Window Press the L Switch Window button to select from a list of open DataView windows to switch to 7 9 6 Keyboard Shortcuts Keyboard Shortcuts The following list is a listing of available keyboard shortcuts found in the DataView section e Ctri A
208. STP E Facility Name Murrumba Downs STP Facility Name South Caboolture STP Facility Name Unitywater Reports Facility Name Woodford STP Multiple Groups The picture shown above also demonstrates the ability for users to group by multiple columns Simply drag another header into the grouping area to adda second group Grouping is sequential and listed in order Remove Grouping To remove grouping click on the A Grouping icon in the toolbar This will remove the groups and replace all columns to their most recent grid position Tools In the tools menu users can find helpful features that will aid in the use of the grid and the data presented there Press the Tools button to display the menu Default grid layout Show hide columns Auto size columns Clear grid filters 2014 AllMax Software Inc 36 Operator10 Help Default grid layout Resets the grid and columns shown to the default Operator10 Wastewater layout and content Show hide columns Shows the menu allowing users to show or hide available columns in the grid Auto size columns Resizes the columns to fit the data present in the grid Clear grid filters Removes any applied grid filters Picklist In many areas a picklist will be available to help filter and sort records based on Facility Additionally when a selection has been made in the picklist future actions may use this selection to help you create new rec
209. Solids TSS Total Suspended Solds TSS XSolds TSS lb Lett Tota Suspen 2500 00 Average Max Weekly Avg Continuous 3800 00 Maximum 5000 00 3395 46 Plant Efcenoy T restment Plant Efficiency RBOD 5 Removal BOD5 Day20 Average Lower Limit LB 85 00 5977 68 Plant E ficency Trestment Plant Efficiency PSdids TSS Rem Total Suspende Average Lower Limit 85 00 95 84 Page 1 of 1 100 Print Preview Window 9 6 4 Report Date Reports are usually printed for a particular date Report Date and are printed ona particular day Print Date A form may be printed for any Date Reported and the form may be printed with any Form Date For information on entering dates see the Date Calendar section 2014 AllMax Software Inc 256 Operator10 Help 9 6 5 9 6 6 MD DMR 01 MS DMR 01 MT DMR 01 Multi Year 01 Multi Year Annual NC DMR 01 NH DMR 01 NM DMR 01 NV DMR 01 SC DMR 01 SD DMR 01 Standard 3320 DMR Annual Standard 3320 DMR Monthly TN NMP int Calendar The Date may usually be selected from the Calendar dialog box by pressing the popup button next to the Date Use the lt and gt buttons to select the previous or next month then press the appropriate 1 to 31 day button to enter the date With a date selected click the Continue button 10 15 2012 4 October 2012 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu 30 1 2 3 4 8 9 10 16 17 18 C Toda
210. T Concentration Time for temp pH Cl LI CVT a b x ConVerT value x from abc units to def units CYL x y CYLinder volume ratio height x diameter y D D_AVG I p x y AVeraGe offset x days for y days D_COMP I p x y offset x Days COMPare offset y days D_COUNT p x y COUNT offset x days for y days D_FLOW I p x y FLOW value offset x months for y days D_FWA I p x Flow Weighted Avg offset x days for y days D_GAUCK p l p x y GAUGE value supply l p offset x days multiplier y D_GMEAN I p x y Geometric MEAN offset x days for y days D_IGAUGE I p l p x y Interpolated GAUGE value supply l p offset x days multiplier y 2014 AllMax Software Inc 382 Operator10 Help D_IMTR l p x y z Interpolated MeTeR value offset x days max meter reading y multiplier z D_INTER I p x y INTERpolate from adjacent data offset x days D_LAST l p x y LAST value not later than date offset x months y days D_LASTN l p x y average of LAST z Number of values not later than date offset x months y days D_LASTNM I p x y z Median of LAST z Number of values not later than date offset x months y days D_LASTNN I p x y z n Nth highest of LAST z Number of values not later than date offset x months y days D_LASTNP p x y z w wth Percentile of LAST z Number of values not later than date offset x months y days D_LOADING I p x y LOADING value offset x months fo
211. TE offset x months for month type y return type z Value The numeric date value offset or length for the month x months from the current month if y is O then the result uses a calendar month if y is 1 then a week falls in the month which contains its Saturday if y is 2 then a week falls in the month which contains its Wednesday if y is 3 then the result uses the first of month for 4 weeks 28 days if y is 4 then the first of month 4th week extends to the end of the month the value 5 is unused for compatibility with other monthly functions if y is 6 then only full weeks Sun Sat in the month are considered The Retum Type z is one of the following O if the result is the beginning of the month as a julian date value 1 if the result is the beginning of the month as an offset in days from the current date 2 if the result is the end of the month as a julian date value 3 if the result is the end of the month as an offset in days from the current date 4 if the result is the length of the month in days NOTE Julian dates are expressed in days since 1 1 4713 B C The resultant date may be used in further calculations using addition or subtraction with any numeric value will add a number of days to a julian date value for example M_DATE 0 2 0 7 the date one week prior to the O 2014 AllMax Software Inc as Operator10 Help start of the month using subtraction with two julian date values will return th
212. The function can also return the number of hourly values for the day or additional information about a particular hourly value can be returned if y is O add 256 to x in order to return the count of the hourly values where y is the number of the hourly value 1 is the first 2 is the second etc add 256 to x in order to return the offset in minutes of the hourly value add 512 to x in order to return the value of the hourly value Examples H_VAL Effluent 50050 1 480 value yesterday at 8 00am H_VAL Effluent 50050 7 720 value at noon one week ago 2014 AllMax Software Inc 4 Operator10 Help 14 9 Mathematical Functions Topics included in this section ABS x ABSolute value of x ADD x y x y ADD x and y AVG x1 x2 xn AVeraGe of all non blank values COUNT x1 x2 xn COUNT of all non blank values DEFAULT x y value y or DEFAULT x if y is blank DIST x standard normal DISTribution of value x DIV x y x y DIVide x by y EXP x EXPonential of x e x FACT x FACTorial of value x 1 2 3 x FIRST x1 x2 xn FIRST non blank value FRAC x FRACtional part of value x IDIST x Inverse of standard normal DISTribution INT x INTeger value of x INTER a c fa fc b INTERpolated value fb INV x INVersion of x 1 x LIMIT x y z LIMIT make value x gt y lt z LN x Natural Log of x LOG x LOG base 10 of x LOG_REM x y LOGarithm of REMoval x in y out MAX x1 x2 xn
213. Therefore the following options are possible e Use Population Standard Deviation as the numerator in calculations data values 28 30 30 32 produce a standard deviation of 1 414 This is the default method of calculation used by the Operator10 software e Use Sample Standard Deviation as the numerator in calculations data values 28 30 30 32 produce a standard deviation of 1 633 If the default method of calculation is not acceptable contact AllMax Software Inc for additional information Logged Documents Logged Documents The Logged Documents feature allows users to log versions of documents DataViews Graphs and Reports as they are printed Logged documents can be reprinted at any time as they were printed the first time 2014 AllMax Software Inc 128 Operator10 Help Facility Name Date Logged Description 196 records 1 selected gt Pa x A A z File Name CE o OOO o Logged Documents Murrumba Downs STP Comment 10 13 2011 11 23 11 22 2011 12 36 12 16 2011 08 36 01 17 2012 11 25 01 23 2012 13 41 02 12 2012 11 03 02 14 2012 15 52 02 23 2012 12 54 Brendale DERM Brendale DERM Brendale DERM Brendale DERM Brendale DERM Brendale DERM Brendale DERM Brendale DERM WMip48briandesktal ip48briandesk al ip48briandesk al Mip 8briandeskhal ip48briandesk al ip48briandesk al ip48briandesk al ip48bria
214. To Formula Result 589304400 Functions List Date 06 07 2012 Location Parameter Use Data from Database Formula e g MAX INFLOW 00310 3 7 100 Default Location Parameter for Wildcards Infuent Flow MGD 8 34 Infuent 9 Use Values from Test Data 1st L P Value 200 2nd L P Value 353300 3rd L P Value 50 4th L P Value 50 4 9 4 Internal Formulas Internal Formulas Several Internal Formulas are supplied with the application These formulas are automatically attached to appropriate parameters when Create Calculations is pressed in the Process Editor These formulas should not be modified although they may be attached to other user defined Location Parameters see also Process Formula Calculate Internal Parameters For your information the Internal Formulas are described below Formula Name example parameter example method of calculation accum_process Accumulated flow to a Process Flow MGD and calculated loadings for MGL and solids parameters to LB flow1 Flow MGD flow2 Flow MGD accum_section Accumulated flow to a Process Section Flow MGD Vol percent volatile solids Solids Vol volatile solids Solids TVSS total solids Solids TSS 100 Loading parameter in MGL or UGL to loading in LB LBOD 5 BOD BOD 5 flow Flow MGD 8 34 2014 AllMax Software Inc ma Operator10 Help Loading total solids in LB LSolids Vol tota
215. Units For both the loadings and concentrations decimal precision and units can be edited Row Setup Units Decimal Precision In the Decimal field enter the desired precision for the loadings or concentration values Units In the Units area a default unit based on the Parameter selected will be displayed Modify the units directly or select from a list of commonly used units by pressing the V dropdown list box to the right of the field 2014 AllMax Software Inc 308 Operator10 Help Quality or Concentration Row 1 Units Plant Efficiency BOD 5 LP BOD DESC Units o Ly MG L 9 7 6 1 3 5 Frequency Sample Type Each row of the Federal DMR report contains setup information required to define the Frequency of Analysis and Sample Type Row Setup Frequency of Analysis Sample Type Frequency In the Frequency area enter the Sample Measurement by entering directly into the field or selecting from a list of common measurements Enter the Permit Requirement or select from common requirements in the dropdown list box O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Sample Type In the Sample Type area enter or select the Sample Measurement from the dropdown list box Enter or select the Permit Requirement from the dropdown list box The dropdown list boxes contain common measurements available for quick selection Frequency Sample Type Row 1 Plant Efficiency BOD 5 LP BOD DESC Frequency Sample Type Samp
216. V Windows in tiled windows with the current eDV window at the top left Arrange Icons arrange any iconized minimized windows along the lower left of the eDV application window e Minimize All minimize all open eDV windows e Restore All restore all minimized eDV windows e Switch Window Press the L Switch Window button to select from a list of open eDV windows to switch to 7 11 2 Working with eDV Working with eDV This topic provides basic information for working with the eDV Viewer eDV Presentation Data is displayed in a row column format similar to a spreadsheet Columns are presented and represent the Location Parameters defined in the originating DataView in Operator10 Wastewater 2014 AllMax Software Inc 24 Operator10 Help Column Headers are provided based on the originating DataView and correspond to the Location Parameter of the values listed Columns may be resized by dragging the right edge of each Column Header Left clicking on a Column Header selects the entire column Columns which correspond to calculated Location Parameters in the original DataView shown with Red Header Text are not editable Row Labels correspond to the Date or Summary of the values listed Left clicking on a Row Label selects the entire row Left clicking on the square in the upper left corner of the grid where Column Headers and Row Labels intersect will Select All cells The Grid similar in style to a spreadsheet
217. a entered via other methods the text color of the entry should it be above the Upper Limit will be red Protected If the Location Parameter should not have data entry capabilities uncheck this option Click the button in the Recent Value column to review data for the selected Location Parameter The DataPort column display only is marked if the values are selected to be entered using the DataPort handheld unit The OPC DDE column display only is marked if the values are selected to be automatically entered via the OPC DDE Interface Application The Historian column display only is marked if the values are selected to be automatically entered via one of the available Historian Interface Applications 2014 AllMax Software Inc Main Application os 4 6 1 Add Location Parameter Add a Location Parameter gt To add a new Location Parameter to the list click the Add button to begin In the Location Parameter edit window that opens see below enter the following information 1 Facility Name The Facility name is required press the button to select a Facility from the list click the OK button to continue 2 Location Enter or select using the button to see a list of Standard Locations a Location name 3 Location Description For new Locations enter a Location Description to further describe the new Location 4 Parameter Select parameters from the Parameter List click the
218. a file name using the Explorer window that opens 4 Click Save 5 Choose from the available options e First Row is Column Headers Exports column header text as first row of data Include Summary Rows in Export Exports summary information displayed at the bottom of the DataView e Non Data in Quotes Exports non numeric data in quotes for text handling e Data in Quotes Exports numeric data in quotes e lt gt Exported with Qualifier Exports qualifying symbols less than lt greater than gt and non detect with data 1 Click 9 OK Excel Export Options When exporting data using the Excel format the process is as follows 6 From the Tools ribbon click the Export button 7 From the Export menu choose Excel 8 Select a file location and enter a file name using the Explorer window that opens 9 Click Save XML Text Export Options When exporting data using the XML Text export option the process is as follows 10 From the Tools ribbon click the Export button 11 From the Export menu choose XML Text 12 Select a file location and enter a file name using the Explorer window that opens 13 Click Save O 2014 AllMax Software Inc DataView 207 7 10 8 Freeze Columns Freeze Columns Columns can be temporarily moved to the left side of the DataView and be locked in place while scrolling Any number of columns can be frozen as needed Columns can be unfrozen once set or upon clos
219. a specific Location Parameter at a specific date and time Date values may range from 01 01 1900 to 12 31 9999 Any entry containing a Slash is a Date value Enter a leading slash for date formats which do not contain the slash character for example 7 Displayed dates for United States users are usually represented in the form MM DD YY where MM is a month from 01 to 12 DD is a day of the month from 01 to 31 and YY is the last two digits of the year from 0 to 99 Valid dates range from January 1 1899 through December 31 9999 Dates for International users are dependent on Windows settings Date values used in calculations and DataView summaries will be treated as the number of days represented actually the number of days since 01 01 4713 BC The result itself is usually a Date value Useful summary information is therefore limited to average maximum or minimum 4 7 3 4 Greater Than Greater Than Data Values Greater Than data values are stored at a specific Location Parameter at a specific date and time Greater Than values may range to 1 0E16 Any entry beginning with a Greater Than gt is a Greater Than value A Greater Than value used in calculations DataView summaries and reports will be treated in one of four ways Blank no data Zero Twice the Entered Value Entered Value or Preserve Greater Than 4 7 3 5 Less Than Less Than Data Values Less Than data values are stored at a specific Location
220. able for entry in the Site Detail Editor Site Address County Soil Texture Slope Restrictions Remarks Approval No Date Latitude Longitude Set Aside Start Date Distance Distance Map Number Click the 13 OK button to save any data entered O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 144 Operator10 Help 5 3 Site Owner BioSolids Owner The Site Owner list displays all defined BioSolid Site Owners and details for each Owners can be assigned to Sites for management and tracking purposes 1 record 1 selected XZ S Ap Site Owner List Facility Name South WWTP Facility Name lt Owner Name Address Assigned Location Contact Name Phone Contract Date Full Name Contact Address Contact Phone Comments The BioSolid Site Owner List displays all site owners and related information Accessing the Owner List Go to the BioSolids ribbon and choose 2 Owner List to open the Owner List Assigned Location In the Site Owner list to show all sites which belong to the current Owner press the button in the Assigned Location column A list of assigned Sites will be displayed Add Site Owner gt To add a new Site Owner click the k Add button to begin O 2014 AllMax Software Inc BioSolids 145 Facility Name Owner Name Address Contact Name Phone Contract Date Full Name Contact Address Contact Phone Comments x Press the button to open and select a Facility from
221. aina ia 250 Report Folder Icons midi i 251 6 Report Preparation niriana ccd deck docs seeded cee a a a E acs ved a N ara seth 251 Print Re port csccsssecccccscciescescecsicevasscssnceccucccesasebuccsastcedescecepneeusivctcetessesreustusvecsedenscesssedscusebusvenstvesendedecerevetishucteusvers 252 Print Date a is 253 Print Pre Vie W ci A dos 253 Report Date iii ais 255 Calendari AAC O O A eee 256 Logged DOCUM CIES viii A ti 256 Report Verify T Report Types siii a a CUSTOM A O Custom Reports Full iaa la AA AAA ee Custom Report From D Vision AREA IAS A e A O G n ral POPE cimil A A IA Ai es General TOMAN anra a ata IO aa EA givers Report Data AAA a cision ERA A a EEES USCFINDUE radiata COMMONS cui do bate Aina a Annual Summary Re ports iscssccccccscedsccissecsvesstevececascecccccscsssctvansevesevevenscndssdcovcceidvecvsdicevesatevscucnstsdcsvetessecnssusevecseavs 5 Year Forecast Report Y Gar Orca UP ii ale ese Sloane General PropertieS voii A A ayn bila ia hare Parameter and Calculations 0 cccesceesceeseeeeeceeeeeeeereceeceeeaeesaeesaeeeaeeeaeseeeeeeesneeseeeseneseeesereeieeenreeates Additional Parameter ivi Aeon da PE EDU and Industry Projections Comments ai doi Mult Year Summary Repo di iii AAA aie Aa A Ai aes Multi Y ear Summary Setup uni A A A Adra General Properties ici ainia beta di dido Parameters ari AA tada Summary ColUnMS aa A A AN Comments cad en a eed Rae ae adele Mass Balance R
222. al of data values of a specific Efficiency Process and parameter for the month x months from the current month The location must either be an Efficiency Process location or the effluent location for an Efficiency Process y is the type of calculation if y is 1 then the result is the average of daily percent removals of loadings mass if y is 2 then the result is the percent reduction of the average of daily concentrations if y is 3 then the result is the average of daily percent reductions of concentrations if y is 4 then the result is the percent removal of the average of daily loadings mass The number of months may be specified where mis the number of months add the additional parameter M_REM p x m NOTE The parameter may be a concentration parameter 00310 etc or any internal parameter based on that parameter L00310 P00310 etc the correct parameter will be found during calculation NOTE If an effluent location is specified the first Efficiency Process with an effluent location which matches will be used for calculation When a parameter to calculate loading is specified amp or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter M_REM I p l_flow p_flow x y 2014 AllMax Software Inc 462 Operator10 Help Additionally an influent and effluent Location Parameter may both be specified that would allow the function to retur
223. alues Examples ISGREAT Effluent 50050 0 1 if a Greater Than value otherwise O ISGREAT Effluent 50050 1 1 if the previous day contained a Greater Than value 14 4 13 ISHR I p ISHR I p If l p IS set for HouRly data entry then TRUE Value If the location parameter is set up for hourly data entry the value TRUE 1 is returned Otherwise the function returns FALSE 0 Examples ISHR Effluent 00400 1 ISHR Effluent Daily 0 14 4 14 ISLESS I p ISLESS I p x If the value offset x days IS a LESS than value then TRUE Value If the value of a specific location and parameter for the date x days from the current date is a Less Than value the value TRUE 1 is returned Otherwise the function returns FALSE 0 The function considers only Less Than values it ignores data Alpha Codes Greater Than or Non Detect values Examples ISLESS Effluent 50050 0 1 if a Less Than value otherwise O ISLESS Effluent 50050 1 1 if the previous day contained a Less Than value 14 4 15 ISLP I p ISLP If l p IS a valid Location and Parameter then TRUE Value If parameter p is a valid parameter for location the value TRUE 1 is returned Otherwise the function returns FALSE 0 Examples ISLP Effluent 50050 1 ISLP Effluent No Way 0 O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 394 Operator10 Help 14 4 16 ISND I p x ISND I p x If the value offset x days IS a Non Detect value
224. alues of a specific location and parameter for the month x months from the current month see also Standard Deviation in the main Synexus application The number of months may be specified where mis the number of months add the additional parameter M_STDEV I p x m When a parameter to calculate loading is specified amp or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter M_STDEV p I_flow p_flow x Examples M_STDEV Effluent 50050 0 standard deviation of present month M_STDEV Effluent 50050 1 standard deviation of previous month 14 11 11M_SUM I p x M_SUM I p x see also M_SUM2 Monthly SUM for location and parameter offset x months Value The sum of data values of a specific location and parameter for the month x months from the current month The number of months may be specified where mis the number of months add the additional parameter M_SUM I p x m When a parameter to calculate loading is specified amp or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter M_SUM I p I_flow p_flow x Examples M_SUM Effluent 50050 0 sum of present month M_SUM Effluent 50050 1 sum of previous month O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 465 14 11 1M_SUM2 I p x y z w M_SUM2 I p x y Z w see also M_SUM Monthly
225. ame Enter the name of the facility Address Enter the address of the reported facility The default address from the selected facility will initially be entered modify this as necessary Facility Enter a facility name for the Limit Report The default facility name will initially be filled in modify this as necessary Location Fill in the location field if necessary Attn Fill in the Attn field to be displayed on the report Permit Number Enter the permit number for the reported facility O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 302 Operator10 Help Discharge Number Enter the discharge number for the reported facility Form Title Enter a formtitle to be displayed on the report Header Enter up to 4 four lines of text to be used as a header for the DMR Page of Enter the starting page and the final page Permit Number OH 12345 Address Discharge Number 911 S Main St 001 A Kenton Ohio 43326 Form Title MAJOR Header SUBR 05 F FINAL EFFLUENT X ca O O E E l Standard 3320 DMR Monthly Standard 3320 4 m gt Save Preview Guidance Click template or press PageUp PageDn 9 7 6 1 3 Rows Report Rows The report contains 7 rows available for reporting different location parameters per page Each row has 9 setup sections e Parameter e Quantity or Loading Row x Avg e Quantity or Loading Row x Max e Quantity or Loading row x
226. ampling Events Topics Additional Sampling Events topics include e Sampling Event Detail e Add Sampling Event e Delete Sampling Event e Print Sampling Event 10 1 Sampling Event Detail SAMPLING EVENT DETAIL In the lower portion of the Sampling Event window the Parameter level information will be displayed Parameters assigned to the Location of the selected Sampling Event are displayed automatically In this area users may enter results and testing information as it pertains to the selected parameter s Data Entry There are three possible types of data entry permitted for Location Parameters in the Sampling Event program 1 Multiple Values For results that require more than a single daily value to be recorded multiple value entries can be made Location Parameter setup will dictate which option is available but 2 options exist 1 Mulitple Daily Values For Location Parameters that are set for Daily Data Entry multiple values can be entered and summarized as a single daily result as chosen by the user See Image 1 below 2014 AllMax Software Inc 332 Operator10 Help 2 Hourly Values For Location Parameters that are set for Hourly Data Entry hourly values can be entered and summarized as a daily result as selected in the Location Parameter setup See Image 2 below 2 Result For a daily value enter the result in this column For Location Parameters that are set for Hourly Data Entry or that have used
227. an be modified by selecting one or more records on the right side of the User Security screen For individual modifications users can use the drop down menu to choose fromthe available options For multiple L P selections users may use the Multi Edit functionality to make changes en masse The following is a legend for the various security options e Default Applies inherited setting from User Security setting Default L P Security e View Only Allows users to see data read only access e Data Entry Allows users to enter modify data e Edit L P Allows users to enter modify data AND edit Location Parameter details 3 3 4 Groups User Group Security To aid in the creation of facility specific permissions for a user access the User Security section of Operator10 go to the File menu and select Security and click on the Groups Tab The Groups tab contains settings to enable or disable specific sections of the Operator10 program based on the selected record or current facility Users can be assigned to a group in the Facilities tab when creating User Facility permissions Default groups have been created and are ready for use within Operator10 Security e Denied Denies user access to modify any section of Operator10 users in this group cannot access or use any feature of Operator10 e Full Permits user to access modify and delete data from any section of Operatori0 users in this group have full access e Restricted Permit
228. anner Scanner e Open the OP10 DataPort Main Window e If BarCodes do not include an AutoSelection Digit when scanning a Facility Location or Parameter or if scanning a Data Value tap to place the cursor in the appropriate field e Press either scanner trigger button to begin the scan When a good scan is received the DataPort will beep and display a green light Otherwise the scan will time out and the No Scan message will be displayed Entering data is as simple as 1 2 3 1 Scan a Location Parameter BarCode use the default Date and Facility 2 Enter the Data value from the popup KeyPad or by using graffiti 3 Press the Save button CAUTION Laser Light Do Not Stare Into Beam 630 680nm Laser 1 0 mW Max Output Class II Laser Product 2014 AllMax Software Inc Operator10 Help Text Formats Code 128 recommended for most users Code 39 Code 3 of 9 Code 93 Numeric Formats Bookland EAN Codabar Coupon D25 EAN JAN 8 EAN JAN 13 Interleaved 2 of 5 ISBT 128 MSI Plessey Trioptic 39 UCC EAN 128 UPC A UPC E UPC E1 13 4 15 Shortcuts Shortcuts Graffiti Command A About Dialog Command C Copy Command D Remove Record Command F Preferences Command G Graffiti Help Command P Paste Command R Review Data Command sS Select All Command T Tips Command U Undo Command X Cut 13 4 16 Time Time O 2014 AllMax Software Inc DataPort 373 e If hourly data entr
229. arameter the parameter name 1 to 16 characters required for DATA MONTH HOUR FORMULA Topics illegal for others date the date in any valid format optional but required by time see also Date If the lt prefix is used the previous day s date is substituted If the date is omitted the current system date is assumed time the time in any valid format optional but requires date see also Time If the lt prefix is used the previous hour is substituted If the prefix is used the whole hour is substituted For example 02 01 through 03 00 is considered as 03 00 If the hour is 00 00 the current system time is assumed For example Item AllMax WasteWater Sample Data Inf Dom 00400 01 02 10 08 00 would retrieve houny data from 01 02 2010 at 8 00am from Location Parameter Inf Dom 00400 of the AllMax WasteWater Sample Data Facility Or use AllMax WasteWater Sample Data Inf Dom 00400 01 02 10 for the daily value or AllMax WasteWater Sample Data Inf Dom 00400 to receive the daily value for today s current date Or use AllMax WasteWater Sample Data Disinfection Process to receive all the daily values for the DataView using the current month Note that each major portion of the Item is separated by the character and no additional spaces are introduced other than between the date and time The Item is not case specific To retrieve OP10 data values in Microsoft Excel for example the format for a cell wo
230. arameters for the DataPort 1 Installing the HotSync Software on a Workstation Install the 3Com HotSync support software according to the provided instructions If this is the first time you have installed the software enter the name that will be used to identify the DataPort handheld unit 2 Installing the OP10 HotSync Support HotSync conduits provide data exchange capabilities between the DataPort handheld and the Operator10 Wastewater main application In the Operator10 Wastewater main application select the Setup ribbon menu DataPort group Y Setup icon and choose Install HotSync Support menu item If the HotSync Manager is already loaded in the workstation s system tray it must be restarted for the new support to take effect 3 Installing Software into the DataPort The DataPort handheld data entry unit available from AllMax will usually have Operator 10 software preinstalled Additionally the same software can be used on 3Com PalmOS compatible PDAs but without scanning capabilities If you need to install or reinstall the software into a handheld unit follow these steps In the Operator10 Wastewater main application select the Setup ribbon menu DataPort group Setup icon and choose Install Operator10 software into DataPort menu item If more than one handheld is used on the workstation select the appropriate Username when requested Press the Done button in the confirmation dialog Note that the software
231. arrow on the right side to select from a special option This option is not present in all grids but when available will be a selection in the menu Delete When available records can be deleted from the grid Users can select or multi select records to be deleted from the available rows of the grid Click the x Delete button to remove Users will be prompted to confirm the deletion of the selected record s to complete the delete process Edit In Grid Editing To edit records contained in the grid users can either enter text directly into blank cells or for cells with existing data double click the cell or press the F2 key and begin the edit process Once editing is complete navigate away from the selected cell using the Tab Enter or Arrow keys to automatically save changes Edit Window To edit records in a form based editor click the A Edit button to display the Edit window to make changes Click the Save button to save any changes made Multi edit For users who desire to change multiple records at a time while multiple records have 2014 AllMax Software Inc 32 Operator10 Help been selected in the grid clicking the Es Edit button will allow users to change data for the selected record s Any available fields for editing will shown in the Edit window Additionally the fields available for editing will vary depending on the section of the program 8 selected Facility Name Location Locat
232. as the less than symbol will be dropped for the final calculation Half Entered Value Calculations will drop the data qualifiers from data and calculated results will display without the qualifiers using one half the entered value of the data Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 64 1 1 4 2 75 as the less than symbol is dropped and 2 is divided in half for final calculation Zero Calculations will drop the data qualifiers from data and calculated results will display without the qualifiers using zero 0 in place of any entered data Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 6 0 1 4 2 5 as the less than symbol is dropped and 0 is used in place of lt 2 for the final calculation 2014 AllMax Software Inc ss Operator10 Help e Blank no data Calculations will drop the data qualifiers from data and calculated results will display without the qualifiers treating data entered with qualifiers to be seen as blank Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 6 1 3 3 333 as the less than symbol is dropped and no data is used in place of lt 2 in the final calculation Add Remove Treat lt gt Data As Move Dn Allow Export Data As Print List Bio Nutrient 01 Bio Nutrient View With 4 Lom Windows File Association Save Preview Guidance Click template or press PageUp PageDn 9 7 7 2 2 BioSolids Nutrient Report General Informat
233. ataView Print Properties Margin section users can define options related to printing the selected DataView Changes to the Margin options will affect the current open DataView only and be saved independently from other DataViews eE Properties DataView Properties Column Setup Column Properties DataView Options E Page Margins inches i Header Footer Top Right Bottom Left DataView Properties Margin Margin Options The following Margin options are available Margins inches e Top Enter or set using the up and down arrow controls a numeric value in inches to define the top margin for the printed DataView 2014 AllMax Software Inc Operator10 Help e Right Enter or set using the up and down arrow controls a numeric value in inches to define the right margin for the printed DataView e Bottom Enter or set using the up and down arrow controls a numeric value in inches to define the bottom margin for the printed DataView e Left Enter or set using the up and down arrow controls a numeric value in inches to define the left margin for the printed DataView Center on Page e Horizontally Check the checkbox to center the printed DataView on the page horizontally 7 8 4 4 DataView Print Properties Header Footer DataView Print Properties Header Footer In the DataView Print Properties Header Footer section users can define options relate
234. ater INHG inches of mercury PSI pounds per square inch KGCM2 kilograms per square centimeter BAR bars a Operator10 Help KM3D thousand cubic meters per ATM atmospheres day CFS cubic feet per second MGD million gallons per day temperature units numeric units any other unit may be converted such as CVT G MILLI 20 for grams to thousandths DK degrees Kelvin PICO trillionths DC degrees Centigrade NANO billionths DF degrees Fahrenheit MICRO millionths MILLI thousandths CENTI hundredths DECI tenths UNIT ones blank ones DEKA tens HECTO hundreds KILO thousands MEGA millions GIGA billions TERA trillions Examples CVT CM IN 20 20 centimeters converted to inches 7 87 CVT IN CM 20 20 inches converted to centimeters 50 8 CVT IN CM conversion factor of inches to centimeters 2 54 14 10 1 CYL x y ee E O A CY Linder volume ratio height x diameter y Value The value returned is the ratio of a partially filled cylindrical tank or pipe where x is the height of the liquid and y is the diameter of the tank Examples CYL 2 10 ratio for a 10 ft diameter cylinder filled 2 ft deep 2014 AllMax Software Inc 14 10 1 FAC abc x FAC dbname abc x Value x from Database named dbname and FACility named abc Value The data value from another Facility from a database The Facility specified MUST be set to Allow Sharing of Facility Data in its Facility Options See additional help in
235. ation Parameters for the report which displays a month s worth of data broken into weekly summary periods allowing for users to see the Weekly Maximum and Minimum Month types are selected to define how the weekly periods are defined and what data is to be used in reporting Setup options for the Weekly Summary Report include e General Properties e General Information e Parameters e Comments 2014 AllMax Software Inc 9 7 5 1 Weekly Report Setup Topics in this section include e General Properties e General Information e Parameters e Comments 9 7 5 1 1 General Properties In the General Properties setup section for the Weekly Summary Report users can edit the following fields Page Adjustment and Print settings Size Enter a percentage to which you would like to reduce the printed form X Offset Adjust the X coordinate to which you would like to offset the printed form Y Offset Adjust the Y coordinate to which you would like to offset the printed form JAllow Comments To enter comments at the time of printing check the Allow Remarks checkbox Month Type Select from the drop down menu to determine the method by which weekly periods will be defined Available options are e Continuous Floating Data is averaged for several overlapping 7 day periods beginning with the first of the month and continuing each consecutive day of the month until a period reaches the end of the month Saturd
236. ation entered click the 3 OK button to save the HotSpot Editing a HotSpot To edit a HotSpot right click on the HotSpot and choose Edit HotSpot from the right click menu This will open the HotSpot Editor see above for more information Deleting a HotSpot To delete a HotSpot right click on the HotSpot and choose Delete HotSpot from the right click menu This will delete the HotSpot 6 1 4 2 2 Add Container Containers allow users to see data based on a selected Location Parameter as a data table or graphically like a gauge or graph Additionally a navigation container is available to display links to external files On any Page users can create modify and remove selected containers Adding Containers To begin click the Add Container to Page button and select from the following e Add Data Container See the following topic for more information Data Container e Add Gauge Container See the following topic for more information Gauge Container e 4 Add Graph Container See the following topic for more information Graph Container e Add Navigation Container See the following topic for more information Navigation Container 6 1 4 2 3 Containers Containers allow users to display data in a graphical way as well as it appears in the database A container type option is also available to display links to external files Topics in this section include e Data Containers e Graph Containers e
237. ax Software Inc 14 Operator10 Help 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 MPO T PUD G3 WP cid A ini M REM LDU XG iii AIRE M_STAT I p l p x y M_STDEV I p x MN SSSUM at M_SUM2 I p x y z w M SUM A ii M TOTAL UD X iii li M_TYPE I p x y OPG DDE FUNCtionis sii scc is tece rete a id DDE al DCs x ii ia ic DDE Pl al DIC XG y iccesseccevesscscnsesonsacecevsseaceastecvaccusvesseateiziguesdesicenssdsssesevesesssoindspavessnaeessiucuactesdasisabsizscnestenaieveetdavesexereis DDE_X alb c x OPC a b c x OPC_W a b c x y Process Section Data Functions unicidad iia 471 ACCUM I p x y S_AVG I p x ETE Quaterly Data FUNCHONS cicatrices 472 ACES MOE Ene 472 SUM Pida ca 473 Trigonometry FUNCtONS ciicoconci acarr ctees see aiaiga nosiad aistia sees caida naaadik saiua niani ipatti 473 ACOS x ASIN x ATAN x cos x CSC x SEC x SIN x TAN x Violation Data FUNC ONS i uan cis E SUM lp X3Y Z WV saisecsscecsscesecsssssnteccccccssasesuscenstcedescecesncensivetectessuecensiseseavessnavesssecsecucsdusrenstvedendecensverivestereusvers VEAV G UP IX5V 52 Wi coccion di Ai AAA A AAA E A is aida VMOCNT EPLAY ZW Discordia V_CNTP I p x y z w V_DLY I p X y Z W ooccocccccconnnnnnno V_DLYM p x y z w V MAV LIP K V Z W V sectseccsnsicececaseeccancicccvevesncsveiwsusssadexssvcencevececussssecennsactecdanseecouedcsctevssatevesestessedencvecsschvesd
238. ax Software Inc 306 Operator10 Help 9 7 6 1 3 3 Concentration Three fields Minimum Average and Maximum for the calculation of concentrations are available the process is exactly the same for both the Minimum Average and Maximum fields Row Setup Concentration Minimum Average Maximum Press the button to select the desired calculation type for the selected report The available calculations are reviewed on the Calculations help file page Permit Enter the permitted limit into the first field in the Permit area This number can be alpha or numeric based If numeric the calculated value will be compared to the value entered and an exception if found will be reported In the dropdown list box select a description for the type of calculation that is reported for the row Alternate Text In the event that there is no data or the field is unused enter text to be displayed The default will be entered as set in the Federal DMR General Properties settings Additionally if a detection limit is needed and if the calculated value is below the detection limit alternate text should be shown enter the comparison value in the If Less Than field and the alternate text into the Text field O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Quality or Concentration Row 1 Avg Plant Efficiency BOD 5 LP BOD DESC Average B Permit REPORT MO AVG Altemate Text Unused Or No Data Text F Less Than Text 9 7 6 1 3 4
239. ay Rule Data is averaged for 7 day periods beginning on Sunday and extending though the following Saturday Periods are considered to be in the month containing the Saturday of the period Wednesday Rule Data is averaged for 7 day periods beginning on Sunday and extending though the following Saturday Periods are considered to be in the month containing the Wednesday of the period First of Month Data is averaged for three 3 7 day periods beginning with the first day of the month and a fourth period extending to the end of the month Full Weeks Only Data is averaged for 7 day periods beginning on Sunday and extending though the following Saturday Periods are considered to be in the month only if the entire period is in the month Any additional days are ignored Treat lt gt Data As Select from the drop down menu to determine the method by which data with the 2014 AllMax Software Inc 294 Operator10 Help less than lt greater than gt or non detect data qualifiers will be treated Available options are Preserve Types Calculations will preserve the available data qualifiers and calculated results will display the appropriate data qualifier Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 34 6 2 1 4 lt 3 as the less than symbol to be preserved for the final calculation Entered Value Calculations will drop the data qualifiers from data and calculated results will display without the qualifiers usin
240. ay period Click Next Enter the Pervasive key code as provided and click Next Upon successful activation the installation will be complete Click Finish to return to the AllMax Software installation Updates Follow these instructions to setup install and apply program updates to existing installations of the AllMax operations programs Updates are normally provided through a web download for both the Server and Client installation 1 Download the file from the AllMax Software web site http www allmaxsoftware com downloads to the machine that you wish to apply the update 2 Locate the downloaded update file and run by double clicking 3 Click Next to proceed with the update process 4 Upon completion and upon opening the application for the first time the database may need to be updated to the latest version A prompt will be provided when the AllMax program is opened Follow the prompts provided to complete 5 Updates will need to be applied to all computers using the AllMax programs Support Information For more information on additional installation options or help with the installation process please contact AllMax Software technical support at 800 670 1867 or 2014 AllMax Software Inc 22 Operator10 Help 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 go2tech allmaxsoftware com or online using our go2tech remote technical support tool About Operator10 Wastewater Topics in this section discuss the following features and
241. ay process one file at a time as desired utilizing the Import Browse functionality Go to the Tools ribbon menu choose Import Export Data group and choose Browse for Import File s to browse for selected file s for import into the database NOTE Import Browse will allow users to select files matching the defined or default file extensions as found in the Database Properties section 15 6 1 Import Sampling Events Data Import Sampling Events Data The ImportuUtility exe application can be used to import data into the Sampling Events sections of the database Data can be imported for the Sampling Event Location and Parameter sections respectively Importing Sampling Events data makes use of the data import process with some adjustments to each line to be imported See the Import Utility help topic for information on Default Usage and Custom Usage of the data import process Data Import File Structure Importing data as Sampling Events data requires each line to be slightly modified The following information is provided as a guide to correctly import Sampling Events data Import Sampling Event Location Data top level grid of Sampling Events section Each line in the data file must either be Blank A comment beginning with a semicolon or tab A data line consisting of A Date A space and a Time optional A comma or tab A Facility ID A comma or tab A Location A comma or tab A Parameter field of N
242. ble the process is exactly the same for both the Average and Maximum fields Row Setup Loading Average Maximum Press the button to select the desired calculation type for the selected report The available calculations are reviewed on the Calculations help file page Select the type of data to be reported value e kg loading e g day loading O 2014 AllMax Software Inc e Ib day loading Permit Enter the permitted limit into the first field in the Permit area This number can be alpha or numeric based If numeric the calculated value will be compared to the value entered and an exception if found will be reported In the dropdown list box select a description for the type of calculation that is reported for the row Alternate Text In the event that there is no data or the field is unused enter text to be displayed The default will be entered as set in the Federal DMR General Properties settings Additionally if a detection limit is needed and if the calculated value is below the detection limit alternate text should be shown enter the comparison value in the If Less Than field and the alternate text into the Text field Quantity or Loading Row 1 Avg Plant Efficiency BOD 5 LP BOD DESC Average verage value kg day loading g day loading gt lb day loading Permit REPORT MO AVG Altemate Text F Unused Or No Data Text Ff Less Than Text 2014 AllM
243. bon menu system to display options and features For more information see the following topics related to the individual ribbons menus e File e Home e Edit e Tools e Window Additionally the DataView Application makes use of the following features of the Main Application e Quick Access Toolbar e Windows Theme 7 9 1 DataView File Menu DataView File Menu 2014 AllMax Software Inc Dataview 191 Interval Show All Hourly Date Range Hourly Options O DataView Help of Close DataView Ext Application lt 0 050 The DataView File Menu provide users with access to the following options e Open Database Provides the user with the ability to open a specific Database from the Open Database Facility picklist e Logged Documents Opens the Logged Documents list e DataView Help Opens the DataView Help File e Close DataView Closes the current DataView e Exit Application Exits the DataView application 7 9 2 DataView Home Ribbon DataView Home Ribbon The DateView Home ribbon provides important access to key features and primary functionality of the DataView application Home Tools Windows A E sv core E a Qe AO Open DataView New DataView Save Properties End Date 05 31 2013 _ Y mo Quick Dates Refresh Intemittent Resize Columns Calculate Print DataViews Properties Date Range Display Options Calculations Printing The Da
244. browser window that opens select the appropriate image file JPG PNG and BMP files and the selected image will display as the background image Delete Background Image To delete the background image for the selected Page press the x Delete Background Image button This will delete the background image Image Placement To choose the placement of the background image use the drop down menu to select from the available choices Options include e Top Left Corner e Centered on Page e Fit to Page Size Background Color To set the color of the background press the button and user the color picker to choose a background color HotSpots The following HotSpot options are available for each Page HotSpot Color To set the color of the border for the HotSpots displayed on the selected Page press the button and user the color picker to choose a background color Outline Width To set the width of the border lines for the HotSpots displayed on the selected Page use the slider to choose the appropriate thickness Show HotSpots To display the HotSpots for a Page place a checkbox in the Show HotSpots option 2014 AllMax Software Inc 168 Operator10 Help 7 DataView DataViews are the spreadsheet style grids where data is entered viewed imported exported or printed Columns represent Facility Location Parameters and Rows represent dates or summary information DataViews may be setup with var
245. button to see the Parameter list click the OK OK button to continue 5 Units Enter the unit of measurement for the selected Location Parameter or choose from the drop down menu 6 Decimal Enter the desired default number of decimal places to be displayed 7 Entry Type Select the data entry type for the Location Parameter for more information see the Location Parameter Entry topic 8 Lower Limit Enter the lower data entry limit for the Location Parameter warnings will be displayed when values exceed the entered limit value 9 Upper Limit Enter the upper data entry limit for the Location Parameter warnings will be displayed when values exceed the entered limit value 10 Formula If the Location Parameter is to be calculated select the desired formula from the Formula List click the button to view and select from the list of available Formulas 11 Protected Check the checkbox for Protected if the Location Parameter should not allow for data entry Click the E Save button to create the new Location Parameter O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 96 Operator10 Help 4 6 2 4 6 3 Facility Name Location Location Description Parameter Parameter Description Units Decimal Entry Type Lower Limit Upper Limit Formula Protected Delete Location Parameter Delete Location Parameter Location Parameters can be deleted from the database click the x Delete butto
246. c mean average if w is 1 then the average is the geometric mean for fecals if w is 2 then the average is the flow weighted average v is the violation limit Daily values may be considered as persistent calculations use the last data not later than the date by adding 32 to the type y The number of months may be specified for monthly 7 day and hourly calculations where mis the number of months add the additional parameter V_AVG p x y Z W V m The function will return the number of violations for the month Additional information about a particular violation can be retumed where vnum is the number of the violation 1 is the first 2 is the second etc add 256 vnum 4 to y in order to return the offset of the day of the violation add 256 vnum 8 to y in order to return the value of the violation When a parameter to calculate loading is specified O 8 or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter V_AVG I p _flow p_flow x y z w v Examples V_AVG Effluent 50050 0 0 0 0 3 14 number of violations for current month monthly average exceeding 3 14 V_AVG Effluent 31614 1 1 0 1 3 14 number of violations for previous month 7 day continuous average for fecals exceeding 3 14 V_AVG Effluent 31614 1 256 2 8 1 0 1 3 14 value of the second violation for previous month 7 day continuous average for fecals exceeding 3 14 14 16 3 V_
247. c mean for fecals if w is 2 then the average is the flow weighted average v is the violation limit 2014 AllMax Software Inc Operator10 Help Daily values may be considered as persistent calculations use the last data not later than the date by adding 32 to the type y The number of months may be specified for monthly 7 day and hourly calculations where mis the number of months add the additional parameter V_MIN I p x y Z w Vv m The function will return the number of violations for the month Additional information about a particular violation can be returned where vnum is the number of the violation 1 is the first 2 is the second etc add 256 vnum 4 to y in order to return the offset of the day of the violation add 256 vnum 8 to y in order to return the value of the violation add 256 vnum 12 to y in order to return the time of the violation for hourly min max When a parameter to calculate loading is specified O 8 or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter V_MIN I p I_flow p_flow x y z w v Examples V_MIN Effluent 50050 0 0 0 0 3 14 number of violations for current month monthly minimum exceeding 3 14 V_MIN Effluent 31614 1 1 0 1 3 14 number of violations for previous month 7 day continuous minimum for fecals exceeding 3 14 V_MIN Effluent 31614 1 256 24 8 1 0 1 3 14 value of the second violat
248. ceneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseaeeeeeeeseeeessaeeesaees 311 BioSolids Application List General Informati0N oonoonnncnnnncnnnccnnncccnnccononcccnnanconocc conc c cnn nnnnncccarccnnnnnnn 314 BioSolids Application List Comments ooooconnccccncccnnccconocccnnncconc ccoo ncnon conan rca n conc n rca nr EAN A o A conduaceeh uchuaceguaduane aabasibeesddes BioSolids Nutrient Report General Properties BioSolids Nutrient Report General Information BioSolids Nutrient Report SitesS ooooonocinncnnnncnncccnccccnnccccnnccconnnconn ccoo cc nan cn cnn cnnnccca nn BioSolids Nutrient Report Report INCIUSIONS ooooncconnncnncccincccnoccccnoccconcncnnnc cono cc conc cnn crac c rca BioSolids Nutrient Report Comment c cccccceceeseceeeeeceeeceeeeceeeeceeeecaeeseaeeeeeeeeseeeseaeeseseeeseaeesseeenaees BioSolids LIRA cal dep sates usdes Sth scceeesSdesyaee cet Sree BioSolids Limit Report General Properties c cccccccceceseeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeseaeeeeeeeeseeeseaeeeeaeeeseeeessaeeeeaees BioSolids Limit Report General Information ccccccccccceseeceneeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeseaeeeceeeeseeeeseaeeeceeeeseeeessaeeeeaees BioSolids Limit Report SiteSuite er aa aea eaa ae ae aaaea re a aa aaaea aiae BioSolids Limit Report Report INCIUSIONS ooooncccinnccnnnncnnncconccconcnconocc nono ncnnnnnono cc cnnc crac ran cc cnn BioSolids Limit Report COMMent c ccccsceceeeeeeneeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeceaeeeceeeesaeeseaeee
249. ched The function considers only valid data and will return BLANK if there is no valid data The function uses the following type z to determine the calculation method if z is O then the hourly results are at the times corresponding to each data value of the Control Location Parameter calculates only at necessary times if z is 1 then the hourly results are at 60 minute intervals fastest calculation if z is 2 then the hourly results are at 30 minute intervals fast calculation if z is 3 then the hourly results are at 15 minute intervals if z is 4 then the hourly results are at 10 minute intervals slow calculation if z is 5 then the hourly results are at 5 minute intervals slow calculation if z is 6 then all hourly results are calculated slowest calculation A specific whole hour may be specified where h is the number of whole hours past midnight add the additional parameter H_CALC l p x y z h The value x may use most functions which do not specify multiple days weeks months or years LP I p l p Boolean TRUE FALSE Functions Constants Date Functions except DATE DDE Functions Mathematical Functions Miscellaneous Functions except ACCRUE ASSIGN ONCE SYNC Trigonometry Functions WARNING The function will calculate and save hourly values in the Location Parameter where the formula is attached 2014 AllMax Software Inc se Operator10 Help 14 8 3 14 8 4 Examples
250. cheuchdeshcecexeceguSeendisecaithcacebevachacntcd vachdeseohshiarhbusige asent 351 NetDDE ciectostes contends cob rtca eis eerie A ase 353 DataPort 355 DataPort Sync Select LiP Ss aii seeds acc ucdoecnesexeceadsutuctensexzer 355 DataP ort S tu piss icisteins croatas cosa a e 356 AllM x Folder SoftWare icon anda rieron 356 Installation A A id nee 357 Malini WIN AAA O 358 Menu Bar Preferences Security Operator10 DataPort Software ooocoonccconnceconncennnenonnncnnnncnnnennnnnnnnnnrnnnnrrnnnnrrnnrrnnnnernnnrrnnneens 359 ADOQUINES Caldas A A AEE E E ESS Graffiti Help HotSync Installation E KE YDa ii AA a Main Window Mana A Se ee cee E E N E a ce este AEE Note ca A o A NA ias PicklESE aa A A ee a oan ate PTOTOTONCOS iaa da deis Remove Record 370 Review Data a A a in ia 370 Sanner RA A A A A ds 371 SROF CU S iaiai O A anat 372 O E E E E A E E EEEE E E EE E EEE E EAE ET 372 WAPS e NO O CO TAO 373 Edit COMMONS ii A ee ii eA eee eke 373 Functions 375 All Functions by groUpS 00 centeedeecteeendceteeeiveent ered cnnteeds 375 All Functions alphabetically iic cicsccccctciccscaceves ccceeveecccueves ceteeveccctewes se ceevvecenevesseteeees cents 380 General InfOrMatiON miii iadivieceac duces ddawes censacedusadavasceascdvecsdoavesasvedsuss cid 386 Data Types caressar 386 LP 1 p 1 p Location Paraim ter ccsiscciisecscsccccassscsececcsecnssdnccnseceactecensctcseacecensesscuesaserssvecst
251. chosen from the drop down list box Press the button to display the selection list 4 Enter a Description 0 to 30 characters to further identify the Parameter in the Description field 5 Enter the number of Decimal Places normally required for this Parameter This value becomes the default number of decimal places for setup of DataViews and reports O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Main Application at Add Similar Parameter From the Parameter list users are able to create similar parameters if one exists To utilize this feature highlight an existing Parameter in the list and click the arrow icon beside the Add button to select Add Similar Parameter 4 5 2 Delete Parameter Delete Parameter Xx Parameters can be deleted from the database click the Delete button to delete records Individually selected records can be deleted as well as multiple selections of Parameters Confirmation is required when deleting Parameters from the database Click the Y Yes Yes button to confirm or X No No to cancel the deletion of data 4 5 3 Stock Parameters Stock Parameters 2014 AllMax Software Inc 2 Operator10 Help Over 16 000 US EPA STOrage and RETreval STORET Codes and abbreviated Chemical Abstracts Service CAS numbers are available when adding a new Parameter to the 4 6 Parameter List To sort the Parameters by either Code Description or Detail Description left click the colu
252. cility Name Address Line 1 City State or Province Zip Country Report State basic only Address Line 2 Address Line 3 i Hourly Entry Type 24 Whole Hours Delete Database Delete Database Databases can be deleted at any time by users with permission to perform this action To delete a Database select a Facility belonging to a Database and click the arrow X beside the Delete button to select Delete Database Delete Facility Delete Facility Facilities can be deleted at any time by users with permission to perform this action X To delete a Facility select a Facility from the list and click the button to remove the selected Facility 2014 AllMax Software Inc Main Application 4 25 Database Structure Operator10 Wastewater Data Structure Simple asii Database Facility Simple Data Structure typical Server Pervasive Operator10 Wastewater requires that the Pervasive SQL database engine be installed This engine should be installed as a service whenever possible Consult with the Pervasive help topic to learn more about the Pervasive database engine and its features License AllMax Software Product License s Each AllMax Software product will install with a keycode that determines features and functionality of the application Multiple instances of the same product may be present on a server but each installed product is required to have a un
253. cility name for the Bio App List Report The default facility name will initially be filled in modify this as necessary Beginning Page Enter the beginning page number if the report is greater than 1 page Operator10 Wastewater will continue the numbering sequence Leave this field blank if you simply want to start at page number 1 O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Reporting 315 TEERERERREE BERS daadiidiiiiiiit Bio App List 01 Bio App List 4 som r _ save Click template or press PageUp PageDn 9 7 7 1 3 BioSolids Application List Comments Comments Enter default comments to be displayed on the printed report if the JAllow Comments checkbox is checked in the General Properties section users can edit these comments when printed O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 316 Operator10 Help T Report Properties _ i AN DA Bio App List 01 Bio App List grm r save Preview Guidance Click template or press PageUp PageDn 9 7 7 2 BioSolids Nutrient Report Bio Nutrient Report The BioSolids Nutrient Report allow users who have created a Biosolids type facility to review the defined nutrients of Biosolid sites Users can add as many or as few sites to the report The Bio Nutrient report generally shows the defined nutrients along with their levels and their applied values There are 5 sections of the reports that can be setup for each report are e General Properti
254. cluded for calculation 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 445 where mis the number of months to be included starting from the month offset add the additional parameter m INCLUDE fn l p x y z m A daily range of data can be specified for calculation use the function as INCLUDE fn l p x y where offset x days for y days Individual values can also be used use the function INCLUDE fn x1 x2 xn The function fn used can be most formulas which use a range of data for their source i e most of the D_ H M_ V_ etc functions SUM AVG COUNT MAX MINO etc Examples INCLUDE SUM 1 2 3 4 5 15 INCLUDE M_MAX p x y z w 100 max of monthly values or 100 INCLUDE M_MAX p x y z wW l p2 x y z w monthly max of two parameters INCLUDE M_MAX p 0 y z w l p1 12 y z w monthly max this and last year 14 10 1 LI x y z w v n1 n2 LI x y z w v n1 n2 Log Inactivation for a particular temp pH Cl LI T n1 n2 Value The value returned uses calculation based either tables or the regression method for calculating the actual Log Inactivation in treating water for disinfection where x is the lowest water temperature in degrees centigrade y is the highest pH z is the lowest disinfectant Chlorine concentration in mg l w is the Log Inactivation required e g 3 0 for giardia 4 0 for viruses v is the contact Time in seconds if n1 is O then the result is for Giardia La
255. ction Help file can be accessed for additional support while writing formulas 5 Location Parameters may be selected from a PickList using the popup button 6 To increase or decrease the displayed font size for the Formula field click the buttons 7 The Formula itself 1 to 1000 characters is written in mathematical style using Location Parameter names constants functions parentheses etc The value calculated as a result will be written to the Location Parameter which uses the Formula More than one Location Parameter may use the same Formula 8 In the Formula Test area testing of written formulas can be performed in 2 ways For date based or formulas sensitive to dates enter a test Date to be used when testing the written formula e Use values from Test Data Use this option to test with user entered data in the fields 1st L P Value 2nd L P Value 3rd L P Value and 4th L P Value e Use Data from Database Use this option to test with a selected L P from the facility Examples Plant Influent Flow MGD 1000000 the flow of Plant Influent in MGD converted to gallons per day Plant Influent Flow MGD Recycled Flow MGD 2 add flow of Plant Influent to flow of Recycled and divide by 2 IF ISBLANK Plant Influent Flow MGD 0 Plant Influent Flow MGD if there is no flow at Plant Influent then return O otherwise return the flow MAX Aer 1 BOD 5 Aer 2 BOD 5 the greater of the BOD value
256. ctions ACCUM l p x y ACCUMulate offset x months y days S_AVG l p x AVG of process sections S_SUM I p x SUM of process sections Quarterly Data Functions Q_CSUM I p x Calendar Quarter SUM of daily values offset x months Q_SUM I p x Quarterly SUM of daily values offset x months Trigonometry Functions ACOS x ArcCOSine of x ASIN x ArcSINe of x ATAN x ArcTANgent of x COS x COSine of x CSC x CoSeCant of x 2014 AllMax Software Inc 3s0 Operator10 Help SEC x SECant of x SIN x SINe of x TAN x TANgent of x Violation Data Functions E_SUM lI p x y z w v Exceedance SUM offset type rule avg limit V_AVG I p x y Z w V offset type rule avg Violation AVG V_CNT I p x y z w offset type rule Violation CouNT values V_CNTP I p x y zZ w offset type Period Violation CouNT values month V_DLY I p x y z w DaiLY Violation offset type max min V_DLYM l p x y z w DaiLY Multiple Violation offset type max min V_MAV I p x y z w v offset type rule avg Violation Min AVerage V_MAX l p x y z w v offset type rule avg Violation MAX V_MIN p x y z w v offset type rule avg Violation MIN SNC_CJP l p x y z w v1 v2 offset type rule avg daily violation avg violation SNC_MAXD I p x y z w v offset type rule avg SNC violation MAX Daily SNC_MAXM I p x y z w v offset type rule avg SNC violation MAX Monthly SNC_MIND I p x y z w v
257. current Location Parameter data cell Notes may also be viewed and printed from the Notes section of the Operator10 Wastewater main application Murrumba Downs STP Weather Station Rainfall 4 09 2012 12 00 00 AM 0 000 Creating Quick Notes The following options allow users to create Quick Notes 2014 AllMax Software Inc Dataview 203 e Right click on any data cell and choose Quick Note Editor from the right click menu e Select any data cell and choose Vid Quick Note from the Edit ribbon Choose View Edit Quick Note from the menu that opens e Select any data cell and use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl N to View Edit the Quick Note Quick Note Display Viewing Quick Notes To view a Quick Note either e Hover the mouse cursor over a data cell displaying the small triangle in the upper right corner or e Right click on any data cell and choose Quick Note Editor from the right click menu 2014 AllMax Software Inc 204 Operator10 Help e Select any data cell and choose J Quick Note from the Edit ribbon Choose View Edit Quick Note from the menu that opens e Select any data cell and use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl N to View Edit the Quick Note Deleting Quick Notes In the event that Quick Notes are no longer valid open the Quick Note Editor from the instructions shown above and clear all data from the Quick Note data field
258. cussed as they appear in the button groups Database Backup e Backup Now Click the Backup Now button to backup the current database Calculations Calculate Now Press the ES Calculate Now button to calculate functions and formulas for the open database e Month to Date Press the Month to Date button to automatically calculate data for the current month to date e Previous Month to Date Press the el Previous Month to Date button to automatically calculate data for the previous month to date Change Order Press the gt Change Order button to edit the Calculation Order Import Export Data e Import Now Press the To Import Now button to import data E e Browse for Import File s Press the ye Browse for Import File s button to browse for specific files to be imported e Export Data Press the dE Export Data to build an export file containing selected Location Parameter data Scheduling O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Main Application e e Setup Schedules Press the Setup Schedules button to open the Operator10 Agent Interface window to begin scheduling items Backups Data Imports and Facility Calculations can be scheduled using the Operator10 Agent Useful Tools Calculator Press the Calculator button to use the Calculator Tool e Tools Calculators and Converters Press the Tools Calculators and Converters button to open the Operator10 Tools section
259. d button on the left pane of the window Select a Location Parameter from the picklist that appears Highlight the desired Location Parameter and press the Select button Each Location Parameter added will be given an Item name beginning with Item001 this Item name will be the identifier when editing the Template in the List and Label Report Designer Item Data Location Parameter To change a selected Location Parameter press the button to select a Location Parameter to be reported on the Custom Report Find the Location Parameter in the Location Parameter Picklist that appears and press the Select button 2014 AllMax Software Inc 264 Operator10 Help Header To modify the header of the selected Location Parameter modify this field Two lines of text may be entered Calculation Press the button to display a picklist of available calculations for the selected Location Parameter To review the list of available calculations consult the Calculations help file page Daily values is the default selection and will display the single daily value is chosen Additionally custom formulas will also be available at the bottom of the picklist Consult the Main help file for Formula help To show the entered data or to calculate a loading value select from value e kg day loading e g day loading e Ib day loading To define how the data should be shown on the report choose from
260. d to printing the selected DataView Changes to the Header Footer options will affect the current open DataView only and be saved independently from other DataViews i All Properties X Ready DataView Properties Column Setup Column Properties DataView Options i Page Header i Margin i Header Footer E DisplayDateRange Footer E Last Page Only Left E Display Page Number Fort DataView Properties Header Footer Header Footer Options O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Dataview 189 The following Header Footer options are available Header First Page Only Check the box for First Page Only to print the header information on the first printed page only Left Enter the desired text into the Left header field to define the Left header Center Enter the desired text into the Center header field to define the Center header Right Enter the desired text into the Right header field to define the Right header Display Date Range Check the box for Display Date Range to display the date range as defined by the DataView Properties in the header area of the printed DataView Display Date Printed Check the box for Display Date Printed to display the date when the DataView is printed e Font Click the button for Font to set and save a desired font for the Date Header options if displayed on the printed DataView Fo
261. dances for previous month 7 day continuous avg exceeding 3 14 14 16 2 V_AVG I p x y z w v V_AVG I p x y Z w Vv monthly AVG Violation for location and parameter offset x months type y rule z average w limit v Value The average violation of data values a violation occurs when the average is above the limit of a specific location and parameter for the month x months from the current month The function uses the following parameters to determine the calculation method y is the type of average if y is O then the result is a monthly or 30 day average if y is 1 then the result is a weekly or 7 day average if y is 2 then the result is an hourly average z is the rule used for a 7 day average if z is O then the result uses a continuous or floating average if z is 1 then a week falls in the month which contains its Saturday if z is 2 then a week falls in the month which contains its Wednesday if z is 3 then the result uses the first of month for 4 weeks 28 days if z is 4 then the first of month 4th week extends to the end of the month 2014 AllMax Software Inc Operator10 Help if z is 5 then the first of month is controlled by facility option if z is 6 then only full weeks Sun Sat in the month are considered if z is 16 then the result uses a continuous or floating average but only counts violations based on unique data w is the type of average used if w is O then the average is the arithmeti
262. dard Windows Font Dialog Box Fonts may also be chosen by pressing the appropriate Toolbar button O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 232 Operator10 Help Font style Arial Arial Rounded MT ARNPRIOR Baskerville Old Face Bauhaus 93 Baveuse Effects Strikeout AaBbYyZz Underline Color MN Black Show more fonts 8 4 1 3 Legends menu Legends menu Legends identify Graphed Data values by specifying the Location Parameter and Formula value and or Date and Time of the Data point The Legends menu displays several on off options Use the Legends menu to turn on or off the following options e The Series or Location Parameter Legend Box may be shown The legend may be displayed in a Legend Box Series or x axis Legend text may be edited in the Data Window If the Default Legend Text menu item is marked legend text will be updated whenever the Graph is refreshed int Dom 50050 BB int ina 50050 BB Etfluent 50050 Si x E int Dom 50050 PM infina sooso B Enveri ze se O 2014 AllMax Software Inc raping 283 e The x axis Legend is displayed from left to right at the bottom of the Graph It is usually an abbreviated form of the Date or Month Year or Time for the associated Data The full text legend may be displayed in an x axis Legend Box Legend El 01 01 01 2010 02 01 02 2010 03 01 03 2010 04 01 04 2010 ERARIO ASEIN 01 01 01 2010 02 01 02 201
263. data and will return BLANK if there is no valid data equal to or later than the date 2014 AllMax Software Inc 406 Operator10 Help The function will return the number of days to the next value by adding 256 to the month x Examples D_NEXT Effluent 50050 1 0 value one month ahead or later D_NEXT Effluent 50050 0 7 value one week ago or later 14 6 21 D_STAT I p l p x y z D_STAT p l p x y z Daily STATistics values for location s and parameter s offset x days for y days type z Value The statistics result for data values of specific location s and parameter s for the date x days from the current date and extending for a range of y days If two locations and parameters are used data values where either is BLANK are ignored If the second location parameter is not needed it may be left BLANK The type z determines the result where z 0 the number count of values either one or two location parameters may be used z 1 Dex the Sum of the values one location parameter 2 z 2 Dox the Sum of the values squared one location parameter f E Yly lt Lal r H i E z 3 2 1 the Sample Variance of the values one location parameter z 4 Sx I x the Sample Standard Deviation of the values one location parameter SSz Y 2 E A z 5 the Sum of the Squares of the Deviations of the values one location parameter C 1 96 ES z 6 the Confidence
264. dge o Field Site Molybdenum in Sludge Nickel in Sludge GAL NUM Tons Tons Acre MG KG MG KG MG KG MG KG MG KG MG KG MG KG 2 Daily 0 Daily 2 Daily 2 Daily 2 Daily 3 Daily 3 Daily 3 Daily 3 Daily 3 Daily 3 Daily 1 Daily 3 Daily 3 Daily Selenium in Sludge Zinc in Sludge 3 Daily 3 Daily m UN None None None None None None None None None None None None aaa aaa Create Calculation Parameters In the Site list see above press the Create Calculation Parameters button to create the Application Parameters for the current Site Application parameters created will include the following e A parameters to calculate pounds per acre applied B parameters to calculate pounds applied H parameters to calculate kilograms per hectare Base parameters for MG KG milligram per kilogram applied e Additional parameters for the calculation of total amounts Dry Tons Metric Tons Trips Quantity etc 5 2 1 Site Detail BioSolids Site Detail The Site Detail window displays additional information from the BioSolids Site 2014 AllMax Software Inc BioSolids 143 Site Det Copy From Site Jones Field 001 Facility South WWTP Site Address Use Copy From to copy all details from another BioSolids Site chosen from a PickList The following information is avail
265. dropped and 2 is divided in half for final calculation Zero Calculations will drop the data qualifiers from data and calculated results will display without the qualifiers using zero 0 in place of any entered data Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 6 0 1 4 2 5 as the less than symbol is dropped and 0 is used in place of lt 2 for the final calculation Blank no data Calculations will drop the data qualifiers from data and calculated results will display without the qualifiers treating data entered with qualifiers to be seen as blank Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 6 1 3 3 333 as the less than symbol is dropped and no data is used in place of lt 2 in the final calculation 2014 AllMax Software Inc sa Operator10 Help m T Report Properties i i Months Reported 4 Decimal Precision 3 A DA Treat lt gt Data As Allow Export Data As Bio App List 01 Bio App List View With 4 om Windows File Association Save Preview Guidance Click template or press PageUp PageDn 9 7 7 1 2 BioSolids Application List General Information General Information In the General Information section of the Bio App List Report setup Report Name Enter the desired report name 1 to 40 characters for the Bio App List Report This name is different than the report name shown in the Direct Access tree Facility Enter a fa
266. e e DataPort HotSync Log Press the Al DataPort HotSync Log button to open the DataPort HotSync log file O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Main Application N e OPC DDE Log Press the 4 OPC DDE Log to open the OPC DDE Interface log file What s New e What s New Press the re What s New button to open the What s New document opens an externally linked PDF from the AllMax Software Inc website About e About Press the ne About button to open the Help About section 4 1 3 Operator10 Options Operatori0 Options The Operator10 Options allows users to define and save program options Program options found in the OperatoriO Options dialog are saved based on the current user of the application and information is stored in the registry for the computer a F Operator10 Options i Options E Exit Confirmation Ribbon Theme Windows7 v Save on Bit 7 Window Position Y Recent Licenses Custom Tools v10 20 Installation Guide doc C Users Brian Dex 2014 AllMax Software Inc e Operator10 Help 4 2 Options Items listed under the Options section include e Exit Confirmation Place a check in the Exit Confirmation checkbox to provide a prompt upon exit of the Main Application e Ribbon Theme Select from the drop down menu to choose the appearance option for the ribbons and other themed elements in the Main Application and DataView sections
267. e Menu 190 Delete Location Parameter 96 DataView Find Data 201 Delete LP 96 DataView Freeze Column 207 Delete Parameter 91 DataView Group Header 198 Delete Process 102 DataView Home Ribbon 191 Delete Sampling Event 334 DataView Icons 199 Delta 398 454 DataView Import 204 Deviation 407 422 464 DataView Keyboard Shortcuts 196 Difference 398 454 DataView List 169 Digits 432 433 434 DataView Logged Documents 131 Direct Access 240 DataView Name 171 Discharge Monitoring Report 298 DataView Properties 177 Disinfection 438 439 440 445 DataView Right Click Menu 207 DIST 426 DataView Tools Ribbon 195 Distribution 426 DataView Window Ribbon 196 DIV 426 DataViews 168 169 170 Divide 416 417 426 Date 47 101 256 361 366 386 392 409 410 Division 426 411 412 413 451 455 DMR 298 Date Data 101 DMR 3320 298 Date Functions 409 DOM 410 Date Reported 253 DOW 410 DATE 409 455 DOY 411 Day 409 411 DP 355 Day of Month 410 Duration 102 481 Day of Week 410 DV 168 Day of Year 411 DV Column Properties 182 Days in Month 411 DV Columns 172 DDE 340 341 342 343 467 DV Display Options 177 DDE Client 340 DV Format 177 DDE Link 342 DV Properties 177 DDE Link Name 344 DVAL 411 2014 AllMax Software Inc s Operator10 Help DVs 168 Dynamic Data Exchange 340 Dynamic Data Exchange DDE 467 Es e 395 ex 426 E SUM 476 Earlier 401 402 403 418 Edit 30 40 373 Edit Label 119 Edit Link 342
268. e a check in this checkbox to verify enter comments at the time of printing the Bio Limit Report Treat lt gt Data As Select from the drop down menu to determine the method by which data with the less than lt greater than gt or non detect data qualifiers will be treated Available options are e Preserve Types Calculations will preserve the available data qualifiers and calculated results will display the appropriate data qualifier Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 6 2 1 4 lt 3 as the less than symbol to be preserved for the final calculation Entered Value Calculations will drop the data qualifiers from data and calculated results will display without the qualifiers using only the numeric entered portion of the data Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 6 2 1 4 3 as the less than symbol will be dropped for the final calculation Half Entered Value Calculations will drop the data qualifiers from data and calculated results will display without the qualifiers using one half the entered value of the data Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 64 1 1 4 2 75 as the less than symbol is dropped and 2 is divided in half for final calculation Zero Calculations will drop the data qualifiers from data and calculated results will display without the qualifiers using zero 0 in place of any entered data Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 6 0 1 4 2 5 as the less than sy
269. e difference in days as a numeric value for example M_DATE 0 2 0 M_DATE 1 2 0 the number of days between the start of the current month and the previous month Examples M_DATE 0 2 0 the date of the start of the current month using a Wednesday rule M_DATE 0 1 4 the length the current month using a Saturday rule 14 11 6 M_GMEAN I p x M_GMEAN I p x Monthly Geometric MEAN for location and parameter offset x months equivalent to logarithmic mean Value The geometric mean of data values of a specific location and parameter for the month x months from the current month Data values less than O are ignored The function is equivalent to a logarithmic mean A logarithmic mean returns the same value although it may use a different calculation method see also Geometric Mean in the main Synexus application The number of months may be specified where mis the number of months add the additional parameter M_GMEAN I p x m When a parameter to calculate loading is specified amp or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter M_GMEAN I p I_flow p_flow x Examples M_GMEAN Effluent 50050 0 geometric mean of present month M_GMEAN Effluent 50050 1 geometric mean of previous month 14 11 7 M_MAX I p x y z w M_MAX I p x y Z w Monthly MAXimum for location and parameter offset x months type y rule z average
270. e entire month each on a separate line as a single text string including including Less Than Greater Than Non Detect values Time values or Alpha Codes HOUR the 24 hourly data values for the entire day each on a separate line as a single text string including Less Than Greater Than Non Detect values Time values or Alpha Codes DV the daily or hourly data values for an entire DataView each separated by tabs with each day or hour on a separate line as a text string including Less Than Greater Than Non Detect values Time values or Alpha Codes FORMULA the result of the formula as a text string The formula uses the location parameter and date specified as if it was being calculated in the main Operator10 application SYSTEM the text string corresponding to the result of several Windows specified topic strings such as SysItems Topics Formats Status or Version NOTE If any data does not exist the string N A is substituted The Item string is specified as follows facility the facility name 1 to 31 characters required for all topics dataview the dataview name 1 to 31 characters required for DV Topic illegal for others formula the formula name 1 to 31 characters required for FORMULA Topic illegal for 2014 AllMax Software Inc 352 Operator10 Help others location the location name 1 to 16 characters required for DATA MONTH HOUR FORMULA Topics illegal for others p
271. e excess hydroxide alkalinity as CaCO3 in mg l e g parameter 00420 v is the percent strength purity of the hydrated lime usually 90 92 NOTE Unused variables may be left as BLANK Examples HLIME Raw 00405 Raw 00425 Raw 00920 Raw 00420 90 mg l lime required HLIME Raw 00405 Raw 00425 Raw 00920 90 1 15 15 excess of lime required 14 10 1INCLUDE fn I p x y z INCLUDE fn l p x y z INCLUDE location parameter I p in execution of Function fn offset X months using Y values and Z rule Value The data value from fn including data from I p offset x months using y values and z rule if y is O then included data uses a calendar month for daily data if y is 1 then included data uses the Z month rule for daily data if y is 2 then included data uses hourly values from the calendar month if z is O then the result uses a calendar month if z is 1 then a week falls in the month which contains its Saturday if z is 2 then a week falls in the month which contains its Wednesday if z is 3 then the result uses the first of month for 4 weeks 28 days if z is 4 then the first of month 4th week extends to the end of the month the value 5 is unused for compatibility with other monthly functions if z is 6 then only full weeks Sun Sat in the month are considered Hourly data for a single day can be included for calculation where x is the day offset INCLUDE fn I p x Additional months may be in
272. e is returned based on the selected weekly formula minimum average or maximum Continuous Overlapping 7 day averages begin on the first day of the reporting period First of Month 7 day averages begin on the first day of the reporting period Sat Rule Weekly average Sun Sat when the Saturday is in the reporting period 2014 AllMax Software Inc Wed Rule Weekly average Sun Sat when the Wednesday is in the reporting period Full Weeks Weekly average Sun Sat only when all 7 days are in the reporting period Min Weekly Avg Full Weeks Mmm fHoury Y Avg Weekly Avg Continuous Max Weekly Avg 1st of Month Max Weekly Avg Full Weeks 9 4 2 List and Label Report Designer Operator10 Wastewater uses an integrated 3rd party report generator known as List amp Label This report generator includes a fully featured designer capable of creating incredibly robust reports that make use of data stored in the Operator10 Wastewater database Access to the List amp Label template designer is given in both the Barcode Label and Reporting sections of Operator10 Wastewater Getting Help The List amp Label report template designer comes with its own user s manual and that manual can be accessed through the Operator10 Wastewater main menu under Help Manuals Report Designer Assistance is also available by contacting the AllMax technical support department Additionally users in the Design
273. e less than symbol will be dropped for the final calculation Half Entered Value Calculations will drop the data qualifiers from data and calculated results will display without the qualifiers using one half the entered value of the data Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 6 1 1 4 2 75 as the less than symbol is dropped and 2 is divided in half for final calculation Zero Calculations will drop the data qualifiers from data and calculated results will display without the qualifiers using zero 0 in place of any entered data Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 6 0 1 4 2 5 as the less than symbol is dropped and 0 is used in place of lt 2 for the final calculation Blank no data Calculations will drop the data qualifiers from data and calculated results will display without the qualifiers treating data entered with qualifiers to be seen as blank Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 6 1 3 3 333 as the less than symbol is dropped and no data is used in place of lt 2 in the final calculation 2014 AllMax Software Inc 262 Operator10 Help Custom Days Add Item002 Plant Effiuent Solids TSS Total Suspended Solic Item003 Plant Ef uent Flow Mad Flow Thru Treatment F Remove Treat lt gt Data As Item004 Plant Effluent pH pH Standard Units Move Dn Allow Export Data As Custom Report 01 Custom Report View With lt oot r 9 Windows
274. e number 4 Print Options The following print options are available e Orientation Click the orientation button to switch between portrait and landscape orientations e Fit to Page Check the Fit to Page option to force the graph to be printed on 1 sheet of paper e Print Size e Size Enter a value 0 100 to define the size in percent the graph will be displayed at the entered percentage e X Offset Enter a numeric value in inches to which the graph will be displayed from the top of the printed page e Y Offset Enter a numeric value in inches to which the graph will be display from the left of the printed page e Starting page number Enter a numeric value to set the page number to be printed Click Continue to begin printing 8 4 1 2 Graph menu Topics in this section include e Data Source 2014 AllMax Software Inc 226 Operator10 Help e Constants Editor e Limits Editor e Refresh e Graph Properties e Copy Options e Automatic Scale e Fonts 8 4 1 2 1 Data Source Data Source See the Data Source Editor topic for more information 8 4 1 2 2 Constants Editor Constants Editor The Constants Editor determines Constant Lines and Bands on the graph Constants Constant Lines Value Type Series Label Median of 5 samples ni Constant Lines Select a Type of none if the Constant Line should not be shown Select a Type of const if the Constant Line should
275. e of houny values w is the type of average used if w is O then the average is the arithmetic mean average if w is 1 then the average is the geometric mean for fecals if w is 2 then the average is the flow weighted average Values may be considered as persistent calculations use the last data not later than the date by adding 32 to the type y The number of months may be specified for monthly 7 day and hourly calculations where mis the number of months add the additional parameter M_MED I p x y w n m When a parameter to calculate loading is specified amp or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter M_NTH I p I_flow p_flow x y w n Examples M_NTH Effluent 50050 0 0 0 4 4th highest value current month M_NTH Effluent 31614 1 1 1 4 4th lowest value previous month 7 day continuous avg for fecals 14 11 1 M_PCT I p x y w p M_PCT I p x y w Monthly PerCenTile for location and parameter offset x months type y average w percent p Value The percentile of data values of a specific location and parameter for the month x months from the current month In the distribution of data values into 100 groups having equal frequencies p percent of the values lie at or below the p th percentile The function uses the following parameters to determine the calculation method y is the type of percentile if y is O then t
276. e of the window 3 To change sites once it has been added press the button Remove Press the Remove button to remove the selected Site from the report Move Up Dn To reorder the sites to be reported highlight a site in the list and press the Move Up or Move Dn button O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 320 Operator10 Help Jones Field 001 Comer of 144 175 Jones Field 001 ua Jones Field 001 Corner of 144 175 Bio Nutrient 01 Bio Nutrient 4 Lm Save Preview Guidance Click template or press PageUp PageDn 9 7 7 2 4 BioSolids Nutrient Report Report Inclusions Reporting Inclusions Bio Nutrient Report Place a check or select an available option from the options on the right pane of the Report Properties window For additional help regarding the information to be included see the Biosolid Nutrients section of the Main Help file Limit Type Choose from the available Limit Types to be shown e JAccum Sum e Year Sum e Month Sum e JSoil Sample e Quarter Sum Not In Service Select an option regarding the display of sites that are marked as Not In Service e Include e Status Only e Ignore 2014 AllMax Software Inc Reporting 321 Add Remove Move Up Move Dn Print List 9 7 7 2 5 BioSolids Nutrient Report Comments Comments Enter default comments to be displayed on
277. e performed as normal However the eDV must then be saved as a new eDV while the template file is unchanged and can be reopened as a blank Create eDV Templates eDV Templates can be created when exporting from the DataView application For more information see the following topic eDV Export Options Opening eDV Templates When opening the eDV Template file the eDV Viewer will prompt for a date range Enter the start and end date for the eDV Once the date is provided the eDV will open and allow for data entry to begin 04 01 2013 04 07 2013 4 April 2013 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu lt April 2013 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu 3 7 2 3 4 3 1 2 3 4 5 8 9 10 11 7 8 9 10 it 12 15 16 17 18 4 15 16 17 18 19 25 21 2 28 9 5 10 C Today 04 30 2013 C Today 04 30 2013 Saving eDV Templates eDV Templates are not saved with data but instead are saved as eDV files while the template remains blank Once data entry is complete if the eDV is to be saved choose the Save eDV As option from the Save eDV button in the ribbon At the prompt enter the file name in the File name field and navigate to a location to which the file will be saved Press the Save button to finish the Save As process O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 8 Graphing Graphin The Graphing application in Operator10 Wastewater allows users to produce full color 2 and 3 dimensional graphs using any data stored in the Operator10 Waste
278. e ports iii A Ainas Mass Balance Report Sel iii A AAA Ad General Proposal a Ad AAA A ra he ae General Information ivi A tan Row s Comments Limit RO di a AAA Limit Report SU A Aa ead eee ekg ad a See General Properties ya Miia a a AA A A AN hd General ot O ivi id aN ds Limits OOO COMMEN S arras Ai ia Weekly Sum Mary Report wis iccicccsccecisccudsteecesticecetcascavedcdecsastivactevesseuveuscuscuecdscestgucvssteevesetevusecnaadceucersvecivestevedeuses Weekly Report Elina A A ii General POPE AA A AENA OEI eee O 2014 AllMax Software Inc General Information Parameters ii po COMMENIS Aika dino shin Ale dle te dd de Al a ll kei DOLL Se Alla Federal DMR Report jwesivessicccsccscensesesncescevcsscarsvsscsasscesensecenncenstecuscasessessasereseccevenscescevcnscesesuersaseusdecvecesavescerchscrsusters Federal SO O hdsscuuvieedack E ses chabschiventans General Properties General Information ROWS A A ee O AA EaR Loading O EE E a Concentration sri ae ators den rd a a ook eo as lla a a og ann TA Units a A AA A A A a ea A A O doderannacheeacetea s 308 RED A ES5e 309 Comments al a dd do at don o ideas Ine rd dd oct dd AAO ceo ee e 310 Bi Solids Reports siccvccieesesseisscecessssssncescevcssctssvvscensecevensecepsceusivchecsessssvensnredeecessuhivncerchecesesuevsaseredearecetevercercsserestuays 311 BioSolids Application List REDONDEADAS 311 BioSolids Application List General PropertieS c ccccccccesce
279. e the mouse pointer change to a solid down arrow With the column selected drag the column into the desired position When the column is held in a position relative to its desired new position the user should see a solid red up arrow This indicates the new position of the column To position the column release the left click mouse button the column should now be in its new position Users may reposition all columns if desired Freeze Unfreeze Unfreeze All Freeze Columns can be frozen to the left side of the grid if desired Right click on the column to be frozen and choose the option Freeze Column from the right click menu The column will now be frozen to the left side of the grid and the remaining 2014 AllMax Software Inc ss Operator10 Help columns will scroll while the frozen column is left always in view Multiple columns can be frozen right click on additional columns to be frozen and repeat the steps listed above Unfreeze Columns can be unfrozen from the grid Right click on a frozen column in the grid and select Unfreeze Column The column should become unfrozen and return to its original position in the grid Unfreeze All To quickly unfreeze all columns right click on any column header and select Unfreeze All All columns frozen will be returned to their original positions in the grid Re size Auto size Column width can be defined and saved for each user To re size the column to a desired
280. e update later AllMax Software recommends that updates be applied as released Your download should only take a few minutes depending upon your internet connection and will ensure that you have the latest version of Operatorl0 Ves please remind me ater No download updates now recommended O 2014 AllMax Software Inc s Operator10 Help 4 4 1 Main Application Topics in this section include Application Characteristics Database Facility Location Parameter Location Parameter Data Process Control Formula Alpha Codes Chemicals Barcode Labels Calculations Logged Documents Application Characteristics Topics in this section include Quick Access Toolbar Menu System Operator10 Options Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access Toolbar is a small toolbar that is visible in the top left hand corner of Operator10 Wastewater and is able to be customized to include access to features and functionality found in the ribbons of the application 7 lt The Quick Access Toolbar is displayed at the Add Items to Quick Access Toolbar To add icons to the Quick Access Toolbar users can perform the following steps 2014 AllMax Software Inc Main Application 1 From any icon or menu item right click and choose Add to Quick Access Toolbar 2 The icon or menu item will be added to the Quick Access Toolbar and available for use Remove Items from Quick Access Toolbar T
281. e used for calculation of daily values for BioSolids Applications Choose from the drop down list box the appropriate method by which the data should be obtained e None Data values for this Parameter are not used in BioSolids calculations Same Day Use values only from the same day as the Application e Month Avg Average the values for the same month as the Application e Next Looks forward beginning with the Application date to find the next value e Previous Looks backward beginning with the Application date to find the previous value e Prev 2 3 or 4 Avg looks backward until 2 3 or 4 previous values are found then uses the average O 2014 AllMax Software Inc BioSolids 139 Available Nitrogen In the BioSolid list press the button in the Available Nitrogen column to set up percentages for Plant Available Nitrogen see Available Nitrogen Create Calculation Parameters In the BioSolid list press the a Create Calculation Parameters button to create the Application Parameters for the current BioSolid 5 2 BioSolids Sites BioSolids Site The BioSolid Site list displays all sites or fields used to track applications of defined BioSolids The Site List shown below shows users the number of sites available as well as allows for the definition of parameters or test measured at the sites Based on applications of known BioSolids users can genereate Site Limits to aid in the determination of corr
282. eading no multiplier 14 6 10 D_INTER I p x D_INTER I p x Daily INTERpolation of adjacent data for location and parameter offset x days Value The interpolated data value for a specific location and parameter for the date x days from the current date If a value exists for the the date it is returned Otherwise the function considers the last data the last data not later than the date and the next data the next data not prior to the date and returns an interpolated linear value If there are no valid last or next values the function returns BLANK Examples D_INTER Effluent 50050 0 value interpolated from adjacent values 2014 AllMax Software Inc 402 Operator10 Help 14 6 11 D_LAST I p x y D_LAST l p x Daily LAST value for location and parameter offset x months and y days Value The data value of a specific location and parameter equal to or prior to the date x months and y days from the current date the last data not later than the date The function considers only valid data and will return BLANK if there is no valid data equal to or earlier than the date The function will return the number of days to the previous value by adding 256 to the month x Examples D_LAST Effluent 50050 1 0 value one month ago or earlier D_LAST Effluent 50050 0 7 value one week ago or earlier 14 6 12 D_LASTN p x y z D_LASTN I p x y z Daily average of LAST z Number of values for l
283. ect application to meet permit requirements To access the BioSolids Site List go to the BioSolids menu and select Site List from the menu 1 record 1 selected Fl Create Calculation Parameters ta ion Site List Facility Name South Facility Name Location Location Description Site Type Site Size Site Owner Active Site Detail Show Parameters N a E i Jones Field 001 Corner of 144 175 Land Application 305 Jones The BioSolid Site List displays all sites fields and related information where BioSolids are to be applied Accessing the Site List Go to the BioSolids ribbon menu and choose g Site List button to open the Site List Site Detail Press the button to set up additional Site information using the Site Detail Editor See the Site Details Help Topic for more information O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 140 Operator10 Help Add a Site To create a new Site in the Site List click the M Add button to add a new Site Users will be presented with a Location Site window that will allow for data entry of required and optional information See below To Create Location Site by entering or selecting available information Facility Name Location Site Type Site Size Site Owner Select a Facility from from the list press the button to open the Facility list for selection Enter a unique Location 1 to 16 characters to identify the Site A
284. ection Location is used for Process Section Location 0 for Process Location returns Section Flow if p is see below or p is a flow parameter returns Section Loading if p is a L parameter 1 to 5 for Location n of process section setup as found in section setup 6 to 8 for Size n 5 in english units of process section setup as found in section setup 9 for Effluent Location of process If is then the Unit Multiplier is returned for flow or concentration parameters flow_parname returns the multiplier for mgal day concentration_parname returns the multiplier for mg l If is CALC_LP then the result of a reference formula is returned This is especially useful within other functions which use l p syntax as a data source for example M_SUM CALC_LP MyFormula 0 or Y_AVG CALC_LP MyFormula 0 0 0 If p is a formula name then the result of that formula is returned If p is a formula name then the formula name must be no more than 16 characters in length If p is n where n is a number from 1 to 99 then the result of the internal reference formula set by the SETF function is returned see also SETF NOTE CALC_LP will only work in place of normal direct database access not within functions which do not identify a specific date such as D_LAST not within functions which modify data such as those which calculate loadings and not with hourly functions If p is then the Default Parameter is us
285. ed If p is then the Flow for the current location is returned or m for mgal day g for gal day k for km3 day l for liter day If p is then the loading is returned O for lb for kg assuming mg l If p is parname then the loading of parameter parname is returned O for lb for kg assuming mg l If p is or parname then the loading is returned O for lb for kg for g for mg l ug l ng l etc If p is then if the section or BioSolids Site is currently In Service TRUE 1 is returned otherwise FALSE 0 is returned If p is n then a BioSolids Site parameter is used 0 for BioSolids Site size in acres 1 to 4 for User Defined Parameter n of BioSolids Site If p is then Base Parameter is used A00000 becomes 00000 If p is a where a A toZ then the parameter A00000 to Z00000 is used even if the parameter is already 00000 When a parameter to calculate loading is specified amp or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter f 1 p f 1_flow p_flow 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 389 To return the stored data without conversion to a numeric type to return an Alpha Code for example add the additional parameter LP f l p 1 Examples Sample Facility Influent 50050 3 14 MGD Flow LP Sample Facility Influent 50050 3 14 LP Sample Facility Influent 3 14 LP 3 14 when a
286. ed for calculation purposes e Type of Process Section Select from the drop down menu the type of process section that best describes the section to be added e Influent of Process Flow Enter a numeric value to define the percent of process influent flow that enters the treatment section e In Service e In Out Service History Press the In Out Service History button to display a historical list of in service out of service events for the selected process section e Section Summary Only Place a check in the checkbox to indicate that the process section is a summary section additional information may be required see section detail for more information e Section Detail Depending on the type of section selected as well as whether the section is a summary additional information may be required please enter any available information Create Calculations To create calculations based on the entered process information click the 2014 AllMax Software Inc 106 Operator10 Help Create process calculations button to begin For more information see the Create Process Calculations topic Save Process Setup Press the Save button to save the data entered into the Process Setup section 4 8 2 Process Section History Process Section Histor The Process Section History displays and allows for the entry of any events in which a process section clarifier tank basin filter etc is taken in or out of service In crea
287. ed into the Sampling Events section adding a similar sampling event will allow users to copy and modify information for this new event based on previous events To Add a Similar Sampling Event select an existing Sampling Event and click the drop gt down arrow beside the i Add button and choose Add similar Sampling Event In the Sampling Event window that appears information will be present based on the selected record Place a check in the box for Include Parameters located in the top most portion of the window This will ensure that similar parameter level data is copied as well Click the E Save button to continue 10 3 Delete Sampling Event DELETE SAMPLING EVENT X Delete Sampling Event button in the toolbar You will be prompted to answer Y Yes Yes or X No No before the record is deleted To delete a sampling event single select or multi select a group of records click the O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Sampling Events 335 Operator10 Sampling Events K No Y Yes The Sampling Event and all associated information will be deleted 1 selected F Do you also wish to delete the associated Hourly and Daily results from the database Do you wish to continue 10 4 Print Sampling Event PRINT SAMPLING EVENT To print a list style or detail report of Sampling Events and their data click the Print button to begin To view all available printing options click the arrow to the right of the print ic
288. eeeeeseeeseaeeeeeeesseeessaeeenaees Part X Sampling Events 1 Sampling Event Detail sisi coimas iii 331 2 Add Sampling EVA ia 333 3 Delete Sampling Event ic e vd teesebheeetmeeietertveats 334 A Print Sampling Event tad 335 Part XI Notes 337 Part XII Interfaces 340 1 OPC DDE Interface iii A A ia 340 OPC DDE Interface OvervieW cccsecccssceeeeeeeeseeesseeeeseeeesneeeeseeeseaneesaeeesaeeeeseeeeseeeeeaesessaeeesaeeeeaeeeeseeeaseeeeeeeseeses 341 OPC DDE Main Wind AAA on II taah aka rA aab aaa Kaa iapa de nehai 342 OPE DDE Pink A i 342 OPC DDE Add Remove Print Setup Log ocooooccciooccconccconcccnnoccnoncccono conc non nn cn nnn cnn rca 342 OPG DDE A AN 343 OPC DDE LINK Siviris iaaa aaae yaaa AR AAA RA A AAA aa 343 OPG DDE Link Name e 344 2014 AllMax Software Inc 10 Operator10 Help Part XIII Part XIV OPG DBEL ink AlIMAX De Fin IiOM 5 ra aata Ear sac sasccazeiadedeasdsesdniaicssacsesuasatstedesdoaie chases nance 344 OPG DDE Link Server Definida 345 OPC DDE Link Schedule Definition aiaiaaeo toreen rasani aeh aeeie aen an araia a taataraa aaea daraanan ihana 346 OPC DDE Link ExamplES cisco a A aaa aeaa ee ae aeaa a aa e didada 347 OPC DDE Functionality ese iii AAA AAA A Vaa aiaa 348 OPC DDE Setup y 348 OPO DDE LOGE si aae n a a er ares memes 350 PC DDE Error CodeS is 2 a Can ee a 350 DDE Server FUNCtIOMAIIIY oss 355 0ccscsscuzesacsacetctvagecesecgcneo
289. eekly or 7 day minimum if y is 2 then the result is an hourly minimum if y is 3 then the result is a 4 day minimum z is the rule used for a 7 day average see also W_MIN if z is O then the result uses a continuous or floating average if z is 1 then a week falls in the month which contains its Saturday 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 459 if z is 2 then a week falls in the month which contains its Wednesday if z is 3 then the result uses the first of month for 4 weeks 28 days if z is 4 then the first of month 4th week extends to the end of the month if z is 5 then the first of month is controlled by facility option if z is 6 then only full weeks Sun Sat in the month are considered w is the type of average used if w is O then the average is the arithmetic mean average if w is 1 then the average is the geometric mean for fecals if w is 2 then the average is the flow weighted average Daily values may be considered as persistent calculations use the last data not later than the date by adding 32 to the type y The offset and count of minimum values may also be returned using the following syntax add 256 num type to the value y where num the number of the minimum type 4 for the offset 8 for the value 12 for the time if data is hourly 16 for the count of minimums if there are multiple equal values The number of months may be specified for monthly 7 day and hourly calculations where mis t
290. efined e Move to folder this option will move the existing report page from the previous folder to the selected folder e Save As this option will allow the user to save a copy of the report page with a new name in the selected folder 9 5 1 Report Folder Icons Icons provide shortcuts to Reports Double Click on an icon to Print Preview the associated Reports Choose an icon bitmap from the available pictures by typing in the number of the icon or by using the button Enter a Name 1 to 30 characters which will be displayed below the icon NOTE Icon spacing and font are dependent on Windows icon settings n Tree Folder Ra o a Save Name Annual Reports Default Action Print 9 6 Report Preparation Topics in this section include e Print Report e Print Preview e Report Date e Calendar e Logged Documents 2014 AllMax Software Inc 252 Operator10 Help 9 6 1 Print Report Print Report Pages In the Report Direct Access Tree highlight the Report Folder or Reports you wish to print In the right pane of the Report application double click the Report Folder Icon you wish to print The Report MultiSelect picklist will be visible from the picklist choose from the list of reports to be printed If you have selected a Report Folder to print all pages listed under the Report Folder will be highlighted Enter a Report Date and Print Date then press the S
291. elect button to begin the print process A window Output Options below will open press the Change button choose the printer Select the output method by choosing from the Direct to drop down list box Many options are available view the list for available options Press Start to begin the process Report MultiSelec Filter IN MRO TriFil2 01 IN MRO TriFil3 01 IN MRO TriFil4 01 Jones Field Bio Limit KY DMR 01 KY Plant Sum 01 port Monthly Limits Report Operational Report Date MARAJA MD DMR 01 MS DMR 01 Print Date MT DMR 01 an Y 10 15 2012 Multi Year Annual NC DMR 01 NH DMR 01 NM NMP N1 2014 AllMax Software Inc Reporting 253 T oupa toe Set output options for the selected reports Export Media J HP LaserJet 2100 PCL6 Change Directto Q Preview Options Save options permanently 9 6 2 Print Date Print Date Report Date Enter the Date Reported or select the date from the calendar by pressing the button The Date Reported is the date on which the report will begin processing and displaying data Typically entering the first of the month to be reported will provide the necessary information for the report to begin printing Enter the Form Date or select the date from the calendar by pressing the button The Form Date is the date on which the report is being printed or prepared Press
292. elect using a calendar e All formulas for facility Select this option and click the button to select from a list of facilities select one or multiple facilities to have all formulas for the selected facilities calculated e Calculate selected formulas Select this option and click the button to browse a list of formulas to be calculated Select individual or multiple formulas to be calculated Click the 13 OK button to begin calculating the database More information For more information about calculations see the following topic e Calculations e Scheduled Calculations 15 5 Locked Data Locked Data Data may be Locked protected for any Facility Locked Data allows data values to be viewed reported exported and used in calculations but does not allow data values to be changed within the Operator10 application O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Utilities 511 Select the Facility to lock data Use the drop down menu to choose the Facility for which you want to Lock Data Select the No locked data radio button to disable Data Locking and release all data for the current Facility To Lock Data prior to a specified date select the Locked prior to date radio button and enter a date or press the popup button to choose a date from a Calendar To Lock All Data for the current Facility select the Lock all data radio button Click the 3 OK button to make the changes for the curr
293. elete Pararn Cte rr vi cscccisssssievsscuccsuseccssstecssstesseseeczeceseusstssusessedsevensvseessenetchectisacesesuccrscuesveceied siesevesesatcedesise etsvsxsests 91 Stock PAMELA aa 91 6 Location Parame te ly iviiiicoconninicr a ceeded ace esedis ctiencescevsensstuevededeveeusecevenedeseeeeeeccdie 92 Add Location Parameter sicisisscccscuscasciccstcresscsvesnscsssedercvecsncevesccssssecennvscssesouseecssdtventevesatevesciasssedencrvssncnvenseussrsesser 95 Delete Location Parameter sincsccctccssscecssisessisececessecsncnsstensesedcorsescsnccscesdcecesterseasecussttvcasevecevesvnatsdterteseedebierseeeeesdeces 96 Location Parameter Usage cccsisiissscecscsscssiseseccscsdsesssssnsescesstsetersesssesssaytensesencesccncssossssuscvavssadeesecesuceesiectteieecusseis 96 TARE D AA O 98 Add Data aci o TNT 98 REVIEW Data iii eran caian rt A A AA Ai A AA 99 A O ADAN 100 Alpha Goderssiiiii SA e E 100 Data Value it A de AA AS weaver elt ean ean ida 100 Date a A A Aad eh a AAA A 101 A NS 101 Less Than Non Detect TIMES ARAS AAA IA E levees eva ss IA AAA IATA 8 Process Control os ccccseconuiic a ip A T 104 Process Section HIStory inicia A iia 106 Create Process Calculations cccscsiccsciecssscsssssssesaceceusceesaceusaicevensseseasiouetcoacetceccsssueceseesoeabeesaieseusasesiceysaiseveasvs ess 107 QO AAA cuits Add Formula Delete Formula 2014 AllMax Software Inc Contents 5 A A aa 112 Internal Formulas viii ada 113 10 Alp
294. ements internal process control and plant performance A facility includes tools for data entry review graphing and reporting In terms of Operator10 Wastewater database structure a Facility is second in the hierarchy of the database Facility is used to separate and maintain different lists of items such as Locations Location Parameters Formulas Graphs and Reports Facility can also be used to indicate Security settings and context 2014 AllMax Software Inc ss Operator10 Help 4 4 A aa 9 records 1 selected gt PA 2 2 WAS Select single Facility Facility Name Burpengary East STP Facility Name lt Directory Address Line 1 City State or Province Zip County Report State Security Level basic only Brendale STP Seman DATA_002 Cribb Road Brendale Queensland 4500 Australia basic only Read Write Delete Bribie Island STP DATA_005 First Avenue Bribie Island Queensland Australia basic only Read Write Delete Burpengary East STP DATA_004 Uhimann Road Burpengary Queensland Australia basic only Read Write Delete Caboolture Water Recycle DATA _003 South Caboolture Morayfield Queensland Australia basic only Read WritesDelete Dayboro STP DATA_001 Strong Road Dayboro Queensland Australia basic only Read Write Delete Murumba Downs STP DATA_000 Bickle Road Murrumba Queensland Australia basic only Read Write Delete South Caboolture STP DATA_006 Weir Road Moraytield Queensland A
295. en 1 else 0 NOTE abc x Note text abc is associated with the return the value x O ONCE x y value y ONCE per month on x th day ONCEW x y value y ONCE per Week on x th day OPC a b c x OPC link for node a server b itemc integer x OPC_W a b c x y OPC Write for node a server b item c integer x value y OPTION x y z w value x using OPTIONs for less than y greater than z or non detect w OR x y xl y if x lt gt 0 OR y lt gt 0 1 else O P 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 385 PCT_REM x y PerCenT REMoval x in y out pi 3 141592653589793 as set in the OP10 CFG configuration file see also Constants PRE_LMT x y PREtreatment LiMiT limit type x PREC x y value x to y significant digits PRECision PWR x y xy x to the PoWeR of y Q Q_CSUM p x Calendar Quarter SUM of daily values offset x months Q_SUM I p x Quarterly SUM of daily values offset x months QLIME x y z w V QuickLIME required in mg l R RAND x RANDom value less than x RANGE x1 y2 y3 yn find RANGE of data ROUND x y value x ROUNDed to y decimal places ROUNDE x y value x Even biased ROUNDed to y places S S_AVG l p x AVG of process sections S_SUM I p x SUM of process section SEC x SECant of x SETF x formula SET an internal reference Formula SETVAR x y SET VARx variable to value y SIN x SINe of x SNC_CJP l p x y z w v1 v2 offset type rule avg daily vi
296. en licensed the Audit Trail cannot be disabled Contact AllMax for additional information Accessing the Audit Trail A To access the Audit Trail go to the File menu and choose A Audit Trail to display O 2014 AllMax Software Inc so Operator10 Help the Audit Trail section Tanti i 256 records 1 selected gt Pp 4 S GQ Ap Audit Trail List lt lt Dec Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Dot Nov gt gt P T User Name Application Name Workstation Action Description Reason Data Location Data Parameter Data Value Previous Data Result importutility exe Data Insert Data Access Plant Effluent Flow MGD importutiky exe P49BRIANDESK_ Irialzs ___ NipdSbriandesk almaxwast DB11022012__ importutilty exe IP48BRIANDESK Seat Management 1 Updated IP48BRIANDESK brian importutiity exe IP4BBRIANDESK Seat Management 1 OK IP4BBRIANDESK brian Saar DataViewexe IP4SBRIANDESK Data Delete Data Access Plant Effluent Flow Mad __ DataView exe _ IP4SBRIANDESK Data Delete _ Data Access _ Plant Effluent Flow Mad DataView exe IP4SBRIANDESK Data Delete Data Access Plant Effluent Flow Mad DataView exe IP4SBRIANDESK Data Delete Data Access Plant Effluent Flow Mad _ DataView exe Data Delete DataAccess q Plant Effluent Flow Mod DataView ere IPABBRIANDESK Data Delete Data Access Plant Effluent Flow Mod DataView exe IPABBRIANDESK Data Delete Data Access Plant Effluent Flow Mad
297. endar If hourly data entries are entered tap the Time selector to edit the time The default setting the Use System pushbutton always uses the current DataPort time but by selecting the Use Entered pushbutton a specific time may be entered for hourly data Daily data values ignore time settings Facility Location and Parameter may be scanned selected from a PickList or entered using graffiti Enter a data Value using the popup KeyPad by tapping the Key button Data values may also be entered by using graffiti or the scanner All data types Daily or Hourly values Less Than Greater Than or Non Detect values Time values or Alpha Codes are supported Enter or blank to enter a BLANK data value 2014 AllMax Software Inc DataPort 367 Tap the Value selector to quickly select the entire data Value text for replacement or editing The Minimum lo and Minimum hi data entry limits and the Parameter units are shown below the value when available Tap the Save button to store the data The data will be transferred during the next HotSync operation If a valid combination of Facility Location and Parameter is not entered or the format of the data Value is not recognized or the value is not within the data entry limits an error message is displayed If all data is valid a confirmation message is displayed If a data value already exists for that combination of Facility Location Parameter and Date
298. ent 50050 3 3 increase for week beginning 3 days ago D_COUNT I p x y D_COUNT I p x Daily COUNT for location and parameter offset x days for y days Value The count of data values of a specific location and parameter for the date x days from the current date and extending for a range of y days The function counts only valid data it ignores Alpha Codes Less Than Greater Than or Non Detect values if Facility options are set to blank When a parameter to calculate loading is specified amp or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter D_COUNT p I_flow p_flow x y Examples O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 399 D_COUNT Effluent 50050 7 7 count of past 7 days D_COUNT Effluent 50050 3 7 count of week beginning 3 days ago 14 6 4 D_FLOW I p x y D_FLOW I p x Daily FLOW for location and parameter offset x months for y days Value The flow value in MG D for any location including a process or section The value p is ignored use An additional parameter z may be added to return 1 for gal d 2 for km3 d 3 for I d Examples D_FLOW Effluent 0 0 flow value today D_FLOW Effluent 3 0 flow value from 3 months ago D_FLOW Effluent 0 0 1 flow value from today converted to gallons per day 14 6 5 D_FWA I p x D_FWA I p x Daily Flow Weighted Average for location and paramet
299. ent Facility Lock data prior to a specific date Facility Mumumba Downs STP v 9 No locked data Locked priorto date Lock all data 15 6 Import Utility Import Utility The Operator10 Wastewater Import Utility ImportUtility exe allows seamless integration of data from other application into the Operator10 Wastewater database and may be used to import data to multiple Facilities The utility must be run from the directory where the Operator10 Wastewater Application Operator10 exe is located It runs transparently and can be run without interaction from the user Basic information and all errors are recorded in the Import log file Default Usage The following information relates to the default usage of the ImportUtility exe application e The data import file must named using the following file extension imp O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 512 Operator10 Help e The data import file must be stored in the Database directory e The notes import file must be named using the following file extension impnote e The notes import file must be stored in the Database directory Custom Usage To make use of custom settings edit the Database Properties for Import Settings The following information is provided in order to customize the usage of the ImportUtility exe application e Import files path the path used by the ImportUtility to find and access files for importing set this path by clicking the bu
300. er offset x days for y days Value The flow weighted average of data values of a specific location and parameter for the date x days from the current date and extending for a range of y days Data values where either the parameter or the flow is BLANK are ignored see also Flow Weighted Average in the main Synexus application When a parameter to calculate loading is specified amp or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter D_FWA I p l_flow p_flow x y Examples D_FWA Effluent 50050 7 7 flow weighted average of past 7 days D_FWA Effluent 50050 3 7 flow weighted average of week beginning 3 days ago 14 6 6 D_GAUGK p I p x y D_GAUGE I p l p x Daily GAUGE value for location and parameter supply value from second location and parameter multiplier y offset x days Value The value calculated from the decrease in gauge reading at a specific location and parameter The function uses the gauge data from the date x days from the current date 2014 AllMax Software Inc 400 Operator10 Help 14 6 7 14 6 8 the last data prior to that date an additional supply value from the date x days from the current date and a multiplier It returns the change in gauge reading multiplied by the multiplier value less the added supply The function considers only valid data and will return BLANK if there is no valid gauge data fo
301. er Properties Date Format Select from the list of available choices in the Date Format drop down menu to display date information Entry of specific date formatting options is available see the Date Format Options topic for more information Row Height Enter a numeric value to define the height of the displayed data rows Font amp Color Press the button to select the Font properties for the Row Headers Font style size color and effects can be selected Data Display Properties Limits Color Press the button to select a color to be used in the display of data values that exceed the Location Parameter data entry upper and lower limits Quick Note Color Press the button to select a color to be used in the display of the Quick Note indicator Font Color Press the button to select the Font properties for the data Font style size color and effects can be selected Row Striping Place a check in the Row Striping checkbox to display alternating background colors for the data rows DataView Properties Column Setup DataView Properties Column Setup In the Column Setup tab users can customize column setup for the DataView Users can perform the following actions O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Dataview 181 All Properti Ready on DataView Properties Column Setup Column Properties Print Properties 10 records 1 selected gt DU X S E AS
302. er the Formula Name or press the popup button to choose from a PickList e Up to two y axis scales are available for graphing Select the 2 radio button if the Location Parameter Data values should be graphed along a secondary y axis Open Graph Date Range Date Range An option Prompt on Open is available when defining the Data Source properties for any graph This prompt when enabled upon opening a graph will provide the user with the ability to set the graph start and end dates Enter a date or click the button to use the Calendar option Users may also use the Relative Dates feature to provide dates relative to the current date Stat Date MNR End Date 01 31 11 Calendar Calendar When prompted users will be able to select or enter dates as it applies to the start and end of data to be displayed on any given graph Use the calender tool to enter or select a date For more information see the Date Calendar help topic as well as the Relative Dates topic E O 2014 AllMax Software Inc raping 2 8 3 8 3 1 01 01 11 4 January 2011 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu 26 2 28 29 30 2 4 5 6 9 11 12 13 16 18 19 20 23 25 26 27 30 1 2 3 4 C Today 12 03 201 Graph Options Topics in this section include e Graph Type e Linear Regression e Graph Data Type e Graph Tools e Balloons Graph Type Graph Type Graphs are available in 14 basic Graph Types and s
303. er window can click on the menu and select Contents to view the List amp Label Report Designer Help 2014 AllMax Software Inc 248 Operator10 Help Creating Reports When creating Custom Reports press the Edit Template button to open the Designer window and begin editing the report template To modify a report template you can drag variables into the Layout Preview pane In the List of variables pane there is a tree displaying the available variables for the template Expand the folders by pressing the button next to each folder In each folder there are available variables The folders labeled Itemxxx correspond to the selected Location Parameters For single values under the Variables folder find the Itemxxx folder and expand it within that folder you may see e Calc Calculation e Header Header e Locat Location e Param Parameter e Result Numeric Result Units Units For repeating values under the Fields folder find the Itemxxx folder and expand it within that folder you may see e Date Date e Result Numeric Result Modifying Objects Once an object has been placed on the report you can modify it s appearance by double clicking on it to view the Properties window Several appearance options are visible in the right pane of the Properties window Click in the appropriate appearance option to modify it Dr To add information to be displayed in the selected object pres
304. er x or y is FALSE 0 or BLANK FALSE is returned Examples 2014 AllMax Software Inc 390 Operator10 Help 14 4 2 14 4 3 14 4 4 14 4 5 AND 3 14 3 1 3 1480 0 BIT x y BIT x y If BIT x of value y is 1 then TRUE else FALSE Value If the bit binary digit x of value y is equal to 1 the value TRUE 1 is returned If it is equal to 0 the value FALSE 0 is returned If x is less than O or greater than 15 or y is negative or greater than 65535 the function returns BLANK Examples BIT 1 2 1 bit 1 of binary 00000010 BIT 0 5 1 bit O of binary 00000101 BIT 1 4 0 bit 1 of binary 00000100 EQUAL x y If x is EQUAL to y then TRUE else FALSE Value If x is equal to y the value TRUE 1 is returned If x is not equal to y the value FALSE 0 is returned If x and y are both BLANK the function returns TRUE Examples EQUAL 3 14 3 0 3 14 3 14 1 EQUAL BLANK BLANK 1 GT x y GT x y x gt y If x is Greater Than y then TRUE else FALSE Value If x is greater than y the value TRUE 1 is returned If x is less than or equal to y the value FALSE 0 is returned If y is BLANK and x is a value the function returns TRUE If x is BLANK the function returns FALSE Examples GT 3 14 3 1 3 14 gt 3 14 0 IF x y Z IF x y Z IF x is true then y else z Value If x is TRUE not equal to 0 the value y is returned If x is FALSE equal to 0 2014 AllMax Sof
305. erator10 and print a document Upon printing a prompt may be visible asking for the user to log the document as printed with an associated note Depending on the settings found in the Database Properties section users can edit which sections of the program prompt for logging documents Delete Logged Documents To delete a logged document highlight the document in the list and click the x Delete button Confirm the deletion of data by clicking the Y Yes Yes or X no No button 4 14 5 Logged Documents Graph Logged Documents The Logged Documents feature allows users to log versions of documents DataViews Graphs and Reports as they are printed Logged documents can be reprinted at any time as they were printed the first time a Sa Logged Documents 196 records 1 selected gt f x Q A P Murrumba Downs STP Facility Name Date Logged Description File Name Type User Name Comment 011 11 23 Brendale DERM ip48briandesk al Report use September 11 22 2011 12 36 Brendale DERM ip48briandesk al Report 12 16 2011 08 36 Brendale DERM ip48briandesk al Report 01 17 2012 11 25 Brendale DERM ip48briandesk al Report 01 23 2012 13 41 Brendale DERM Mip 48briandesktal Report 0212 2012 11 03 Brendale DERM Sip48briandesk al Report 02 14 2012 15 52 Brendale DERM ip48briandesk al Report 02 23 2012 12 54 Brendale DERM ip48briandesk al Report 5
306. ers may Import or Export Facility data into and from existing databases To begin the process of Importing or Exporting Facility data go to the File menu and choose Open Database Locate and click the Import Export Facility button The Import Export Facility window will open follow the steps below to Import or Export facility data Import Facility When importing data users will be able to create a new facility based on the selected export file from Operator10 Wastewater The new facility will be added to the current database 1 Choose the Import Facility option to begin 2 Enter a new Facility Name 1 to 30 characters 3 Click the button in the FileName field to choose the Exported facility file zip to be imported 4 Click the 13 OK button to import the facility ia Import Export Facility Enter information to Import or Export facility information O Import Facility Export Facility Facility Name File Name Export Facility When exporting data the created file will be suitable for importing into other installations of Operator10 Wastewater importing into other databases in Operator10 Wastewater as well as sending to AllMax Software Technical Support staff 1 Choose the Export Facility option to begin 2 The Facility Name field will be filled with the Facility you have chosen to Export 3 Click the button in the File Name field to choose a file location and name t
307. ers only valid data and will return BLANK if there is no valid data equal to or earlier than the date If z is less than or equal to zero the function returns BLANK The median Loading may be returned by adding the additional parameter D_LASTNM l p x y z 1 Examples D_LASTNM Effluent 50050 1 0 7 median of seven values one month ago or earlier 14 6 14 D_LASTNN I p x y z D_LASTNN I p x y z n Daily Nth value of LAST z Number of values for location and parameter offset x months and y days Value The Nth data value of z number of data values of a specific location and parameter equal to or prior to the date x months and y days from the current date the last data values not later than the date The values are ordered from minimum to maximum and the nth highest value is returned For instance if the data values are 6 2 5 8 and 3 the 4th value would be 6 If n is used the values are ordered from maximum to minimum and the nth lowest value is returned If n is blank zero or greater than the number of data values the function returns BLANK The function considers only valid data and will return BLANK if there is no valid data equal to or earlier than the date If z is less than or equal to zero the function returns BLANK The Nth Loading may be returned by adding the additional parameter D_LASTNN lI p x y z n 1 Examples D_LASTNN Effluent 50050 1 0 7 2 2nd of seven values one month ago or earlier
308. es e General Information e Site e Reporting Inclusions Bio Nutrient Report e Comments 9 7 7 2 1 BioSolids Nutrient Report General Properties General Properties In the General Properties section of the Bio Nutrient Report users can modify several options including 2014 AllMax Software Inc Page Adjustment and Print settings Size Enter a percentage to which you would like to reduce the printed form X Offset Adjust the X coordinate to which you would like to offset the printed form Y Offset Adjust the Y coordinate to which you would like to offset the printed form JAllow Remarks Place a check in this checkbox to verify enter comments at the time of printing the Bio Nutrient Report Treat lt gt Data As Select from the drop down menu to determine the method by which data with the less than lt greater than gt or non detect data qualifiers will be treated Available options are e Preserve Types Calculations will preserve the available data qualifiers and calculated results will display the appropriate data qualifier Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 6 2 1 4 lt 3 as the less than symbol to be preserved for the final calculation Entered Value Calculations will drop the data qualifiers from data and calculated results will display without the qualifiers using only the numeric entered portion of the data Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 6 2 1 4 3
309. es 22 LICENSE A A ais 22 Key Code WITT AA ATA AeA I ea cd ee 22 ContfigUration FllS icon icecsscevscconscveeesazeceusacesuceusstsevetsvsveisievaeceaceesedeuesvanessensdassuesosecevestusdceussiesvensveneasts 23 Help AB OUt AAA O NT 23 System A O OO 26 O 26 3 SUpport isian anaana a dd iaa 26 SUP PONE A CA 27 A Help File CONVENtIONS ia e a e aae aA a Kaeaea aaiae na r ea aa aeaa Reis diaaa 27 S Copyrights arein TO 28 Part Ill General Features 30 see Clits A pereterr re reer cert A rere reer rere cere rer er eperr eter cere rer T 30 Grid TOOID AR A rai n 30 Grid AA e Es 36 Grid Data Vie Wi pas 38 A NN 40 MultiEdit ocio ii a iaa a 40 A O OT 41 User A ON 42 US OF AAA O DO 43 User LP Permisi S A e are a a aE dadt era Eae Eaa n aa N SEE 45 O NN 45 A DatelCalendar iii A dias 47 Relativo Dates bet eed vended eeah bed hana tiated tat eee eae aai 48 TANG ar anes cecueeee PA 49 BPE AAA AO 49 6 WINDOWS LOGIN da 51 7 Auto Update vee coxis ii 51 Part IV Main Application 56 1 Application Characteristics a a Alen RARA 56 Quick Access TOO0 bA ivi A 56 MENU Ste MA iras 57 File Menu A A te Ae ee 57 Dashboard tac ed 58 O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 4 Operator10 Help WAS W RIDDOM EEEE TARET TTE A cotalesuacesudeshssentusactuenseudushsndcssaute Suonaeibabcaeuthoveaata EEST 59 Setup RIDON iieri e a aee eee i e a saa cucteconcecuweve seven ceubnvcun cure EEA A a aTa 61 BioSolidsRIDDOMN
310. ess View Only Add Edit Delete to limit access to the Graphing section Import Choices include Access No Access to enable disable the ability to Import data Limits Bio Choices include No Access View Only Add Edit Delete to limit access to the Limits section of the BioSolids Site Limits section Locked Data Choices include Access No Access to enable disable the ability to Lock Data for the selected facility OPC DDE Choices include No Access View Only Add Edit Delete to limit access to the OPC DDE Interface Operator 10 Notes Choices include No Access View Only Add Edit Delete to limit access to the Notes section Owners List Bio Choices include No Access View Only Add Edit Delete to limit access to the BioSolids Owner section Process History Choices include No Access View Only Add Edit Delete to limit access to the Process History section Process Setup Choices include No Access View Only Add Edit Delete to limit access to the Process Setup section Reports Choices include No Access View Only Add Edit Delete to limit access to the Reports section Sampling Events Choices include No Access View Only Add Edit Delete to limit access to the Sampling Events section O 2014 AllMax Software Inc General Features 47 The following is a legend for the various security options e Access Allows user access to the selected section of Operator10 and enables use of that section e No Access De
311. ete Alpha Code Users can delete Alpha Codes as needed with an Alpha Code selected click the x Delete button Confirm the deletion of data by clicking the Y Yes Yes or X No No button 2014 AllMax Software Inc ns Operator10 Help 4 11 Chemicals Chemical The Chemical section allows the User to define chemicals used for the current Facility Calculations may then be performed for a Process in which chemicals are used based on Percent Strength Specific Gravity and Cost per Pound Kilogram Gallon or Liter 1 record 1 selected gt X X Ba a Bl P Town of Montague Chemical List Facility Name Town of Montague UnitType 1 5 Gallons Accessing the Chemical List To access the Chemical List go to the Setup ribbon and choose EN Chemicals button Add Chemical Users can create add Chemicals to the list click the k Add button Enter the following information e Parameter Click the button to select from a list of Parameters Select the Parameter that will be used to store the amount of chemical added to a process e Unit Select from the list of available units all options for Units are displayed e Percent Strength Enter the Percent Strength of the chemical being applied 2014 AllMax Software Inc Main Application no e Specific Gravity Enter the Specific Gravity of the chemical being applied e Cost Per Unit Enter the Cost Per Unit of t
312. eter y 4 Sx u x the Sample Standard Deviation of the values one location parameter 2 Ot 2 SS x 2 I e n y 5 the Sum of the Squares of the Deviations of the values one location parameter 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 463 CI 196 Vx y 6 the Confidence Interval 95 of the values assumes large n one location parameter y 7 2x1 the Sum of the Products of the first and second location parameter ut Y s LL Cry 2917 y 8 E the Covariance of the values Y Sy Y Zaf x the Sum of the Products of the Deviations z y 9 of the values Ot SS b oe y 10 HHX the Slope of the sample Linear Regression line yb y 11 n the y Intercept of the sample Linear Regression line E SSxy SSES 7 y 12 the Correlation Coefficient of the values y 14 me n the Population Variance of the values one location parameter y 15 Sx Y x the Population Standard Deviation of the values one location parameter The number of months may be specified where mis the number of months add the additional parameter M_STAT I p I p x y m 2014 AllMax Software Inc 464 Operator10 Help Examples M_STAT Inf Dom 50050 BLANK 1 1 sum of past month M_STAT Inf Dom 50050 Inf Ind 50050 0 8 Covariance for the month 14 11 14M_STDEV I p x M_STDEV I p x Monthly STandard DEViation for location and parameter offset x months Value The standard deviation of data v
313. everal Multiple Types can be created by assigning different types to each Location Parameter Series Up to 8 Location Parameters or Formulas can be graphed at once using a secondary y axis if required Graph types colors patterns point shapes lines multiple series types 3 D qualities and rotation linear or logarithmic scales units grids titles legends fonts and sizes are all configurable by the user Available basic Graph Types include Area Lines Horizontal Bars Pie Surface Bars Marks Scatter X Y Doughnut Pareto Cubes Fit to Curve Open Hi Lo Close Polar 2014 AllMax Software Inc 222 Operator10 Help 8 3 2 8 3 3 8 3 4 8 3 5 Linear Regression Linear Regression A Linear Regression line can be shown on the graph for X Y Scatter graphs Mark the Regression checkbox in the Data Editor The slope intercept and correlation coefficient values will be shown in the upper left corner of the graph 8 00 y a bx e a 0 0143824 E 7 50 4 b 3 01777 coeff 0 9636 E a Graph Data Type Graph Data Type Range The Data Type and Date Range may be shown at the lower left side of the graph by marking the Graph Data Type Range menu item The text will use the same font as the x legend Graph Tools Graph Tools The Graph Tools toolbar item provide quick access to commonly used features and functionality Tl v Legend Y Series Legend v ToolBar PaletteBar PatternBar Status
314. ew Facility 71 New Graph 224 New Label 119 New Process 102 New Report Availability 244 New Sampling Event 333 New User 42 New View 153 Next 401 405 418 No data 396 Node 345 Nonblank 426 427 Non Blank 431 NONBLANK 431 Non Detect 101 386 394 447 451 466 Non Detect Data 101 Non Zero 431 NONZERO 431 Normal Distribution 426 Not 394 NOTO 394 Note 368 386 446 451 NOTE 446 Notes 337 NOW 395 nth 403 446 449 459 Number 398 416 425 454 478 480 498 Numbers 366 Numeric 386 451 Numeric Data 100 Nutrient List 148 Nutrient Report 316 0 OLE for Process Control 340 OLE for Process Control OPC 467 ONCE 446 ONCEW 447 OPC 340 341 342 343 467 OPC Client 340 OPC Link 342 OPC Link Name 344 OPC Linking 469 470 OPC Serer 345 OPC 469 OPC DDE 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 350 351 OPC DDE Error 350 OPC DDE Error Codes 350 OPC DDE Errors 350 OPC DDE Functions 467 OPC DDE Links 342 OPC DDE Log 350 OPC DDE Serer 351 OPC DDE Server Functionality 351 OPC DDE Setup 342 348 OPC_W 470 Open Database 57 Open Graph 224 Operator Log 337 Operator Notes 337 Operator10 Agent 505 Operator10 Help 57 Operator10 Options 67 Operator10 Tools 519 Operators Log 337 Option 447 OPTION 447 Options 57 67 165 Or 395 ORO 395 Out of Service 106 Owner 144 O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Index 531 Owner List 144 Print Properties Footer 188 Print Pr
315. f month is controlled by facility option if z is 6 then only full weeks Sun Sat in the month are considered w is the type of average used if w is O then the average is the arithmetic mean average if w is 1 then the average is the geometric mean for fecals if w is 2 then the average is the flow weighted average Daily values may be considered as persistent calculations use the last data not later than 2014 AllMax Software Inc ass Operator10 Help the date by adding 32 to the type y The number of months may be specified for monthly 7 day and hourly calculations where mis the number of months add the additional parameter M_AVG I p x y Z w m When a parameter to calculate loading is specified amp or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter M_AVG I p I_flow p_flow x y z w Examples M_AVG Effluent 50050 0 0 0 0 current month monthly average M_AVG Effluent 31614 1 1 0 1 previous month 7 day continuous average for fecals 14 11 2 M_COMP I p x y M_COMP I p x Monthly COMPare for location and parameter offset x months offset y months Value The difference in data values for a specific location and parameter comparing the date x months from the current date to the date y months from the current date Examples M_COMP Effluent 50050 0 1 increase since the previous month M_COMP Effluent 5
316. f the program at any time When prompted users can choose to log the document or not as well as entering a note or comment about the document that has been printed and is being logged m Log Complete Enter comments and log complete ves J _ mo Logged Documents All Logged Documents The Logged Documents feature allows users to log versions of documents DataViews Graphs and Reports as they are printed Logged documents can be reprinted at any time as they were printed the first time O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 130 Operator10 Help Da a ee Logged Documents 196 records 1 selected gt PU KR S QA L Murrumba Downs STP Facility Name 4 Date Logged Description File Name Type User Name Comment 10 13 2011 11 23 Brendale DERM WMip48briandesktal Report September 11 22 2011 12 36 Brendale DERM Sip48briandesk al Report 12 16 2011 08 35 Brendale DERM ip48briandesk al Report 01 17 2012 11 25_ Brendale DERM ip48briandesk al Report 01 123 2012 13 41 Brendale DERM ip48briandesk al Report 02 12 2012 11 03 Brendale DERM Mip48briandesktal Report 02 14 2012 15 52 Brendale DERM Nipd8briandesktal Report 02 23 2012 12 54 Brendale DERM in48briandesk al Report The Logged Documents section allows users to view a list of logged documents printed from the DataView Graphing and Reporting sections Accessing Logged Doc
317. f z is 6 then only full weeks Sun Sat in the month are considered w is the type of average used if w is O then the average is the arithmetic mean average if w is 1 then the average is the geometric mean for fecals if w is 2 then the average is the flow weighted average v1 is the daily violation limit v2 is the average violation limit The count of violations and values may be returned instead of the ratio add 4 to y in order to return the count of violations add 8 to y in order to return the count of values Daily values may be considered as persistent calculations use the last data not later than the date by adding 32 to the type y The number of months is assumed to be 6 but may be specified for monthly 7 day and hourly calculations where mis the number of months add the additional parameter SNC_CIP I p x y z w v1 v2 m When a parameter to calculate loading is specified O 8 or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter SNC_CJP I p _flow p_flow x y z w v1 v2 Examples SNC_CJP Effluent 00400 0 0 0 0 8 5 8 current 6 months SNC daily maximum exceeding 8 5 monthly avg exceeding 8 SNC_CJP Effluent 00400 6 1 3 0 8 5 1 2 8 1 2 previous 6 months SNC 7 day ist of Month exceeding limits by 20 SNC_CJP Effluent 00400 6 1 3 0 8 5 1 2 8 1 2 gt 33 TRUE if the ratio is greater than 33 14 16 1 SNC_MAXD I p x
318. ffset y days D_COUNT p x y COUNT offset x days for y days D_FLOW I p x y FLOW value offset x months for y days D_FWA I p x Flow Weighted Avg offset x days for y days D_GAUGE I p l p x y GAUGE value supply l p offset x days multiplier y D_GMEAN I p x y Geometric MEAN offset x days for y days D_IGAUGE I p l p x y Interpolated GAUGE value supply l p offset x days multiplier y D_IMTR l p x y z Interpolated MeTeR value offset x days max meter reading y multiplier z D_INTER I p x INTERpolate from adjacent data offset x days D_LAST l p x y LAST value not later than date offset x months y days D_LASTN I p x y z average of LAST z Number of values not later than date offset x months y days D_LASTNM I p x y z Median of LAST z Number of values not later than date offset x months y days D_LASTNN I p x y z n Nth highest of LAST z Number of values not later than date offset x months y days D_LASTNP l p x y z w wth Percentile of LAST z Number of values not later than date offset x months y days D_LOADING I p x y LOADING value offset x months for y days D_MAX l p x y MAXimum offset x days for y days D_METER I p x y z METER value offset x days max meter reading y multiplier z D_MIN I p x y MINimum offset x days for y days D_NEXT Il p x y NEXT value not prior to date offset x months y days D_STAT I p l p x y z Daily STATistics of
319. following parameters and calculations are provided for the current Process Pot Gak ltems marked with an asterisk are unavailable and will NOT be created Location Parameter Description Dependencies Flow Mgd Flow Million Gallons Day Flow Mgd Flow Million Gallons Day Primary Clr 3 Flow Mad Flow Million Gallons Day Primary Cir Pro Flow Mgd Primary Flow Mad source flow LBod 5 source Bod 5 Flow Mad RBod 5 source Bod 5 How Mad PBod 5 source Bod 5 Flow Mgd XBod 5 Primary Cir Eff Bod 5 Primary Cir LSolids TSS i source Solids TSS How Mgd RSolids TSS source Solids TSS How Mgd PSolids TSS source Solids TSS How Mad XSolids TSS Primary Cir Eff Solids TSS Prima Priman Cartinm uli Create Calculations Upon review of the list of calculations to be generated users should press the Create button to generate the provided Location Parameters This process will create the L Ps as well as the necessary internal formulas used in the calculation of this data 2014 AllMax Software Inc 108 Operator10 Help 4 9 Print Calculations list Click the Print button to print the provided list of calculations for review Formula Formula Formulas may be entered and used by name for calculating Location Parameter values Additionally formulas can be written for use in DataViews Reports and Graphs For more information contact AllMax Technical Support The Formula List displays all
320. for processing with the Operator10 Agent provided that you have added the server database to the list to be processed Scheduled Calculation 1 Go to the Tools ribbon menu and choose Es Schedule in the Calculations group to begin 2 Choose the facility multiple facilities can be selected to be calculated 3 Enter a number of days from the current date to perform calculations 4 Press D OK to continue 5 In the Schedule dialog that opens if this schedule is e New press the New button to begin scheduling O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Uitites 509 e Existing proceed to the schedule information step 6 6 Select from the options in the Schedule Task menu to determine the frequency of the task 7 Provide additional information based on the choice of schedule frequency to continue 8 Click OK to continue Your task is now scheduled and ready for processing with the Operator10 Agent provided that you have added the server database to the list to be processed Scheduled Import Go to the Tools ribbon menu and choose E Schedule Imports from the menu to begin 2 In the Schedule dialog that opens if this schedule is e New press the New button to begin scheduling e Existing proceed to the schedule information step 3 3 Select from the options in the Schedule Task menu to determine the frequency of the task 4 Provide additional information based on the choice of schedule frequency to continue 5 Click O
321. formulas associated with the selected facility Formula Details displays details of the currently selected formula Accessing the Formula List To access the Formula list go to the Setup ribbon and choose the A Formula button This will display the Formula list Internal Formulas To view Internal Formulas only place a check in the Internal Formulas checkbox To view formulas from another facility use the drop down menu in the toolbar to choose a different facility O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Main Application 109 5 E Formula ole x id lt 4 118 records 1 selected gt Da gt X x a a a Dr Y Internal Formulas J Town of Montague Facility Name Formula Formula Text Comments Parsed Text ID Attached L P Secu Town of Montague Inventory P 6 7 base parameter DIW MUL MUL 20 Read Wwrite Town of Montague Inventory 7 27 76 71 base parameter DIW MUL MUL 28 Read Write Town of Montague Inventory _S formula base parameter DIW MUL 32 Read Write Town of Montague Inventory_S formula base parameter DIW MUL 24 Read Wite Town of Montague InventoryYol 7 1Solids base parameter DIW MUL LP 36 Read Write Formula e g MAX INFLOW 00310 3 7 100 Town of Montague lf JOE flow base 8 Write Town of Montague Loading o base parameter DIW MUL MUL 12
322. fset x days for y days type z D_STDEV I p x y STandard DEViation offset x days for y days D_SUM I p x y SUM offset x days for y days D_TOTAL I p x y avg range offset x days for y days D_VAL I p x y VALue offset x mon y days O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 398 Operator10 Help 14 6 1 14 6 2 14 6 3 e LP I p l p Location Parameter data e LOG REM x y LOGarithm of REMoval x in y out e PCT_REM x y PerCenT REMoval x in y out D_AVG I p x y D_AVG I p x Daily AVeraGe for location and parameter offset x days for y days Value The average of data values of a specific location and parameter for the date x days from the current date and extending for a range of y days When a parameter to calculate loading is specified amp or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter D_AVG p l_flow p_flow x y Examples D_AVG Effluent 50050 7 7 average of past 7 days D_AVG Effluent 50050 3 7 average of week beginning 3 days ago D_COMP I p x y D_COMP I p x Daily COMPare for location and parameter offset x days offset y days Value The difference in data values for a specific location and parameter comparing the date x days from the current date to the date y days from the current date Examples D_COMP Effluent 50050 0 7 increase for past week since 7 days ago D_COMP Efflu
323. g in LB SF SL_SF loading in LB LSolids Vol or LSolids TSS surface area of tank SL_KCF_CBOD Solids Loading in LB 1000CF SL_KCF loading in LB LBOD Carb 5 volume of tank 7480 SL_KCF Solids Loading in LB 1000CF SL_KCF loading in LB LBOD 5 volume of tank 7480 SL_HSF Solids Loading in LB HR SF SL_HSF loading in LB LSolids Vol or sLSolids TSS runhours RUNHRS surface area of tank SL_CF Solids Loading in LB CF SL_CF loading in LB LSolids Vol or LSolids TSS volume of tank 7 48 SL_CFVol Volitile Solids Loading in LB CF SL_CF loading in LB LSolids Vol or LSolids TVSS volume of tank 7 48 RespRate Respiration Rate in MG HR GVSS RESP oxygen uptake in MG L HR OXYUPT solids in MGL Solids TVSS or Solids TSS 1000 Flow_P Flow Percent FLOW_P waste flow Flow MGD influent flow Flow MGD 100 Flow_T Total Flow in MGD FLOW_T waste flow Flow MGD influent flow Flow MGD HLoad Hydrolic Loading in GPD SF HLOAD waste flow Flow MGD influent flow Flow MGD surface area of tank 1000000 Alk NH3 Alkalinity NH3 N Ratio ALK NH3 alkalinity Alkalinity ammonia Nh3 N Ammonia VolAcid Alk Volatile Acid Alkalinity Ratio VA A volatile acids Volatile Acids alkalinity Alkalinity or PhenPhLfinAlk VolRed Percent Volatile Reduction VOLRED 1 VSS out Solids Vol VSS in Solids Vol
324. g only the numeric entered portion of the data Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 6 2 1 4 3 as the less than symbol will be dropped for the final calculation Half Entered Value Calculations will drop the data qualifiers from data and calculated results will display without the qualifiers using one half the entered value of the data Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 6 1 1 4 2 75 as the less than symbol is dropped and 2 is divided in half for final calculation Zero Calculations will drop the data qualifiers from data and calculated results will display without the qualifiers using zero 0 in place of any entered data Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 6 0 1 4 2 5 as the less than symbol is dropped and 0 is used in place of lt 2 for the final calculation Blank no data Calculations will drop the data qualifiers from data and calculated results will display without the qualifiers treating data entered with qualifiers to be seen as blank Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 6 1 3 3 333 as the less than symbol is dropped and no data is used in place of lt 2 in the final calculation 2014 AllMax Software Inc General Properties Adjust Page Size X Offset o Y Offset 0 Month Type Continuous Floating y Treat lt gt Data As Preserve Types EI Add Plant Effluent BOD 5 MG L LP BOD DESC Remove Move Up Move Dn E All
325. g the decimal to be displayed as a default decimal precision can be set individually in other sections as desired Entry Type Data entry can be either Daily or Hourly Choose from the following options to determine the appropriate data entry type e Daily Select Daily to allow for daily data entry e Hourly non sum Select Hourly non sum to allow for hourly data entry with no daily summary Hourly avg Select Hourly avg to allow for hourly data entry with a daily summary of average e Hourly max Select Hourly max to allow for hourly data entry with a daily summary of maximum e Hourly min Select Hourly min to allow for hourly data entry with a daily summary of minimum e Hourly sum Select Hourly sum to allow for hourly data entry with a daily summary of sum e Hourly count Select Hourly count to allow for hourly data entry with a daily summary of the count of entries per day Formula Select a formula for the Location Parameter by clicking the button A formula list will be shown choose a formula to be attached and used in the calculation of the Location Parameter Lower Limit Enter a lower data entry limit to be warned if unexpected values are entered in the DataView Additionally for data entered via other methods the text color of the entry should it be below the Lower Limit will be red Upper Limit Enter a upper data entry limit to be warned if unexpected values are entered in the DataView Additionally for dat
326. h to Date To immediately calculate from the first of the month to the current date click the Month to Date button Calculations will automatically be performed starting on the first of the current month through the current date CALCULATE Previous Month to Date To immediately calculate from the first of the previous month to the current date click 2014 AllMax Software Inc Main Application 123 the l Previous Month to Date button Calculations will automatically be performed starting on the first of the previous month through the current date Scheduling a Calculation To schedule a calculation routine using the Operator10 Agent Scheduling tool see the Scheduled Calculation help topic Calculation Order The order in which calculations are performed is vital in order to avoid missing or non calculated values based on dependencies As process calculations and user written formulas may depend on other calculated values it is important to maintain proper order To view or reorder the current order in which all data is to be calculated go to the gt Tools ribbon and choose the gt Change Order button To move the calculations up or down highlight a listed calculation and single left click on the record to drag the record to the desired position Changes to calculation order should be immediately visible click the 3 OK button to save the changes 4 13 1 Averages Topics in this section include e 4 Day
327. ha Codes a arnes 116 11 Chemicals comoda a a aE aai naaa eaa awaa Naai uNa DENNE 118 92 Barcode Labels 0 a se A a aa aa a a E a AEE Aana 119 Barcode Template Name isccsccsecscsssssavcscevesaresssseussvesencecsnscavcavevecasesesvenserssensevenscaveivevectesduevenseresencavensvescavevecrensnets 121 13 CalculatiONS iii ii ai 121 NO O O N 123 4 Day Average De we 123 TeDay AV Grage it A A eh a 124 Average MEN A aia aii he Melia a iid detained ida 125 Flow Weighted AV erage unit A A AS 125 Geometric MEN iii AA A AD Manipal rat 126 R nding Ulsa A A A A NA 126 Standard DEVIN aia ida ii AAA dei dE 127 14 gt Logged Document iio iii 127 Log DOCUIM CE APP PUOU 0 0ZQZ QQZE A e On o Kaaren Anarai a aaaea iaaea Naara ka nanira 129 Logged Documents All AAA At 129 Logged Documents DataView c ccescceeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeesaeeseaneesaneenaeeseaneesaeeseneessaeeesaaeeneaeessaeeeseeeenseeeeeaees 131 Logged Documents Re port omoconccinnncnnnncnnnncnnncnncnnrr anara Kee aa SAK eaaa aaae aa aane danadana taiii aaaeei iiiaae aaia 132 Logged Documents Graph cccseceesceeeeeeeeseeeesneeeeeneeeeeeeaeeesaneeeaeeeneaeeesaeeesaeeensaeessaeeesaeeeneaeessaeeeeneeeneeeensaees 133 Part V BioSolids 136 BiOSOlIAS Listin E dial e 136 2 BIOS OMS SHOES iii ii ii 139 Site Detail ca O ias 142 ISTMO OWNER A a dk 144 SM MAS A A ads 145 5 Nutrient List ooo i 148 6 BioSolids APPLICATION coli ives cau
328. has both Upper and Lower Entry Limits defined Entered Value Limit Upper displayed in each data cell when an a entered value has exceeded the Upper Entry Limit defined for the selected Location Parameter Entered Value Limit Lower displayed in each data cell when an Y entered value has exceeded the Lower Entry Limit defined for the selected Location Parameter 7 10 4 Find Data Find Data Data values in a DataView may be easily found by selecting the Find icon on the Edit ribbon Find data using the options below Data Value Scope Current Column 2014 AllMax Software Inc 202 Operator10 Help Finding Data 1 Enter the partial phrase or criteria 0 to 255 characters desired for the Data Value to be found 2 Select either the Current Column or Entire DataView radio button to set the Scope of data searched e Mark the Current Period Only checkbox if the search should stay within the current DataView time period Otherwise the search will continue through all available data 3 The search Direction may be specified by selecting the Previous or Next radio button 4 Press the OK button to begin searching records If a matching data value is found the cell which contains the data will be highlighted Press the lt F3 gt key to repeat the find 7 10 5 Quick Notes The Quick Note Editor dialog box allows notes to be easily entered and linked to the
329. he chemical being applied Click the EJ Save button to complete the process Parameter 2 Feed Rate 9 Pounds Percent Strength 1 Specific Gravity 1 Cost Per Unit 3 00 Delete Chemical Users can delete Chemicals as needed with an Chemical selected click the x Delete button Confirm the deletion of data by clicking the Y Yes Yes or X No No button 4 12 Barcode Labels Barcode Labels Barcode Label Templates can be created and used to print labels with barcodes suitable for use with the DataPort Handheld Data Entry tool The barcode labels can be managed and optimized for printing to selected label styles and printers Four categories of barcode labels can be printed e Facility e Location e Parameter e Location Parameter 2014 AllMax Software Inc 120 Operator10 Help Avery 5163 Avery 5164 List 8 511 Retum Address Accessing Barcode Label Templates To access the Barcode Label Templates section go to the Setup ribbon menu and choose m labels List from the ribbon Creating Barcodes In the Barcode Label Templates window press the Add button to create a new template Enter a name for the Barcode Label Template and press M After the template has been named the List and Label Label Designer will open Edit the label or define label settings using the List and Label designed Edit Barcode On the Labels list click the Es Edit button to open the
330. he entire day are used If y is from 1 to 24 a single hour is used i e y 3 for values from 02 01 through 03 00 Examples H_GMEAN Effluent 50050 0 0 geometric mean for the day H_GMEAN Effluent 50050 0 15 geometric mean for 14 01 through 15 00 H_GMEAN Effluent 50050 7 0 geometric mean 7 days ago H_INTER I p x y H_INTER I p x Hourly INTERpolation of adjacent data for location and parameter offset x days hour y Value The interpolated hourly data value for a specific location and parameter for the date x days from the current date The hour y is from 1 to 24 i e y 3 for the value at 03 00 If a value exists for the the hour it is returned Otherwise the function considers the last data the last data not later than the hour and the next data the next data not prior to the hour and returns an interpolated linear value If there are no valid last or next values the function returns BLANK Examples H_INTER Effluent 50050 0 15 H_INTER Effluent 50050 7 3 interpolated value for 15 00 interpolated value for 03 00 7 days ago O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 419 14 8 8 14 8 9 H_MAX I p x y z H_MAX I p x y Z Hourly MAXimum for location and parameter offset x days hour y option z Value The maximum of hourly data values of a specific location and parameter for the date x days from the current date Parameters e I p Define a Location Parameter for
331. he file to be saved as the Export file The file will be created in a zip or compressed file format suitable for importing into Operator10 Wastewater O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Uilites sos 4 Click the 13 OK button to import the facility a Tirso pon ty Enter information to Import or Export facility information Y ok Import Facility Export Facilty Facility Name Town of Montague File Name c allmaxwastewater 102Qo0x data montague AllMax Facility Expor 15 3 Operator10 Agent Operatori0 Agent The Operator10 Agent is an interactive Windows Service that runs silently in the background of the Windows Operating System The Operator10 Agent silently monitors configuration information which tells the service which scheduled tasks to perform Based on selected servers and databases scheduled tasks are performed based on the desired schedules as set by the end user 2014 AllMax Software Inc so Operator10 Help Local Scheduler Service Operator 10Agent Properties and Settings Service Status Running Local Config File C ProgramData AllMax Operator10 Agent config ml 1 record X 3 Q4AS Database UNITY WATER Individual Schedule Definitions Backup Schedule Scheduled At 10 55 AM every day starting 12 17 2012 12 21 2012 10 55 00 AM ia The Operatori0 Agent performs scheduled task operations such as backups calculations and data imports Accessi
332. he grid Apply Filter Direct Entry To filter the column by entry enter a search string into the blank field that appears above the column Filtering begins immediately as the user enters data Selection To filter the column by selection click in the filter field to display the drop down arrow click the drop down arrow to display a list of the unique items that appear in the grid column Quick filters can be applied by selecting from the list Remove Filter To remove an individual filter select the option All from the selection list of the filter field To remove all filters users may e Right click on the filter area and choose the option Clear all filters e Click the Tools button to display the Tools menu From the Tools menu choose the option Clear grid filters Grouping Data that appears in each grid can be grouped based on selected columns Grouped data provides a condensed view of records and allows users to see only the selected information See the Grouping help topic for details Right click Functionality Right click functionality in any grid is available throughout Operator10 Wastewater Users will find different right click options exist depending on the area of the grid that is clicked on e Filter Fields Right clicking on the filter field will allow the user to remove any filters that have been applied to the grid contents e Cells Right clicking on any cell in the grid will display a right click menu
333. he number of months add the additional parameter M_MIN I p x y Z w m When a parameter to calculate loading is specified amp or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter M_MIN I p _flow p_flow x y z w Examples M_MIN Effluent 50050 0 0 0 0 current month monthly minimum M_MIN Effluent 31614 1 1 0 1 previous month 7 day continuous minimum for fecals 14 11 1 M_NTH I p x y z n M_NTH I p x y w n Monthly NTH value for location and parameter offset x months type y average w rank n Value The nth data value of a specific location and parameter for the month x months from the current month The values are ordered from minimum to maximum and the nth highest value is returned For instance if the data values are 6 2 5 8 and 3 the 4th value would be 6 If n is used the values are ordered from maximum to minimum and the nth lowest value is returned If n is blank zero or greater than the number of data values the function returns BLANK The function uses the following parameters to determine the calculation method y is the type of minimum 2014 AllMax Software Inc so Operator10 Help if y is O then the result is the nth value of monthly or 30 day values if y is 1 then the result is the nth value of weekly or 7 day continuous or floating average of values if y is 2 then the result is the nth valu
334. he qualifiers using zero 0 in place of any entered data Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 6 0 1 4 2 5 as the less than symbol is dropped and 0 is used in place of lt 2 for the final calculation Blank no data Calculations will drop the data qualifiers from data and calculated results will display without the qualifiers treating data entered with qualifiers to be seen as blank Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 6 1 3 3 333 as the less than symbol is dropped and no data is used in place of lt 2 in the final calculation General Properties and Information Adjust Page Size X Offset 0 Y Offset 0 Beginning Page blank for default Header Multi Year 01 Facility Wastewater Sample Data Add Remove Treat lt gt Data As Move Dn E Allow Export Data As Print List Multi Year 01 Multi Year View With 4 m Y Windows File Association Save Preview Guidance Click template or press PageUp PageDn 9 7 2 2 1 2 Parameters In the Parameters setup section for the Multi Year Summary Report Parameters 2014 AllMax Software Inc Operator10 Help To ADD Location Parameters To add values to the Multi Year Summary report press the Add button to select from the Location Parameter Multi select Picklist Highlight a desired Location Parameter and press the Select button in the Picklist Location Parameter Definiti
335. he result is a percentile of monthly or 30 day values if y is 1 then the result is a percentile of weekly or 7 day continuous or floating average of values if y is 2 then the result is a percentile of hourly values w is the type of average used if w is O then the average is the arithmetic mean average if w is 1 then the average is the geometric mean for fecals if w is 2 then the average is the flow weighted average 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 461 Values may be considered as persistent calculations use the last data not later than the date by adding 32 to the type y The number of months may be specified for monthly 7 day and hourly calculations where mis the number of months add the additional parameter M_PCT l p x y w p m When a parameter to calculate loading is specified O 8 or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter M_PCT p l_flow p_flow x y w p Add 256 y to get the interpolated percentile similar to Microsoft 2007 Excel calculations using the PERCENTILE function Examples M_PCT Effluent 50050 0 0 0 70 70th percentile current month monthly minimum M_PCT Effluent 31614 1 1 1 70 70th percentile previous month 7 day continuous avg for fecals 14 11 12M_REM I p x y M_REM I p x Monthly percent REMoval for location and parameter offset x months Value The average Percent Remov
336. hows current information about the application including copyright and version numbers for Operator10 Wastewater Reporting Software AllMax Reporting Version 10 20 ight 1996 2010 AllMax Software Inc PO Box 40 Kenton OH 43326 1 800 670 1867 www allmaxsoftware com 2014 AllMax Software Inc 330 Operator10 Help 10 Sampling Events Sampling Events The Sampling Events section is provided to track supporting information about a sampling event This information would be similar to the information that would be on a chain of custody or laboratory bench sheet To access the Sampling Events section click the View ribbon and select Sampling Events or click on the icon in the toolbar SAMPLING EVENT LIST The sampling event application has two displayed grids The upper grid or Event level displays a list of sampling events that have been entered along with the information associated with the event Facility Date Location COC Chain of Custody Employee Sample Type Sample Sampler Collection Method Lab Certification Sampling Time Duration Status Comments and more The lower grid or Parameter level allows specific information about the tests performed on the sample to be added such as Parameter Units Multi Values when applicable Result Method Bottle Previous Special Analysis Date Analyst Number Comments and more Test results can be entered or modified a
337. icense Displays the license number as provided by AllMax Software e Update Information Displays the current release of the Operator10 Wastewater software Internet Connection required and current status Current or Out of Date File Versions Opens the Check Version Utility go2tech Internet Connection required Begins a new session with AllMax Software Technical Support View the go2tech topic to learn more Web Support Internet Connection required Takes users to support form on AllMax Software s website Form information is sent directly to Technical Support Representatives Email Support Internet Connection required Initializes a new email message addressed to AllMax Software Technical Support staff Error Log Provides a link to the error log of Operator10 Wastewater Help File Conventions Help Topic action s represents an entry in this help file by the name of Help Topic which may be activated in the application by performing the action s listed lt keyname gt represents pressing the keyboard key marked as keyname button name represents pressing the dialog box pushbutton displaying the name button name menu_item1 menu_item2 represents choosing menu item1 from the main menu then choosing menu item2 from the submenu O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 28 Operator10 Help 2 5 radio_name represents choosing the radio button displaying the name radio name check_name
338. ick template or press PageUp PageDn 9 7 4 Limit Report A Limit Report provides the ability to set upper and lower data limits for early error or limit detection for any Parameter based upon quantity and concentration Setup options for the Limit Report include e General Properties e General Information e Comments 9 7 4 1 Limit Report Setup Topics in this section include e General Properties e General Information e Limits e Comments 9 7 4 1 1 General Properties In the General Properties setup section for the Limit Report users can edit the following fields 2014 AllMax Software Inc Operator10 Help Page Adjustment and Print settings Size Enter a percentage to which you would like to reduce the printed form X Offset Adjust the X coordinate to which you would like to offset the printed form Y Offset Adjust the Y coordinate to which you would like to offset the printed form JAllow Comments To enter comments at the time of printing check the Allow Remarks checkbox Months Select a number of months from the drop down list box The report will calculate the desired amount of data based on this selection Treat lt gt Data As Select from the drop down menu to determine the method by which data with the less than lt greater than gt or non detect data qualifiers will be treated Available options are e Preserve Types Calculations will preserve the available data
339. ides a text masked entry field e Checkbox provides a true false checkbox e Grid provides a customizable grid for table based entry Default Enter text into the Default field to be used each time the report is printed Read Only Each item can be flagged as read only preventing changes from being made at the time of printing Report Usage User Input items are passed through with the following syntax to the Report Template as data e UserX ItemY Label Passes through the information defined in the field Label e UserX ItemY Text Passes through the information defined in the field Default or what is entered at the time of printing e UserX ItemY Text Z Passes through field information based on entered data in the Grid when selected O 2014 AllMax Software Inc User Input Group 1 of 10 O verify Label Default Item002 Plant Effiuent Solids TSS Total Suspended Solic Item003 Plant Effiuent Flow Mad Flow Thru Treatment F Item004 Plant Effiuent pH pH Standard Units Custom Report 01 Custom Report 4 am save Click template or press PageUp PageDn 9 7 1 3 5 Comments In the Comments setup section for the Custom Report users can edit the following information Comments Enter the default comments to appear on report at the time of printing Users can modify these comments at the time of printing if the Verify Comments checkbox is marked O 2014 AllMax
340. ield The field will be set to the default facility name coming from the name of your current facility JAllow Comments To enter comments at the time of printing check the JAllow Comments checkbox Treat lt gt Data As Select from the drop down menu to determine the method by which data with the less than lt greater than gt or non detect data qualifiers will be treated Available options are e Preserve Types Calculations will preserve the available data qualifiers and calculated results will display the appropriate data qualifier Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 34 6 2 1 4 lt 3 as the less than symbol to be preserved for the final calculation Entered Value Calculations will drop the data qualifiers from data and calculated results will display without the qualifiers using only the numeric entered portion of the data Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 6 2 1 4 3 as the less than symbol will be dropped for the final calculation 2014 AllMax Software Inc Half Entered Value Calculations will drop the data qualifiers from data and calculated results will display without the qualifiers using one half the entered value of the data Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 6 1 1 4 2 75 as the less than symbol is dropped and 2 is divided in half for final calculation Zero Calculations will drop the data qualifiers from data and calculated results will display without t
341. ies are entered tap the Time selector to edit the time The default setting the Use System pushbutton always uses the current DataPort time but by selecting the Use Entered pushbutton a specific time may be entered for hourly data Daily data values ignore time settings e If hourly data entries should be saved only on even hours 08 00 09 00 etc select the Whole Hour pushbutton Enter the number of minutes past the hour that the entry should be saved as the next hour Use System Use Entered 13 4 17 Tips Tips Options Tips Entering data is as simple as 1 2 3 1 Scan a Location Parameter BarCode use the default Date and Facility 2 Enter the Data value from the popup KeyPad or by using graffiti 3 Press the Save button 13 4 18 Edit Commands Undo Cut Copy Paste Select All Edit Undo Cut Copy Paste Select All Cut Copy Paste or Select All text in any field using these menu items or shortcut commands using the clipboard Use Undo to restore a field to its previous value 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 375 14 Functions General Information Data Types Accessing Location Parameter data values Function Categories Boolean TRUE FALSE Functions Constant Daily Data Functions Date Functions OPC DDE Functions Hourly Data Functions Mathematical Functions Miscellaneous Functions Monthly Data Functions Process Section Data Functions Quarterly Data Functions Trigonome
342. iew ribbon menu and choose 1 Graphs to open the graphing application Users will be presented with an option to open an existing graph from the Graph List or to create a New graph Graphing Application Functionality O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 28 Operator10 Help 8 1 8 2 8 2 1 The following options are available in the Graphing application e Graph List e Graph Data e Graph Options e Main Window Graph List Graph List The Graph List is a dialog box displaying a list of items that the user may choose pick or edit To open an existing graph highlight the item in the Graph list and press Select or double click on the item To create a new Graph press New to open a new graph To filter the list and only display items which match filter criteria enter a filter 0 to 255 characters in the box and press See the Operator10 Wastewater main application help for details on filtering Graph Data Topics in this section include e Data Source e Open Graph Date Range Data Source Data Source Go to the Graph menu and select Data Source to open the Data Source dialog 2014 AllMax Software Inc conser E Data Range Display Data Values Start Date gt 24 Hourly Daily End Date J Monthly Yearly 09 30 11 30 2 D X Y Scatter first 2 L Ps Prompt On Open Regression Number of Undated Values Data Series Location Parameter Formula Total
343. if n1 is O then the result is for Giardia Lamblia Free Chlorine if n1 is 1 then the result is for Giardia Lamblia Chlorine Dioxide if n1 is 2 then the result is for Giardia Lamblia Ozone if n1 is 3 then the result is for Giardia Lamblia Chloramine if n1 is 8 then the result is for Virus Free Chlorine if n1 is 9 then the result is for Virus Chlorine Dioxide if n1 is 10 then the result is for Virus Ozone if n1 is 11 then the result is for Virus Chloramine if n2 is O then the result is from a CT table if n2 is 1 then the result is interpolated from a CT table see CTI if n2 is 2 then the result is from a regression formula see CTR Examples CT 20 8 2 1 90 5 required CT in mg l minutes CT Tap 00010 Tap 00400 Tap 50064 5 required CT in mg l minutes 14 10 9 CTI x y z w CTI x y z w Interpolated Disinfection Concentration and contact Time required for a particular temp pH Cl LI Value The value returned is the interpolated product of the disinfection concentration C in mg l and the time required T in minutes to treat water for disinfection where x is the lowest water temperature in degrees centigrade y is the highest pH z is the lowest disinfectant Chlorine concentration in mg l w is the Log Inactivation e g 0 5 for conventional 1 0 for slow sand Examples CT 20 8 2 1 90 5 required CT in mg l minutes CT Tap 00010 Tap 00400 Tap 50064 5 required CT
344. ific location and parameter for 6 months beginning x months from the current month The SNC is expressed as a ratio equal to the count of values exceeding the limit divided by the count of all values The function uses the following parameters to determine the calculation method y is the type of average if y is O then the result is based on a daily minimum if y is 1 then the result is based on a weekly or 7 day minimum if y is 2 then the result is based on an hourly minimum if y is 3 then the result is based on a 4 day minimum z is the rule used for a 7 day average if z is O then the result uses a continuous or floating average if z is 1 then a week falls in the month which contains its Saturday if z is 2 then a week falls in the month which contains its Wednesday if z is 3 then the result uses the first of month for 4 weeks 28 days if z is 4 then the first of month 4th week extends to the end of the month if z is 5 then the first of month is controlled by facility option if z is 6 then only full weeks Sun Sat in the month are considered w is the type of average used if w is O then the average is the arithmetic mean average if w is 1 then the average is the geometric mean for fecals if w is 2 then the average is the flow weighted average v is the violation limit 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 491 The count of violations and values may be returned instead of the ratio add 4 to y in order to
345. ill be used in the calculation of geometric mean e Treat Zeros as One Any 0 values present in the dataset will be seen as 1 and will be used will be in the calculation of geometric mean e Ignore Zeros Any 0 values present in the dataset will be ignored and will not be used in the calculation of geometric mean Standard Deviation Choose from the following options to change the method by which Operator10 Wastewater calculates standard deviation e Population Numerator n e Sample Numerator n 1 Rounding Rule Choose from the following options to change the method by which Operator10 Wastewater rounds calculated data 2014 AllMax Software Inc Main Application e Arithmetic Rounding Values greater than 5 round up otherwise it rounds down e Even Biased Rounding Values greater than 5 round up exactly 5 rounds to nearest even value otherwise it rounds down e Truncation Values are truncated rather than rounded e Significant Digits Values are rounded to the specified significant digit Database Timeout Seconds Enter a number of seconds to allow for a response from the database before the operation times out Include in Scheduler Checks Enable the checkbox for Include in Scheduler Checks to establish the connection between the current database and the Operator10 Agent to allow the database to be included in the processing of the scheduled imports calculations and backups Calculation Constants Build
346. ill open Create Hot Spot Describe the function of this hot spot Description V Show Description on HotSpot Image Image Size Small Y Show Image on HotSpot Link To DataView Graph Report Extemal Location Link Target HotSpot Editor In the HotSpot Editor enter the following information e Description Enter a description for this HotSpot e Show Description on HotSpot Check this box to display the description of the HotSpot on screen e Image Click the button to view a list of images to use with the HotSpot e Image Size Choose the size of image to be displayed with the HotSpot from the drop down menu e Show Image on HotSpot Check this box to display the image on the HotSpot e Link To Choose from the following options e DataView Choose the DataView option to open a DataView from the HotSpot e Graph Choose the Graph option to open DataView from the HotSpot e Report Choose the Report option to open a Report Group from the HotSpot e External Location Choose the External Location option to open a file external to Operator10 Wastewater e Link Target Click the button in the Link Target field to browse for the selected type of item to link to for External Location the Windows Explorer browse window will open select an external file to be opened 2014 AllMax Software Inc Dashboard 157 With the above inform
347. ine name and database name where the Operator10 Wastewater database is located Properties Operator10 Wastewater maintains multiple settings and properties that apply to the database and application Depending on user security settings users may be able to work with these settings and modify database and application characteristics Click on the available link options to make changes when applicable e Database Properties Click this link to work with database level properties For more information see the Database Properties help topic e System Properties Click this link to view information about the current machine or system settings For more information see the System Properties help topic 2014 AllMax Software Inc z Operator10 Help 2 2 4 2 2 5 2 3 Copyright Contact Information The Copyright Contact Information section displays contact information for AllMax Software Inc as well as a Credits and Acknowledgements section For more information see the Credits help topic System Properties The System Properties window displays the basic information related to the computer or system running the Operator10 Wastewater application Information here is for display only and typically only necessary during technical support calls Details provided on this screen include but are not limited to e Microsoft Windows version e Microsoft Net version e Memory RAM e Hardware information e
348. information security settings can be established on the right side of the User Security window The following security options are available e Audit Trail Choices include Access or No Access and will enable disable a user s ability to access the Audit Trail feature of Operator10 e Backup Choices include Access or No Access and will enable disable a user s ability to create a Backup of the selected database e Dashboard Choice include Edit No Edit and will allow or disallow a user from editing the Dashboard of the selected database O 2014 AllMax Software Inc General Features 43 e Database Admin Choices include Access or No Access and will enable disable a user s ability to perform database related operations e User Security Choices include Access or No Access and will enable disable a user s ability to create and modify user security settings 3 3 2 User Facility Security User Facility Securit To establish facility specific permissions for a user access the User Security section of Operator10 go to the File menu and select Security and click on the Facilities Tab The Facilities tab contains settings to enable or disable specific sections of the Operator10 program based on the selected record or current facility Add a User to a Facility gt To allow a user access to a selected facility click the uM Add button to begin Users will see a new window that will allow them to select a Facility User Name a
349. ing and a multiplier It returns the change in meter reading multiplied by the multiplier value The function considers only valid data and will return BLANK if there is no valid meter data for the current or past dates NOTE The function may also be used for meters that count down by specifying a negative value for the maximum meter reading y Examples D_METER Effluent M92225 0 99999 001 change in meter reading divided by 1000 D_METER Effluent M92225 0 999 1 change in meter reading no multiplier 14 6 19 D_MIN I p x y D_MIN I p x Daily MINimum for location and parameter offset x days for y days Value The minimum of data values of a specific location and parameter for the date x days from the current date and extending for a range of y days When a parameter to calculate loading is specified amp or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter D_MIN I p l_flow p_flow x y Examples D_MIN Effluent 50050 7 7 minimum of past 7 days D_MIN Effluent 50050 3 7 minimum of week beginning 3 days ago 14 6 20 D_NEXT I p x y D_NEXT I p x Daily NEXT value for location and parameter offset x months and y days Value The data value of a specific location and parameter equal to or later than the date x months and y days from the current date the first data not prior to the date The function considers only valid
350. ing 3 14 2014 AllMax Software Inc Operator10 Help 14 16 8 V_MAX I p x y Z w Vv V_MAX I p x y Z w V monthly MAXimum Violation for location and parameter offset x months type y rule z average w limit v Value The maximum violation of data values of a specific location and parameter for the month x months from the current month The function uses the following parameters to determine the calculation method y is the type of maximum if y is O then the result is a monthly or 30 day maximum if y is 1 then the result is a weekly or 7 day maximum if y is 2 then the result is an hourly maximum if y is 3 then the result is a 4 day maximum z is the rule used for a 7 day average if z is O then the result uses a continuous or floating average if z is 1 then a week falls in the month which contains its Saturday if z is 2 then a week falls in the month which contains its Wednesday if z is 3 then the result uses the first of month for 4 weeks 28 days if z is 4 then the first of month 4th week extends to the end of the month if z is 5 then the first of month is controlled by facility option if z is 6 then only full weeks Sun Sat in the month are considered if z is 16 then the result uses a continuous or floating average but only counts violations based on unique data w is the type of average used if w is O then the average is the arithmetic mean average if w is 1 then the average is the geometric mean
351. ing the DataView the columns will be returned to their original locations Murrumba Downs STP Weather Station Rainfall Column Properties Edit Column Header N N N N 10 Freeze Column 10 Auto Size v GoTo 0 7 420 0 03 lt 0 10 7 400 0 0 p Freeze Columns To freeze a DataView column right click on the column header and choose the Freeze Column option from the right click menu Unfreeze Columns To unfreeze a DataView column right click on a column header that has been frozen locked to the left side and choose the Unfreeze Column option from the right click menu 7 10 9 Right Click Right Click Options Many functions of the DataView application can be performed from the right click menu Depending on where the right click is performed AND what items have been selected the menu options will be displayed DataView Info Cell 2014 AllMax Software Inc 208 Operator10 Help In the top left corner of every DataView is an Info Cell that can be used to display DataView information such as the name date range and type of DataView Right click options on the DataView Info Cell include Column Properties Opens the DataView Column Properties section Autosize All Columns Automatically re sizes all columns based on current text present in the Column Header Column Header Right clicking on any column header in the DataView will provide access to the following options Facility L
352. inks and written to the database is also recorded in the log file OPC DDE Error Codes DDE Error Codes DDE Link errors may show the following Error Codes Oi Advise Timeout 02 Busy 03 Data Timeout 04 DLL Not Initialized 05 DLL Usage 06 Exec Timeout 07 Invalid Parameter 08 Low Memory 09 Memory Error 10 Not Processed 11 No Conversation 12 Poke Timeout 13 PostMessage Failed 14 Reentrancy 15 Server Died 16 System Error 17 Unadvise Timeout 2014 AllMax Software Inc Interfaces 351 18 Queue ID Not Found 12 1 4 4 DDE Server Functionality DDE Server Functionality As a DDE Server the AllMax Operatori0 OPC DDE Interface provides an individual data or formula value or a month or hourly range of values The Facility which is to be accessed MUST be configured to Allow sharing of Facility data in the Facility Options The data is identified by specifying the Facility optional Formula Location Parameter and optional Date with optional time The DDE Link format is as follows Service OP10 Topic DATA or MONTH or HOUR or FORMULA or DV see below Item facility dataview formula location parameter lt date lt time 00 00 see below see below for specific usage examples The returned value for the each Topic is as follows DATA the actual data value as a text string including Less Than Greater Than Non Detect values Time values or Alpha Codes MONTH the daily data values for th
353. instance of Operatori0 Wastewater is installed to the target computer with the following directory structure PC TARGETDIR Application lst rpt_dll lbl manuals Data License SampleData NAMED DB There are two main branches in this structure Application and Data The Application directory will be present in every installed instance of Operator10 Wastewater as this is where all application files dependencies and support files to the application are located The Data directory will only be found on those machines that serve data to 2014 AllMax Software Inc Main Application other machines This Data directory has within it a minimum of three database directories Two of these are installed by default License and SampleData In addition to these two stock databases any number of user created databases can exist The first of these is created during the initial installation of Operator10 Wastewater Additional databases can be created from within the application 4 2 6 Database Properties Database Properties Database Properties can be set to determine calculation methods constants conversion values fecal parameters and more for each database created as part of Operator10 The Database properties tab is part of the Database Utilities section and can be accessed by going to the File menu selecting Open Database and clicking the button in the colu
354. ioeiesedeaveveresteransersantens 387 Boolean Functions iiscccen a seceded careers A a aa 389 ANDO A i es 389 EA a AE EEA ET E o o e sacesees vortande 390 EQUAL X Y a A A NEATE eee a ata ee ee 390 GT x y 2014 AllMax Software Inc TOS Y5Z ss ISALPHA I p x ISBLANK x E EE A chee ceaeesca cea lesan cceseesed E Quay aay cevecnsoy vevsdesuyse crease ISDATA gt ui ENYA ISFECAL LED wssescetsscccecseecsccccceccccesarsnecevececensareeces ISFLOW I p seeseesesseeeeseeseeeeeseseesseeseeseeeeeeeesaees ISGREAT I p x ISHR Ep iii ISLESS PD a ISLP I p ISND I p x ISTIME PO iia desiste E O A O NOT x OROGY _eiectessceicvecidaiesvsesenssccusssnnsescavevecvecgdsbtenesvecadsecedevscavcvecrtelesesosenvstavsntensoscevevecvestechtenesvecadbecedevecaveieertelerevens HOR a A A A AAA a 5 COnista MS A A A A nn BLANK le ld lalo AS VAR ad 6 Daily Data FUNCION Sirio ia ivbocs 397 DAV G LED XY ico AAA AAA AAA AREAS D_COMP I p x y D_COUNT I p x y D_FLOW Ip x y 2 ccceseeeeseeeeseeseeeeesseeeeseeeeaee D FWA EP X A aeda Neseniai ieia D CAUCA PUP XG V e E a a E a A aa eaaa easten EE 399 D_GMEAN I p x y D IGAUGE EPLIEPLA tae 400 DUMTR EP K yZ savievecscsvescensecesensisssncavsccevesssssssveusetevescecenscescivedscussuusceusetcusniaveuscausivecceucsuessensetesescanstecdvchievecesvences 401 D_INTER I p x D LAST AAA A Io TT D LASTI LEPLAY Z inici iii A A ads D_LASTNM
355. ion General Information In the General Properties section of the Bio Nutrient Report setup Report Name Enter the desired report name 1 to 40 characters for the Bio Nutrient Report This name is different than the report name shown in the Direct Access tree Facility Enter a facility name for the Bio Nutrient Report The default facility name will initially be filled in modify this as necessary Beginning Page Enter the beginning page number if the report is greater than 1 page Operator10 will continue the numbering sequence Leave this field blank if you simply want to start at page number 1 2014 AllMax Software Inc General Information Report Name Facility South WWTP Beginning Page blank for default Add Remove Move Up Move Dn Print List Bio Nutrient 01 Bio Nutrient 4 Save Preview Guidance Click template or press PageUp PageDn 9 7 7 2 3 BioSolids Nutrient Report Sites Site Each Nutrient report that is created can contain a number of Biosolid sites for which values can be reported Follow these instructions to add sites to the report 1 Press the Add button in the left pane of the Report Properties window in the Location picklist that appears select the Biosolid application site to be reported Once selected press the Select button 2 Once the site has been added brief information about that site will be visible in the right pan
356. ion Description Afuljo e Location group Active p Notes Print Data presented in the grids throughout Operator10 Wastewater can be printed Several Print options exist Click the Print button to review the printing options O 2014 AllMax Software Inc General Features 33 F Print Setup Y ok Please choose from the following options Orientation 0 a Portrait Landscape Page Size 8 5x 11 Letter y Font Size 49 7 Fit Width to Page Print Range All Records Selected Records Include T Grid Lines Save current settings as default Orientation Select from the options Portrait or Landscape to set the page orientation Page Size Select from Letter 8 5 x11 Legal 8 5 x 14 or Tabloid 11 x14 to set the size of the page Font Size Select a font size to print grid contents NOTE By choosing the option Fit Width to Page the font size will automatically be calculated and used for printing Print Range Select fromthe options All Records or Selected Records to determine the number of records to be printed Include Select Grid Lines if you want to print the records with grid lines Save current settings Click this link if you wish to save the as default settings as a default to be used during the next print NOTE The settings are saved by user and by the individual print windows Export Data 2014 AllMax Software Inc
357. ion for previous month 7 day continuous minimum for fecals exceeding 3 14 14 16 1 SNC_CJP I p x y z w v1 v2 SNC_CJP I p x y Z w v1 v2 monthly Significant Non Compliance SNC using CJP for location and parameter offset x months type y rule z average w daily limit v1 average limit v2 Value The Significant Non Compliance SNC violation using the Compliance Judgement Point CJP for data values of a specific location and parameter for 6 months beginning x months from the current month The SNC is expressed as a ratio equal to the count of values exceeding the daily limit plus the count of averages exceeding the average limit divided by the CJP the count of all values plus the count of all averages The function uses the following parameters to determine the calculation method y is the type of average if y is O then the result is based on a daily average if y is 1 then the result is based on weekly or 7 day averages z is the rule used for a 7 day average 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 487 if z is O then the result uses a continuous or floating average if z is 1 then a week falls in the month which contains its Saturday if z is 2 then a week falls in the month which contains its Wednesday if z is 3 then the result uses the first of month for 4 weeks 28 days if z is 4 then the first of month 4th week extends to the end of the month if z is 5 then the first of month is controlled by facility option i
358. ious combinations of headers footers parameters and summaries Unlimited DataViews can be created giving users the ability to truly customize their access to the data stored within Operator10 Wastewater e Daily Values DataView Coun 9 Sum 1675017 Avg 26402 Mac 306139 Min 0232 GMa 2048 SL DO 5825 Summary Values DataView Hourly Values DataView Accessing DataViews e Individual DataViews can be accessed using HotSpots from the Dashboard e In the Main Application window go to the View ribbon and click the DataView List button to open the DataView List e In the Main Application window go to the View ribbon and click the New DataView button to create a new DataView DataView Types The DataView application provides users with the ability to create 3 unique types of view capable of providing data entry and review e Daily Values DataView e Hourly Values DataView e Summary Values DataView Additional Topics View the following topics for additional information e DataView Data Entry e DataView Properties 2014 AllMax Software Inc Dataview 169 e DataView Application e DataView Features e eDV Electronic DataView 7 1 DataView List The DataView List allows users to view access and manage DataViews for the current database DataView Type Facility Name Daily Unitywater Reports Brendale STP
359. ique keycode license as distributed by AllMax Software Inc AllMax Software products include Operator10 Wastewater for Wastewater Data Management Operator10 Wastewater for Water Data Management Antero Maintenance Data Management and Synexus Pretreatment Data Management Database A database in Operator10 Wastewater represents a collection of facilities and the associated information for each Each database can contain one or many facilities Certain information is shared between facilities within a database most notably Parameters Add Create Database See the Add New Database help topic for more information on database creation Open Database See the Database help topic for more information on opening a database for use O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Operator10 Help Operatori0 Wastewater Data Structure Advanced Facility A Database 2 7 Facility Database Facility Facility Database Facility Facility Facility Database Facility Li Database Facility lid Facility Database lt w Database Facility Facility Facility Facility Advanced Data Structure Diagram The above diagram illustrates a hypothetical server which has four instances of Operator10 Wastewater installed Each instance can contain any number of databases and each database can contain any number of facilities Ultimately these facilities serve as grouping mechanisms for the underlying data in the database Directory Structure Each
360. ist Go to the BioSolids ribbon and choose A Nutrients list Adding Nutrients In the Nutrient list press the i Add button to Press the popup button to choose a Parameter from a PickList Enter a Market Value for the Parameter to be used on BioSolids Nutrient Reports O 2014 AllMax Software Inc BioSolids 149 Press the EJ Save button to save the information entered 5 6 BioSolids Application BioSolids Application A BioSolids Application describes the amount of a specific BioSolid applied to a specific Site on a specific day Application data from applications made to a Site will be used in the calculation of Site data and loadings Multiple application entries may be made to sites per day for tracking of all applications and data Application List The BioSolids Application list displays all applications of BioSolids to Sites Users may create new applications from the BioSolid Application List window as well as edit existing applications and delete applications as needed F BioSolid Applicatio m dsscord diselecied X 2 a a Pe BioSolid Application List Facility Name South WWTP Site BioSolid Application Method Units User Values Applied By Comments Jones Field 001 Cake 12 07 2012 The BioSolid Application List displays all applied biosolids to sites Accessing the Application List To access the Application List go to the BioSolids ribbon and choose A Applicatio
361. it The count of months having violations and values may be returned instead of the ratio add 4 to y in order to return the count of months having violations add 8 to y in order to return the count of months having values Daily values may be considered as persistent calculations use the last data not later than the date by adding 32 to the type y The number of months is assumed to be 6 but may be specified for monthly 7 day and hourly calculations where mis the number of months add the additional parameter 2014 AllMax Software Inc 490 Operator10 Help SNC_MAXM I p x y Z w V m When a parameter to calculate loading is specified amp or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter SNC_MAXM I p _flow p_flow x y z w v Examples SNC_MAXM Effluent 00400 0 0 0 0 8 5 current 6 months SNC monthly average exceeding 8 5 SNC_MAXM Effluent 00400 6 1 3 0 8 5 1 2 previous 6 months SNC 7 day ist of Month average exceeding 8 5 by 20 SNC_MAXM Effluent 00400 6 1 3 0 8 5 1 2 gt 33 TRUE if the ratio is greater than 33 14 16 1 SNC_MIND I p x y Z wW vV SNC_MIND I p x y Z w V monthly Significant Non Compliance SNC MINimun Daily violation for location and parameter offset x months type y rule z average w limit v Value The minimum daily Significant Non Compliance SNC violation for data values of a spec
362. it on the Windows Clipboard for use Paste Select Paste to paste data stored on the Windows Clipboard into the selected cell s Delete Select Delete to delete data stored in the selected data cell s Show Summary Opens the Block Summary dialog displaying summary information for the selected cell s data O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Dataview 209 e Read Selected Data Allows a utility to read back the data entered in the DataView cell s Print Selected Data Prints the data from the selected cell s Quick Note Editor Opens the Quick Note Editor allowing the user to enter edit or view a quick note associated with the selected data cell Calculator Opens a calculator allowing the user to quickly perform a hand calculation the result of which is entered into the data cell e Review Data Opens the Review Data section which allows users to view recent values all data can be displayed as an option entered in the database Row Header Right click on any row header to select from the following options e Go To Opens a Calendar allowing users to select a date to browse to 7 10 10 Block Summary Block Summar Use the Block Summary feature to display a summary of data based on the selected data cells from the DataView Facility DATA_000 Location Weather Station Accessing Block Summary To open the Block Summary dialog highlight a selection of data cells in any DataView With a selection of cells made
363. its Decimal 2 Plant Effluent Solids TSS Total Suspended Solids TSS Plant Effluent Solids TSS Total Suspended Solids TSS Plant Efficiency XSolids TSS lb Left Total Suspen Limits Report Operational Limit Report 4 m LB save Preview Guidance Click template or press PageUp PageDn 2014 AllMax Software Inc 292 Operator10 Help 9 7 4 1 4 Comments 9 7 5 In the Comments setup section for the Limit Report users can edit the following information Comments Comments Enter the default comments to appear on report at the time of printing Users can modify these comments at the time of printing if the JAllow Comments checkbox is marked in the General Properties and Settings screen i E Add Plant Efficiency XBOD 5 lb Left BOD 5 Day 20 Plant Efficiency XBOD 5 lb Left BOD 5 Day 20 Remove Plant Effluent BOD 5 LP BOD DESC Plant Effluent BOD 5 LP BOD DESC Move Up Plant Effluent pH pH Standard Units Plant Effluent pH pH Standard Units eo Move Dn Plant Effluent Solids TSS Total Suspended Solids TSS Plant Effluent Solids TSS Total Suspended Solids TSS Print List Plant Efficiency XSolids TSS lb Left Total Suspen Limits Report Operational Limit Report 4 oi save Preview Guidance Click template or press PageUp PageDn Weekly Summary Report A Weekly Summary Report provides the ability to define Loc
364. its Saturday if z is 2 then a week falls in the month which contains its Wednesday if z is 3 then the result uses the first of month for 4 weeks 28 days if z is 4 then the first of month 4th week extends to the end of the month if z is 5 then the first of month is controlled by facility option if z is 6 then only full weeks Sun Sat in the month are considered if z is 16 then the result uses a continuous or floating average but only counts violations based on unique data w is the type of average used if w is O then the average is the arithmetic mean average if w is 1 then the average is the geometric mean for fecals if w is 2 then the average is the flow weighted average v is the violation limit 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 477 Daily values may be considered as persistent calculations use the last data not later than the date by adding 32 to the type y When a parameter to calculate loading is specified O amp VO or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter E_SUM I p I_flow p_flow x y z w v The number of months may be specified for monthly 7 day and hourly calculations where mis the number of months add the additional parameter E_SUM I p x y Z w V m Examples E _SUM Effluent 50050 0 0 0 0 3 14 sum of exceedances for current month exceeding 3 14 E SUM Effluent 31614 1 1 0 0 3 14 sum of excee
365. ized throughout the program to edit data in a form style layout allowing navigation from field to field This presentation is seen when adding editing and editing multiple pieces of information Multi edit 2014 AllMax Software Inc General Features 41 For users who desire to change multiple records at a time while multiple records have been selected in the grid clicking the Es Edit button will allow users to change data for the selected record s Any available fields for editing will be shown in the Edit window Additionally the fields available for editing will vary depending on the section of the program 8 onion O O O O OO OOOO Edit Location by modifying or selecting available information 8 selected Facility Name Location Location Description Location group Active Notes 3 3 Security To access the Security section of Operator10 Wastewater go to the File menu and select Security The Security section includes the following features to learn more click on the linked Help Topics User Security User Security The User Security section includes the ability to configure the following items e Users Create new users and grant deny access to database related features and functionality e Facilities Setup user access to facilities and facility related features and functionality e Groups Create groups for easy assignment of facility features and functionality e L P Pe
366. l A Location describes a point in a facility physical or logical where Parameters are located A Parameter can be chosen fromthe Parameter List which consists of calculated parameters USEPA defined parameters or user defined parameters Selected Parameters are linked to a specific Location forming a Location Parameter Examples Raw Influent Flow MGD Flow MGD Parameter at the Raw Influent Location Effluent BOD 5 BOD 5 BOD 5 Day MG L Parameter at the Effluent Location 2014 AllMax Software Inc Main Application 93 Accessing Location Parameter To access Location Parameter in Operator10 Wastewater in the Setup ribbon click 9 the L Ps Location Parameters button 5 Location Parameter A 4 274 records 1 selected gt DU X dE AS City of Williamston y Facility Name Location Location Description Parameter Parameter Description Units Decimal Entry Type Recent Y a Flow Thru Treatment Plant TMG 4 Daily Nitrogen Ammonia Total As City of Willaston Tint Ef Plant effluent Flow Mad City of Williamston Pint Ef Plant effluent City of Williamston Pint Ef Plant effluent pH Standard Units S U 2 Daily City of Williamston Plint Ef E Plant effluent Phosphorus Total As P MG L 4 Daily City of Williamston Pint Ef Plant effluent Solids TSS Total Suspended Solids TSS MG L 1 Daily m J Gene
367. l Flow cal to kL Murrumba Downs STP Total Outfall Flow cal to kL Dial y Daiy y Custom y Speedometer y Day y Custom y Linear y Daiy y Custom x Data Range 04 01 2012 06 30 2012 Data Range 04 01 2012 06 30 2012 Data Range 04 01 2012 06 30 2012 oo Ava 20345 Max 57731 uc Avg 20345 Max 57731 Loco Ag 20345 Max 57731 06 30 2012 29912 l Dala ryt 1 I 18431 32134 45837 1540 25282 39985 52688 66391 11579 Dial Gauge Example Speedometer Gauge Example Linear Gauge Example 299 1 2 06 30 2012 06 30 2012 gt u x Ker 29912 P gt O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 162 Operator10 Help Sample Gauge Containers Working with a Gauge Container To work with a Gauge Container see the following topics Adding a Gauge Container To add a Gauge Container in the Operator10 Wastewater Main Application open a Dashboard View and select a Page With a Page selected click the button in the ribbon to Add Container to Page and select Add Gauge Container The new Gauge Container will be displayed at the top left of the page and will be blank and ready for setup Unlimited Gauge Containers can be added to any Page Editing Gauge Container Settings Select Location Parameter To select the Location Parameter to be displayed click the Y Settings button at the top right of the Gauge Container window From the menu that appears choose Select Location Paramete
368. l solids Solids Vol flow Flow MGD specific gravity defaults to 1 Spec Gravity 8 34 10000 Loading Lb percent volatile solids to LB percent volatile solids Solids Vol percent total solids Solids Vol 100 Inventory Inventory in LB ISolids TSS total solids Solids TSS volume of tank 8 34 1000000 Inventory Inventory in LB ISolids Vol percent total solids Solids Vol volume of tank 8 34 10000 Inventory Vol Inventory in LB ISolids Vol percent volatile solids Solids Vol Inventory in LB ISolids Vol F M_CBOD Food Microorganism ratio F M section influent CBOD in LB LBOD Carb 5 total solids in LB LSolids TVSS or volatile solids in LB LSolids TSS F M Food Microorganism ratio F M section influent BOD in LB LBOD 5 total solids in LB LSolids TVSS or volatile solids in LB LSolids TSS F MV Food Microorganism ratio F M section influent volatile solids in LB sLSolids Vol or volatile solids in LB LSolids TVSS inventory volatile solids in LB sISolids Vol or inventory volatile solids in LB ISolids TVSS SVI Sludge Volume Index SVI settleable solids Solids Settlbl volatile solids Solids TSS 1000 MCRT Mean Cell Resonance Time MCRT inventory volatile solids in LB ISolids TSS sum of waste volatile solids loadings in LB LSolids Vol or Solids TSS MCRTS solids Mean Cell Residence Time MCRT
369. lMax Software Inc Operator10 Help such as Fecal Coliform Total Coliform and E Coli Any additional parameters may be gt added click the 7 Add button to select a parameter for inclusion in this list Import Settings Use these fields to update default configuration of the ImportUtilit y e Import files path the path used by the ImportUtility to find and access files for importing set this path by clicking the button e Extension for import data files the custom file extension used by the ImportUtility to seek out data import files Examples txt csv imp etc e Extension for import notes files the custom file extension used by the ImportUtility to seek out notes import files Examples note notes impnote etc Logged Documents For the following sections of Operator10 Wastewater select the desired level of prompting for the Logged Documents feature DataView e Never Never prompts user to log any printed documents e Always Does not prompt user automatically logs all printed documents e Prompt default option Prompts for logging of printed documents Graph e Never Never prompts user to log any printed documents e Always Does not prompt user automatically logs all printed documents e Prompt default option Prompts for logging of printed documents Report e Never Never prompts user to log any printed documents e Always Does not prompt user automatically logs all pri
370. label editor window This editor provides many options for customizing the current label or for creating totally new labels and adding them to the available styles list Variables and a default barcode are provided that are specific to the Operator10 software Print Barcode Labels To print labels using barcode templates defined in the previous topics go to the Setup a menu and select the Print option Choose from the drop down menu the type of data to be printed on the label Select O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Main Application 121 from Facility Location Parameter or Location Parameter Once an option has been selected a picklist will open highlight individual or multiple records and click the M button to print the selected records as barcodes In the next window that opens select the Barcode Template to be used when printing Highlight an available template and press E Continue with the process by choosing the appropriate options in the Output To window to proceed with the printing of data 4 12 1 Barcode Template Name Barcode Template Name Each barcode must be named Enter a name for the new barcode and press the O button Enter a name for the new label Name 4 13 Calculations Calculate Calculations may be performed for Location Parameters in the current Facility using all Hourly Daily or Monthly formulas or a range of formulas Performing a Calculation There are many ways in which
371. lation 2014 AllMax Software Inc General Properties and Information Adjust Page Size X Offset 0 Y Offset 0 i x rr error Page Report Title 5 Year Forecast Report ey Facility Wastewater Sample Data o Treat lt gt Data As C Allow Export Data As dar rca rad 5Year Forecast 01 5Year Forecast View With m Windows File Association preview Guidance Click template or press PageUp PageDn 9 7 2 1 1 2 Parameter and Calculations In the Parameter and Calculation Settings setup section for the 5 Year Forecast Report users can edit the following fields Parameter and Calculation Settings Location Parameter Press the button to select a Location Parameter to be reported on the 5 Year Forecast Report Find the Location Parameter in the Location Parameter Picklist that appears and press the Select button Header To modify the header of the selected Location Parameter modify this field Report Label Enter the report label for Location Parameter selected Decimal Indicate the desired number of decimal precision to be shown on the report Calculation Type Select the type of calculation to be performed on the selected Location Parameter Select from Month Sum Month Average Month Maximum Month Minimum Month Count Month Formula Geometric Mean Standard Deviation Max 7 Day Continuous Min 7 Day Continuous Max
372. lculated offset based on the z calculation type the numeric offset represents the end of the reporting period in which the weekly calculations are to be made if y is 34 then the result is the calculated offset based on the z calculation type the numeric offset represents the beginning of the 7 day period week which is calculated as the weekly maximum average using the value returned when using the special case 32 to determine the beginning of the period to be reported z is the rule used for a 7 day average if z is O then the result uses a continuous or floating average if z is 1 then a week falls in the month which contains its Saturday if z is 2 then a week falls in the month which contains its Wednesday if z is 3 then the result uses the first of month for 4 weeks 28 days if z is 4 then the first of month 4th week extends to the end of the month if z is 5 then the first of month is controlled by facility option if z is 6 then only full weeks Sun Sat in the month are considered w is the type of average used if w is O then the average is the arithmetic mean average if w is 1 then the average is the geometric mean for fecals if w is 2 then the average is the flow weighted average When a parameter to calculate loading is specified O 8 or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter W_MAX I p _flow p_flow x y z w Examples
373. le Sample Measurement Measurement m E o 9 7 6 1 4 Reporting Use the Reporting section to modify the information that should appear each time the report is printed Reporting No Discharge To place a check in the No Discharge checkbox on the printed report place a check in the checkbox 2014 AllMax Software Inc 310 Operator10 Help Months To modify the number of months to be used for reporting and calculation purposes select a number of months from the dropdown list box Name Title Officer Enter the name and title of the official responsible for report submission Telephone Enter the telephone number of the contact person responsible for report submission A O S Name Title Officer Russell Maxwell Superintendent Telephone 419 673 8863 Standard 3320 DMR Monthly Standard 3320 4 m gt save preview Guidance Click template or press PageUp PageDn 9 7 6 1 5 Comments In the Comments setup section for the Federal DMR Report users can edit the following fields Comments Comments Enter the default comments to appear on report at the time of printing Users can modify these comments at the time of printing if the Verify Comments checkbox is marked in the General Properties screen 2014 AllMax Software Inc Reporting 311 Standard 3320 DMR Monthly Standard 3320 4 m gt Click template or press PageUp Page
374. le click the listed Report Folders to begin the print preview process for all listed reports of the selected folder see Report Folder 2014 AllMax Software Inc Right click the listed report to view the available options Annual Reports 5Year Forecast Annual Limits Report Annual Multi Year Annual Standard 3320 DMR Annual BioSolids Reports E Monthly Reports Mass Bala Print Standard Properties 5 Operational Re Rename Custom Re Delete Limits Repi Save As Protected About Print Select Print to begin the printing process see Print Report Properties To edit view the properties of a selected report select Properties see Report Properties Rename If the selected report should be renamed select Rename from the menu and enter a new report name in the Rename window that appears Press the Save button to rename the report Delete To remove a report from this section select Delete from the menu Confirm the deletion by pressing the Yes or No button Save As Select Save As to create an exact copy of the selected report with a new name Enter the name into the Save As window that appears and click the Save button to save the report Protected To make a report read only select Protected from the menu A check should appear the next time a right click is made on the selected report Changes can be made to the report properties but when exiting the properties section
375. led in here modify the header if desired There are two lines of text available for each header Calculation Press the button to select from the Formula Picklist click Select to choose the highlighted formula see also Report Calculations Units Default Units will be shown based on the selected Location Parameter Modify this field as desired Limit Enter the actual Limit value 1 to 14 characters A double asterisk on the report will signify that the value has exceeded the specified Limit Decimal Default decimal precision based on the selected Location Parameter will be shown in the Decimal field modify this value as necessary Remove Press the Remove button to remove a selected Location Parameter from the Limit Report Move Up Move Dn To re arrange the order in which the selected Location Parameters are shown on the Limit Report press the Move Up or Move Dn button s int O Pej Location Parameter Plant Efficiency XBOD 5 Header Plant Efficiency Treatment f XBOD 5 lb Left BOD 5 Day Calculation Average value kg day loading g day loading Plant Efficiency XBOD 5 lb Left BOD 5 Day 20 lb day loading Plant Efficiency XBOD 5 lb Left BOD 5 Day 20 Plant Efficiency XBOD 5 lb Left BOD 5 Day 20 Es Plant Effluent BOD 5 LP BOD DESC Plant Effluent BOD 5 LP BOD DESC imi 2500 00 Plant Effluent pH pH Standard Units a Plant Effluent pH pH Standard Un
376. lied as the source for data instead of after the data is obtained Examples APPLY SUM 1 2 3 MUL 1 1 2 2 3 3 i e 14 APPLY M_COUNT p 0 0 VERIFY 50 100 the count of monthly values gt 50 and lt 100 APPLY SUM 1 2 3 MUL 1 1 2 3 e 6 14 10 5 ASSIGN I p x y ASSIGN l p x ASSIGN value x type y to location parameter and return x Value The value x is written to the given location parameter as data type y and also returned The type y determines the type of data if y is O then the value is Data if y is 1 then the value is BLANK if y is 2 then the value is a Less Than value lt if y is 3 then the value is an Alpha Code if y is 4 then the value is a Greater Than value gt if y is 5 then the value is a Non Detect value if y is 6 then the value is a Time value if y is 7 then the value is a Date value An Alpha Code should be in its internal representation as returned by the ALPHA function The function can also write data values with the current system date and or time Add 8 to y in order to write data to the current system date add 16 to y in order to write data to the current system time hourly data entries Examples ASSIGN Influent 00310 02 2 assigns lt 002 to the l p but does not return a value see Note above ASSIGN Influent 00310 ALPHA AA 3 writes AA to the l p O 2014 AllMax Software Inc as Operator10 Help 5 ASSIG
377. ling Event 333 Add similar 30 Add Similar Limit 145 Add Similar Location 86 Add Similar Parameter 90 Add Similar Site 139 Add Site 139 Add Site Owner 144 Add special 30 Add 425 Addition 425 434 Admin Security 42 Administrator 42 After 401 403 405 418 459 All Functions 375 380 AllMax Data Definition 344 AllMax Folder 358 AllMax Folder Software 356 Alpha 436 Alpha Code 100 116 386 391 436 437 451 Alpha Code List 116 ALPHA 436 And 389 AND 389 Angled Weir 452 Annual 500 Applicaiton List 149 Application 149 364 Application Report 311 Application Values 151 Apply 436 APPLY 436 Arccosine 473 Arcsine 474 Arctangent 474 Area 519 Arithmetic Mean 125 ASIN 474 Assign 437 ASSIGN 437 ATAN 474 Audit Trail 49 57 Automatic Scale 231 Available Nitrogen 151 Average 125 126 398 399 401 402 414 418 422 425 453 457 461 472 477 482 486 492 496 497 501 Average Percent Reduction 461 Average Percent Removal 461 Averages 123 124 125 126 127 Avg 398 402 414 425 453 457 472 477 482 486 492 496 497 501 AVG 425 A Z 380 Bos Background 165 Background Image 165 O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Index 523 Backup 503 Calculation 121 Backup Schedule 505 Calculation Constants 75 Barcode 119 Calculation Order 121 Barcode Label 119 Calculation Parameters 75 Barcode Name 121 Calculation Schedule 505 Barcode Template Name 121 Calculations 519 Ba
378. ll preserve all backup files created at the selected location ii Delete backup files after Days Enter a numeric value and the backup process will remove any files that have been created via the scheduled backup utility that were created X number of days prior to the current date iii Delete backup files after Months Enter a numeric value and the backup process will remove any files that have been created via the scheduled backup utility that were created X number of months prior to the current date 5 Press Schedule Setup button to continue 6 In the Schedule dialog that opens if this schedule is e New press the New button to begin scheduling e Existing proceed to the schedule information step 5 O 2014 AllMax Software Inc sos Operator10 Help 7 Select from the options in the Schedule Task menu to determine the frequency of the task 8 Provide additional information based on the choice of schedule frequency to continue 9 Click OK to continue 10 Press 19 OK to complete the scheduling process PA ES Schedule Automatic Backups File Name MURRUMBADOWNS File Path CATEMP Multiple Backup Copies v Create multiple backup copies appends date to backup file name Keep all backup files 9 Delete backup files after 1 Days Delete backup files after Scheduling Schedule details At 10 55 AM every day starting 12 17 2012 Your task is now scheduled and ready
379. ll round to the nearest even value Examples ROUNDE 123 45 1 123 4 ROUNDE 123 35 1 123 4 ROUNDE 123 45 1 120 14 9 32 SQRT x SQRT x SQuare RooT of x Value The square root of x If x is negative or x is BLANK the function returns BLANK Examples SQRT 9 8596 3 14 SQRT 100 10 14 9 33 SUB x y x y SUB x y x SUBtract y from x Value The difference of x and y y subtracted from x If either x or y is BLANK the function returns BLANK Examples SUB 3 2 1 3 14 2 1 14 2014 AllMax Software Inc 434 Operator10 Help 14 9 34 SUM x1 x2 xn SUM x1 x2 xn SUM of all non BLANK values from x1 through xn Value The sum of values x1 through xn Any number of values may be specified If any value is BLANK the value is ignored The value BLANK is returned if all values are BLANK Examples SUM 3 2 5 SUM 1 2 BLANK 3 2 4 0 8 4 14 9 35 TRUNC x y TRUNC x y Value x TRUNCated to y decimal places Value The value of x truncated to y decimal places Positive y values signify places to the right of the decimal point negative y values signify places to the left of the decimal point If x or y is BLANK the function returns BLANK Examples sTRUNC 123 456 1 120 14 9 36 VERIFY x y z VERIFY x y z VERIFY that the value x is not less than y and not greater than z Value The value x If x is less than the limit y or if x is greater than the limit z the function retur
380. lmaxwaste T r 4 2 7 3 Database Utilities Rebuild Rebuild tables The Rebuild tables tab provides functionality allowing for the rebuilding of database files in the event of corruption or data failure Many different rebuild options are presented and functionality presented within this tab should be performed only with technical support personnel 2014 AllMax Software Inc Main Application at l Table Properties 2 Rebuild Table 4 2 7 4 Database Utilities Registry Registry _ For information purposes Registry entries used by Operator10 software are presented in the Registry tab Users can make changes to the Date Month and Time formats if desired O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 82 Operator10 Help 4 2 8 Database properties Rename Table properties Rebuild tables Server Name localhost Database Name MONTAGUE Use Custom Formats Date Format MM dd yyyy Month Format MMAyyy Time Format HH mm Pervasive Pervasive PSQL v11 v10 and Btrieve Internal database management is provided by Pervasive PSQL Btrieve software 1992 2014 Pervasive Software Inc For Pervasive PSQL products included with your Operator10 installation are utilities provided by Pervasive and installed in the Pervasive directory by default C Program Files Pervasive Software PSQL For Pervasive SQL 2000 products included wi
381. lude reports or generic formulas a Location Pint Ef Plant effluent Data 4127 items 01 01 2002 06 27 2013 LP Security none DataView Effluent Data Entry Pint Ef Flow Mgd MGD Daily Inverted Test City of Williamston Pint Ef Flow Mgd MGD MSU Data MGD Plant Effluent Pint Ef Flow Mgd MGD Avg Graph none Sampling Events none Formula none OPC DDE none m Location Parameter Usage is visible for a selected L P Information includes usage on DataViews Date Range Graphs Formulas and more Location Parameter Usage Data L P Usage information provided includes e Location Name displays the full name of the Location e Data displays the number of records as well as the date range for which data exists e LP Security displays any security applied to the individual Location Parameter e DataView displays any DataViews for which the L P appears as a column e Graph displays Graphs upon which the L P is selected as plotted data e Sampling Events displays any Sampling Event data e Formula displays any formulas in which the L P is identified e OPC DDE displays LP usage via the OPC DDE Interface Location Parameter Usage L P Usage information is presented for help in identifying all sections of Operator10 Wastewater where the selected Location Parameter is in use This information does not include Reports or Generic Formula Information provided appears as formatted text
382. lue The data value of a specific location and parameter for the date x months and y days from the current date 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 409 Examples D_VAL Effluent 50050 1 0 value last month D_VAL Effluent 50050 0 7 value last week 14 7 Date Functions Topics in this section include DATE j m d y current julian or m d y DATE DATE j x m d y x value x calculated on a julian or m d y DATE DOM x Day Of Month 1 31 offset x days DOW x Day Of Week 1 7 offset x days DOY x Day Of Year 1 365 offset x days DVAL j x VALue x for the julian Date j LOM x Length Of Month 28 31 offset x months LOY x Length Of Year 365 366 offset x years M_DATE x y z Monthly DATE offset x months for month type y MOY x Month Of Year 1 12 offset x months WDOM x WeekDay Of 1st of Month 1 7 offset x months WOM x Week Of Month 1 5 offset x days YR x the YeaR 1970 2037 offset x years 14 7 1 DATE I i m d y DATE j m d current julian or m d y DATE Value The numeric date value calculated from the specified information and returned as a julian date value Julian dates are expressed in days since 1 1 4713 B C if DATE is specified then the current date is returned if DATE j is specified then the date returned is based on the julian value if DATE m d y is specified then the date returned is based on the month day and year The value y may be either a two
383. maximum for the day H_MAX Effluent 50050 0 15 0 maximum for 14 01 through 15 00 H_MAX Effluent 50050 1 15 1 maximum value for period beginning 14 01 yesterday and ending 24 hours later at 14 00 the next day today H_MAX Effluent 50050 7 0 256 corresponding time value for the maximum 7 days ago H_MED I p x y H_MED I p x Hourly MEDian for location and parameter offset x days hour y Value The median of hourly data values of a specific location and parameter for the date x days from the current date In the distribution of data values the middle value is returned Where there are an even number of values the average arithmetic mean of 2014 AllMax Software Inc 420 Operator10 Help the two middle values is returned If y is O the values for the entire day are used If y is from 1 to 24 a single hour is used i e y 3 for values from 02 01 through 03 00 Examples H_MED Effluent 50050 0 0 median for the day H_MED Effluent 50050 0 15 median for 14 01 through 15 00 H_MED Effluent 50050 7 0 median 7 days ago 14 8 10 H_METER I p x y z H_METER l p x y z Hourly METER for location and parameter maximum meter reading y multiplier z offset x days Value The sum of hourly values calculated from the positive change in hourly meter readings at a specific location and parameter The function uses the hourly meter data for the date x days from the current date the last data prior
384. mblia Free Chlorine if n1 is 1 then the result is for Giardia Lamblia Chlorine Dioxide if n1 is 2 then the result is for Giardia Lamblia Ozone if n1 is 3 then the result is for Giardia Lamblia Chloramine if n1 is 8 then the result is for Virus Free Chlorine if n1 is 9 then the result is for Virus Chlorine Dioxide if n1 is 10 then the result is for Virus Ozone if n1 is 11 then the result is for Virus Chloramine if n2 is O then the result is based on a CT table if n2 is 1 then the result is based oninterpolation from a CT table see CTI if n2 is 2 then the result is based on a regression formula see CTR NOTE In general LI temp pH C LI T lit C T CT temp pH C li Examples 2014 AllMax Software Inc s Operator10 Help LI 20 8 2 1 90 3 0 60 O 0 Log Inactivation of Giardia Lamblia using Free Chlorine by table LI Tap 00010 Tap 00400 Tap 50064 5 60 9 2 Log Inactivation using Chlorine Dioxide for Virus by regression 14 10 1SLOOK x y1 y2 yn LOOK x1 y1 y2 yn LOOK up the xth value from the values y1 through yn Value The xth value of values y1 through yn Any number of values may be specified The value BLANK is returned if there is no xth value Examples LOOK 3 10 20 30 40 50 30 LOOK DOW 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 TRUE 1 on Mon Wed or Friday otherwise FALSE 0 14 10 2 NOTE abc x NOTE abc x The NOTE text abc is associated with the return the value x Value
385. mbol is dropped and 0 is used in place of lt 2 for the final calculation 2014 AllMax Software Inc 32 Operator10 Help e Blank no data Calculations will drop the data qualifiers from data and calculated results will display without the qualifiers treating data entered with qualifiers to be seen as blank Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 6 1 3 3 333 as the less than symbol is dropped and no data is used in place of lt 2 in the final calculation Add Remove Treat lt gt Data As Move Dn Allow Export Data As Print List Bio Limit 01 Bio Limit View With 4 m r 9 Windows File Association Save Preview Guidance Click template or press PageUp PageDn 9 7 7 3 2 BioSolids Limit Report General Information General Information In the General Properties section of the Bio Limit Report setup Report Name Enter the desired report name 1 to 40 characters for the Bio Limit Report This name is different than the report name shown in the Direct Access tree Facility Enter a facility name for the Bio Limit Report The default facility name will initially be filled in modify this as necessary Beginning Page Enter the beginning page number if the report is greater than 1 page Operator10 will continue the numbering sequence Leave this field blank if you simply want to start at page number 1 2014 AllMax Software Inc
386. mn Properties for a selected database Additionally users can go to the Help ribbon and choose the About option to access the Help About screen Fromthe Help About screen click the link for Database Properties Other Database Properties Functions Additional functions are available in the Database Properties section See the following links for additional information e Database Utilities Rename e Database Utilities Table properties e Database Utilities Rebuild tables e Database Utilities Registry O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Operator10 Help F Database Properties Town of Database properties Rename Table properties Rebuild tables Registry MONTAGUE Properties y General Geometric Mean Type Calculation Constants Calculation Parameters Standard Deviation Type Flow Parameters i Concentration Units Rounding Rule re use Units Database Timeout Seconds Fecal Parameters 3 Ly Settings Include in Scheduler Check i Logged Documents The following sections are available for editing in the Database properties tab These sections are able to be selected on the left side of the Database Properties window as shown above General Geometric Mean Type Choose from the following options to change the method by which Operator10 Wastewater calculates geometric mean e Use Zeros Any 0 values present in the data set w
387. mn header Select a Parameter and click the 19 OK button to add the parameter to the Parameter List Pcb1 2421 254wet MoisturContT is SulfateE xtr Betagroswatw hl Aldicarbsulfon Aldicarbsulfox Tetraclrehtyle No Match HydCarbS toteffspectrphotm Aluminum Acid Soluble Eff Pcb 1242 1254 Tissue Wet Moisturontenisoet Well depthbott below Lnd Welldpthtop below Lnd Surf WellD epthCompleAbove B Sulfate WtrExtractab Sludge Beta Gross Wtr Wh Pe L Aldicarb Sulfone Eff Aldicarb Sulfoxide Eff Tetrachloroethylene Eff Blank UG L UG L UG G FEET FEET FEET MK KG EL UGAL UGAL UGL Tolyltri zole Tolyltriazole Eff UGAL HydroxyE thylid Hydroxy Ethylidene 1 Eff UGAL v Detail Descriptio No Match HYDROCARB ALUMINUM AC PCB 1242 1254 MOISTURE CO WELL DPTH BC WELL DPTH TC WELL DEPTH SULFATE WTF BETA GROSS ALDICARB SUL ALDICARB SUL TETRACHLORE TOLYLTRIAZOL HYDROXY ETH ChloroEthaneEf Chloroethane Eff UG L CHLOROETHAS 12DichEthiT m Dichloroethylene Trans 12 UGAL DICHLOROETt DodecylGuansal Dodecylguanidine Salts Eff MG L EthyltolueneEf Ethyltoluene P Eff UGAL DODECYLGUA 4 m Location Parameter ETHYLTOLUEN r A Location Parameter or BioSolids BioSolid Parameter or Site Parameter represents a capacity for data storage calculation or retrieva
388. n Column Width Decimals Format String Group Header E Summaries Average Count Custom Formula Custom Formula Text Name Geometric Mean Maximum Maximum 7 Day 1st of month Maximum 7 Day Continuous L False Minimum Minimum 7 Day 1st of month Minimum 7 Day Continuous Standard Deviation TO False Sum E Summary Values Type Yearly Summary Type Sum Average True to calculate Average for the column otherwise False DataView Properties Column Properties Display Options in the Display section section are as follows Background Color Click the arrow in the cell for Backgroud Color to set the background color for the column header If the option for Full Column Color is set the selected column color will also be used for the full column Column Header Use the column header field to enter modify the header information for the selected Location Parameter column Column Justification Select the desired justification left right center or general for the data displayed in the selected column s Column Width Enter a numeric value for the column width Decimals Enter a numeric value for the decimal display of the selected column s Format String Select an option from the drop down menu Available options are e Currency displays the local currency symbol e Scientific Notation displays the value in scientific notation format 2014 AllMax Software Inc 184 Operator10 Help 7
389. n a percent removal without the requirement of an Efficiency Process being present The following format should be used M_REM p l p x where the first l p is a parameter at the influent to a plant process and the second l p is the same parameter at the effluent to a plant process EXAMPLE M_REM Influent BOD 5 Effluent BOD 5 0 would return a percent removal calculated using the Influent and Effluent BOD values Examples M_REM Effluent 00310 0 1 average Percent Removal for the current month as calculated by averaging daily percent removals of loadings M_REM Effluent 00310 1 2 previous month based on the average of daily concentrations 14 11 1 M_STAT p p x y M_STAT Ep l p x Monthly STATistics values for location s and parameter s offset x months type y Value The statistics result for data values of specific location s and parameter s for the month x months from the current month If two locations and parameters are used data values where either is BLANK are ignored If the second location parameter is not needed it may be left BLANK The type y determines the result where y 0 n the number count of values either one or two location parameters may be used y 1 2x the Sum of the values one location parameter 2 y 2 2x the Sum of the values squared one location parameter eco gt x et E ae A y 3 ze 2 1 the Sample Variance of the values one location param
390. n of Operator10 but does not permit any changes to be saved Add Edit Allows user access to the selected section of Operator10 AND permits changes to be saved Delete Allows user access to the selected section of Operatori0 AND permits changes to be saved AND ability to delete selected items Data Entry Applies only to Location Parameter security and allows users to enter modify data Edit L P Applies only to Location Parameter security and allows users to enter modify data AND edit Location Parameter details Full Applies only to Location Parameter security and allows users to enter modify data AND edit Location Parameter details AND delete Location Parameters O 2014 AllMax Software Inc General Features 45 3 3 3 User L P Permissions Location Parameter Permissions To aid in the protection of Location Parameter Data Location Parameter permissions can be established to allow or deny a users ability to manipulate data for selected Location Parameters To access the L P Permissions section of Operator10 Wastewater go to the File menu and select Security and click on the L P Permissions Tab To change L P Security select a user on the left side of the User Security screen The listings on the left side of the User Security section are automatically populated for all User Facility combinations from the Facilities tab Information is read only and should be modified on the Facilities tab if necessary L P Security c
391. n to delete records Individually selected records can be deleted as well as multiple selections of location parameters Confirmation is required when deleting location parameters from the database Click the Y Yes Yes button to confirm or X No No to cancel the deletion of data Location Parameter Usage Location Parameter Usage information is available from the Detail section First select a Location Parameter from the list grid at the top of the Location Parameter section next select the tree item LP Usage to view Location Parameter Usage information 2014 AllMax Software Inc Main Application ld 4 274 records 1 selected gt PU RA SB QBAL City of Williamston y Facility Name lt Location Location Description Parameter Parameter Description Units Decimal Entry Type Recent Y Pint Ef Plant effluent low Thru Treatment Plant MGD City of Williamston City of Williamston Pint Ef Plant effluent ittogen Ammonia Total As MG L 4 Daily City of Williamston Pint Ef Plant effluent pH pH Standard Units S U 2 Daily e City of Williamston Pint Ef Plant effluent Phos Total Wet Phosphorus Total As P MG L 4 Daily e City of Williamston Pint Ef Plant effluent Solids TSS Total Suspended Solids TSS MG L 1 Daily eu X 4 m General Facility City of Williamston LP Usage Location Pint Ef Plant effluent Parameter Flow Mad How Thru Treatment Plant Mad Does not inc
392. n type as the specified location x days from the current date Example S_AVG Section 50050 0 average section flow for all similar process sections 14 13 3 S_SUM I p x S SUM I p x Section SUM for location and parameter offset x days Value The sum of like parameter values of process sections of the same process and the same section type as the specified location x days from the current date Example S_SUM Section 50050 0 sum of section flow for all similar process sections 14 14 Quaterly Data Functions Topics in this section include e Q_CSUM I p x Calendar Quarter SUM of daily values offset x months e Q SUM I p x Quarterly SUM of daily values offset x months 14 14 1 Q_CSUM I p x _CSUM I p x Calendar Quarter SUM of daily values for location and parameter offset x months Value The sum of data values of a specific location and parameter for the calendar quarter beginning January April July or October from the first month of the quarter through the month x months from the current month When a parameter to calculate loading is specified amp or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 473 add the additional parameter Q_CSUM I p _ flow p_flow x Examples Q_CSUM Effluent 50050 0 quarterly sum through the present month Q_CSUM Effluent 31614 1 quarterly sum through
393. n with Numeric and or Alpha Code produces Greater Than Non Detect with Numeric produces Non Detect Less Than and Greater Than with Numeric Alpha Code and or Non Detect produces Numeric Time with any other Data Type produces Time Date with any other Data Type produces Date Blank with any other Data Type produces Blank Notes have no effect unless they are the final result Special cases or exceptions Subtraction Division second argument is inverted for example 20 lt 5 gt 15 Flow Calculations produce Numeric True False Boolean produce Numeric Sine Cosine Tangent etc produce Numeric Count Standard Deviation produce Numeric Meter produce Numeric Date Offsets Violation Durations produce Numeric Internal BioSolids Calculations produce Numeric The Alpha Code TNTC is treated specially 14 3 2 LP I p l p Location Parameter LP Il LP f l f l The data value of a specific Location and Parameter from the specified Facility for the current date Value The data value of a specific location and parameter from the specified facility for the current date of calculation NOTE The facility location and parameter to which the formula is attached is used as a Default Location and Parameter for the following Special Cases O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 388 Operator10 Help If f is then the Default Facility is used If is then the Default Location is used If is 2n then a Process S
394. nc Functions 449 14 10 2 RANGE x1 y1 y2 yn RANGE x1 y1 y2 yn find which RANGE contains the value x from the range limits y1 through yn Value The index 1 through n of the first range limit y1 through yn which contains the value x x does not exceed the range limit Any number of range limits may be specified and they must be in ascending order If a range limit is BLANK it is considered to have no limit and will always contain the value x If the value x is BLANK it is contained in the first range The value BLANK is returned if there is no range which contains the value x NOTE Only the limits through the range which includes the value are processed all other limits are never processed Examples RANGE 27 5 10 20 30 40 50 3 27 5 exceeds 10 and 20 but not 30 the 3rd value RANGE LOM 0 29 30 31 1 if the month has 28 or 29 days 2 if 30 3 if 31 14 10 2iSETF x y SETF x formula SET an internal reference Formula Value The function sets an internal reference formula for later use and the value TRUE 1 is returned An internal reference formula may be used in place of any data using the LP CALC_LP n syntax see also LP Any internal reference formulas set by SETF remain in place for as long as the application is loaded Use an empty string for example SETF x to clear a formula SETF may be combined with a LP CALC_LP n syntax for example I
395. nce Report This name is different than the report name shown in the Direct Access tree Facility Enter a facility name for the Mass Balance Report The default facility name will initially be filled in modify this as necessary O 2014 AllMax Software Inc General Information Report Title Mass Balance Report Facility WasteWater Sample Data Total Dri tion imissna V0 tet tion Ratia Mass Balance Monthly Mass Balance 4 m save Preview Guidance Click template or press PageUp PageDn 9 7 3 1 3 Rows Report Rows The report contains two sections with an influent section on top and a distribution section on the bottom The summaries of these sections will be used to determine the influent to distribution ratio Influent upper section of the report contains four rows for selecting location parameter combinations that represent streams contributing to the process These can be where solids are produced and or areas where a solids increase occurs A name can be defined as a header for each row that will be displayed on the report Distribution lower section of the report contains six rows for selecting location parameter combinations that represent streams discharged from the process A name can be defined as a header for each row that will be displayed on the report Row Options several options are available for each row of the report Each parameter can be set to either Add or Subt
396. nd Group Click the button to the right of each field to choose from the list Click the EJ Save button to save any data entered Upon selecting the above information security settings can be established on the right side of the User Security window The following security options are available Applications Bio Choices include No Access View Only Add Edit Delete to limit access to the BioSolids Application section Calculate Choices include Access No Access to enable disable the ability to calculate data Chemical Choices include No Access View Only Add Edit Delete to limit access to the Chemical section Dataport Choices include No Access View Only Add Edit Delete to limit access to the Dataport section Dataviews Choices include No Access View Only Add Edit Delete to limit access to the Dataview section Default L P Security Choices include View Only Data Entry Edit L P Full and acts as a default setting for all Location Parameters see note below for more information Formula Choices include No Access View Only Add Edit Delete to limit access to the Formula section Graphing Choices include No Access View Only Add Edit Delete to limit access to the Graphing section Import Choices include Access No Access to enable disable the ability to Import data Limits Bio Choices include No Access View Only Add Edit Delete to limit access to the Limits section of the BioSolids Site Limits section O 20
397. ndesk al Report Report Report Report Report Report Report Report September The Logged Documents section allows users to view a list of logged documents printed from the DataView Graphing and Reporting sections Accessing Logged Documents To access the Logged Document section in the main application window go to the View ribbon menu click the lv View Documents button in the Logged Documents group Adding Logged Documents To add new documents to the list of logged documents go the the DataView Graphing or Reporting sections of Operator10 and print a document Upon printing a prompt may be visible asking for the user to log the document as printed with an associated note Depending on the settings found in the Database Properties section users can edit which sections of the program prompt for logging documents Delete Logged Documents To delete a logged document highlight the document in the list and click the x Delete button Confirm the deletion of data by clicking the Y Yes Yes or X No No button 2014 AllMax Software Inc Main Application 1 4 14 1 4 14 2 Log Document Log Document When users print from DataView Graphing or Reporting a prompt will be presented to log documents as complete or printed Logging a document saves a copy of the document as the document was printed The logged document is able to be accessed from the Logged Documents section o
398. ng char with value x Value The data value returned by a Dynamic Data Exchange DDE link with another open 2014 AllMax Software Inc Operator10 Help application The other application requires specific Service Topic and Item strings see documentation of the other application The and characters separate the strings and the character in any string is replaced by the integer value of x For example if x is equal to 4 then R C1 becomes R4C1 If the DDE link does not succeed the original value of the Location Parameter will be returned the data will be unchanged If the DDE link succeeds but no valid data is returned the returned value will be BLANK Calculations using DDE links are very dependent upon another application and may therefore be much slower than normal calculations especially if the link must time out because of errors In most cases the other application must be running and the appropriate file must be open Synexus DDE links require the other application to be able to return a single value in the ascii text CF_TEXT format The Service string is usually the name of the application the Topic string is usually the filename and or page and the Item string is usually a reference to the specific data Use the character and specify the value x when for example the link depends on the day of the month using the DOM function to determine a row or column Examples DDE EXCEL Book1
399. ng the Operator10 Agent To access the Operator10 Agent information go to the Tools menu choose Setup Adding Server Database to Agent To instruct the Operator10 Agent to perform the scheduled tasks associated with backups calculations or data imports follow these steps 1 Click the v Add button to begin O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Utilities 507 2 In the Server list that opens select the server where the Operator10 Database resides 3 Click 3 OK 4 In the Database list that opens select the database to be processed when the Operator10 Agent performs the scheduled tasks 5 Click 13 OK Upon adding the server database combination to the list the scheduled tasks will be displayed Scheduled Tasks From the Operator10 Agent Service Options window the following tasks are available to be scheduled Scheduled Backups 1 In the area labeled Individual Schedule Definitions press the Schedule button for Backup Schedule to begin 2 Enter the desired name of the file to be created in the File Name file 3 Select the desired path where the backup file is to be created Press the button 4 In the Multiple Backup Copies area a Check the Create multiple backup copies checkbox to create unique backup files that will have the date appended to the name of the file Example Operator10Backup_20121219 zip b Select from the available options i Keep all backup files This option wi
400. nies user access to the selected section of Operator10 View Only Allows user access to the selected section of Operator10 but does not permit any changes to be saved Add Edit Allows user access to the selected section of Operator10 AND permits changes to be saved e Delete Allows user access to the selected section of Operator10 AND permits changes to be saved AND ability to delete selected items Data Entry Applies only to Location Parameter security and allows users to enter modify data e Edit L P Applies only to Location Parameter security and allows users to enter modify data AND edit Location Parameter details Full Applies only to Location Parameter security and allows users to enter modify data AND edit Location Parameter details AND delete Location Parameters 3 4 Date Calendar Date Calendar Dates for United States users are usually represented in the form MM DD YY where MM is a month from 01 to 12 DD is a day of the month from 01 to 31 and YY is the last two digits of the year from 0 to 99 Valid dates range from January 1 1970 through December 31 2037 Dates for International users are dependent on Windows settings Dates may be entered in a variety of manners e Delimiters may be omitted when the entered form is MMDDYY or MMYY e Delimiters can be any of the following characters e When using delimiters the leading O may be omitted for month day or year e When using delimiters the
401. nks Listbox The OPC DDE Links Listbox displays list of all created OPC DDE Links The listed order can be sorted by clicking the header of the desired column Name Location Parameter Item Data Type To view Link details simply highlight the OPC DDE Link the details will appear to the right side of the dialog box in the Link Status frame To edit Link details simply highlight the OPC DDE Link and click the Edit button to modify the link OPC DDE Add Remove Print Setup Log OPC DDE Add Edit Remove Print Setup Log Buttons ADD Press the Add button to begin the process of adding a new OPC DDE Link see 2014 AllMax Software Inc Interfaces 343 OPC DDE Link EDIT Press the Edit button to edit an existing link see OPC DDE Links REMOVE Press the Remove button to remove a selected OPC DDE Link When prompted acknowledge the removal by pressing Yes or No PRINT Press the Print button to print the list of OPC DDE links SETUP Press the Setup button to view the setup configuration of the Operator10 OPC DDE Interface see OPC DDE Setup LOG Press the Log button to show the OP10_DDE LOG log file see OPC DDE Log 12 1 2 3 OPC DDE Start amp Stop Start and Stop Buttons Press the Start button to start the internal timer which controls when OPC DDE Links are enacted The Current Date and Time will be displayed and update while the timer is running Any overdue Links will be
402. nning page The Limit Report will continue to number subsequent pages if applicable Leave this field blank to use default numbering 9 7 4 1 3 Limits j Report Properties S E A Ze Wastewater Sample Data Header 911 S Main St Kenton Ohio 43326 Beginning Page blank for default Add Plant Efficiency XBOD 5 lb Left BOD 5 Day 20 Plant Efficiency XBOD 5 lb Left BOD 5 Day 20 Remove Plant Effluent BOD 5 LP BOD DESC Plant Effluent BOD 5 LP BOD DESC Move Up Plant Effluent pH pH Standard Units Plant Effluent pH pH Standard Units Move Dn Plant Effluent Solids TSS Total Suspended Solids TSS Plant Effiuent Solids TSS Total Suspended Solids TSS i Print List Plant Efficiency XSolids TSS lb Left Total Suspen Limits Report Operational Limit Report m r save Preview _ cudance Click template or press PageUp PageDn In the Limits setup section for the Limit Report Location Parameter Setup To ADD Location Parameters To add values to the limit report press the Add button to select from the Location Parameter Multiselect Picklist Highlight a desired Location Parameter and press the Select button in the Picklist Location Parameter Definition Once the Location Parameter has been added edit the following fields to define your limit Header 2014 AllMax Software Inc A default Header based on the Location Parameter selected will be fil
403. nnnr cnn 180 DataView Properties Column Properties cccccceeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeaeeeeaeeeesneeseaeeesaeeeesaeessaeeeseeeensneeeeaees 182 DataView Properties Print Properties c cccessceeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeaeeesaeeeesaeessaeeesaeeensaeessaseeseeeenseeensaees 184 DataView Print Properties OPtiONS ooooooonnccinnccnnnccnnoccconnccconcccnonccnono conc cnn n cnn noc aran cnn cnn nara rn nr 184 DataView Print Properties Pagl ooooocconccccnocccconccconcccoonccnoncncnnncconnccnnn nn nan nn nan nn nn n aran EES rr rn rra rra 185 DataView Print Properties MargiN oooooonncccninccinnccnnoccccocccnnncncnncccnnnc ccoo cnn nn conc n narran crac 187 DataView Print Properties Header FOoter cccccccccceseseeeeceeeeeeeeseaeeeeaeeeeeeesaeeseaeeceaeeesaeeseaeeeseeeessaeeseaees 188 DataView ApplicatiON aie taa aerae iii 189 DataView File AAA a aar aaa aa Eae aaao a aa edaran erea a eae daa aaaea iiaa daane 190 DataVie W HoMe RID DO T sd ccicezecsieccssscccesscssdessesasicienoadesscenceiessossvoasdszoisdsedesteniesuserenscevsdbessubecuiceeesetbcescetasvetsxeteis 191 DataView Edit Ribbon DataView Tools Ribbon DataView Window Ribbon oooconccconncconnccnonoccnnncnncncnn cnn 196 Keyboard SHOP CUtS aa a era aE aa aar a AT a a r vensnssoundseauedsosszscinerseeeedeeisnbsieinbeetetdtencetsaversvoters 196 DataViow Features E E E E E E T 197 Group HE Ad OTS ii secsisescstectvsceec nceeddescess
404. ns from the menu Add an Application gt In the BioSolid Application list click the 7 Add button to add a new Application The window BioSolid Application will appear and allow users to enter the following information 2014 AllMax Software Inc 150 Operator10 Help 0 0 Y Click the button to choose a Facility Name Click the button to choose a Site to apply a BioSolid Click the button to choose a BioSolid to apply to a Site Click the button to choose a Date to select a date for application from the calendar Select an Application Method for this application of a selected BioSolid Enter the number of Trips made to the selected Site for application Enter the Amount of BioSolid applied per trip for the application Select the Units for the Amount of BioSolid applied per trip for the application Enter a name or idenitifying value for the user employee applying the BioSolid in the Applied By field Enter any comments for the application in the Comments field Click the EJ Save button to save any data entered O 2014 AllMax Software Inc BioSolids 151 5 6 1 User Values User Values In the BioSolid Application List users may enter specific information about the application such as Miles Driven Fuel Usage etc as Parameter data Click the popup button in the list entry for an application to enter specific user data about the application To record values by a
405. ns BLANK If the limit y or z is BLANK it is not used Examples VERIFY 3 14 0 10 3 14 the value is within the limits VERIFY 12 6 0 10 BLANK VERIFY 12 6 0 BLANK 12 6 no upper limit 14 10 Miscellaneous Functions Topics in this section include e ACCRUE I p x ACCRUE all values offset x months e ACODE I p x numeric Alpha CODE offset x days e ALPHA ab numeric ALPHA code representation for ab 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 435 APPLY x y apply function 2 y to data in function 1 x ASSIGN l p x y ASSIGN value y type x to location parameter BIN x BINary value of x expressed as an AlphaCode BLANK x BLANK data BLANK no data exists CT x y z w disinfection CT Concentration Time for temp pH Cl LI CT1 x y z w interpolated disinfection CT Concentration Time for temp pH Cl LI CTR x y z w Regression method disinfection CT Concentration Time for temp pH Cl LI CVT a b x ConVerT value x from abc units to def units CYL x y CYLinder volume ratio height x diameter y FAC abc x value x from another FACility abc FORMULA abc value from another FORMULA HEX x HEXadecimal value of x expressed as an AlphaCode HLIME x y z w v Hydrated LIME required in mg l INCLUDE fn Ip x y z m INCLUDE location parameter with calculated formula LI x y Z w Vv n1 n2 Log Inactivation LOOK x y1 y2 yn LOOK up the xth value NOTE abc x Note text abc is
406. nt month If y is O or BLANK the function assumes 1 year The function counts only valid data it ignores Alpha Codes Less Than Greater Than or Non Detect values if Facility options are set to blank When a parameter to calculate loading is specified O 8 or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter Y_COUNT p I_flow p_flow x y Examples Y_COUNT Effluent 50050 0 0 start current month yearly count Y_COUNT Effluent 31614 6 6 previous 6 month count 14 18 5 Y_CSUM I p x Y_CSUM I p x Calendar Year SUM of daily values for location and parameter offset x months Value The sum of data values of a specific location and parameter for the calendar year from January through the month x months from the current month When a parameter to calculate loading is specified amp or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter Y_CSUM I p I_flow p_flow x Examples Y_CSUM Effluent 50050 0 yearly sum from January through the present month Y_CSUM Effluent 31614 1 yearly sum through the previous month The start month of the calendar may be specified where mis the start month January is 1 add the additional parameter Y_CSUM I p x m 14 18 6 Y_MAX I p x y Y_MAX I p x Yearly MAXimum for location and parameter offset x months f
407. nted documents e Prompt default option Prompts for logging of printed documents Sampling e Never Never prompts user to log any printed documents e Always Does not prompt user automatically logs all printed documents e Prompt default option Prompts for logging of printed documents 2014 AllMax Software Inc Main Application 4 2 7 Database Utilities From the Database Properties window the following options are available as Database Utilities e Rename e Table properties e Rebuild tables e Registry 4 2 7 1 Database Utilities Rename Rename The Rename utility allows users to rename specific items found in the Operator10 database Users can rename Locations Location Parameters Formulas Facilities and Facility Directories Due to the sensitive nature of these items it is recommended that a backup be completed prior to performing any rename functions In most cases the procedure to rename data is as follows 1 Select the type of data to be renamed 2 Choose the item to be renamed click the button to select from an available list of items 3 Enter a new item name 4 Click the Rename button located in the top right to complete the process a T Database Properties Town of Montague WT Rename Table properties Rebuild tables Registry y Rename Rename MONTAGUE Items Town of Montague Does not include reports or generic formulas Rename Location
408. ntially enter a value for Label Every Marks The first mark and the first mark of each normal period for the data range type is always labeled i e the first of each month for daily data 8 4 1 4 Window menu Topics in this section include e Data Window e Zoom e Palette Bar e Pattern Bar 8 4 1 4 1 Data Window Data Window Go to the Window menu and choose Data Window to displays the data in spreadsheet form instead of a graph It includes the x axis Legend text as row labels the Series Location Parameter Legend text as column headers and the data shown in each Data cell Legend text may be edited by LeftDoubleClicking the appropriate label Graphed Data values may be edited by LeftDoubleClicking the appropriate Data cell 2014 AllMax Software Inc 236 Operator10 Help Ml Inf Dom 50050 E Inf Ind 50050 120172010 120272010 1 03 2010 1 04 2010 45 59 oer 32 75 1 06 2010 63 41 8 4 1 4 2 Zoom Zoom Resize Graph To Zoom in or magnify any section of the current Graph check the Zoom menu item then LeftDrag through the area of the graph that should be shown in the window Uncheck the Zoom menu item to return to normal viewing Zoom may also be chosen by pressing the appropriate Toolbar button To Resize a Graph within its window LeftDrag the edges of the walls of the graph as necessary The mouse cursor will change to arrows when moved directly over the edges of the graph
409. o establish a selection of links to extemal files that may be commonly used or accessed Sample Navigation Container Working with a Navigation Container To work with a Navigation Container see the following topics Adding a Navigation Container To add a Navigation Container in the Operator10 Wastewater Main Application open a Dashboard View and select a Page With a Page selected click the button in the ribbon to Add Container to Page and select Add Navigation Container O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 164 Operator10 Help The new Navigation Container will be displayed at the top left of the page and will be blank and ready for setup Unlimited Navigation Containers can be added to any Page Editing Navigation Container Settings Adding Links to a Navigation Container To add links to a Navigation Container click the e Add button to display an explorer window allowing you to browse for a file and select it to be included in the container Removing Links from a Navigation Container To remove a link from a Navigation Container single click a displayed icon or link to highlight it With a link highlighted click the x Delete button and the link will be removed Set View Options To set the view options for the Navigation Container choose from the following options in the drop down menu e Large Icon e Details e Small Icon e List e Tile Removing a Navigation Container To remove a Navigati
410. o remove icons fromthe Quick Access Toolbar perform the following steps 1 Right click on any icon in the Quick Access Toolbar 2 Choose Remove from Quick Access Toolbar 4 1 2 Menu System Topics in this section include File Menu Dashboard Ribbon View Ribbon Setup Ribbon BioSolids Ribbon Pretreatment Ribbon Not available in Operator10 for Water and Wastewater Tools Ribbon Support Ribbon Help Ribbon 4 1 2 1 File Menu Main Application File Menu O 2014 AllMax Software Inc s Operator10 Help The Main Application File menu provides users with access to the following features Change Facility Opens a Facility picklist allowing the user to select a Facility from the current Database Open Database Opens the Database Facility picklist allowing the user to choose a new facility from any Database Setup Provides the following options e Options Opens the Operator10 Wastewater Options dialog e Email Opens a utility in which email settings can be defined for use when printing previewing Security Opens the User Security section Audit Trail Opens the Audit Trail section Operator10 Help Opens the Operatori0 Help File Exit Closes the Operator10 Wastewater Application 4 1 2 2 Dashboard Ribbon Main Application Dashboard Ribbon The Dashboard ribbon provides the following functionality 2014 AllMax Software Inc Main Application s mie
411. ocate the Add button 2 Clicking directly on the Add button will take the user to the DataView Properties section 3 Clicking on the drop down arrow beside the Add button will allow the user to choose from the following e Daily Values DataView e Hourly Values DataView e Summary Values DataView DataView Application To create a new DataView from the DataView Application follow these steps 1 Go to the Home ribbon 2 Click the New DataView button 3 Choose from the available options 2014 AllMax Software Inc DataView 171 e Daily Values DataView e Hourly Values DataView e Summary Values DataView 7 3 DataView Name DataView Name DataViews are saved using a unique name When saving a new DataView users will be prompted to enter a DataView name Users can also use the Save As feature to save existing DataViews under a new name Save In the Home ribbon press the E Save button and choose Save DataView to save the new DataView Enter the DataView name into the dialog provided and click the 0 OK button to save the DataView Save As To save an existing DataView using a new name find the Home ribbon press the Save button and choose Save As to save the new DataView Enter the DataView name into the dialog provided and click the 3 OK button to save the DataView with the new name 7 4 Delete DataView DataViews can be deleted as necessary To delete a DataView please follow these
412. ocation Parameter to display the Location Parameter list Select the desired Location Parameter from the list and click the 3 OK button Perform these steps as needed to edit any Data Container at any time Set Date Range To set the date range for the Data Container use the drop down menu displayed on the Data Container Choose from the following options e Previous 7 Days e Current Month Previous Month Previous 30 Days Previous 60 Days Previous 90 Days e Current Year e Custom Removing a Data Container To remove a Data Container click the red X in the top right corner of the Data Container Answer Y Ys Yes or X No No to the prompt when presented 6 1 4 2 3 2 Graph Containers Graph Containers allow users to see a graph or chart of data for a single Location Parameter Data can be graphed using a Line Horizontal Bar Vertical Bar or Scatter style based on the selected date range O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 160 Operator10 Help 3385345933 6 Go 8 bo Be Bee eee SE fs Line Graph Example Horizontal Graph Vertical Graph Scatter Graph Example Example Example Sample Graph Containers Working with a Graph Container To work with a Graph Container see the following topics Adding a Graph Container To add a
413. ocation Parameter The first option in the right click menu displays the Facility Location Parameter F L P that is represented as a column Formula Depending on the F L P selected the Formula associated with the F L P will be displayed click on the Formula text to display the complete formula information Limit s Depending on the F L P selected if limits have been defined Upper and or Lower Limits will be displayed Column Properties Opens the DataView Column Properties section Edit Column Header Opens the Column Header edit window Freeze Column Select this option to Freeze the column to the left side of the DataView Autosize Choose from the available options to automatically re size the width of the selected column or all columns in the DataView Go To Choose fromthe list of F L Ps displayed as columns on the open DataView to be taken to that column directly Data Cell Right click on any cell in the DataView and select from the following options Column Properties Opens the DataView Column Properties section Add Data Opens the Add Data dialog for specific date time data entry for the selected column F L P Alpha Code Opens the Alpha Code picklist and based upon selection inserts the selected Alpha Code into the data cell Cut Select Cut to remove the entered data from the data cell s and place it on the Windows Clipboard for use Copy Select Copy to make a copy of entered data from the data cell s and place
414. ocation and parameter offset x months and y days Value The average of z number of data values of a specific location and parameter equal to or prior to the date x months and y days fromthe current date the last data values not later than the date The function considers only valid data and will return BLANK if there is no valid data equal to or earlier than the date If z is less than or equal to zero the function returns BLANK If z is 1 the function returns the same value as D_LAST The average Loading may be returned by adding the additional parameter D_LASTN I p x y zZ 1 A Geometric Mean may be returned instead of an average by adding the additional parameter D_LASTN I p x y Z 2 Examples D_LASTN Effluent 50050 1 0 2 average of two values one month ago or earlier D_LASTN Effluent 50050 0 7 1 value one week ago or earlier 14 6 13 D_LASTNM I p x y z D_LASTNM I p x y z Daily Median of LAST z Number of values for location and parameter offset x months and y days Value The median of z number of data values of a specific location and parameter equal to or prior to the date x months and y days fromthe current date the last data values not later than the date In the distribution of data values the middle value is returned Where there are an even number of values the average arithmetic mean of the two 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 403 middle values is returned The function consid
415. ocess is accounted for There are four setup sections e General Properties e General Information e Rows e Comments 9 7 3 1 Mass Balance Report Setup Topics in this section include e General Properties e General Information e Rows e Comments O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 282 Operator10 Help 9 7 3 1 1 General Properties In the General Properties setup section for the Mass Balance Report users can edit the following fields Page Adjustment and Print settings Size Enter a percentage to which you would like to reduce the printed form X Offset Adjust the X coordinate to which you would like to offset the printed form Y Offset Adjust the Y coordinate to which you would like to offset the printed form OPlain Paper Mark the Plain Paper radio button to print the entire form including all lines headers and data Form Mark the Form radio button if you are printing directly on or will be copying onto a blank form Preprinted Form If generic information is already preprinted on the form mark the Preprinted Form radio button to print only the data and appropriate information JAllow Comments To enter comments at the time of printing check the JAllow Comments checkbox Calculate Increase Using Three options are available to calculate increase using e First and last value uses the first and the last values of the month to determine the increase e First and last week
416. of the selected Location Parameter as a column or the database various icons may be displayed automatically in the column header area as well as the status bar area at the bottom of the displayed DataView These icons help to identify important information about the selected column or cell Calculator Icon denotes that the selected Location Parameter has an attached Formula Right click E on the column header and select Formula Formula Name to display the attached formula information O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 200 Operator10 Help Hourly L P Icon denotes that the selected Location Parameter is flagged as an Hourly Location Parameter Locked Data Icon denotes that for a period of time based on the current Locked Data setting access to the selected Location Parameter is denied as it is locked Protected Icon denotes that the selected Location Parameter is flagged as Protected and data entry is denied Restricted Icon denotes that the user is restricted to the Location Parameter based on LP Permissions in the security section Upper Limit denotes that the selected Location Parameter has a data entry limit set for the Upper Entry Limit Lower Limit denotes that the selected Location Parameter has a data entry limit set for the Lower Entry Limit Dual Limit denotes that the O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Dataview 201 selected Location Parameter
417. of value x 1 2 3 x Value The factorial of the integer value of x 1 2 3 x If x is BLANK or less than O the function returns BLANK Examples FACT 4 24 1 2 3 4 FACT 3 5 6 1 2 3 14 9 10 FIRST x1 x2 xn FIRST x1 x2 xn FIRST non BLANK value from x1 through xn Value The first of values x1 through xn Any number of values may be specified If any value is BLANK the value is ignored The value BLANK is returned if all values are BLANK Examples FIRST x y Z x if it is not blank or else y if it is not blank or else z if it is not blank FIRST Influent 50050 Effluent 50050 3 2 the first flow value found or the default 3 2 14 9 11 FRAC x FRAC x a FRACtional part of the value x Value The fractional part of the value x is returned If x is BLANK the function returns BLANK Examples FRAC 123 456 456 FRAC 3 14 14 14 9 12 IDIST x IDIST x O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 4 Operator10 Help Inverse of the standard normal DISTribution for value x Value The value of the standard normal distribution curve for the area x If x is not between 0 and 1 the function returns BLANK Examples IDIST 975 1 96 IDIST 5 0 14 9 13 INT x INT x INTeger value of x Value The largest integer not greater than x If x is BLANK the function returns BLANK Examples INT 3 14 3 INT 3 14 4 14 9 14 INTER a c fa fc b INTER a c fa fc b INT
418. oftware Inc 7 Add button to begin Enter a date time stamp y 33 Operator10 Help Begin entering notes or comments in the text entry field that appears at the bottom of the window Check the Protected checkbox to indicate that this note should not be edited by other users Edit Note To edit an existing note highlight the note in the grid and click the 4 Edit button to begin editing the note Delete Note x button to delete the note Confirm the deletion of the note by clicking the Y Yes Yes or X No No button To delete an existing note highlight the note in the grid and click the Delete 2014 AllMax Software Inc 340 Operator10 Help 12 12 1 Interfaces Topics in this section include e OPC DDE Interface OPC DDE Interface OPC DDE Interface Application The AllMax OPC DDE Interface OLE for Process Control Dynamic Data Exchange is a separate Client Server application that can be used both to Retrieve data on a Daily or periodic Real Time basis and to allow DDE Access to Operatori0 data values Data can be exchanged with any running application which supports OPC or DDE Linking Since the OPC DDE Interface application is able to both share and retrieve data it is technically known as both a DDE Server a DDE Client and an OPC Client It is capable of linking with any running application which supports OPC or DDE links such as most SCADA software Microsoft Excel
419. olation avg violation SNC_MAXD I p x y z w v offset type rule avg SNC violation MAX Daily SNC_MAXM I p x y z w v offset type rule avg SNC violation MAX Monthly SNC_MIND I p x y z w v offset type rule avg SNC violation MIN Daily SNC_MINM I p x y z w v offset type rule avg SNC violation MIN Monthly SODA x SODA required in mg l SORT x SQuare RooT of x SUB x y x y SUBtract y from x SUM x1 x2 xn SUM of all non blank values SYNC abc SYNCronize location with facility abc T TANGO TANgent of x TRUE 1 not equal to 0 see also Constants TRUNC x y TRUNCate value x to y decimal places TYPE x y TYPE of data x set type y V V_AVG I p x y Z w V offset type rule avg Violation AVG V_CNT I p x y z w offset type rule Violation CouNT values V_CNTP I p x y zZ w offset type Period Violation CouNT values month V_DLY I p x y z w DaiLY Violation offset type max min V_DLYM l p x y z w DaiLY Multiple Violation offset type max min 2014 AllMax Software Inc 386 Operator10 Help V_MAV I p x y z w v offset type rule avg Violation Min AVerage V_MAX I p x y Z w v offset type rule avg Violation MAX V_MIN I p x y Z w V offset type rule avg Violation MIN VAL abc VALue and data type of abc VAR1 through VAR9 variable set using SETVAR see also Constants VERIFY x y z VERIFY value x gt y lt z else blank
420. on Once the Location Parameter has been added edit the following fields to define Header A default Header based on the Location Parameter selected will be filled in here modify the header if desired There are two lines of text available for each header Number of Years Select the number of years to be calculated for the selected Location Parameter Choose from the drop down list box Decimal Default decimal precision based on the selected Location Parameter will be shown in the Decimal field modify this value as necessary Remove Press the Remove button to remove a selected Location Parameter from the Limit Report Move Up Move Dn To re arrange the order in which the selected Location Parameters are shown on the Limit Report press the Move Up or Move Dn button s O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 4 Multi Year 01 Multi Year m save Preview Guidance Click template or press PageUp PageDn 9 7 2 2 1 3 Summary Columns In the Summary Columns setup section for the Multi Year Summary Report users can choose from the following summary calculations for the selected location parameters select no more than 8 Calculation Options 2014 AllMax Software Inc Sum Daily Avg Daily Max Daily Min Daily Count Daily Avg Monthly Max Monthly Min Monthly Avg Loading Max Loading Min Loading Avg Mo Loading Max Mo Loading Min Mo Loading 280 Opera
421. on Choose from additional options to print specific reports 2014 AllMax Software Inc 11 Notes Notes Notes 337 Notes can be entered as they relate to specific data entered into the application Quick Notes as well as for day to day operation Operator Notes The Notes section provides access to the notes stored in the database as well as the ability to add edit and delete notes 2 Operator Notes oe x Facility Name User Name Notes Hd 4 5 records 1 selected gt Pa de K a Q ap Security Level DateTime Protected Murrumba Downs STP Inlet TP mg L Read write Delete 05 04 2011 Inlet T P_PERSULPHATE Murumba Downs STP 51 ROC EAMMONIA_N Murumba Downs STP Murrumba Downs STP 152 Pre ROC AMMONIA_N Murumba Downs STP Weather Station Rainfall Date Time 04 07 2012 Missing chlorine value auto sampler not functioning The Operator Notes section displays notes entered for data as well as day to day notes Accessing Operator Notes 51 ROCVETt Missing chlorine 52 Pre ROC Weather Station Read write Delete Wirite Delete Read Write Delete Read write Delete 04 07 2012 08 23 2011 01 16 2012 The Notes section can be accessed by going to the View menu ribbon and clicking the Notes button Add Note To create a new note click the gt for the note by clicking the button O 2014 AllMax S
422. on Container click the red X in the top right corner of the Navigation Container Answer Y Yes Yes or X No No to the prompt when presented 6 1 4 2 3 5 Container Size Dashboard Containers can be sized as desired by users To set the container size choose from available preset sizes or define a custom size Adjusting Container Size To set the size of a container click on the Y Settings button at the top right of the container From the menu that is displayed choose the Window Size option and select from the available choices Default sizes are provided and maintained by Operator10 Wastewater Choose the option Custom Size to define a custom size for the Container Enter a numeric value in the Height and Width fields or use the up down arrow buttons to 2014 AllMax Software Inc Dashboard 165 adjust the size Press the Save button to set the size of the container 6 1 4 2 4 Page Options For each Page the following options are available Page Options To access Page Options click the 2 Page Options icon in the Dashboard Ribbon The Page Properties window will open and is shown below moge Plaenent Background Color A HotSpots HotSpot Color HO H Background Image Each Page has the ability to store a background image 2014 AllMax Software Inc 166 Operator10 Help Select Background Image To set the background image press the button From the
423. on uses the following type z to determine the calculation method if z is O then the hourly result is the data value y if z is 1 then the hourly result is the data value y if z is 2 then the hourly result is the data value y if z is 3 then the hourly result is the data value y if z is 4 then the hourly result is the maximum of the data value or y if z is 5 then the hourly result is the minimum of the data value or y if z is 6 then the hourly result is the average of the data value and y if z is 7 then the hourly result is BLANK if the data value exceeds the upper limit y if z is 8 then the hourly result is BLANK if the data value exceeds the lower limit y if z is 9 then the hourly result is y A specific whole hour may be specified where h is the number of whole hours past midnight add the additional parameter H_FUNC l p x y z h WARNING The function will calculate and save hourly values in the Location Parameter where the formula is attached 2014 AllMax Software Inc ns Operator10 Help 14 8 6 14 8 7 Examples H_FUNC Effluent 50050 0 10 2 multiply all hourly data by 10 H_FUNC Effluent 50050 0 1000 4 the max of hourly data or 1000 H_GMEAN l p x y H_GMEAN I p x Hourly Geometric MEAN for location and parameter offset x days hour y Value The geometric mean of hourly data values of a specific location and parameter for the date x days from the current date If y is 0 the values for t
424. ons ABC 4 10 Alpha Codes Alpha Code An Alpha Code is a one to ten character abbreviation that may be defined and entered as Data The characters may be alphabetic A Z and or numeric 0 9 and case is ignored A description 1 to 60 characters will be associated with each Alpha Code Accessing the Alpha Code section To access the Alpha Code section go to the Setup ribbon and click the LT Alpha Codes button O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Main Application 117 a a ES Bd 4 23records 1 selected gt DU DA Alpha Code List Facility Name Town of Montague Description Below Detectable Limit Analytical Data Lost Plant Not Discharging Automatic Analyzer Out of Service Analytical Data Not Valid Sample Site Inaccessible Due to Flooding or EEE E a Sample Not Taken Explanation Included Above Range of Automatic Analyzer Biological Sample Too Numerous to Count No Discharge During Monitoring Period Sample Not Taken Plant Not Normally Staffed Clear Confluent Growth False High Background Count No Overcast Partly Cloudy Rain P892 B ZPR E AAA Add Alpha Code Users can create additional Alpha Codes for usage throughout Operator10 Wastewater click the Add button Enter the desired Alpha Code in the Alpha Code field a Description can be entered as well Click the EJ Save button to save the entry Del
425. operties Header 188 P Print Properties Margin 187 Print Properties Options 184 Print Properties Page 185 Print Report 252 Print Sampling Event 335 Prior 401 402 403 418 Process 106 471 472 Process Control 102 104 Process Create Calculations 107 Page 155 165 Page Features 155 Page Options 165 Pages 154 155 Palette Bar 237 Parameter 88 90 91 366 368 387 392 393 Part 402 Particle Power 421 Process Section Data Functions 471 Particles 421 Process Section History 106 Past 401 402 403 418 ore Sedih lt 04 Paste 373 Properties 240 245 Pattern Bar 237 peal 182 PWR 432 PCT_REM 431 Pennsylvania Chapter 94 268 Percent 461 Q Percent Reduction 461 Percent Removal 431 461 Q_CSUM 472 Percent Strength 118 Q_SUM 473 Percentile 403 460 QLIME 448 Period 480 Quarterly 472 473 Pervasive 82 Quarterly Data Functions 472 Pervasive Database 19 82 Quick Access 56 Pervasive Database Engine 82 Quick Access Toolbar 56 pi 395 Quick Note 368 PickList 30 242 368 Quick Notes 202 337 Plant Available Nitrogen 151 Poke 468 as R lt Population Standard Deviation 127 Popup KeyPad 366 uy RAND 432 Positive 425 Random 432 Power 432 Range 449 455 PRE_LMT 448 RANGE 449 PREC 431 Rank 402 403 457 459 460 Rebuild Tables 80 Recent 402 Rectangular Weir 452 Reduction 461 Refresh 227 Refresh Graph 227 Registry 81 Registry Entries 81 Regression 406 440 445 462
426. or Access Wonderware InTouch Viewer or Intellution FIX e OPC DDE Interface Application Overview e OPC DDE Interface Main Window e Start Stop Buttons e Add Edit Remove Print Setup Log Buttons e OPC DDE Links Listbox e OPC DDE Link Definition e DDE Link Examples e DDE Server Functionality e DDE Error Codes NetDDE Network DDE 2014 AllMax Software Inc Interfaces 341 r F OPC DDE Interface AllMax nu Link Status Next Run Time 12 06 12 00 30 Last Run Time Last Result Schedule At 12 30 AM every day starting 12 05 2012 Image has hotspots click to view more information 12 1 1 OPC DDE Interface Overview OPC DDE Interface Application Overview The AllMax Operatori0 OPC DDE Interface OLE for Process Control Dynamic Data Exchange is a separate Client Server application that can be used both to Retrieve data on a Daily or periodic Real Time basis and to allow DDE Access to Operator10 data values Data can be exchanged with any running application which supports DDE Linking Since the DDE Interface application is able to both share and retrieve data it is technically known as both a DDE Server and a DDE Client It is capable of linking with any running application which supports DDE links using the ASCII text format such as Microsoft Excel or Access Wonderware InTouch Viewer or Intellution FIX When the application is started sign in with a User Name
427. or fecals 14 18 Yearly Data Functions Topics in this section include e Y_AVG I p x y z Yearly AVG Daily value offset months type e Y_AVGM I p x y zZ Yearly AVG Monthly average offset months type e Y_CAVG I p x y Calendar Year AVG of daily values offset x months type e Y_COUNT I p x y Yearly COUNT of daily values offset x months for y months e Y_CSUM l p x Calendar Year SUM of daily values offset x months e Y MAX I p x y Yearly MAX daily value offset x months for y months e Y_MAXM I p x y z Yearly MAX Monthly average offset months type e Y_MIN I p x y Yearly MIN daily value offset x months for y months e Y_MINM I p x y z Yearly MIN Monthly average offset months type e Y_RES I p x y1 y2 y3 y4 Yearly RESidual offset x years percents y1 y2 y3 y4 e Y_SUM I p x y Yearly SUM of daily values offset x months for y months e Y_TOTM I p x y Yearly sum of Monthly TOTals offset x months for y months 14 18 1 Y_AVG I p x y z Y_AVG I p x y z Yearly AVeraGe of daily values for location and parameter offset x months for y months average z Value The average of daily data values of a specific location and parameter for y months beginning x months from the current month If y is O or BLANK the function assumes 1 year The value z is the type of average used if z is O then the average is the arithmetic mean average if z is 1 then the average is the geomet
428. or four digit year Any value may be omitted to use the month day or year of the current date For example DATE 1 1 January 1 of the current year The resultant date may be used in further calculations using addition or subtraction with any numeric value will add a number of days to the julian date value for example DATE 7 the date one week prior using subtraction with two julian date values will return the difference in days as a numeric value for example DATE DATE 1 1 the number of days since the beginning of the year Example DATE the current calculation date 2014 AllMax Software Inc so Operator10 Help 14 7 2 14 7 3 14 7 4 DATE 2458850 the date of January 1 2020 DATE 1 1 2020 the date of January 1 2020 DATE MOY 1 the date of the same day last month DATE j x m d y x DATE j x m d y x the value x calculated on a julian or m d y DATE Value The value x calculated on a particular date given by the specified information if DATE j x is specified then the value x is returned for the date based on the julian value if DATE m d y is specified then the value x is returned for the date returned is based on the month day and year The value y may be either a two or four digit year Any value may be omitted to use the month day or year of the current date For example DATE 1 1 x the value on January 1 of the current year Example DATE 24588
429. or y months Value The maximum of data values of a specific location and parameter for y months beginning x months from the current month If y is O or BLANK the function assumes 1 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 499 year When a parameter to calculate loading is specified O 8 or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter Y_MAX l p l_flow p_flow x y Examples Y_MAX Effluent 50050 0 0 start current month yearly maximum Y_MAX Effluent 31614 6 6 previous 6 month maximum 14 18 7 Y_MAXMI I p x y z Y_MAXM I p x y zZ Yearly MAXimum of Monthly averages for location and parameter offset x months for y months average z Value The maximum of the monthly averages for a specific location and parameter for y months beginning x months from the current month If y is O or BLANK the function assumes 1 year The value z is the type of monthly average used if z is O then the average is the arithmetic mean average if z is 1 then the average is the geometric mean for fecals if z is 2 then the average is the flow weighted average When a parameter to calculate loading is specified amp or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter Y_MAXM l p _flow p_flow x y z Examples Y_MAXM Effluent 50050 0 0 0 start current month yea
430. ords and speed the entry process Dayboro STP gt Grid Columns Columns The grids in Antero provide users more flexibility by allowing the inclusion or exclusion of columns from any grid Additional column manipulation or usage is available from the following options Review this following topic for details Show Hide Columns Columns can be shown or hidden based on a users preference To show additional available columns click on the Tools button in the Grid Toolbar and choose the option Show hide columns Columns available to be included or removed will be shown in the list provided Place a check beside any column you wish to display Remove the check from any column and the column will be removed Columns added will be placed to the far right of the grid and can be moved to a desired position see the topic for Drag Drop Placement below for details 2014 AllMax Software Inc General Features 37 Facility Name Location Location Description Parameter Parameter Description Units SLI Entry Type Lower Limit Upper Limit Formula Protected Security Level OPC DDE Historian DataPort EEE EEE E Location group Location Type LP Usage Recent Values Columns can also be quickly removed by right clicking on the column header and choosing Hide Column from the right click menu Drag Drop Placement To re order columns left click and hold on the column header to be moved Users should se
431. ore information or refer to the linked help topics mentioned above AllMax Folder Software AllMax Folder Software The AllMax DataPort Folder Software provides easy access to the whole line of DataPort software products Operator10 for Operator10 users Antero DataPort Meter Gauge Software for Antero users Antero DataPort Parts Material Software for Antero users Antero DataPort Work Order Software for Antero users 3Com HotSync Utility for all users Installation 2014 AllMax Software Inc DataPort 357 Main Window Menu Bar Preferences Security 13 3 1 Installation Installation Software installation for the AllMax Folder requires only one step Installing Software into the DataPort The OP10 DataPort handheld data entry unit available from AllMax will usually have the AllMax Folder Software pre installed Additionally the same software can be used on 3Com PalmOS compatible PDAs but without scanning capabilities If you need to install or reinstall the software into a handheld unit follow these steps In the Operator10 Wastewater main application select the Setup ribbon menu a DataPort group Setup icon and choose Install AllMax software into DataPort menu item If more than one handheld is used on the workstation select the appropriate Username when requested Press the Done button in the confirmation dialog Note that the software will be installed during the next HotSync ope
432. oter e Last Page Only Check the box for Last Page Only to print the footer information on the last printed page only Left Enter the desired text into the Left footer field to define the Left footer Center Enter the desired text into the Center footer field to define the Left footer Right Enter the desired text into the Right footer field to define the Left footer Display Page Number Check the box for Display Page Number to display the current page number on the printed DataView Font Click the button for Font to set and save a desired font for the Page Footer options if displayed on the printed DataView 7 9 DataView Application The DataView application presents data stored in the Operator10 Wastewater database Location Parameter Data that has been entered collected calculated or otherwise stored in Operator10 Wastewater is available for usage DataViews use a row column format to provide standardized easy to use tools for data entry and review Many features and functionality is available in the DataView application O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 190 Operator10 Help mi y Effluent Data Entry Operator108 DataView GOBA Home Edt Tools Windows OS Start Date 04 01 2012 a aaa a a BA Open DataView New DataView Save Properties Quick Date 3 Show All Hourly Refresh Intermittent Resize Columns Calculate Print
433. ounts particle diameter X for first L P particle diameter Y for second L P 2014 AllMax Software Inc 42 Operator10 Help Value The hourly values calculated from the hourly data at two specific locations and parameters The function uses the hourly data for the current date It stores the result at the Location Parameter where the formula is attached at the time corresponding to each data value The function then returns the Hourly Calculation as configured for the Location Parameter where the formula is attached The function considers only valid data existing at the same time for both parameters and will return BLANK if there is no valid data The two L Ps are two concentrations usually expressed as a number per ml or ml of particles larger than a given diameter usually expressed as microns or um or um The variable x is the given particle diameter for the first L P variable y is for the second The resultant hourly values are an exponent or power for a power law distribution comparing the data values If the particles are naturally distributed in a log normal distribution the exponents should theoretically be similar The function is best used to observe changes which might indicate particles not uniformly distributed WARNING The function will calculate and save hourly values in the Location Parameter where the formula is attached Example H_PRTPWR Eff Part Cnt gt 2 Eff Part Cnt gt 10 2 10 hourl
434. ow Export Data As Weekly Summary 01 Weekly Summary _ View With m t 9 Windows File Association 4 Click template or press PageUp PageDn 9 7 5 1 2 General Information In the General Information setup section for the Weekly Summary Report users can edit the following fields General Information Header Enter the desired header 1 to 40 characters for the Weekly Summary Report Facility Enter a facility name for the Weekly Summary Report The default facility name will initially be filled in modify this as necessary O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 296 Operator10 Help General Information Header Weekly Summary Report Facility Wastewater Sample Data Add Plant Effluent BOD 5 MG L LP BOD DESC Remove Move Up Move Dn Weekly Summary 01 Weekly Summary m r save _ preview _ cudance Click template or press PageUp PageDn 9 7 5 1 3 Parameters In the Parameters setup section users can select and define Location Parameters to be displayed on the Weekly Summary Report Parameters To ADD Location Para meters To add values to the weekly summary report press the Add button to select from the Location Parameter Multi select Picklist Highlight a desired Location Parameter and press the Select button in the Picklist Location Parameter Definition Once the Location Parameter has been added edit the following fields Header
435. p e BioSolids Press the YY BioSolids button to open the BioSolids List BioSolids Parameters Press the Y BioSolids Parameters button to open the BioSolids Parameters list Sites Press the EC Sites button to open the BioSolids Site List Site Parameters Press the O Site Parameters button to open the BioSolids Site Parameters list e Site Owners Press the 2 Site Owners button to open the BioSolids Site Owners list Site Limits Press the Y Site Limits button to open the BioSolids Site Limits list Nutrients Press the DA Nutrients button to open the Nutrient list Application e Applications Press the x Applications button to open the Application list 4 1 2 6 Tools Ribbon Main Application Tools Ribbon The Tools ribbon provides the following functionality 2014 AllMax Software Inc e Operator10 Help W TI operator10 Wastewater po N baha Fite Dashboard View Setup BioSolids Tools Support Help 5 BD E 34 gaa oa a X Custe Backup Now Calculate Now Monthto Date Previous Monthto Date Change Order Import Now Browse for Import File s Export Data Setup Schedules Calculator Tools Calculators and Converters Sx Locked Data Database Backup Calculations t Bp Scheduling Use The Tools ribbon displays various tools and utilities avialable for use within Operator10 Tools Functions The following options are available in the Tools ribbon and are dis
436. p Aim Prior to use a laser pointer to aim 1 second before scanning Tap Beep to sound a beep when a good scan is received Tap Quiet if no sound should be heard Tap Text Types to scan only BarCode types which support alphabetic characters Tap All Types to scan all recognized BarCode types including numeric only Tap Standard to scan standard BarCode types without optional checkdigits Tap Extended to scan BarCode types with optional checkdigits or extensions Tap the Reset Scanner selector to reinitialize the scanner O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Operator10 Help scanner Preferences rol Scan Onby Aim Prior Text Types All Types 13 4 12 Remove Record Remove Record Edit Remove Record Remove delete the record matching the current Facility Location Parameter and Date WARNING Removing data will delete existing data Do not proceed unless you are sure you wish to remove data 13 4 13 Review Data Review Data Edit Review Data e Use the scrollbar or the PageUp and PageDown hardware buttons to Review previously entered Data e Tap the Remove button to remove delete the current record WARNING Removing data will delete existing data Do not proceed unless you are sure you wish to remove data 2014 AllMax Software Inc DataPort 371 Review Data filias Date 0811 2004 Facility 1 Location PlntifO2 Farameter 01051 Yolue 3 550 record 1of3 13 4 14 Sc
437. p down list boxes Daily A single data value is stored for each day 2014 AllMax Software Inc Interfaces 345 Daily Current Day A single data value is obtained each day Daily Previous Day A single data value is obtained each day but it is written to the previous day Time A single data value is obtained each time interval as selected from the second drop down list box Time Actual Time A single data value is stored as hourly data using the current time Hourly Hourly 30 15 10 5 Minute Precision Any value received is Quantized to force data to be moved to the preceding 60 30 15 10 or 5 minute interval For example a 15 minute interval will force data from 08 25 to 08 15 Summary Multiple retrieved values are summarized for the day then written once as a daily value Daily Sum Average Maximum Minimum Count and Geometric Mean Multiple retrieved values are summarized for the day then written once as a daily value according to the selected calculation type 12 1 3 3 OPC DDE Link Server Definition OPC DDE Link Server Definition The data value returned by a OPC DDE OLE for Process Control Dynamic Data Exchange Link with another application requires specific Service Topic and Item DDE strings or Node Server and Item OPC strings see documentation of the other application Retrieving data via OPC DDE links is very dependent upon another application and may therefore be somewha
438. permitted Highlight a group of records to be edited together and click the Edit button to begin editing Items able to be edited include Upper Limit Lower Limit Formula Entry Type and Protected For more information see Location Parameter User Defined Parameters To establish a set of parameters to be considered User Defined and entered at the BioSolids Application section choose an option for Application Entry from the list of available options User defined entries will appear as User Values in the BioSolids Application Editor where values are entered by the user Summaries will be calculated and stored as Daily Data values for the chosen Parameter Choose the Summary Type from the dropdown List box A Parameter 1 to 16 characters should be chosen from a PickList by pressing the popup button 2014 AllMax Software Inc 12 Operator10 Help Facility Name South WWTP Location Jones Field 001 Comer of 144 175 South WWTP Parameter Parameter Description Units Decimal Entry Type Recent Value Protected Application Entry Cadmium Sludge Chromium Slg Copper Sludge Lead Sludge Mercury Sludge MolybdenumSlg Nickel Sudge Selenium Slg Cake Trips NUM 0 Daily Liquid Gal Total Liquid Trips Dry Tons Dry Tons Acte Nh3 N Ammonia in Sludge Arsenic in Sludge Cadmium in Sludge Chromium in Sludge Copper in Sludge Lead in Sludge Mercury in Slu
439. ph Daily data for a selected Hourly Location Parameter e Monthly xyz Use these options to graph a summarized monthly value for the selected Location Parameter for the selected Date Range Monthly Sum Average Maximum Minimum and Count are available for selection e Yearly xyz Use these options to graph a summarized yearly value for the selected Location Parameter for the selected Date Range Yearly Sum Average Maximum Minimum and Count are available for selection Set Date Range To set the date range for the Graph Container use the third drop down menu displayed on the Graph Container Choose from the available options Based on the Graph Data Options the quick dates displayed will be different For each the quick dates are relative to the type of data to be graphed and will provide familiar easy to understand date options The Custom option will be available regardless of the selected Graph Data Option Removing a Graph Container To remove a Graph Container click the red X in the top right corner of the Graph Container Answer Y Yes Yes or X No No to the prompt when presented 6 1 4 2 3 3 Gauge Containers Graph Containers allow users to see a Gauge or chart of data for a single Location Parameter Data can be displayed using a Dial Gauge and Linear style Gauge based on the selected date range Gauge V Gauge VB Gauge Ve Murrumba Downs STP Total Outfall Flow cal to kL Murrumba Downs STP Total Outfal
440. pplication For the Static Topic Name enter the DDE Topic string for the application Mark the Is Service checkbox to eliminate extra verification 3 Trust the new share Highlight the new share in the list of shares and press the Trust Shares button Mark the Start Application Enable and Initiate to Application Enable checkboxes Press the Set button to Set the trust In the AllMax Operator10 OPC DDE Interface specify the new NetDDE share Service computername NDDE where computemame is the network identifier for the computer Topic sharename where sharename is the Share Name entered in the DDE Share Utility Item R C e g R1C4 Microsoft Excel example Run DDE Share on a computer named SRVROO3 create a new Share and Trust it using these names Share Name Excel_Book1 Static Application Name EXCEL Static Topic Name filename or bookname sheetname e g Book1 xls Sheet1 In the AllMax Operator10 DDE Interface set up a DDE Link for Service SRVROO3 NDDE Topic Excel_Book1 Item R C e g R1C4 2014 AllMax Software Inc DataPort 355 13 DataPort Topics in this section include e DataPort Sync Select L Ps e DataPort Setup e AllMax Folder Software e Operatori0 DataPort Software 13 1 DataPort Sync Select L Ps DataPort Sync Select L Ps The DataPort Sync Select L Ps option allows users identify Location Parameters for which readings and results should be ente
441. pplication enter a value in the Data Result field For more information on User defined fields for Application entry see the BioSolids Site User Defined Entry help topic 5 7 Available Nitrogen BioSolids Available Nitrogen The BioSolids Plant Available Nitrogen Editor edits settings for each BioSolid Enter information for calculating Plant Available Nitrogen Press the popup button to choose a Parameter from a PickList Enter the Percentage of available Nitrogen for Injected or Surface application For Organic enter Parameter Names for both TKN and Ammonia Plant Available Nitrogen will be calculated by adding the percentage of loadings for each specified Parameter Click the 13 OK button to save any data entered Ge T Plant Available Nitrogen Parameters W Site Cake Facility South WWTP Y OK Plant Available Nitrogen B_NITRO will be calculated from the sum of the percentages of the associated B site parameters Injected Surface TKN Ammonia Organic 100 TKN 100 Ammonia Ammonia Nitrogen ews Additional TKN Nitrate Nitrite 2014 AllMax Software Inc Dashboard 6 Dashboard The Dashboard feature of Operator10 Wastewater allows users to create and manage Views Views are capable of containing and displaying data as well as links to other features of the Operator10 Wastewater program For more information see the following topics e Views e Pages e
442. qualifiers and calculated results will display the appropriate data qualifier Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 6 2 1 4 lt 3 as the less than symbol to be preserved for the final calculation Entered Value Calculations will drop the data qualifiers from data and calculated results will display without the qualifiers using only the numeric entered portion of the data Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 6 2 1 4 3 as the less than symbol will be dropped for the final calculation Half Entered Value Calculations will drop the data qualifiers from data and calculated results will display without the qualifiers using one half the entered value of the data Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 6 1 1 4 2 75 as the less than symbol is dropped and 2 is divided in half for final calculation Zero Calculations will drop the data qualifiers from data and calculated results will display without the qualifiers using zero 0 in place of any entered data Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 6 0 1 4 2 5 as the less than symbol is dropped and 0 is used in place of lt 2 for the final calculation 2014 AllMax Software Inc e Blank no data Calculations will drop the data qualifiers from data and calculated results will display without the qualifiers treating data entered with qualifiers to be seen as blank Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 6 1 3 3 333 as the less than s
443. r to display the Location Parameter list Select the desired Location Parameter from the list and click the OK button Perform these steps as needed to edit any Gauge Container at any time Set Gauge Type To set the type for the Gauge Container in the first drop down menu that appears on the Gauge Container choose from the following options e Dial e Speedometer e Linear Set Gauge Data Options To set the Gauge data options choose from the following options in the second drop down menu e Hourly Use this option to display Hourly data for a selected Hourly Location Parameter e Daily Use this option to display Daily data for a selected Hourly Location Parameter Set Date Range To set the date range for the Gauge Container use the third drop down menu displayed on the Gauge Container Choose from the available options Based on the 2014 AllMax Software Inc Dashboard 163 Gauge Data Options the quick dates displayed will be different For each the quick dates are relative to the type of data to be displayed and will provide familiar easy to understand date options The Custom option will be available regardless of the selected Gauge Data Option Removing a Gauge Container To remove a Gauge Container click the red X in the top right corner of the Gauge Container Answer Y Yes Yes or X no No to the prompt when presented 6 1 4 2 3 4 Naviagtion Containers Navigation Containers allow users t
444. r Report Folders contain links to existing Report Pages and serve as a grouping tool Add Report Folder To Add a Report Folder right click in the Direct Access Report Tree left pane and select New Folder In the Tree Folder window enter a Name 1 30 characters to identify the report folder You may select an icon by pressing the button and selecting from the drop down list box or entering a number in the field to the right Select a Default Action frosm the drop down menu Choices include Print and Export Tree Folder Add Reports to Report Folders New Reports New reports can be added to any folder right click on the desired folder and choose 2014 AllMax Software Inc Reporting 251 New Report from the right click menu to begin Continue the process using the Add Report help topic Existing Reports Existing reports can be moved to existing folders as needed In the Report Direct Access Tree click the button to expand any folders in which reports are currently stored With the list of report pages expanded press and hold the left mouse button With the left mouse button held drag the report to the other report folder where the report should be located Release the left mouse button A menu should appear choose fromthe 3 available options e Add to folder this option will add a reference to the report page to the selected folder the report will exist in two or more folders as d
445. r the current or past dates Examples D_GAUCK Effluent M92225 Effluent CL2 Tank 0 1000 change in gauge reading multiplied by 1000 with CL2 supply D_GAUGE Effluent M92225 0 1 change in gauge reading no multiplier no supply D_GMEAN I p x y D_GMEAN I p x Daily Geometric MEAN for location and parameter offset x days for y days equivalent to logarithmic mean Value The geometric mean of data values of a specific location and parameter for the date x days fromthe current date and extending for a range of y days Data values less than 0 are ignored The function is equivalent to a logarthmic mean A logarithmic mean returns the same value although it may use a different calculation method When a parameter to calculate loading is specified O amp VO or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter D_GMEAN I p l_flow p_flow x y Examples D_GMEAN Effluent 50050 7 7 geometric mean of past 7 days D_GMEAN Effluent 50050 3 7 geometric mean of week beginning 3 days ago D_IGAUGE I p I p x y D_IGAUGE I p l p x Daily Interpolated GAUGE value for location and parameter supply value from second location and parameter multiplier y offset x days Value The value calculated from the decrease in gauge reading at a specific location and parameter The function uses the gauge data from the date x days from the c
446. r y days D_MAX l p x y MAXimum offset x days for y days D_METER I p x y z METER value offset x days max meter reading y multiplier z D_MIN l p x y MINimum offset x days for y days D_NEXT I p1 x y NEXT value not prior to date offset x months y days D_STAT I p l p x y z Daily STATistics offset x days for y days type z D_STDEV l p x y STandard DEViation offset x days for y days D_SUM p x y SUM offset x days for y days D_TOTAL I p x y avg range offset x days for y days D_VAL I p x y VALue offset x mon y days DATE 1 j1 m d y 1 current julian or m d y DATE DAT E j x m d y x value x calculated on a julian or m d y DATE DDE a b c x DDE link replacing char with x DDE_P a b c x y DDE Poke value y DDE_X a b c x DDE eXecute command c DEFAULT x y value y or DEFAULT x if y is blank DIST x standard normal DISTribution of value x DIV x y x y DIVide x by y DOM x Day Of Month 1 31 offset x days DOW x Day Of Week 1 7 offset x days DOY x Day Of Year 1 365 offset x days DVAL j x VALue x for the julian Date j E e 2 718281828459045 as set in the OP10 CFG configuration file see also Constants E_SUM lI p x y z w v Exceedance SUM offset type rule avg limit EQUAL x y x y if x EQUALS y 1 else O EXP x EXPonential of x e x F FAC abc x value x from another FACility abc FACT x FACTorial of value x 1
447. rCodes 369 371 Calculator Tool 518 Base 438 443 Calendar 47 220 256 361 Before 401 402 403 418 459 Calendar Quarter 472 BIN 438 Calendar Year 497 498 Binary 438 443 Carryover 500 BioSolid 136 Change 398 399 400 401 405 420 454 BioSolid Application 149 Change Facility 57 BioSolid Application List Report 311 Chapter 94 268 BioSolid Application User Values 151 Characters 436 451 BioSolid Available Nitrogen 151 Chemical 118 BioSolid Limit Report 322 Chemical List 118 BioSolid Limits 145 Chemicals 118 BioSolid List 136 Cipolletti Weir 452 BioSolid Nutrient Report 316 Citect 347 BioSolid Owner 144 CJP 486 BioSolid Owner List 144 Client 19 BioSolid Site 139 Client Server 19 BioSolid Site Detail 142 Close Graph 224 BioSolids 136 149 Coefficient 406 462 BioSolids List 136 Column Header 198 BioSolids Nutrient 148 Commands 372 BioSolids Nutrients 148 Comment 368 BioSolids Ribbon 62 Comments 202 257 337 BioSolids Sites 139 Compare 398 454 BioSolids Units 75 Compliance Judgement Point 486 Bit mask 390 Concentraion x Time 440 BIT 390 Concentration Units 75 Blank 386 391 395 396 431 451 466 Concentration x Time 438 439 445 BLANK 395 396 Conditional 390 446 449 Block Summary 209 Conduit 364 Boolean 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 446 Confidence Interval 406 462 449 Config 23 Boolean Functions 389 Configuration 23 Branching 390 446 449 Configuration File 23 Constant 396 a C Constants 226 395 438 440 443 4
448. ract from the report section The parameter can also be set to calculated loading calculate increase and calculate using the multiplier by checking the desired option s 2014 AllMax Software Inc 286 Operator10 Help Mass Balanca Report 11 9 2004 Allman WaseWister Sample Beta Influent Row 1tssBstencaRepert terlanuarg 2020 Total Solids Influent Plant Efficiency LSolids TSS Total Solids Influent Local Paewder Plant Efficiency LSolids TSS 9 Adds D Subtracts F Calculate Loading jb day L F Calculate Increase Using first and last value 1 F Calculate Using Multiplier 0 75 M Total Dri don imissna V0 tet tion Ratia Mass Balance Monthly Mass Balance 4 m r Save Preview Guidance Click template or press PageUp PageDn 9 7 3 1 4 Comments In the Comments setup section for the Mass Balance Report users can edit the following fields Comments Comments Enter the default comments to appear on report at the time of printing Users can modify these comments at the time of printing if the JAllow Comments checkbox is marked in the General Properties screen 2014 AllMax Software Inc Report Properies NS o Comments Mass Balance Repor 11 9 2004 Alisa Wsdsistar Sem pls Data Mass Ealanca Report tar January 2020 Total Otstritu tan imissn VD et tion Ratia Mass Balance Monthly Mass Balance 4 r Save Preview Guidance Cl
449. ral Facility City of Williamston LP Usage Location Pint Ef Plant effluent Parameter pH pH Standard Units Units SU Decimal 2 A Entry Type Dai y Formula Lower Limit 5 Upper Limit 9 Protected DataPort dl OPC DDE The Location Parameter form uses a List and Detail display to provide information about individual Location Parameters General information is available as well as Usage infotmation Location Parameter Section Functionality In the Location Parameter section functionality includes the ability to create new L Ps edit existing L Ps and delete L Ps The list detail presentation of data allows users to work with items through the List grid displayed in the top portion of the L P section and the Detail section displayed in the lower portion of the window Data entered via the List or Detail section is saved immediately to the database and changes will be reflected as data is entered Location Parameter Usage To view Location Parameter Usage information choose the LP Usage tree item displayed at the left of the Location Parameter window O 2014 AllMax Software Inc o Operator10 Help Location Parameter Properties Location Parameters have several available fields that allow users to determine the data entry method calculation and data entry limits Units Enter or select units from the available list of common units Decimal Enter the default number of places followin
450. rate Brendale STP BD Final Eff Final Effluent Releas to Water Brendale STP BD Lagoon BD Irrigation Pond Lagoon Brendale STP BD PST Primary Settling Tank Brendale STP BD Raw Raw Sewage Influent Brendale STP a BD Rec_Eff Tank _ Recycle effluent tank Brendale STP BD RWS DB Raw Waste Sludge Brendale STP Effluent 8251F Albany Creek Sports Fld Reuse Brendale STP Effluent 8261F Bowden Farm Irrig Reuse Brendale STP Effluent 8271F Waintima Golf Club Reuse ERRE m 1i oTM GATO saan p r anina 4 To select a column single click and hold on the column header and drag the column header into the darkened space release the mouse to group by the selected header The records will reorganize using the selected column to group items together Users will now see the information in the grid organized by grouped selection By clicking the button to the left of the information in the grid users will be able to see the grouped information in the new grouped view see image below O 2014 AllMax Software Inc General Features 35 1d 4 93 records O selected HL AA Location List Facility Name Dayboro STP Facility Name Location Location Description Location group Active Notes Facility Name Brendale STP Facility Name Bribie Island STP E Facility Name Burpengary East STP Facility Name Caboolture Water Recycle Plant Facility Name Dayboro
451. ration O 2014 AllMax Software Inc ase Operator10 Help Press the HotSync button on the DataPort cradle to initiate a HotSync action and transfer the software 13 3 2 Main Window 13 3 3 13 3 4 Main Window The AllMax Folder Software Main Window contains icons representing available software Tap the icon to run the corresponding software When the software is closed by tapping its Exit button control returns to the Main Window Icons may be disabled hidden or enabled shown by setting the Preferences Security may be enforced for all DataPort applications Contact AllMax for additional information Enter a DataPort ID 1 to 3 characters to identify the data to transfer to the DataPort during a HotSync Tap the X button to exit the software Menu Bar Menu Bar The Menu Bar is activated by tapping the Menu silkscreen at the left of the Graffiti area Preferences Security Preferences Preferences Several Icons may be enabled and shown by highlighting their corresponding PushButton Operator 106 Operations O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Antero Meter Gauge Antero Parts Material Antero Work Order 3Com HotSync AllMax Preferences Operator 10 Operations ATM Meter Gouge ATM Farts Material ATM Work Order AllMax Attend HotSync 13 3 5 Security Securit Security may be enforced for all DataPort applications Security requires selections by BarCode
452. red on the DataPort Handheld Device using the Operator10 application This allows users to potentially scan barcodes enter and save results while in the field The device will capture and store data as entered by users Individual users can be created and L P lists can be maintained independently from other users Accessing DataPort Sync Select L Ps To access the Location Parameter selection tool go to the Setup ribbon menu and a choose the 5 Select L Ps button Selecting L Ps To select Location Parameters to be sent to the DataPort when the HotSync operation is performed follow these steps gt In the DataPort Sync window click the K Add button 2 In the window that opens press the button to select a DataPort User ID for which the L P should be exported a Unlimited users can be created and individual lists can be maintained for each created user the lists will export independently of one another and be used only when the appropriate ID is entered when performing the HotSync 3 In the Facility Name field press the button to choose a Facility from which the L P will be selected 4 In the Location Parameter field press the button to choose individual or multiple Location Parameters to be exported for the selected User ID Pp Press the EJ Save button to commit the selections to the database u Repeat the steps above as needed to produce a list of Location Parameters for each DataPort user
453. rent month The total is defined as the average of values multiplied by the number of days in the month The number of months may be specified where mis the number of months add the additional parameter M_TOTAL I p x m When a parameter to calculate loading is specified amp or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter M_TOTAL p I_flow p_flow x Examples M_TOTAL Effluent 50050 0 total of present month M_TOTAL Effluent 50050 1 total of previous month 14 11 1M_TYPK I p x y M_TYPE I p x Monthly data TYPEs for location and parameter offset x months range type y Value The return value is a combination representing the types of data values of a specific location and parameter for the month x months from the current month 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 467 The value of y determines the range of data if y is O then the result represents a monthly range if y is 1 then a week falls in the month which contains its Saturday if y is 2 then a week falls in the month which contains its Wednesday if y is 3 then the result uses the first of month for 4 weeks 28 days if y is 4 then only full weeks Sun Sat in the month are considered if y is 5 then the result represents a monthly range of hourly values The number of months may be specified where mis the number of months add the additional parameter M_TYPE
454. rent running version of the application against the newest available version If the version installed is older than the current available version a prompt to review new features and functionality is provided as well as a way to update the computer with the newest version of Operator10 Wastewater 2014 AllMax Software Inc 52 Operator10 Help A new version of Operator10 is available Operator10 10 21 247 is now available You have version 10 21 246 installed Would you like to download it now Release Notes te ii a s Ce ee a ee ee rr O ie ty tehy e O upime Pah aao pap ide hert Vesti A a Tees F weh OF Reind melt The New Version notification displays information related to any new release of Operator10 Wastewater with details of features and functionality to be found in the new version Download and Update Once downloaded the update to Operator10 Wastewater will be run Once initiated it is a requirement that any running instance of Operator10 Wastewater on the computer be exited The update process will indicate any running Operator10 Wastewater applications or support applications and offer to shut these application down as part of the update process Acknowledge the prompts to confirm forced exit The update will be performed on the local computer only and will not be pushed or performed on any other workstation s client computer s or server s The update MUST be performed
455. represented Time values may therefore be used in conjunction with numeric data values treated as minutes The result itself is usually a Time value Process Control Process Control The Process Control section of Operator10 Wastewater allows users to define and identify the specific water treatment processes that occur in the Facility A Process consists of Process Sections containing Location Parameters summary information dimension information other values necessary for the calculation of data using standard water and wastewater treatment math 2014 AllMax Software Inc Main Application 103 1 record 1 selected Process List Facility Name South WWTP Process Name lt Process Type Effluent Flow Primary Clr Eff Accessing Processes To access the Process section go to the Setup ribbon menu and choose ye Processes The Process list will open Add a New Process To add a new process click the y New button to begin The Process Setup screen will open see the Process Setup topic for more information Edit a Process To edit an existing process highlight an existing process in the list and click the Es Edit button Editing of the Process Setup will occur in the Process Setup Delete a Process x To delete an existing process highlight an existing process in the list and click the Delete button Click the Y Yes Yes button to confirm or X No No to cancel the deletion of data
456. return the count of violations add 8 to y in order to return the count of values Daily values may be considered as persistent calculations use the last data not later than the date by adding 32 to the type y The number of months is assumed to be 6 but may be specified for monthly 7 day and hourly calculations where mis the number of months add the additional parameter SNC_MIND p x y Z W v m When a parameter to calculate loading is specified O 8 or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter SNC_MIND p l_flow p_flow x y z w v Examples SNC_MIND Effluent 00400 0 0 0 0 5 5 current 6 months SNC monthly minimum below 5 5 SNC_MIND Effluent 00400 6 1 3 0 5 5 8 previous 6 months SNC 7 day ist of Month minimum pH below 5 5 by 20 SNC_MIND Effluent 00400 6 1 3 0 5 5 8 gt 33 TRUE if the ratio is greater than 33 14 16 14SNC_MINM I p x y z w Vv SNC_MINM I p X y Z W V monthly Significant Non Compliance SNC MINimun Monthly violation for location and parameter offset x months type y rule z average w limit v Value The minimum monthly average Significant Non Compliance SNC violation for data values of a specific location and parameter for 6 months beginning x months from the current month The SNC is expressed as a ratio equal to the count of monthly averages exceeding the limit divided by the count of all
457. review available data The Graphing section allows users to produce unlimited full color 2 dimension and 3 dimension charts capable of displaying raw and summarized data for user defined multi day month or year periods Stock regulatory and custom reports are able to be created and managed for previewing and printing as well as electronic data export This help file is designed to help users new and experienced alike and provide a valuable reference to the tools and features available in Operator10 Wastewater Getting Started General Application Characteristics Review the following topics to learn more e Getting Started e Ribbon Interface Getting Started Users Upgrading from version 9 e Main Application e Dashboard e DataView e Operator10 Agent O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Introduction to Operator10 Wastewater 19 2 Introduction to Operator10 Wastewater Topics in this section provide basic information related to the general usage of Operator10 Wastewater In this section e Getting Started e About Operator10 Wastewater e Support e Help File Conventions e Copyright 2 1 Getting Started Topics in this section include e Installation Overview 2 1 1 Installation Overview Important Installation Notes If you are an existing user of Operator10 version 9 19 you will need to make note of the following important items e Prior to installation perform a backup of all active databases main
458. revious month 7 day continuous maximum for fecals exceeding 3 14 14 16 9 V_MIN I p x y zZ w v V_MIN I p x y Z w V monthly MINimum Violation for location and parameter offset x months type y rule z average w limit v Value The minimum violation of data values of a specific location and parameter for the month x months from the current month The function uses the following parameters to determine the calculation method y is the type of minimum if y is O then the result is a monthly or 30 day minimum if y is 1 then the result is a weekly or 7 day minimum if y is 2 then the result is an hourly minimum if y is 3 then the result is a 4 day minimum z is the rule used for a 7 day average if z is O then the result uses a continuous or floating average if z is 1 then a week falls in the month which contains its Saturday if z is 2 then a week falls in the month which contains its Wednesday if z is 3 then the result uses the first of month for 4 weeks 28 days if z is 4 then the first of month 4th week extends to the end of the month if z is 5 then the first of month is controlled by facility option if z is 6 then only full weeks Sun Sat in the month are considered if z is 16 then the result uses a continuous or floating average but only counts violations based on unique data w is the type of average used if w is O then the average is the arithmetic mean average if w is 1 then the average is the geometri
459. ribution IF x y z IF x lt gt 0 then y else z INCLUDE fn Ip x y z m INCLUDE location parameter with calculated formula INT x INTeger value of x INTER a c fa fc b INTERpolated value fb INV x INVersion of x 1 x ISALPHA I p x if value IS an ALPHA code then 1 else O offset x days ISBLANK x if x IS BLANK then 1 else 0 ISDATA x if x IS valid DATA then 1 else 0 ISDATE I p x if value IS a DATE value then 1 else O ISFECAL I p if p IS a FECAL parameter then 1 else O ISFLOW l p if p IS a FLOW parameter then 1 else O ISGREAT I p x if value IS a GREATer than value then 1 else O offset x days ISHR I p if l p IS set for HouRly data entry then 1 else O ISLESS l p x if value IS a LESS than value then 1 else 0 offset x days ISLP I p if L P IS valid then 1 else O ISND I p x if value IS a Non Detect value then 1 else 0 offset x days ISTIME I p x if value IS a TIME value then 1 else O offset x days L LI x y z w v n1 n2 Log Inactivation LIMIT x y z LIMIT make value x gt y lt z LN x Natural Log of x LOG x LOG base 10 of x 2014 AllMax Software Inc ass Operator10 Help LOG _REM x y LOGarithm of REMoval x in y out LOM x Length Of Month 28 31 offset x months LOOK x y1 y2 yn LOOK up the xth value LOY x Length Of Year 365 366 offset x years LP I p l p Location Parameter data LT x y x lt y if x is Less Than y 1 else O
460. ric mean for fecals if z is 2 then the average is the flow weighted average When a parameter to calculate loading is specified amp or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter Y_AVG I p _flow p_flow x y z Examples Y_AVG Effluent 50050 0 0 0 start current month yearly average Y_AVG Effluent 31614 6 6 1 previous 6 month average for fecals 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 497 14 18 2 Y_AVGM I p x y z Y_AVGM I p x y z Yearly AVeraGe of Monthly averages for location and parameter offset x months for y months average z Value The average of monthly averages for a specific location and parameter for y months beginning x months from the current month If y is O or BLANK the function assumes 1 year The value z is the type of monthly average used if z is O then the average is the arithmetic mean average if z is 1 then the average is the geometric mean for fecals if z is 2 then the average is the flow weighted average When a parameter to calculate loading is specified amp or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter Y_AVGM I p I_flow p_flow x y z Examples Y_AVGM Effluent 50050 0 0 0 start current month yearly average Y_AVGM Effluent 31614 6 6 1 previous 6 month average for fecals The Average 3 Month
461. rly maximum Y_MAXM Effluent 31614 6 6 1 previous 6 month maximum for fecals The Maximum 3 Month Average of monthly averages may be specified by adding the additional parameter Y_MAXM I p x y z 3 14 18 8 Y_MIN I p x y Y_MIN I p x Yearly MINimum for location and parameter offset x months for y months Value The minimum of data values of a specific location and parameter for y months beginning x months from the current month If y is O or BLANK the function assumes 1 year When a parameter to calculate loading is specified amp or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter Y_MIN I p l_flow p_flow x y 2014 AllMax Software Inc so Operator10 Help Examples Y_MIN Effluent 50050 0 0 start current month yearly minimum Y_MIN Effluent 31614 6 6 previous 6 month minimum 14 18 9 Y_MINM I p x y z Y_MINM I p x y z Yearly MINimum of Monthly averages for location and parameter offset x months for y months average z Value The minimum of the monthly averages for a specific location and parameter for y months beginning x months from the current month If y is O or BLANK the function assumes 1 year The value z is the type of monthly average used if z is O then the average is the arithmetic mean average if z is 1 then the average is the geometric mean for fecals if z is 2 then the average is the flow
462. rmissions Define user specific permissions for Location Parameters across permitted facilities 2014 AllMax Software Inc az Operator10 Help 3 3 1 Additional Topics Additional topics related to Security e Audit Trail Access the program generated time stamped list of data and program related entries e Windows Login The method by which Operator10 Wastewater validates users User Security User Securit To access the User Security section of Operator10 Wastewater go to the File menu and select Security The User Security section allows the creation of new Operator10 Wastewater users and establishes Database level Security Create a New User gt To create a new user click the v Add button to begin Users will see a new window that will allow them to enter a unique User Name 0 to 30 characters as well as additional user specific information e Description A description of the user 0 to 30 characters e Position A definition of the position of the user within the organization O to 30 characters e Department A definition of the department of the user within the organization 0 to 30 characters e Region A definition of the region or section of the user within the organization 0 to 30 characters e Enabled Determines whether the user is active and able to login into Operator10 0 to 30 characters Click the Save button to save any data entered Upon entering the above
463. s can be entered for a Location enter text directly into the Notes field 5 Click the EJ Save button to save any data entered Facility Name Location Location Description Location group Active Notes O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Main Application Add Similar Location From the Location list users are able to create similar locations if one exists To utilize this feature highlight an existing Location in the list and click the arrow icon beside the Add button to select Add Similar Location 44 2 Delete Location Delete Location x Locations can be deleted from the database click the Delete button to delete records Individually selected records can be deleted as well as multiple selections of locations Confirmation is required when deleting locations from the database Click the Y Yes Yes button to confirm or X No No to cancel the deletion of data 4 43 Standard Location Standard Location The Standard Location list displays a list of locations as defined by AllMax that represent possible locations for use in the Operator10 Wastewater application Additionally when users of a database create new locations those locations are also added to the list to aid in future setup and Location Parameter definitions 2014 AllMax Software Inc Operator10 Help 4 5 Tors eo nS 432 records 1 selected gt f X 0 Ap Select single or multiple Standard Location Location l
464. s persistent calculations use the last data not later than the date by adding 32 to the type y The number of months may be specified for monthly 7 day and hourly calculations where mis the number of months add the additional parameter V_CNT I p x y Z w m The function will return the number of violations for the month Additional information about a particular violation can be returned where vnum is the number of the violation 1 is the first 2 is the second etc add 256 vnum 4 to y in order to return the offset of the day of the violation add 256 vnum 8 to y in order to return the value count of data values of the violation When a parameter to calculate loading is specified O 8 or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter V_CNT I p l_flow p_flow x y Zz w Examples V_CNT Effluent 31614 0 1 1 3 number of violations for current month if count is less than 3 per week V_CNT Effluent 31614 0 256 2 8 1 1 3 value of the second violation for previous month V_CNT Effluent 31614 256 3 3 0 0 4 number of violations for previous quarter if count is less than 4 per month 2014 AllMax Software Inc Operator10 Help 14 16 4 V_CNTP I p x y z w V_CNTP I p x y Z w monthly Period CouNT Violation for location and parameter offset x months type y limit z months w Value The count violation of data values of a
465. s the ed button and a new window Edit Text will open In the Edit Text window add the information to be 2014 AllMax Software Inc displayed A status message will appear below the entered text alerting users whether the data can and or will be displayed as entered E Appearance Font Arial 10 0 pt Format None El Layout Alignment 0 Left Appearance Condition True Show Blank Optimization No Inerasable No Justified No Line Spacing 0 0 pt Line Wrap Wrap Paragraph Spacing 0 0 pt Appearance Available Objects On the left side of the Designer window a toolbar displays the list of available objects to be added to the report Select Text Line Rectangle El Ellipse Circle gt Picture Barcode Table Formatted Text Form Control Chart lan a el al O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 250 Operator10 Help 9 4 3 9 5 Crosstab Pivot Table HTML Text OLE Container 8 Report Guidance Documents Report Guidance Documents Report Guidance Documents are available for every report provided by AllMax Software Inc This allows users to view specific details regarding the stock reports state forms and custom reports to be created from the Operator10 Wastewater To access the Guidance Document for a report press the Guidance button and a new window will be visible Guidance documents may be printed for future use Report Folde
466. s user to access data from any section of Operator10 users in this group have Read Only permissions Create a Group gt To create a new group to assign to users click the e Add button to begin O 2014 AllMax Software Inc s Operator10 Help Users will see a new window that will allow them to enter a Group Name 1 to 30 characters and Description 0 to 30 characters Click the EJ Save button to save any data entered Upon selecting the above information security settings can be established on the right side of the User Security window The following security options are available Applications Bio Choices include No Access View Only Add Edit Delete to limit access to the BioSolids Application section Calculate Choices include Access No Access to enable disable the ability to calculate data Chemical Choices include No Access View Only Add Edit Delete to limit access to the Chemical section Dataport Choices include No Access View Only Add Edit Delete to limit access to the Dataport section Dataviews Choices include No Access View Only Add Edit Delete to limit access to the Dataview section Default L P Security Choices include View Only Data Entry Edit L P Full and acts as a default setting for all Location Parameters see note below for more information Formula Choices include No Access View Only Add Edit Delete to limit access to the Formula section Graphing Choices include No Acc
467. se 0 OR x y Xl y if x lt gt 0 OR y lt gt 0 1 else O XOR x y if x OR y eXclusively then 1 else 0 Constants ASK BLANK BEEP TRUE FALSE pi e 8 3 3 785 45359 Daily Data Functions D_AVG I p x y AVeraGe offset x days for y days D_COMP I p x y offset x Days COMPare offset y days D_COUNT p x y COUNT offset x days for y days D_FLOW I p x y FLOW value offset x months for y days D_FWA I p x Flow Weighted Avg offset x days for y days D_GAUGE I p l p x y GAUGE value supply l p offset x days multiplier y D_GMEAN I p x y Geometric MEAN offset x days for y days D_IGAUGE I p l p x y Interpolated GAUGE value supply l p offset x days multiplier y D_IMTR l p x y z Interpolated MeTeR value offset x days max meter reading y multiplier z D_INTER I p x y INTERpolate from adjacent data offset x days D_LAST l p x y LAST value not later than date offset x months y days D_LASTN I p x y average of LAST z Number of values not later than date offset x months y days D_LASTNM I p x y z Median of LAST z Number of values not later than date offset x months y days D_LASTNN I p x y z n Nth highest of LAST z Number of values not later than date offset x months y days D_LASTNP l p x y z w wth Percentile of LAST z Number of values not later than date offset x months y days D_LOADING I p x y LOADING value offset x months for y days D_MAX l p
468. sinfection CT Concentration Time for temp pH Cl LI CTI x y z w interpolated disinfection CT Concentration Time for temp pH Cl LI CTR x y z w Regression method disinfection CT Concentration Time for temp pH Cl LI CVT a b x ConVerT value x from abc units to def units CYL x y CYLinder volume ratio height x diameter y FAC abc x value x from another FACility abc FORMULA abc value from another FORMULA HEX x HEXadecimal value of x expressed as an AlphaCode HLIME x y z w V Hydrated LIME required in mg l INCLUDE fn Ip x y z m INCLUDE location parameter with calculated formula LOOK x y1 y2 yn LOOK up the xth value NOTE abc x Note text abc is associated with the return the value x ONCE x y value y ONCE per month on x th day ONCEW x y value y ONCE per Week on x th day OPTION x y z w value x using OPTIONS for less than y greater than z or non detect w PRE_LMT x y PREtreatment LiMiT limit type x QLIME x y z w V QuickLIME required in mg l RANGE x1 y2 y3 yn find RANGE of data SETF x formula SET an internal reference Formula SETVAR x y SET VARx variable to value y SODA x SODA required in mg l SYNC abc SYNCronize location with facility abc O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 379 TYPE x y TYPE of data x set type y VAL abc VALue and data type of abc WEIR x y z WEIR rectangular gal min for head x inches width y ft type z Monthly Da
469. sions Reporting Inclusions Bio Limit Report Place a check or select an available option from the options on the right pane of the Report Properties window For additional help regarding the information to be included see the Biosolid Limits section of the Main Help file Include Choose to display Limits and or Warnings e Limits e Warnings Limit Type Choose from the available Limit Types to be shown e JAccum Sum e Year Sum e Month Sum e JSoil Sample e Quarter Sum Agency Select the appropriate agency limits to be included on the report 2014 AllMax Software Inc e JFederal e JState e Local Not In Service Select an option regarding the display of sites that are marked as Not In Service e Include e Status Only e Ignore Bio Limit 01 Bio Limit 4 om r Click template or press PageUp PageDn 9 7 7 3 5 BioSolids Limit Report Comments Comments Enter default comments to be displayed on the printed checkbox is checked in the General Properties section when printed 2014 AllMax Software Inc Add Remove Move Up Move Dn Print List report if the JAllow Comments users can edit these comments 32 Operator10 Help 9 8 Add Remove Move Dn Print List Bio Nutrient 01 Bio Nutrient m 4 r About About The About dialog s
470. some users Therefore the following options are possible on some Reports e Standard Rounding a data value whose non significant portion is greater than or equal to 5 rounds up otherwise it rounds down 2 25 to 1 decimal place produces 2 3 This is the standard rule of rounding used by the Operator10 Wastewater software 2014 AllMax Software Inc 4 13 1 7 4 14 Main Application 127 e Even Biased Rounding a data value whose non significant portion is greater than 5 rounds up exactly 5 rounds to the nearest even value otherwise it rounds down 2 25 to 1 decimal place produces 2 2 2 35 to 1 decimal place produces 2 4 e Truncated Rounding a data value s non significant portion is truncated rather than rounded 2 29 to 1 decimal place produces 2 2 If the standard rule of rounding is not acceptable contact AllMax Software Inc for additional information Standard Deviation Standard Deviation Standard Deviation X1 t Xa t X3 Xp 2 Xit Xa t X3 Xp 2 Xit Xa t X3 Xp 2 OD FSG A SAA n n n n This method is actually the Population Standard Deviation which uses a numerator of n However a more accurate method when using samples may be Sample Standard Deviation which uses a numerator of n 1 Xi t Xa t X3 Xp 2 Xit Xa t X3t t Xy 2 Xit Xa t X3t t Xy 2 a EA XO A rn n n n i NOTE Results may be similar for a large number of samples
471. specified amp or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter W_AVG I p l_flow p_flow x y z w Examples W_AVG Effluent 50050 0 0 0 0 current month monthly 7 day average W_AVG Effluent 31614 1 1 6 1 previous month first full week average for fecals 14 17 2 W_MAX I p x y Z w W_MAX I p x y Z w MAXimum of Weekly average 7 day values for location and parameter offset x months 2014 AllMax Software Inc a Operator10 Help week y rule z average w Value The maximum of weekly averages of data values of a specific location and parameter for the month x months from the current month The function uses the following parameters to determine the calculation method y is the week of average if y is O then the result is the maximum weekly average for a monthly period see also M_MAXO if y is 1 then the result is the weekly or 7 day average for the first week if y is 2 then the result is for the second week if y is 3 then the result is for the third week if y is 4 then the result is for the fourth week if y is 5 then the result is for the fifth week etc special cases if y is 32 then the result is the calculated offset based on the z calculation type the numeric offset represents the beginning of the reporting period in which the weekly calculations are to be made if y is 33 then the result is the ca
472. ss the Location list in the Operator10 Wastewater Main Application go to O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Main Application es the Setup ribbon click the D Locations button To E ias Bd 4 8 records 1 selected gt DU RKB S OA L Dayboro STP J E3 Location List Facility Name Dayboro STP Facility Name lt Location Location Description Location group Active Notes Security Level Show Parameters ja Full Control Full Control sa Full Control sa Full Control m Full Control ax Full Control Full Control Full Control Aeration Tank 1 Aeration Tank 1 Aeration Tank 2 Aeration Tank 2 D Final Effluent Release to Land D Dayboro STP Irrigation DB Raw Raw Water Influent Quality DB Storage Dam Dayboro STP Storage Dam DB Waste Waste AST Weather Station Weather Station Dayboro STP IEEE a dana Location List Functionality The Location list and Location editor window have the general properties of the Grid and Grid Edit windows For more information about these sections please see the topic Grid Functionality In the Location List users can e Add Location e Delete Location Add Assign Parameters Parameters tests or samples collected at the respective Location can be added to the Location gt Using the Add button secondary menu the drop down menu arrow or split button select the option Add Parameters or from the Location list click the button that appears in
473. string is usually a reference to the specific data Use the character and specify the value x when for example the link depends on the day of the month using the DOM function to determine a row or column Examples OPC_W SERVER1 MyServer Tag DOM 0 Influent 50050 Writes value into MyServer the tag Tag using the row based on the day of the month and using the first column 14 13 Process Section Data Functions Topics in this section include e ACCUM I p x y ACCUMulate offset x months y days e S AVG I p x AVG of process sections e S_SUM l p x SUM of process sections 14 13 1 ACCUM I p x y ACCUM I p x Flow ACCUMulation for location and parameter offset x months and y days Value Flow for a specific location for the month x months and y days from the current date If the location is a process the flow is based on process accumulation settings If the location is a process section the flow is based on section location or flow percentage The value p is ignored use Examples 2014 AllMax Software Inc Operator10 Help ACCUM Process 0 0 returns process flow calculates and saves process loadings removals percent removals ACCUM Section 0 0 returns section flow 14 13 2 S_AVG I p x S_ AVG I p x Section AVeraGe for location and parameter offset x days Value The average of like parameter values of process sections of the same process and the same sectio
474. string is usually either the string SYSTEM or the filename and or page and the Command string is usually a command or macro name 14 12 4 OPC a b c x oPC a b c x O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Operator10 Help Value from an OPC link specifying Node a optional Server b Item c Integer x optional Value The data value returned by an OLE for Process Control OPC link with an OPC Server The Node is an optional workstation name or IP address where the OPC Server is running The OPC Server application requires specific Service and Item strings see documentation of that application If the OPC link does not succeed the original value of the Location Parameter will be returned the data will be unchanged If the OPC link succeeds but no valid data is returned the returned value will be BLANK The character in any string is replaced by the integer value of x For example if x is equal to 4 then R C1 becomes R4C1 Calculations using OPC links are very dependent upon another application and may therefore be much slower than normal calculations especially if the link must time out because of errors In most cases the Server application should already be running Synexus OPC links require the Server application to be able to return a numeric value Less Than Alpha Code Greater Than Non Detect and Time values are not supported Use the character and specify the value x when for example the link depends on
475. susstests VMAX H TE iii V_MIN I p x y z w v SNC CIP UEP XY ZW V VZ icono iniciada daa ii AA dicas SNC MAXD ED X Y Z W V sstvscetsssccsescevciceccssecccaversscavesdeseosceucucedsesasesascuveceveutecevecsnsiserseuececesencstaventeretecsvenseresssnesens SNC MAXM lip X Y Zj WV icsicccvescceessecvacticoscssssccessecescscoseevedcctssscsdvencesdcasestetsessecenscdsettescouserbucsseteressoevensciesscsesens SNC_MIND I p x y Z w v SNC_MINM I p x y z w v Weekly Data FUNCtONS 2 05 cc siee ccs Fecti cece ne ccevecth A Eaa ag i aa sia WAVE Y iZ Wi A A ia ias 492 MAA AAA AO 493 WL MIN TED PGY Z W rir A A e E dese vesebsVececuuatecgvesdsuensacnevess eave 495 Yearly Data FUNctONS iisiecccccceesceisecseceecces evevensseveciecacetuedsseeetuee coveeedecsreuseceseteeiea seu sdesdanteets 496 NAV G AR A 496 2014 AllMax Software Inc Part XV Y AVOMILEP Y A ci A A A AA did YU CAV GED X Y 32 iii A A Y COUNT Ii 1 5X V2 saccrsiccesccdveveacilcecsdeueasdi cecseccsevcehecevveccesvenslavtocsscevessoceuvsesuecscsssuensudcevesstsuece arcevseatstvensdastucnecsvexs Y_CSUM l p X cocccccccoccccnonccnnnnnnncnnann cnn cnenannnnnanncn Y_MAX Ip Y cocococccccnnncncnnancnccnc nano ncnnnncnnnncnnnnno Y_MAXM I p X y Z ooooooccccocononcccnanancnanononannnnanonos Y_MIUN Isp X y AA Y_MINM l p X Y Z ooooccoccccncononcccnanancnanononannnnannnos Y_RES I p x y1 y2 y3 y4 Y SUM EP
476. t Description Aeration 1 Bioreactor Aeration 1 Bioreactor Aeration 3 Bioreactor Aeration 4 Aeration Tank 1 Aeration Tank 1 Aeration Tank 2 Aeration Tank 2 Aerobic Digester Tank 1 Aerobic Digester Tank 2 Aerobic Digester Tank 3 Aerobic Dig Eff Aerobic Digester Effluent Aerobic Dig Pro Aerobic Digester Process Aerobic Digester Summary Afterbumer Unit 1 Anaerobc Dig Eff Anaerobic Digester Effluent Anaerobe Dig Pro Anaerobic Digester Process Anaerobc Dig Sum Anaerobic Digester Summary Anaerobic Dig 1 Anaerobic Digester Tank 1 Anaerobic Dig 2 Anaerobic Digester Tank 2 Anaerobic Dig 3 Anaerobic Digester Tank 3 Anerobic 2 Bioreactor Anerobic 2 Anerobic 4 Bioreactor Anerobic 4 Parameter Parameters are associated with Locations so that the Data can be stored These Parameters can be chosen from the Parameter List which consists of calculated parameters USEPA defined parameters or user defined parameters Selected Parameters are linked to a specific Location Examples Raw Influent Flow MGD Flow MGD Parameter at the Raw Influent Location Effluent BOD 5 BOD 5 BOD 5 Day MG L Parameter at the Effluent Location The Parameter List consists of calculated parameters US EPA defined parameters or user defined parameters Selected Parameters are linked to a specific Location forming a Location Parameter For increased efficiency Parameters found in the Parameter List are shared between all
477. t Access example Server MSACCESS Topic filename TABLE tablename e g DB1 mdb TABLE OP10Data Item DATA Microsoft Word example Server WINWORD Topic filename e g C MyDocs Document1 doc Item bookmark e g DDE_LINK1 2014 AllMax Software Inc 348 Operator10 Help 12 1 4 12 1 4 1 Wonderware InTouch Viewer example Server VIEW Topic T AGNAME Item tagname e g RawFlow Intellution FIX example Server DMDDE Topic DATA Item node tag field e g NODE1 TEMP A_CV Citect example Server CIT ECT Topic VARIABLE Item variable tag e g FILTER_TANK_LEV LookOut example Server LOOKOUT Topic process file e g svgaeval Item object e g RawFlow RSLinx example Server RSLINX Topic station e g S1 Item abe e g F8 25 OPC DDE Functionality Topics in this section include e OPC DDE Setup e OPC DDE Log e OPC DDE Error Codes e DDE Server Functionality e NetDDE OPC DDE Setup OPC DDE Setup In the OPC DDE Setup window users of the Operator10 OPC DDE Interface can modify certain aspects of data collection 2014 AllMax Software Inc Interfaces 349 Logging 7 Log Data Values Sampling Interval minutes 1 Midnight Avoidance minutes 0 End of Day for summaries 24 00 fe License Path To store data in a location other than the directory folder where the OPC DDE Interface is running from press the button to navigate and direct the interface to the correct
478. t Daily Item001 Plant Effluent BOD 5 LP BOD DESC 9 Repeat Monthly Item002 Plant Effuent Solids TSS Total Suspended Solic Item003 Plant Effluent Flow Mad Flow Thru Treatment f As Ttem004 Plant Effluent pH pH Standard Units Calendar Month y default Custom Report 01 Custom Report 1 alla r Click template or press PageUp PageDn 9 7 1 3 4 User Input User Input can be created and entered at the time of printing to provide a more dynamic report Data setup in the User Input section is passed through to the List and Label Template Designer and is available for usage on the printed report User Input Setup In the User Input section users can define up to 10 groups of user input entries Each group of user input options provides 6 items that can be defined User Input Groups To Navigate to each Group of User Input items click the Next gt or lt Back buttons Each group of user input options can be verified at the time of printing Place a check in the Verify checkbox to receive the prompt when printing and enter information at that time O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 266 Operator10 Help User Input Item Definition Label Enter text into the Label field to help define the User Input item Type Items can be defined as follows e Text provides a single line text entry field e Multi line Text provides a multi line text entry field e Password prov
479. t an r a aa cual aeae 434 VR A ad 434 10 Miscellane Ous FUNCtONS ii i n 434 ACCRUE E Pi A ONO duraareane 435 PA CODE Up 3X A di tadt E AE NA 436 ALPHA ab 436 APPLY X Y lt an 436 ASSIGN I p x y a 437 BIN X aa Ga tine eed eal aE Aaa tls 438 BLEANK 0 ATETEA O cas ses cts ainia 438 CT KEY ZW cavececscavesusevssccsscsscissacsdvssescesuvevs a sete deus cusetecutaredesinevsedecdccersusersstetseats 438 CTIOGYSTIW O A ET 439 ea H Et D E Ar AA D E idad AAC A Di ia 440 CVT a b x CYL x y FAC abc x FORMULA ADC cio A ti 443 AN 443 FHI EC X Y ZW A E E E A A EA aaa 444 ING LUBE A OOO 444 ERA AA A A 445 LO0K x y1 y2 yN 446 NOTE abc x 446 ONCE x y 446 ONC EW EY A ass 447 A O O 447 PREM aa 448 QBIMEX y Z Wi ussasnci Ni 448 RANGE X TY 1 42 YIN iisiesctavesccecvetdsaseh uecctcecscveventceduouecedgncasdivendedeeesvenecnessdcssugesueuevnserssetevensdelvausecdcccsstivexcereuster 449 SETF x y SETVAR x SODA x SYNC abc TYPE x y VAL abc O ACA 452 11 Monthly Data Functions A ie 452 M AV SIP AY ZW iii 453 M COMP ip YN i iia 454 M COUN TA tasas 454 M COUNTH Up sx c ia 455 MEDATEN VD aiii 455 M GMEAN PT2 iii rallada 456 M MAX P A A WI a A tii 456 MME DIX Y5Z iirinn oaaao naaa eaaa aeda aeea aaa Taara aaaea Aa AEM ARAS aaaea da naiera riai 457 M_MIN I p x y Z w 458 MNTA TE D559 E A a E E R T A E E E E 459 O 2014 AllM
480. t slower than other data transfers especially if the link must time out because of errors In most cases the other application must be running and the appropriate file must be open Operator10 DDE Links require the other DDE application to be able to return a single value in the ascii text CF_TEXT format For DDE Links The Server string 1 to 30 characters is usually the name of the application the Topic string 1 to 90 characters is usually the filename and or page and the Item string 1 to 90 characters is usually a reference to the specific data The Service Topic and Item strings for a DDE Link which has been copied to the Windows clipboard may be entered by pressing the Paste button For OPC Links The optional Node string 0 to 30 characters is the name or IP address of the of the workstation where the server is running the Server string 1 to 90 characters is the name of the OPC Server and the Item string 1 to 90 characters is a reference to the specific data Enter an optional Node string or choose from a PickList by pressing the popup button If the Node string is left blank the local workstation is assumed O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 346 Operator10 Help 12 1 3 4 Enter the Server string or if a valid Node is already entered or the Node is blank choose from a PickList by pressing the popup button Enter the Item string or if a valid Server is already entered choose from a PickList
481. t the Parameter grid If data already exists in the database it will be displayed Information can be entered into all colunms The navigation toolbar includes add delete group and allows a forward or backward search through the records Grouping filtering and sorting capabilities are available for all columns displayed in each grid O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Sampling Events 331 ne vera File Help 3 records 1 selected gt gt i x B 8 A Dr City Wastewater Plant Date v Location Facility Name Location Descriptio Sample Type Sample Sampling Time Duration Employee Sampler Ca 1002 2012 Pra City Wastewater Plant Downstream 8 HR COMP 2012 1080451 11 00 09 04 2012 Downstream City Wastewater Plant Downstream 8 HR COMP 2012 1231085 09 00 08 00 BGS 001 08 07 2012 Downstream City Wastewater Plant Downstream 8 HR COMP 2012 0091231 11 00 08 00 BGS 001 m 4 mm m 6 records 1 selected gt ba Ei a a a Pr Parameter Units Parameter Descrip Decimal Hourly Type Multiple Values Result Analyst Method Bottle Previous Cl2 Residual Chlorine Total 2 None Coliform 100ML Total Coliform 1 None EColi FMODML E Coli 1 None Fecal Coliform M00ML Fecal Coliform 1 None pH SU pH Standard Units 2 None Water Temp C DEGC Temperature 2 None 4 m The Sampling Events section displays information related to the samples taken as well as data S
482. t x in inches width y in feet if z is 1 then the result is the flow for a 90 degree v shaped weir 2 25 height 4 5 2 height x in inches y is ignored if z is 2 then the result is the flow for an angled v shaped weir 2 25 tan y 2 height 5 2 height x in inches angle y in degrees if z is 3 then the result is the flow for a Cipolletti trapezoidal weir 1512 width height 3 2 height x in inches width y in feet if z is 4 then the result is the flow for a rectangular suppressed weir 1495 width height 3 2 height x in inches width y in feet Examples WEIR 4 5 0 flow through a rectangular weir 4 inches by 5 ft wide Monthly Data Functions Topics in this section include e M_AVG I p x y Z w AVG offset x months type rule avg e M_COMP I p x y offset x Days COMPare offset y days e M_COUNT p x COUNT of values offset x months e M_COUNTH I p x COUNT of Hourly values offset x months 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 453 e M_DATE x y z Monthly DATE offset x months for month type y e M_GMEAN I p x Geometric MEAN offset x months e M_MAX l p x y z w MAX offset x months type rule avg e M_MED I p x y z Monthly MEDian offset x months type y rule z e M_MIN l p x y z w MIN offset x months type rule avg e M_NTH I p x y z n NTH value offset x months type y avg z n e M_PCT l p x y w p PerCenTile offset x months type y avg w p e
483. ta Functions M_AVG I p x y z w AVG offset x months type rule avg M_COMP I p x y offset x Days COMPare offset y days COUNT p x COUNT of values offset x months COUNTH p x COUNT of Hourly values offset x months DATE x y z Monthly DATE offset x months for month type y GMEAN I p x Geometric MEAN offset x months MAX l p x y z w MAX offset x months type rule avg M_MED I p x y z Monthly MEDian offset x months type y rule z M_MIN I p x y Z w MIN offset x months type rule avg M_NTH l p x y z n NTH value offset x months type y avg z n M_PCT l p x y w p PerCenTile offset x months type y avg w p M_REM l p x y Monthly percent REMoval offset x months type y M_STAT I p l p x y Monthly STATistics offset x months type y M_STDEV I p x STandard DEViation offset x months M_SUM I p x SUM of values offset x months M_SUM2 l p x y z w SUM offset x months type rule avg M_SUMH I p x SUM of Hourly values offset x months M_TOTAL I p x TOTAL offset x months avg days M_TYPE I p x y Monthly data TYPE offset x months range type y EAEI EE E OPC DDE Functions DDE a b c x DDE link replacing char with x DDE_P a b c x y DDE Poke value y DDE_X a b c x DDE eXecute command c OPC a b c x OPC link for node a server b item c OPC_W a b c x y OPC Write link for node a server b item c integer x value y Process Section Data Fun
484. ta values to the database Fac Loc Par Brendale STP BD Raw ALKALINITY Date Value 11 12 2012 a 4 7 2 Review Data Review Data The Review Data dialog provides a list of the recent data values for a selected Location and Parameter All values can be displayed place a check in the checkbox labeled All Data in the toolstrip at the top of the window From this window users can add delete or edit records for any date and optionally time if the selected Location Parameter is hourly ad Click the i Add button to create a new entry and fill in the available fields Click the x Delete button to remove an entry For Location Parameters that are flagged as Protected click the S Unprotect button located in the toolstrip and data entry will be allowed for the length of time that the Review Data window remains open Upon closing the Review Data window the Location Parameter will again be protected O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 100 Operator10 Help 4 7 3 4 7 3 1 4 7 3 2 E NS 91 records 1 selected gt f Pr All Data Data List Facility Name Murrumba Downs STP Location Weather Station Parameter Wet Weather Day Range 01 01 2012 03 31 2012 DateTime v Location Facility Name Security Level Locked Data X 03 31 2012 Weather Station Murrumba Downs STP Wet Weather Day z Full Control Full Control Full Control Full Control Full Control Full Control Full
485. taView Home ribbon provides important access to key features and primary functionality Home Ribbon functions The following options are available in the Home ribbon and are discussed as they appear in the button groups DataViews 2014 AllMax Software Inc 192 Operator10 Help e Open DataView Press the Open DataView button to display the DataView List e New DataView Press the New DataView button to select froma list of new DataView Types to create a new DataView e Save Press the E Save button to choose Save or Save As Properties e Properties Press the DataView Properties to select froma list of DataView Properties sections Date Range e Start Date Enter or choose a start date use the button to display a Calendar for the DataView e End Date Enter or choose an end date use the button to display a Calendar for the DataView e Previous amp Next When visible press the Previous or gt Next buttons to move to the next whole period in the DataView e Quick Date Press the E button to choose from the available options to set a Start and End Date for the current DataView O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Dataview 188 Hourly Options e Interval When the DataView type is Hourly choose from the available Hourly Interval options to display data entered on the selected interval e Show All Hourly When the DataView type is Hourly check the Sho
486. tained in version 9 19 e Install version 10 20 see Installation Guide and Installation Instructions e Restore version 9 19 database s through the version 10 20 application upon initial use e Upon restoration databases will be updated to current version 10 20 structure If you are a new user or installing Operator10 version 10 20 on computer or server which has not been used previously you may skip to the Installation Guide or Installation Instructions topics Installation Guide At the server for stand alone machines e Install Pervasive Database support included on CD ROM only if necessary e Install Operatori0 Application e Run Application e Update Database s At the clients workstations e Install Pervasive Database support included on CD ROM only if necessary e Install Operatori0 Application 2014 AllMax Software Inc z Operator10 Help e Run Application Installation Instructions 1 Insert the disk in the CD ROM drive as provided by AllMax Software Inc e The Autorun feature should immediately begin the install process Should Autorun not begin explore the CD and run Setup App Name exe NOTE Microsoft Net Framework 3 5 SP1 is required If absent the installation will alert the user and abort Download and install Microsoft Net Framework 3 5 from the Microsoft website http www microsoft com en us download details aspx id 22 NOTE Microsoft Visual C 2008 SP1 is required and included on
487. te 2 if the result is the end of the month as a julian date value 3 if the result is the end of the month as an offset in days from the current date 4 if the result is the length of the month in days NOTE Julian dates are expressed in days since 1 1 4713 B C The resultant date may be used in further calculations using addition or subtraction with any numeric value will add a number of days to a julian date value for example M_DATE 0 2 0 7 the date one week prior to the start of the month using subtraction with two julian date values will return the difference in days as a numeric value for example M_DATE 0 2 0 M_DATE 1 2 0 the number of days between the start of the current month and the previous month Examples M_DATE 0 2 0 the date of the start of the current month using a Wednesday rule M_DATE 0 1 4 the length the current month using a Saturday rule 14 7 10 MOY x MOY x Month Of the Year offset x months O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 413 Value The numeric value 1 to 12 of the month of the year x months from the current month January returns 1 February returns 2 etc The value x is usually 0 Example MOY 0 current month 14 7 11 WDOM x WDOM x WeekDay Of the first day of the Month offset x months Value The numeric value 1 to 7 of the weekday of the first day of the month x months from the current month
488. te and equivalent method for calculation which produces identical results is Logarithmic Mean z e Neither method handles negative data values so all negative data values are ignored considered as blank in calculations A data value of zero 0 produces a geometric mean equal to O using the first formula It is not possible to calculate using the logarithmic method since the log of 0 is undefined Although the O result is mathematically correct it is not acceptable to some users Therefore the following options are possible e Use O values in calculations data values 0 30 35 40 produce a geometric mean of O This is the default method of calculation used by the Operator10 software e Treat O values as 1 in calculations data values 0 30 35 40 produce a geometric mean of 14 3 as if the data values were 1 30 35 40 This is also the same as using the logarithmic method and using 0 in place of the undefined log e Ignore O values in calculations data values 0 30 35 40 produce a geometric mean of 34 8 as if the data values were 30 35 40 This treats O in the same manner as negative values If the default method of calculation is not acceptable contact AllMax Software Inc for additional information Rounding Rules Rounding Rules AllMax Software Inc Operator10 Wastewater software uses standard rounding rules for all reported values Although this rule is usually appropriate it is not acceptable to
489. ted to printing the selected DataView Changes to the Print Options will affect the current open DataView only and be saved independently from other DataViews 2014 AllMax Software Inc Dataview 185 DataView Properties Column Setup Column Properties Page Include Options Margin Header Footer Group Headers Column Summaries Grid Lines Data Values Worksheet Only DataView Properties Print Options Options The following Options are available Include Group Headers Check the checkbox for Group Headers to include Group Headers in the printed DataView Include Column Summaries Check the checkbox for Column Summaries to include the Column Summaries in the printed DataView Include Grid Lines Check the checkbox for Grid Lines to include grid lines cell borders in the printed DataView Include Data Values Worksheet Check the checkbox for Data Values Worksheet to print the DataView without data as a blank worksheet 7 8 4 2 DataView Print Properties Page DataView Print Properties Page In the DataView Print Properties Page section users can define options related to printing the selected DataView Changes to the Page options will affect the current open 2014 AllMax Software Inc 186 Operator10 Help DataView only and be saved independently from other DataViews z All Properti Ready
490. th your Operator10 installation are utilities provided by Pervasive and installed in the Pervasive directory by default C PVSW BIN PCC EXE Pervasive Control Center Version Pervasive SQL 2000 Pervasive Control Center includes complete utilities for configuration troubleshooting file management and ODEC services Several of the utilities may also be run individually PCC EXE Pervasive System Analyzer 2014 AllMax Software Inc Main Application s PSAWIZRD EXE Pervasive System Analyzer found by default in C Program Files Common Files Pervasive Software PVLOCATE EXE GateWay Locator WorkGroup Users W32MAINT EXE File Maintenance and Creation W3MONV75 EXE Monitor Files and Users W32RBLD EXE File Rebuild Utility W32UCADM EXE User Count Administrator WBEXEC32 EXE Function Executor The ODBC Administrator ODBCAD32 EXE may also be found in the Windows System directory folder or run from the Windows Control Panel ODBC Data Sources 32bit Icon For Pervasive Version 6 x products included with your Operator10 installation are utilities provided by Pervasive and found in the Operator 10 directory folder DBSETUP EXE edit BTI INI settings Version 6 Win3 1 W32MKSET EXE edit registry settings Version 6 Win95 or NT WBMANAGE EXE inspect data files Version 6 4 3 Facility A Facility represents the Locations and Parameters that are sampled to meet water and wastewater treatment sampling requir
491. the Synexus main application Examples FAC AlIMax Sample Data Influent 50050 flow data from sample Facility in current database no database name specified FAC MyDBName AllMax Sample Data Effluent 50050 flow data from sample Facility from named database MyDBName FAC Synexus East Station D_VAL Effluent 50050 1 0 value last month from database Synexus 14 10 14FORMULA abc FORMULA x a FORMULA named x Value The value returned by another formula named x Internal formula names provided by AllMax begin with the character Examples FORMULA My Formula 12 where MyFormula is 4 3 FORMULA Loading 3 14 14 10 1 HEX x HEX x The HEXadecimal value x expressed as an AlphaCode Value The value returned is the value of x expressed as an AlphaCode The maximum value is HEX 4294967295 or Oxffffffff Example HEX 32767 AlphaCode H7fff HEX 256 AlphaCode H100 2014 AllMax Software Inc a Operator10 Help Oxffff the value 32767 14 10 1 HLIME x y z w v HLIME x y Z W V Hydrated LIME required in mg l Value The value returned is the hydrated lime Ca OH 2 required in milligrams per liter to treat water for softening where x is the available carbon dioxide CO2 in mg l e g parameter 00405 y is the bicarbonate hardness as CaCO3 or alkalinity in mg l e g parameter 00425 z is the magnesium hardness as CaCO3 in mg l e g parameter 00920 w is th
492. the abe logo at the bottom left corner of the graffiti area om2ersionisia O 2014 AllMax Software Inc DataPort 363 Back Caps Caps Space Space Return Shift Lock Menu Cursor Cursor Short Crd Left Right Cut Punctuation shift Tap once E E O See E PUNA OM f ma i aa Ta TaS Punctuation shift Tap once lt NINA eZ 2014 AllMax Software Inc 364 Operator10 Help 13 4 4 13 4 5 Extended shift TA El 2 1 L a5 MRE INIA x gt Pa Sloe ZE E i ji Bb eX Sf amp Accent write the letter then the stroke below w a a a r T E E a Write these characters inthe letter side i HotSync HotSync The DataPort HotSync operation is responsible for transmitting data between the Operator10 Wastewater application and DataPort HotSync operations can be initiated from the DataPort cradle hardware button or from the HotSync app found on the DataPort Home screen software button as well as the AllMax Folder application on the DataPort When initiated the HotSync manager application should be visible on screen and the transfer of data will begin Installation Installation Software installation for the DataPort requires these four steps Installing the HotSync Software on a Workstation Installing the Operator10 HotSync Support Installing Software into the DataPort 2014 AllMax Software Inc Export Location P
493. the Item string is usually a reference to the specific data Use the character and specify the value x when for example the link depends on the day of the month using the DOM function to determine a row or column Examples DDE_P EXCEL Book1 XLS Sheet1 R C1 DOM 0 Influent 50050 Pokes value into Microsoft Excel the file BOOK1 XLS and sheet SHEET1 using the row based on the day of the month and using the first column DDE_P EXCEL Sheet 1 R C MOY 0 DOM 0 4 Influent 50050 Pokes value into Microsoft Excel any open file having sheet SHEET1 using the row based on the month and using the column beginning after the fourth column and based on the day of the month 14 12 3 DDE_X alb c x DDE_X a b c DDE EXecute Service a Topic b Comand c returning value TRUE or FALSE Value A Dynamic Data Exchange DDE link is established with another open application and the Command is executed The other application requires specific Service Topic and Command strings see documentation of the other application The and characters separate the strings If the DDE link succeeds the value TRUE is returned otherwise FALSE is returned In most cases the other application must be running and the appropriate file must be open Synexus DDE links require the other application to be able to retum a single value in the ascii text CF_TEXT format The Service string is usually the name of the application the Topic
494. the data Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 64 1 1 4 2 75 as the less than symbol is dropped and 2 is divided in half for final calculation Zero Calculations will drop the data qualifiers from data and calculated results will display without the qualifiers using zero 0 in place of any entered data Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 6 0 1 4 2 5 as the less than symbol is dropped and 0 is used in place of lt 2 for the final calculation Blank no data Calculations will drop the data qualifiers from data and calculated results will display without the qualifiers treating data entered with qualifiers to be seen as blank Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 6 1 3 3 333 as the less than symbol is dropped and no data is used in place of lt 2 in the final calculation 2014 AllMax Software Inc 264 Operator10 Help 9 Plain Paper Form O Preprinted Form Loading Units kg day loading g day loading 9 lb day loading Total Distribus tan imissna V0 tet ition Ratia Mass Balance Monthly Mass Balance _ View With 4 m t Windows File Association Save Preview Guidance Click template or press PageUp PageDn 9 7 3 1 2 General Information In the General Information setup section for the Mass Balance Report users can edit the following fields General Information Report Title Enter the desired title 1 to 40 characters for the Mass Bala
495. the eDV In practice one user may e mail an eDV to a second user who may either simply view the data copy it to other applications via the Windows clipboard save it into their own database or edit the data and return it so that the first user may then view and or save the data into the original database Note that only the Operator10 Wastewater DataView application can initially create eDVs the eDV Viewer simply forwards or returns the edited document The eDV Viewer requires a very small installation since it does not require separate database engines or other Operator10 Wastewater products Topics in this section include e eDV Viewer e Working with eDV e eDV Templates 7 11 1 eDV Viewer eDV Viewer Main Window The eDV Viewer main window uses a ribbon style toolbar to provide access to features and functionality The following options are available as menu options in the View ribbon 2014 AllMax Software Inc 212 Operator10 Help a WER View Windows Hep he Aa se ea OpeneDV Select Dates SaveeDV EmaileDV Transfer Print eDV Calculate Open Date Range Save 4 Email Transfer to DB Printing Calculate View ribbon functions The following options are available in the Home ribbon and are discussed as they appear in the button groups Open e Open eDV Press the FA Open eDV button to browse for and open an eDV Date Range e Select Dates Press the Es Select
496. the grid by using the available features Depending on the section of the AllMax software program some features and options may be enabled or disabled For more information please contact AllMax Technical Support Representatives for more information 8 records 1 selected gt PU RA IA ODA L Dayboro STP E Navigation Navigation through the records displayed in the grid can be controlled through the navigation portion of the toolbar 8 records 1 selected gt Pi In order the buttons provide the following functionality Move First Move Previous Total Records Record s Selected Move Next Move Last Add Users may create new records for most grids when available the Add button will allow users to create new records as well as use additional functionality to create similar records or add special items when necessary 2014 AllMax Software Inc General Features 31 Add Location Add similar Location Add Parameters Add New gt When adding new records users may click M Add the button directly or click the arrow to the on the right side to select from a menu this will begin the process of adding a new record Add Similar When applicable users may click the arrow on the right side to select Add Similar from the menu this will begin the process of adding a new record based on a selected record or selection of records Add Special When available users may click the
497. the list Enter a unique Owner Name 1 to 16 characters to identify the Owner Enter an Address for the Site Owner Enter a Contact Name for the Owner Enter a Phone number for the Owner Enter a Contract Date 4 to 8 characters or use the popup button to choose a Date from a Calendar Enter appropriate Owner information Information for a Contact Address and Contact Phone may be entered Enter Owner Comments as required 5 4 Site Limits BioSolids Site Limits BioSolids Site Limits and Nutrient Targets are set for each Site and used for BioSolids Reporting Limits can be created to maintain requirements for a number of agencies including federal state and local Additionally limits can be set for field Nutrients and can aid in the determination of benefit of application To access the Limits section go to the 2014 AllMax Software Inc 146 Operator10 Help BioSolids menu and choose Limits to begin 11 records 1 selected gt DU e KG B QA L Site Limit List Facility Name South WWTP Facility Name Location Parameter Description Agency 4 Calculation Type Warn at Limit Type Include mes Field 001 AZ dge A re Federal Accum Sum Jones Field 001 ASelenium Sig AS elenium Sig LB Acte Federal Accum Sum Jones Field 001 ANickel Sudge ANickel Sudge LB Acre Federal Accum Sum Jones Field 001 AMolybdenumSlg AMolybdenumSlg LB Acte Federal Accum Sum Jones Field 001 eee
498. the previous month 14 14 2 Q_SUM I p x _SUM I p x Quarterly SUM of daily values for location and parameter offset x months Value The sum of data values of a specific location and parameter for a quarter 3 months beginning x months from the current month When a parameter to calculate loading is specified amp or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter Y_SUM I p I_flow p_flow x Examples Q_SUM Effluent 50050 0 current month quarterly sum Q_SUM Effluent 31614 3 previous quarter sum 14 15 Trigonometry Functions Topics included in this section ACOS x ArcCOSine of x ASIN x ArcSINe of x ATAN x ArcTANgent of x COS x COSine of x CSC x CoSeCant of x SEC x SECant of x SIN x SINe of x TAN x TANgent of x 14 15 1 ACOS x ACOS x oo ArcCOSine of x in degrees Value The arccosine of x returned in degrees The value of x must be between 1 and 1 If x is BLANK the function returns BLANK Examples ACOS 707107 45 2014 AllMax Software Inc Operator10 Help ACOS 0 90 14 15 2 ASIN x ASIN x ArcSINe of x in degrees Value The arcsine of x returned in degrees The value of x must be between 1 and 1 If x is BLANK the function returns BLANK Examples ASIN 707107 45 ASIN 1 90 14 15 3 ATAN x ATAN x ArcTANgent of x in degrees Value The arctangent of x ret
499. the qualifiers using one half the entered value of the data Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 6 1 1 4 2 75 as the less than symbol is dropped and 2 is divided in half for final calculation Zero Calculations will drop the data qualifiers from data and calculated results will display without the qualifiers using zero 0 in place of any entered data Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 6 0 1 4 2 5 as the less than symbol is dropped and 0 is used in place of lt 2 for the final calculation Blank no data Calculations will drop the data qualifiers from data and calculated results will display without the qualifiers treating data entered with qualifiers to be seen as blank Example results 3 6 lt 2 1 average 3 6 1 3 3 333 as the less than symbol is dropped and no data is used in place of lt 2 in the final calculation 2014 AllMax Software Inc General Properties Adjust Page Size X Offset Y Offset 0 Default Text for Rows Sample aces Pemi arcas Units Treat lt gt Data As Allow Export Data As Standard 3320 DMR Monthly Standard 3320 View With 4 m Windows File Association Save Preview Guidance Click template or press PageUp PageDn 9 7 6 1 2 General Information In the General Information setup section for the Federal DMR Report users can edit the following fields General Information N
500. the user will be prompted to save the report with a new name O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 242 Operator10 Help 9 2 9 3 9 3 1 About To view the settings of the selected report select About Report Picklist PickList The Report PickList is a dialog box displaying a list of reports that the user may choose to print e To choose an item highlight the item in the PickList and press Select or DoubleClick on the item e To filter the list and only display items which match filter criteria enter a filter 0 to 255 characters in the box and press See the Operator10 main application help for details on filtering e Enter the Report Date and Print Date by pressing the buttons or entering a date Create Reports Topics in this section include e Add Report e New Report Availability e Report Name Add Report Unlimited report pages can be added to the Operator10 Wastewater Report section Add a New Report To Add a Report right click in the Direct Access Report Tree left pane and select New Report In the New Reports window below place a check in the appropriate checkbox beside the report you wish to create 2014 AllMax Software Inc 5Year Forecast 1 page E Bio App List 5 Bio Limit 7 Bio Nutrient 7 Custom from DV Custom Report DERM Reports Limit Report Mass Balance 1 page Multi Year OH Annual Sewage Sludge OH EPA 4500 1 page OMI Weekly Ctl
501. this installation media if necessary the installation for this will be performed automatically NOTE If the software has already been installed on the computer you will be presented with the option to upgrade the application Click Yes to proceed 2 To view the installation instructions click Instructions or click Next gt 3 Please read and select an option for acceptance of the End User License Agreement Click Next 4 Enter the AllMax Software key code Click Next 5 Select the role of the computer e This computer will store and serve data to others Choose this option if the computer is the server a computer acting as a server or a stand alone computer Click Next e This computer will access data that is server by another computer Choose this option if the computer is going to connect to a server or serving computer on the network as a client or workstation Click Next NOTE If necessary Pervasive PSQL Database engine support will be installed This is a separate installation program and will proceed independently from the AllMax Software installation 6 Select the Destination Folder to which the application will be installed To change click Change Click Next to continue NOTE The default directory provided is intended for new installations and is not suitable for existing users of version 9 19 The directory path MUST be modified in order to allow the installation to proceed Click the Change button
502. thly tables and graphs can be added to a custom report The custom report is created by adding parameters choosing calculation and data types then editing a template in the List and Label Report Designer To create a Custom Report from DV choose the Custom from DV report style when choosing the new report Once you click Create you will be asked to select a DataView from the DataView picklist Highlight the DataView to be used in the creation of your custom report and press Select A confirmation dialog window will appear asking about orientation answer Yes or No appropriately Once created a new Custom Report will be visible Location Parameters will already be selected based on the chosen DataView There are 5 sections in which the Custom Report can be defined in addition to the template e General Properties O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 260 Operator10 Help e General Information e Report Data e User Input e Comments 9 7 1 3 Custom Report Setup Topics in this section include e General Properties e General Information e Report Data e User Input e Comments 9 7 1 3 1 General Properties In the General Properties setup section for the Custom Report users can edit the following fields Page Adjustment and Print settings Size Enter a percentage to which you would like to reduce the printed form X Offset Adjust the X coordinate to which you would like to offset the printed form Y Offset
503. ting this record or history of the process section Operator10 Wastewater can properly calculate those process calculations based on whether the section in use or not 3 records 1 selected gt pde Kid DE A L Section History List E Primary Cir Pro Primary Clr 1 u Primary Clr Pro Add Process History To add Process History notes for a process section press the Add button to begin Enter the following information to log an in out of service event 2014 AllMax Software Inc Main Application 107 e Date Enter or select a date from the calendar to specify the date on which the section was in or out of service Process Name Click the button to select a process from the Process list Process Section Click the button to select a process section from the selected Process Active Place a check in the checkbox for Active if the section was in service on the date specified leave unchecked for out of service events 4 8 3 Create Process Calculations Process Create Calculations Upon completing the setup of the process calculations can be created to generate the desired process data Depending on the type of process as well as the information provided during process setup calculations will be provided Each calculation provided will create a unique Location Parameter that will help to calculate and store the process data The Process Create Calculations window displays that list The
504. tiply 2014 AllMax Software Inc Value The product of x and y If either x or y is BLANK the function returns BLANK Examples MUL 3 2 6 3 14 2 6 28 14 9 24 NONBLANK x NONBLANK x NONBLANK returns the value x or returns O if x is BLANK Value The value returned is guaranteed to be a valid non BLANK value The value O is returned if x is BLANK Examples Influent 50050 NONBLANK Inf2 50050 returns value even if Inf2 flow does not exist NONBLANK 1 2 0 0 returns O even though division by O is undefined 14 9 25 NONZERO x NONZERO x NONZERO returns the value x or returns BLANK if x is 0 Value The value returned is a non zero value The value BLANK is returned if x is O Examples NONZERO Inf2 00310 returns BLANK if 0 was entered NONZERO 0 3 14 BLANK 14 9 26 PCT_REM x y PCT_REM x PerCenT REMoval x in y out Value The percentage of the removal or reduction from the value x to the value y If either x or y is BLANK the function returns BLANK Examples PCT_REM Inf BOD 5 Eff BOD 5 the percent removal of BOD PCT_REM 127 0 4 99 685 14 9 27 PREC x y PREC x y 2014 AllMax Software Inc 432 Operator10 Help Value x to y significant digits PRECision Value The value of x rounded to y significant digits of precision The value of y may range from 0 to 15 If y is equal to 0 7 digits are used Examples PREC 123 45 4 123 5 PREC 123 4
505. to 0 FALSE 0 is returned If x is FALSE equal to 0 the value TRUE 1 is returned If x is BLANK the function returns BLANK Examples NOT 3 14 0 NOT 0 1 14 4 20 OR x y OR x y xly If x OR y is TRUE then TRUE else FALSE Value If either x or y is TRUE not equal to 0 the value TRUE 1 is returned If both x and y are FALSE equal to 0 or BLANK FALSE 0 is returned Examples OR 3 14 3 1 3 14 0 1 14 4 21 XOR x y XOR x y If x OR y is eXclusively TRUE then TRUE else FALSE exclusive or Value If either x is TRUE not equal to 0 and y is FALSE equal to 0 or y is TRUE and x is FALSE the value TRUE 1 is returned Otherwise FALSE 0 is returned If either x or y is BLANK the function returns FALSE Examples XOR 3 14 0 XOR 3 14 1 3 0 14 5 Constants Topics in this section include e Constants e BLANK x e VARO 9 14 5 1 Constants Constants Value Several Constants may be specified in formulas and the actual values will be used during calculation 2014 AllMax Software Inc 396 Operator10 Help 14 5 2 14 5 3 BLANK BLANK the absence of any valid data VARO through VAR9 variable set using SETVAR TRUE 1 not equal to 0 FALSE 0 equal to 0 NOW the current system date NOT the current date of the calculation as a julian date value see Date Functions pi 3 141592653589793 as set in the OP10 CFG configuration file e 2 71
506. to each hourly reading for that date the maximum possible whole number meter reading and a multiplier It stores the change in meter reading multiplied by the multiplier value at the Location Parameter where the formula is attached at the time corresponding to each meter data value The function considers only valid data and will return BLANK if there is no valid meter data for the current or past dates WARNING The function will calculate and save hourly values in the Location Parameter where the formula is attached Examples H_METER Effluent Meter 0 99999 001 change in meter reading divided by 1000 O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 421 H_METER Effluent Meter 0 999 1 change in meter reading no multiplier 14 8 11 H_MIN I p x y z H_MIN I p x y Z Hou rly MINimum for location and parameter offset x days hour y option z Value The minimum of hourly data values of a specific location and parameter for the date x days from the current date Parameters I p Define a Location Parameter for which the function will evaluate the hourly minimum x The x parameter allows a daily offset to be passed to the function Use a positive or negative numeric value to calculate values x days from the current date y The y parameter allows numeric values in the range 0 24 to be passed to the function Use 0 24 to define the hour of the day to be evaluated Use O to evaluate the entire day use 1 24 to
507. to identify the type of process to be created e Source Status In the six available spaces define the influent source s of data click the button to select locations from the Location list e Flow Place a check in the checkbox for Flow if the location selected is a source of positive influent flow for the process e Flow Place a check in the checkbox for Flow if the location selected is a source of flow data which is to be subtracted from the process 2014 AllMax Software Inc Main Application 105 e Lab Data Place a check in the checkbox for Lab Data if the location selected is a source of concentration mg L ug L etc values examples may include BOD TSS Ammonia etc e Process Effluent Press the button to select the location which represents the effluent source of data for the process e Process Section Flow Based On of Process Influent Flow When selected users will be required to enter a numeric percentage which will be used to calculate the approximate amount of flow entering the process section e Section Flow Meters When selected the calculations will assume that there is a flow value present which will be used to calculate e Sections e Press the Add button to add a location to be used as a process section e Press the Remove button to remove a location from the section list e Section Information With a process section defined the following information must be enter
508. to select a new path or enter a new path to be used Suggested paths C AllMax Software Wastewater NOTE If the computer serves data the selected directory MUST be shared or part of an existing share available to network users If the selected directory is 2014 AllMax Software Inc Introduction to Operator10 Wastewater 21 8 Upon the completion of the installation click Finish Pervasive Database Installation If necessary the installation will begin to install the Pervasive PSQL Database Engine This is a separate installation procedure from the operations software application Following the successful installation the software install will continue e Click Next to begin the installation Choose the I accept option to accept the Pervasive End User License Agreement EULA Click Next To enable the most flexibility AllMax recommends installing the Pervasive Engine as a Windows Service Select Run as Service Click Next Choose the Complete option to continue with the installation Click Next The installation will now begin During the installation any old Pervasive version will be identified and removed or archived Following the installation the option to activate the Pervasive software will appear Choose Activate Now to activate if you have a Pervasive license as supplied to you by AllMax Software If you do not have the key code a demo license will be installed and will be active for a 30 d
509. to which you would like to offset the printed form Y Offset Adjust the Y coordinate to which you would like to offset the printed form OPlain Paper Mark the Plain Paper radio button to print the entire form including all lines headers and data Form Mark the Form radio button if you are printing directly on or will be copying onto a blank form Preprinted Form If generic information is already preprinted on the form mark the Preprinted Form radio button to print only the data and appropriate information JAllow Remarks To enter comments at the time of printing check the JAllow Remarks checkbox JInclude Graph A graph representing the reported data and projections can be included if the Include Graph checkbox is marked Page Enter a page number of total pages into these fields Report Title To customize the title of this report enter it into this field Facility To customize the name of the facility on this report enter it into this field The field will be set to the default facility name coming from the name of your current facility Treat lt gt Data As Select from the drop down menu to determine the method by which data with the 2014 AllMax Software Inc Operator10 Help less than lt greater than gt or non detect data qualifiers will be treated Available options are Preserve Types Calculations will preserve the available data qualifiers and calculated results will
510. tor10 Help For Loading summaries choose from English Ib day or Metric kg day to determine calculation method Summary Columns select no more than 8 Sum Daily Avg Loading Avg Daily Max Loading Max Daily Min Loading Min Daily Avg Mo Loading Com Daly Max Mo Loading Avg Monthly Min Mo Loading Max Monthly Loading Units aca English b day Metric g day Add Remove Move Up Move Dn Print List Multi Year 01 Multi Year m Save Preview Guidance Click template or press PageUp PageDn 9 7 2 2 1 4 Comments In the Comments setup section for the Multi Year Summary Report users can edit the following fields Comments Comments Enter the default comments to appear on report at the time of printing Users can modify these comments at the time of printing if the JAllow Comments checkbox is marked in the General Properties screen 2014 AllMax Software Inc Add Remove Move Up Move Dn Print List Multi Year 01 Multi Year 4 m Save Preview Guidance Click template or press PageUp PageDn 9 7 3 Mass Balance Reports The Mass Balance report was designed to allow the quantification of material flow in to and out of a given process The report determines if all streams and production growth in and out of a pr
511. try Functions Violation Data Functions Weekly Data Functions Yearly Data Functions All Functions by groups All Functions alphabetically 14 1 All Functions by groups All Functions by groups See also All Functions alphabetically Data Types Accessing Location Parameter data values Boolean TRUE FALSE Functions AND x y x amp y if x lt gt 0 AND y lt gt 0 then 1 else O BIT x y if BIT x of y is 1 then 1 else 0 EQUAL x y x y if x EQUALs y 1 else O GT x y x gt y if x is Greater Than y 1 else 0 IF x y Z IF x lt gt 0 then y else z ISALPHA I p x if value IS an ALPHA code then 1 else 0 offset x days ISBLANK x if x IS BLANK then 1 else 0 ISDATA x if x IS valid DATA then 1 else O ISDATE I p x if value IS a DATE value then 1 else O ISFECAL I p if p IS a FECAL parameter then 1 else O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Operator10 Help ISFLOW I p if p IS a FLOW parameter then 1 else O ISGREAT l p x if value IS a GREATer than value then 1 else 0 offset x days ISHR I p if l p IS set for HouRly data entry then 1 else O ISLESS l p x if value IS a LESS than value then 1 else O offset x days ISLP I p if L P IS valid then 1 else O ISND I p x if value IS a Non Detect value then 1 else O offset x days ISTIME I p x if value IS a TIME value then 1 else O offset x days LT y x lt y if x is Less Than y 1 else O NOT x if x is NOT equal to O then 1 el
512. ttached to location Influent 14 4 Boolean Functions Topics in this section include AND x y x amp y if x lt gt 0 AND y lt gt 0 then 1 else O BIT x y if BIT x of y is 1 then 1 else O EQUAL x y x y if x EQUALS y 1 else O GT x y x gt y if x is Greater Than y 1 else O IF x y z IF x lt gt 0 then y else z ISALPHA I p x if value IS an ALPHA code then 1 else 0 offset x days ISBLANK x if x IS BLANK then 1 else O ISDATA x if x IS valid DATA then 1 else O ISDATE I p x if value IS a DATE value then 1 else O ISFECAL I p if p IS a FECAL parameter then 1 else O ISFLOW l p if p IS a FLOW parameter then 1 else O ISGREAT I p x if value IS a GREATer than value then 1 else 0 offset x days ISHR I p if l p IS set for HouRly data entry then 1 else O ISLESS l p x if value IS a LESS than value then 1 else O offset x days ISLP I p if L P IS valid then 1 else O ISND I p if value IS a Non Detect value then 1 else O offset x days ISTIME I p x if value IS a TIME value then 1 else O offset x days LT x y x lt y if x is Less Than y 1 else O NOT x if x is NOT equal to O then 1 else O OR x y xl y if x lt gt 0 OR y lt gt 0 1 else O XOR x y if x OR y eXclusively then 1 else 0 14 4 1 AND x y AND x y x amp y If x AND y are TRUE then TRUE else FALSE Value If x is TRUE not equal to 0 and y is TRUE not equal to 0 the value TRUE 1 is returned If eith
513. tton e Extension for import data files the custom file extension used by the ImportUtility to seek out data import files Examples txt csv imp etc e Extension for import notes files the custom file extension used by the ImportUtility to seek out notes import files Examples note notes impnote etc The Importutility will read through the default database directory or the defined custom directory and process all files matching the imp impnote default or user defined file extensions Users will now benefit from the ability to process multiple incoming files from LIMS SCADA Historian and other exported data files Data Import File Structure Each line in the data file must either be Blank A comment beginning with a semicolon or tab A data line consisting of A Date A space and a Time optional A comma or tab A Facility ID A comma or tab A Location A comma or tab A Parameter A comma or tab A Data value optionally if the Data value is numeric A comma or tab A DataType number See the Data help topic for more information about data types and equivalent values O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Utilities 513 Example 1 The following line 09 01 00 001 Plant If Flow MGD 1 600 imports a numeric daily data value of 1 6 into the Facility referenced as 001 using Location Plant If and Parameter Flow MGD Example 2 The following line 09 01 00 10 00
514. tware Inc the value z is returned If x is BLANK the function returns BLANK Examples 1F 1 3 14 10 3 14 IF 0 3 14 10 10 14 4 6 ISALPHA I p x ISALPHA I p x If the value offset x days IS an ALPHA code then TRUE Value If the value of a specific location and parameter for the date x days from the current date is an Alpha Code the value TRUE 1 is returned Otherwise the function returns FALSE 0 The function considers only Alpha Codes it ignores data Less Than Greater Than or Non Detect values Examples ISALPHA Effluent 50050 0 1 if an Alpha Code otherwise 0 ISALPHA Effluent 50050 1 1 if the previous day contained an Alpha Code 14 4 7 ISBLANK x ISBLANK x If x IS BLANK then TRUE Value If x is equal to BLANK the value TRUE 1 is returned Otherwise the function returns FALSE 0 The function considers only valid data it ignores Alpha Codes Less Than Greater Than or Non Detect values if Facility options are set to blank Examples ISBLANK 3 14 0 ISBLANK BLANK 1 14 4 8 ISDATA x ISDATA x If x IS valid DATA then TRUE Value If x is a valid data value non BLANK the value TRUE 1 is returned Otherwise the function returns FALSE 0 The function considers only valid data it ignores Alpha Codes Less Than Greater Than or Non Detect values if Facility options are set to blank Examples 2014 AllMax Software Inc 392 Operator10 Help ISDATA 3 14
515. uce dasveisvsxedssatat cuavulsbaevsshevencuschaisiayeiesazeatateseieeiconetsvonene 423 9 Mathematical FUNnGtiOnS lt ici na linen 424 ABS x A ii ADD X y x y AVG x1 x2 xn GOUNT X1 X2 X AAA Nu a a rae a aaa raa aaa aa Eanan aidaa AEn akaaite 425 DEA A a O tsisiabs 426 DIST 20 ssesewesneceeseecccsecauecocverencessiune cvegdevestsenssnwupsunpan canes senvcuoescecaeedsuwesayancaueneeanedcevneueceniwieninseneeeetevevenvedasunnenten 426 DIV 0G RAY O AN 426 APA alain 426 o NN 427 AAA caves scnscevevecnetteademesdvaneslvsucawedecutestcuteshientesenteeatbeevsiyeddsuesteten 427 FRAC x IDIST x INT x INT ER a fa fC DY iii ISA 428 NVA a devel cae a E a a easel eames dia eens E LIMI 0G 952 ssncesssnsevccccscetevisevensiccvensedesseescecevecssetuecesstcedesdedesnevucivchdeleossipeusiusvectesensiestencuteassSusvenstcedeecedespuessivchieteaseers O O E LOG x LOG_REM x y SAA A O O 430 MINOR O oi A A is 430 MODOCY KYY ia 430 MUL OGY AY ii 430 NONBLANKOO ici aaa 431 NONZ ERO X iii sea 431 POT REM dt 431 PREC x y PWR x y xy 2014 AllMax Software Inc RAND its 432 ROUNDOSY a 432 asalt D o eNA AAEE E tev eachlvecee cece vaeescuceuatlassuvecceseesed atscca ces E ecg cevecnseyvovstesunee creeens 433 SORT xX aee ar aa bande ieeteace ii 433 SUB X5Y 5 KEY siii ia a E E E E E A cie 433 SUM x1 x2 xN wees 434 TRUNCA E cocci cadences ce E eae peste sas
516. uld be OP10 DATA AllMax WasteWater Sample Data Inf Dom 00400 01 02 10 Note that Excel requires the pipe character and exclamation point to separate Service Topic and Item portions and it also requires all portions with embedded spaces to be surrounded by single quote characters 2014 AllMax Software Inc Interfaces 353 12 1 4 5 NetDDE NetDDE Also known as Network DDE NetDDE Network Dynamic Data Exchange services allow DDE links between different computers over a network The NetDDE services are usually included in the Microsoft Windows operating system but may need to be started and configured Shares must be set up on any computer which will serve or share DDE data Run the DDE Share utility DDESHARE EXE usually found in the System directory folder to create and configure shares The AllMax Operator10 OPC DDE Interface is fully compliant as both a NetDDE Server and a NetDDE Client It is capable of linking with any running application which supports DDE links using the ASCII text format such as Microsoft Excel or Access Wonderware InTouch Viewer or Intellution FIX To set up a NetDDE link 1 Run the DDE Share utility on the computer where the software that provides data will be running 2 Add a new Share In the list of shares press the Add a Share button For the Share Name enter a name ending with a character For the Static Application Name enter the DDE Service string for the a
517. umber of months add the additional parameter M_SUM I p x y Z w m When a parameter to calculate loading is specified amp or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter M_SUM2 I p l_flow p_flow x y z w Examples M_SUM2 Effluent 50050 0 0 0 0 current month monthly sum M_SUM2 Effluent 31614 1 1 0 1 previous month sum of 7 day continuous averages for fecals 2014 AllMax Software Inc 466 Operator10 Help 14 11 17M_SUMH I p x M_SUMH I p x Monthly SUM for Hourly data values at location and parameter offset x months Value The sum of hourly data values of a specific location and parameter for the month x months from the current month The number of months may be specified where mis the number of months add the additional parameter M_SUMH I p x m When a parameter to calculate loading is specified O 8 or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter M_SUMH I p _flow p_flow x Examples M_SUMH Effluent 50050 0 sum of present month M_SUMH Effluent 50050 1 sum of previous month 14 11 4 amp M_TOTAL I p x M_TOTAL I p x Monthly TOTAL for location and parameter offset x months average number of days Value The total of data values of a specific location and parameter for the month x months from the cur
518. uments To access the Logged Document section go to the View ribbon menu click the View Documents button in the Logged Documents group Adding Logged Documents To add new documents to the list of logged documents go the the DataView Graphing or Reporting sections of Operator10 and print a document Upon printing a prompt may be visible asking for the user to log the document as printed with an associated note Depending on the settings found in the Database Properties section users can edit which sections of the program prompt for logging documents Delete Logged Documents To delete a logged document highlight the document in the list and click the x Delete button Confirm the deletion of data by clicking the Y Yes Yes or X No No button O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Main Application 131 4 14 3 Logged Documents DataView Logged Documents The Logged Documents feature allows users to log versions of documents DataViews Graphs and Reports as they are printed Logged documents can be reprinted at any time as they were printed the first time Ts A ls Logged Documents Date Logged Description 196 records 1 selected gt PU KR S A L Facility Name Brendale Brendale Brendale 10 13 2011 11 23 11 22 2011 12 36 12 16 2011 08 36 01 17 2012 11 25 01 23 2012 13 41 02 12 2012 11 03 02 14 2012 15 52 02 23 2012 12 54 Brendale DERM Brendale DERM Brendale DERM Brendale
519. ur 372 394 Hourly 393 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 455 466 481 Hourly Calculation 415 Hourly Data Functions 413 Hourly DataViews 168 Hourly Values 331 Hourly Values DataView 174 Icons 251 IDIST 427 If 390 446 449 IFO 390 sz Operator10 Help iFix 347 Import 467 469 Import Data Utility 511 Import DataView Data 204 Import Facility 504 Import Schedule 505 Import Settings 75 Import Export Facility 504 In Serice 106 Include 444 Include in Scheduler 75 INCLUDE 444 Increase 398 454 Install 19 357 364 Install DataPort Software 357 Installation Guide 19 INT 428 Integer 428 Intellution 347 INTER 428 Intercept 406 462 Interface 340 Internal Calculations 113 Internal Formula 108 Internal Formulas 108 113 Interpolate 400 401 418 428 Interpolated 428 InTouch 347 INV 428 Inverse 428 Inversion 428 ISALPHA 391 ISBLANK 391 ISDATE 392 ISFECAL 392 ISFLOW 392 ISGREAT 392 ISHR 393 ISLESS 393 ISLP 393 ISND 394 ISTIME 394 Item 345 J Julian 409 411 K Key 366 Keyboard Control 196 Keyboard Shortcuts 196 Keycode 22 KeyPad 366 is L amp L 247 L P 92 L P Permissions 45 Land Application 149 Last 401 402 403 418 Later 401 405 418 Least 403 459 Legend Box Size 234 Legends 232 Length of Month 411 Length of Year 411 Less Than 101 386 393 394 437 447 451 466 Less Than Data 101 Level 399 400 LI 4
520. urned in degrees If x is BLANK the function returns BLANK Examples ATAN 57735 30 ATAN 1 45 14 15 4 COS x cos x COSine of x degrees Value The cosine of x degrees If x is BLANK the function returns BLANK Examples COS 45 707107 cos 90 0 14 15 5 CSC x CSC x CoSeCant of x degrees Value The cosecant of x degrees If x is BLANK the function returns BLANK Examples CSC 45 1 41421 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 475 CSC 90 1 14 15 6 SEC x SEC x SECant of x degrees Value The secant of x degrees If x is BLANK the function returns BLANK Examples SEC 45 1 41421 SEC 0 1 14 15 7 SIN x SIN x SINe of x degrees Value The sine of x degrees If x is BLANK the function returns BLANK Examples SIN 45 707107 SIN 90 1 14 15 8 TAN x TAN x TANgent of x degrees Value The tangent of x degrees If x is BLANK the function returns BLANK Examples TAN 45 57735 TAN 30 0 14 16 Violation Data Functions Topics in this section include e E SUM I p x y z w v Exceedance SUM offset type rule avg limit e V_AVG I p x y z w v offset type rule avg Violation AVG e V_CNT l p x y z w offset type rule Violation CouNT values e V_CNTP l p x y z w offset type Period Violation CouNT values months O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Operator10 Help e V_DLY I p x y z w DaiLY Violation offset type max min e V_DLYM
521. urrent date the last data prior to that date an additional supply value from the date x days from the current date and a multiplier It returns the interpolated change in gauge reading multiplied by the multiplier value less the added supply The function considers only valid data and will return BLANK if there is no valid gauge data for the current or past dates 2014 AllMax Software Inc Examples D_IGAUGE Effluent M92225 Effluent CL2 Tank 0 1000 change in gauge reading multiplied by 1000 with CL2 supply D_IGAUGE Effluent M92225 0 1 change in gauge reading no multiplier no supply 14 6 9 D_IMTR I p x y z D_IMTR I p x y z Daily Interpolated MeTeR value for location and parameter maximum meter reading y multiplier z offset x days Value The value calculated from the positive change in meter reading at a specific location and parameter The function uses the meter data from or following the date x days from the current date the last data prior to that date the maximum possible whole number meter reading and a multiplier It returns the interpolated change in meter reading multiplied by the multiplier value The function considers only valid data and will return BLANK if there is no valid meter data for the future or past dates Examples D_IMTR Effluent M92225 0 99999 001 interpolated change in meter reading divided by 1000 D_IMTR Effluent M92225 0 999 1 interpolated change in meter r
522. ustralia basic only Read Write Delete Unitywater Reports DATA_008 Weir Road Morayfield Queensland Australia basic only Read Write Delete Woodford STP DATA_O07 Canando Street Woodford Queensalnd Australia basic only Read wWrite Delete Accessing Facility List To access the list of Facilities go to the File menu and choose Change Facility This will display the Facility list seen above and will allow users to change facilities Creating a New Facility To create a new facility go to the File menu and choose Open Database to begin See the Add New Facility topic for more information Deleting a Facility To delete a facility go to the File menu and choose Open Database to begin See the Delete Facility topic for more information Location A Location can be used to describe a point in a facility physical or logical where Parameters are located such as Plant Influent Effluent Aeration Tank etc At each location parameters specific tests or data points can be added depending on the type of data to be stored BOD TSS VSS Ammonia Flow etc A standard naming list of commonly used naming conventions for a Wastewater treatment plant is included to choose from or user defined names can be created Examples Raw Influent Flow MGD Flow MGD Parameter at the Raw Influent Location Effluent BOD 5 BOD 5 BOD 5 Day MG L Parameter at the Effluent Location Accessing Location List To acce
523. ut is not limited to e Keycode This is the current keycode associated with the Operator10 Wastewater license in use To update the keycode click the Keycode label and enter the provided KeyCode For more information see the Keycode Help Topic e Seats Displays the recent count of the number of seats used to access the license and the total number of licensed seats available based on current licensing Click the Seats label to view a lists of seats recently used to access the license Username Displays the current user logged into Operator10 Wastewater For more information on Users please see the User Security topic Version Displays the version number of the application The version number is displayed in the following format Version Release Revision ex 10 20 0123 and is updated periodically as new versions releases or updates are provided Application Information The information present in the Application Information section includes but is not limited to e Application Folder Displays the path to the directory folder where Operator10 Wastewater is currently being run from e Conduit Location Displays the machine name that the client application main application is using to communicate with the Operator10 Wastewater database e License Location Displays the machine name and license database name where the Operator10 Wastewater license database is located e Database Location Displays the mach
524. value of the second violation y is equal to 256 2 4 14 16 7 V_MAV I p x y Z w V V_MAV I p x y Z w V monthly Minimum AVerage Violation for location and parameter offset x months type y rule z average w limit v Value The minimum average violation a violation occurs when the average is below the limit of data values of a specific location and parameter for the month x months from the current month The function uses the following parameters to determine the calculation method y is the type of average 2014 AllMax Software Inc Functions 483 if y is O then the result is a monthly or 30 day average if y is 1 then the result is a weekly or 7 day average if y is 2 then the result is an hourly average z is the rule used for a 7 day average if z is O then the result uses a continuous or floating average if z is 1 then a week falls in the month which contains its Saturday if z is 2 then a week falls in the month which contains its Wednesday if z is 3 then the result uses the first of month for 4 weeks 28 days if z is 4 then the first of month 4th week extends to the end of the month if z is 5 then the first of month is controlled by facility option if z is 6 then only full weeks Sun Sat in the month are considered if z is 16 then the result uses a continuous or floating average but only counts violations based on unique data w is the type of average used if w is O then the average is
525. w button to begin The new Page will be added and allow users to begin adding HotSpots and Containers Rename Page To rename any page tab right click on the desired page tab to be renamed and choose the Rename Page option Enter a new name into the field and click the 3 OK button to rename the page Remove Page To remove a page from a View click the small X that appears on the right side of the tab A prompt will be displayed confirming the deletion of the Page Answer appropriately by clicking the Y Yes Yes or X no No button 6 1 4 2 Page Options and Features Pages can be created and added to Views Pages allow for users to define and display data in various formats as well as providing shortcuts or links to internal items as well as external files Pages can be created for more information see the following topics e Add HotSpots e Add Containers e Data Containers e Graph Containers e Gauge Containers e Navigation Containers e Page Options 6 1 4 2 1 HotSpots HotSpots allow the user to link to various items such as DataViews Report Groups and Graphs created in Operator10 Wastewater Additionally HotSpots can link to external files Creating a HotSpot To create a HotSpot open a View and on any Page left click and drag the cursor over an 2014 AllMax Software Inc 156 Operator10 Help area This will draw an outline and upon release of the left mouse button a HotSpot editor w
526. w All Hourly option to show all Hourly data entered regardless of the selected Interval Display Options e Refresh Press the Refresh button to refresh or re query the DataView from the Database e Intermittent Press the Intermittent button to change the DataView to show only data entered for the date range excluding any blank cells from display S e Resize Columns Press the Resize Columns button to select from the available options to resize all columns or resize selected columns only Calculations e Calculate Press the ED Calculate Now button to bring up the Calculate Utility Printing e Print Press the Print button to select from the available options of Print Preview or Print 7 9 3 DataView Edit Ribbon DataView Edit Ribbon The DateView Edit ribbon provides access to functionality to edit data displayed in the DataView cells Operator108 DataView OcZ E gt RO F ag Cut Copy Paste Delete Fil Block Block Summary Read Block Add Data Review Data Quick Note Alpha Code Find Previous Edit Effluent Testing The DataView Edit ribbon provides access to functionality related to data entry O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 194 Operator10 Help Edit Ribbon functions The following options are available in the Edit ribbon and are discussed as they appear in the button groups Edit e Undo Press the l Undo button to undo recent data entries e Redo Press the
527. w a list of Alpha Codes available for entry into the selected cell O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Dataview 195 ja e Find Press the a Find button to find data entered in the DataView Find Data e Previous Use the Find Previous button to find and highlight the previous matching data value entered in the DataView based on the Find Data Field entry e Find Data Field Enter a value in the Find field to find data displayed in the open DataView e Next Use the gt Find Next button to find and highlight the next matching data value entered in the DataView based on the Find Data Field entry 7 9 4 DataView Tools Ribbon DataView Tools Ribbon The DateView Tools ribbon provides access to functionality to import and export data displayed in the DataView cells wm i File gt Home Edit dd amp Import Export Operatorl0 DataVi Import Export The DataView Tools ribbon provides access to functionality related to the import and export of data Tools Ribbon functions The following options are available in the Tools ribbon and are discussed as they appear in the button groups Import Export e Import Press the dE Import button to begin the Import data process e Export Press the E Export button to choose from a list of available Export file options O 2014 AllMax Software Inc 196 Operator10 Help 7 9 5 DataView Window Ribbon DataView Window
528. water database Data can be graphed for hourly and daily values days weeks months and years The Graphing application allows users to produce a variety of graph chart types with titles legends scale dual Y axis plotting displayed values linear regression constant lines and bands limit details and much more a S iu Graphing Operator10 Wastewater Murrumba Downs STP S1 Flow amp Rainfall D aa SS i File Graph Legends Window Help e x ad con amp S k mm jojo a YE WE 210 Tus Murrumba Downs STP 1 Flow L day and Rainfall mm day Data 150000 100 146250 _lMlaximum Releaseon any DEY Wee tel 2X Se 142500 138750 92 135000 131250 88 127500 Lo 123750 f 120000 80 116250 a 112500 Outfall Flow 108750 105000 101250 68 97500 Lin 93750 90000 60 lax 86250 pi 82500 3 78750 52 75000 3 3 5 E E 71250 3 E 67500 44 2 63750 60000 40 56250 52500 Ss 48750 32 45000 41250 28 37500 e 33750 30000 20 26250 22500 iS 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 14 12 13 14 45 46 47 18 419 20 24 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 2 30 Daily Data 09 01 11 to 09 30 11 Days NUM The Operator10 Graphing application provides users with full featured full color graphs Accessing Graphing To open the Graphing application go to the V
529. which the function will evaluate the hourly maximum x The x parameter allows a daily offset to be passed to the function Use a positive or negative numeric value to calculate values x days from the current date y The y parameter allows numeric values in the range 0 24 to be passed to the function Use 0 24 to define the hour of the day to be evaluated Use O to evaluate the entire day use 1 24 to evaluate the specific single hour of the day i e y 3 for values from 02 01 through 03 00 z The optional parameter z can be used to define special handling options for the calculation and return of values The optional parameter z can be either 0 1 2 or the preceding options 0 1 or 2 plus 256 Parameter options e O If z is set to O the function will return the value for the day x days from the current date only e 1 If z is set to 1 the function will use the values for an entire 24 hour period beginning at a specific hour y i e y 3 z 1 for values from 03 01 the current day through 03 00 the next day e 2 If z is set to 2 the function will offset the period to begin on an even hour y i e y 3 z 2 for values from 02 00 through 02 59 the third hourly period of the day 256 While z is set to 0 1 or 2 add 256 to z to return the time of the maximum value for the day x days from the current date i e y 0 z 256 for the corresponding time of the maximum value for the day Examples H_MAX Effluent 50050 0 0 0
530. width move the mouse pointer to the right edge of the column header to be re sized The mouse pointer will change and display with arrows on both the left and right sides Left click and hold to begin resizing the column To automatically size the column to the data presented click the Tools menu and choose the option Auto size to automatically re size the column to data Grouping Grids can be grouped based on desired columns Grouping can help to compact the data presented in the grid by grouping together like pieces of information See the Grouping help topic for details Default Grid Layout Grids can be reset to the default AllMax generated grid layout This will reset all grid preferences including columns shown hidden size and content 3 1 3 Grid Data View Data The grids in Operator10 Wastewater allow users to see virtually every piece of data stored in the database With this increase in data comes the need for proper view options when working with the Operatori0 Wastewater data Users can perform the following 2014 AllMax Software Inc General Features 39 actions on data to ensure efficient usage and navigation throughout the application and database Sorting Columns can be sorted in ascending or descending order Left click on the column header to sort in an ascending A Z order Left click again sort in a descending Z A order Filtering Filters can be applied to one or more columns appearing in t
531. with common text commands such as Cut Copy Paste and Delete Additionally when right clicking on a field that is in someway linked to other sections of the program users may find Edit options available Selecting an Edit option will display the Edit window for the linked item 2014 AllMax Software Inc 4 Operator10 Help 3 1 4 Grid Print Print Data presented in the grids throughout Operator10 Wastewater can be printed Several iah Print options exist Click the Print button to review the printing options p Y ok Please choose from the following options Orientation a Portrait a Landscape Page Size 8 5x 11 Letter y Font Size 49 E Fit Width to Page Print Range All Records Selected Records Include T Grid Lines Save current settings as default Orientation Select from the options Portrait or Landscape to set the page orientation Page Size Select from Letter 8 5 x11 Legal 8 5 x 14 or Tabloid 11 x14 to set the size of the page Font Size Select a font size to print grid contents Print Range Select from the options All Records or Selected Records to determine the number of records to be printed Include Select this option if you want to print the records with gridlines Save current settings as default Click this link if you wish to save the settings as a default to be used during the next print 3 2 Multi Edit Edit The edit window is util
532. y 10 15 2012 Logged Documents The Logged Documents feature is available in the Main Application as well as in DataView Graphing and Reporting The Logged Documents option allows users to save or log any and all printed documents including graphs DataViews and Reports To access logged documents in the Reporting Application click on the File menu and O 2014 AllMax Software Inc select Logged Documents In Reporting the Logged Documents list is automatically filtered to include only those documents created in the Reporting section Place a check the JInclude All box to see the logged documents for all sections In the Logged Documents window information for each document is displayed in the grid including description date of the first document useful if the item is actually a group of reports or if the data spans a wide time frame user who logged the document the date of document logging and type of document For each item in the Logged Documents list a note may be entered in the box provided Notes may be modified at any time Click the Open Doc button to preview the document or Remove to permanently delete the logged document Notes may be saved for each logged document as well enter any notes into the field labeled Note e OO 5Year Forecast Annual Bod Removal Results Flow Graph Limits Report Annual Limits Report Monthly Multi Year Annual Plant Effluent Monthly Plant influent
533. y a complete list of available items Once a valid Location has been entered the Parameter PickList displays a filtered list of parameters If there is no Location or the Loc Par button is pressed a complete list of Location Parameters is displayed e Select any item in the PickList by tapping on the item e The previous item from the main screen is automatically highlighted when opening the PickList To Find another item enter the first characters by using graffiti or by the popup keyboard tap the abc logo in the graffiti area The first item matching the characters will scroll into place and the item will be highlighted 2014 AllMax Software Inc NOTE A valid Facility must be entered prior to displaying the Location or Parameter PickList A valid Location or no Location must be entered prior to displaying the Parameter or Loc Par PickList Diss Oxygen 00400 Ph Field 50050 Flow Magd 13 4 11 Preferences Preferences Several Scanner Preferences may be selected with the following PushButtons Tap Hold to scan only while a scan trigger button is depressed Tap Click if scan should continue after the trigger buttons are released Either until a good scan is received or it times out Tap Wide to use a wide scanning angle wide field of vision about 53 deg Tap Narrow if the scanner should use a narrower scanning angle about 38 deg Tap Scan Only if the scanner should scan when triggered Ta
534. y list Chemical e Chemicals Press the Chemicals button to open the Chemical section Formula e Formulas Press the A Formulas button to open the Formulas section Alpha Code e Alpha Codes Press the 2 Alpha Codes button to open the Alpha Codes section Barcode Labels T e Labels List Press the zm Label List button to access the Barcode Labels List cm yz e Print Press the 5 Print button to select from the list of available data sections to be printed as barcode labels DataPort e Select L Ps Press the Y Select L Ps button to access the list of Location Parameters to be exported to the DataPort for data entry J g e Setup Press the Y Setup button to select from a list of setup items related to DataPort Setup items 4 1 2 5 BioSolids Ribbon Main Application BioSolids Ribbon The BioSolids ribbon provides the following functionality O 2014 AllMax Software Inc Main Application e File Dashboard View Setup Bio Solids Tools Support Help Y Y DO ZOJ A BioSolids BioSolids Parameters Sites Site Parameters Site Owners Site Limits Nutrients Applications Setup Application The BioSolids Ribbon allows users to access sections of Operator10 specific to the licensed BioSolids features of Operator10 BioSolids Functions The following options are available in the BioSolids ribbon and are discussed as they appear in the button groups Setu
535. y power values for two Particle Count parameters 14 8 13 H_STD I p x y H_STD I p x Hourly STandard Deviation for location and parameter offset x days hour y Value The standard deviation of hourly data values of a specific location and parameter for the date x days fromthe current date If y is 0 the values for the entire day are used If y is from 1 to 24 a single hour is used i e y 3 for values from 02 01 through 03 00 Examples H_STD Effluent 50050 0 0 standard deviation for the day H_STD Effluent 50050 0 15 standard deviation for 14 01 through 15 00 H_STD Effluent 50050 7 0 standard deviation 7 days ago 2014 AllMax Software Inc 14 8 14 H_SUMI I p x y H_SUM I p x Hourly SUM for location and parameter offset x days hour y Value The sum of hourly data values of a specific location and parameter for the date x days from the current date If y is O the values for the entire day are used If y is from 1 to 24 a single hour is used i e y 3 for values from 02 01 through 03 00 Examples H_SUM Effluent 50050 0 0 sum for the day H_SUM Effluent 50050 0 15 sum for 14 01 through 15 00 H_SUM Effluent 50050 7 0 sum 7 days ago 14 8 15 H_VAL I p x y H_VAL I p x Hourly VALue for location and parameter offset x days and y minutes Value The data value of a specific location and parameter for the time x days from the current date and y minutes after midnight
536. y z w v SNC_MAXD I p x y Z w V monthly Significant Non Compliance SNC MAXimun Daily violation for location and parameter offset x months type y rule z average w limit v Value The maximum daily Significant Non Compliance SNC violation for data values of a specific location and parameter for 6 months beginning x months from the current month 2014 AllMax Software Inc 488 Operator10 Help The SNC is expressed as a ratio equal to the count of values exceeding the limit divided by the count of all values The function uses the following parameters to determine the calculation method y is the type of average if y is O then the result is based on a daily maximum if y is 1 then the result is based on a weekly or 7 day maximum if y is 2 then the result is based on an hourly maximum if y is 3 then the result is based on a 4 day maximum z is the rule used for a 7 day average if z is O then the result uses a continuous or floating average if z is 1 then a week falls in the month which contains its Saturday if z is 2 then a week falls in the month which contains its Wednesday if z is 3 then the result uses the first of month for 4 weeks 28 days if z is 4 then the first of month 4th week extends to the end of the month if z is 5 then the first of month is controlled by facility option if z is 6 then only full weeks Sun Sat in the month are considered w is the type of average used if w is O then the average
537. ymbol is dropped and no data is used in place of lt 2 in the final calculation Add Plant Efficiency XBOD 5 lb Left BOD 5 Day 20 Plant Efficiency XBOD 5 lb Left BOD 5 Day 20 Remove z Plant Effluent BOD 5 LP BOD DESC A Plant Effluent BOD 5 LP BOD DESC Move Up Plant Effluent pH pH Standard Units Plant Effluent pH pH Standard Units S Move Dn Plant Effluent Solids TSS Total Suspended Solids TSS Allow Export Data As Plant Effluent Solids TSS Total Suspended Solids TSS Print List Plant Efficiency XSolids TSS lb Left Total Suspen Limits Report Operational Limit Report View With 4 all gt 9 Windows File Association Save Preview Guidance Click template or press PageUp PageDn 9 7 4 1 2 General Information In the General Information setup section for the Limit Report users can edit the following fields General Information Report Name Enter the desired name 1 to 40 characters for the Limit Report This name is different than the report name shown in the Direct Access tree Facility Enter a facility name for the Limit Report The default facility name will initially be filled in modify this as necessary Header Enter up to 3 three lines of text to be used as a header for the Limit Report The default header will be the Facility Address 2014 AllMax Software Inc 290 Operator10 Help Beginning Page Enter the begi
538. yntax add 256 num type to the value y where num the number of the maximum type 4 for the offset 8 for the value 12 for the time if data is hourly 16 for the count of maximums if there are multiple equal values The number of months may be specified for monthly 7 day and hourly calculations where mis the number of months add the additional parameter M_MAX I p x y Z w m When a parameter to calculate loading is specified amp or amp amp parameter a separate flow location and parameter may also be specified add the additional parameter M_MAX I p _flow p_flow x y z w Examples M_MAX Effluent 50050 0 0 0 0 current month monthly maximum M_MAX Effluent 31614 1 1 0 1 previous month 7 day continuous maximum for fecals 14 11 8 M_MED I p x y z M_MED I p x y zZ Monthly MEDian for location and parameter offset x months type y average w Value The median of data values of a specific location and parameter for the month x months fromthe current month In the distribution of data values the middle value is returned Where there are an even number of values the average arithmetic mean of the two middle values is returned The function uses the following parameters to 2014 AllMax Software Inc ase Operator10 Help determine the calculation method y is the type of minimum if y is O then the result is a median of monthly or 30 day values if y is 1 then the result is a

Operator10 Help - AllMax Software, Inc.

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents